0% found this document useful (0 votes)

2K views1,357 pages

Kia e Soul EV 2015 Workshop Service Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Peter

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

2K views1,357 pages

Kia e Soul EV 2015 Workshop Service Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Peter

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 1357

Page 1 sur 27

General Information

Safety Precaution

Sinse Electric Vehicle contains a high voltage, battery mishandling the high voltage system or vehicle may lead to a serious accident
including electric shock and electric leakage.

• Be sure to shut off the high voltage by removing the safety plug before inspecting or repairing the high voltage system(Refer to
“High Voltage Shut-off Procedures”).
• A responsible worker should keep removed safety plugs to prevent it from being connected by mistake.
• Keep away from any metal objects (watch, ring etc.) while working on the high voltage system, as they may cause serious accidents
like electric shock.
• Before beginning to work on the high voltage system, workers should wear personal protective equipment to prevent safety
accidents(Refer to “Personal Protective Equipment”).
• At any time, do not allow workers not wearing personal protective equipment to touch the high voltage system. High voltage
components should be covered with an insulation sheet to prevent safety accidents.
• Use insulation tools when working on the high voltage system.
• Place removed high voltage components on an the insulation mat.
• Check that voltage between the high voltage terminals is below 30V after removing the safety plug.

• All the high voltage wiring and connectors are in orange.

• A caution label for high voltage is attached to the high voltage components
• High voltage components : High Voltage Battery, Power Relay Assembly (PRA), Quick Charge Relay Assembly (QRA), Motor,
Power Cable, BMS ECU, Inverter, LDC, On-Board Charger (OBC), Main Relay, Pre-charge Relay, Pre-charge resistor, Battery
Current Sensor, Safety Plug, Main Fuse, Battery Temperature Sensor, Busbar, Charge Port, A/C Compressor, Electric Power
Control Unit (EPCU), High Voltage Heater, High Voltage Heater Relay etc.

• Inform of possible danger of high voltage by placing a "high voltage caution" sign on the vehicle as in the image below.
Page 2 sur 27
Page 3 sur 27

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Insulation gloves Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage
components
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]
Page 4 sur 27

Insulation shoes

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation clothes
components

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses

Used in the following cases :

• During Removal & installation or inspection of the high
voltage battery terminals or wiring, which spark might happen.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

All removed high voltage components are placed on an

Insulation mat
insulation mat to prevent safety accidents.

Insulation sheet is used to cover high voltage components to

Insulation sheet protect people not wearing personal protective equipment from
safety accidents.

Warning tape Used for infomring that it is dangerous to come over this line.
Page 5 sur 27

Personal Protective Equipment Inspection

• Check that the personal protective equipment is not damaged.

• Check that the insulation gloves are not torn or damaged.
• Wear the insulation glove after removing moisture.

Fold the insulation glove as above.

Fold again 3~4 times to make it airtight.
Squeeze the inflated glove to see if the glove is torn or damaged.
Caution when repairing the power cable

• When installing the high voltage terminal, insulate the terminal using insulation tape.
• Tighten the high voltage screw with specified torque.
• Be careful that the (+) terminal does not contact the (-) terminal.

Precautions when handling high voltage battery

• Battery Control System - Refer to "High Voltage Battery Handling Guide"

Precautions in case of fire in High Voltage Battery System

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• If fire broke out indoors, ventilate the area to clear out hydrogen gas.
• If fire can be put out, then do so using a CO₂ fire extinguisher. If this is not available, then use water or other types of fire extinguisher.
• CO₂has high insulation characteristics against electricity, so it is appropriate for electricity (C Rating) related fire.
• If fire cannot be put out, evacuate to a safe location, notify the fire department and do not approach the vehicle until the fire has been
extinguished.
• Turn OFF the vehicle Key in case of vehicle submersion/collision, and then exit the vehicle as quickly as possible.

Precautions in case of high voltage battery gas and/or electrolyte leakage

Page 6 sur 27

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug.
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• Gas is hydrogen and alkali vapor. If the fire occurred indoor, ventilate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline
solution.
• If leaked vapor or liquid gets in your eye, immediately clean with running water, then get medical attention.
• In case of gas leakage due to high temperature, do NOT use the battery until the high voltage battery cools down to room temperature.

Precautions when handling vehicle after an accident

• Be sure to wear insulated gloves (or rubber gloves), protective goggles, insulated suit, and insulated boots.
• Do NOT touch the bare cable when its insulation covering has been peeled.
(refer to "Precautions When Handling Power Cable")
• In case of fire on the vehicle and if the fire can be put out, then do so by using a CO₂ fire extinguisher. If this is not available, then use
water or other types of fire extinguisher.
• If more than half of the vehicle is submerged, then do not attempt to approach high voltage components, such as the Safety Plug. If such
a component must be handled, then first relocate the vehicle to a safe location, then handle the component.
• if fire broke out indoors, ventillate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location. because the gas id hydorgen and akali fumes.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline
solution.
• If high voltage needs to be shut-off, then refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure" when handling relevant components.

Preparations when servicing accident affected vehicle

• Insulated gloves (or rubber gloves), protective goggles, insulated suit, and insulated boots.
• Boric Acid Powder or Solution.
• CO₂ fire extinguisher or other fire extinguisher.
• Towel for cleaning electrolyte.
• Vinyl tape (for terminal insulation)
• Megaohm Tester (for checking high voltage insulation resistance)

Precautions when EV is unattended for a prolonged period

• Turn OFF the Start Button. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start. (This is to
prevent rapid discharging of high voltage battery from dark current.)
• If the high voltage battery state of charge (SOC) is less than 30%, then do not leave the vehicle unattended for a prolonged period.
• If the vehicle is unattended for prolonged period, then fully recharge the battery via normal charging once every 3 months to prevent the
high voltage battery SOC from becoming 0.
• When checking the auxiliary battery for discharge status or when replacing the auxiliary battery, check for problem related to high
voltage battery SOC reset.

Hybrid Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery / Charging Precautions

• Since the electric compressor uses high-voltage, POE oil with high Volumetric Resistivity Should be used.
• Do not use the same A/C recovery / charging station as conventional belt-driven compressors.

If the POE oil in the system gets mixed with PAG oil, it may result in dielectric breakdown due to decreased volumetric resistivity and
inoperative A/C compressor, disabling the A/C compressor.

General Information

High Voltage Shut-off Procedure

High voltage components : High Voltage Battery, Power Relay Assembly (PRA), Quick Charge Relay Assembly (QRA), Motor, Power
Cable, BMS ECU, Inverter, LDC, On-Board Charger (OBC), Main Relay, Pre-charge Relay, Pre-charge resistor, Battery Current
Sensor, Safety Plug, Main Fuse, Battery Temperature Sensor, Busbar, Charge Port, A/C Compressor, Electric Power Control Unit
(EPCU), High Voltage Heater, High Voltage Heater Relay etc.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative (-) terminal of the auxiliary battery.
2. Remove the cover (A) on the floor carpet of the rear seat.

3. After loosening the nut, remove the safety plug service cover (A).
Safety plug service cover mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Remove the safety plug (A).

Remove the safety plug in the follwing order.

Page 8 sur 27

5. Wait at least 5 minutes or until the capacitor in the high voltage system is fully discharged.
6. Measure the voltage between the inverter terminals to check that the capacitor in the inverter is discharged completely
(1) Lift the vehicle.
(2) Remove the high voltage battery lower cover (A) by loosening the bolt.

(3) Remove the high voltage cable (A).

(4) Measure the voltage between the inverter terminals.

Less than 30V : High voltage circuit properly shut
More than 30V : Faulty on high voltage circuit
Page 9 sur 27

If measured voltage is over 30V, check that the safety plug is removed completely. If it is is over 30V even though the safety plug
has been removerd, there may be a serious problem in the high voltage circuit. In this case, check DTC and never touch on the
high voltage system.
General Information

Basic Service Symbols

There are five primary symbols used to complement illustrations. These symbols indicate that particular materials should be applied in each
part during the sevice.
Symbol Meaning

Do not reuse the part. Replace a new one.

Apply engine oil or transmission oil to the part.

Page 10 sur 27

Apply automatic transmission fluid (ATF) to the part.

Apply grease to the part.

Apply sealant to the part.

General Information

General Service Information

Protection Of The Vehicle
Always be sure to cover fenders, seats, and floor areas before starting work.

The support rod must be inserted into the hole near the edge of the hood whenever you inspect the engine compartment to prevent the
hood from falling and causing possible injury.
Make sure that the support rod has been released prior to closing the hood. Always check to be sure the hood is firmly latched before
driving the vehicle.

Preparation Of Tools And Measuring Equipment

Be sure that all necessary tools and measuring equipment are available before starting work.

Special Tools
Use special tools as needed

Removal Of Parts
Page 11 sur 27

First, find the cause of the problem and then determine whether to remove or disassemble before starting the job.

Disassembly
If the disassembly procedure is complex, requiring many parts to be disassembled, all parts should be disassembled in a way that will not
affect their performance or external appearance.
1. Inspection of parts
Each removed part should be examined carefully for any suspected malfunctions, deformantion, damage and other problems.

2. Arrangement of parts
All disassembled parts should be carefully arranged for effective reassembly.
Be sure to separate and correctly identify parts to be replaced from reusable parts.

3. Cleaning parts for reuse

All reusable parts should be carefully and thoroughly cleaned by an appropriate method.
Page 12 sur 27

Parts
When replacing parts, use KIA MOTORS genuine parts.

Replacement
Standard values, such as torques and certain adjustments, must be strictly observed in the reassembly of all parts.
Once removed, the following parts should always be replaced with new ones.
1. Oil seals
2. Gaskets
3. O-rings
4. Lock washers
5. Cotter pins (split pins)
6. Plastic nuts

Depending on their location.

7. Sealant should be applied to gaskets.
Page 13 sur 27

8. Oil should be applied to the moving components of parts.

9. Specified oil or grease should be applied to the prescribed locations (oil seals, etc) before assembly.

Adjustment
Use gauges and testers to correctly adjust the parts according to standard values.

Electrical System
1. Be sure to disconnect the battery cable from the negative (-) terminal of the battery.
2. Never pull on the wires when disconnecting connectors.
3. Locking connectors will click when the connector is secure.
4. Handle sensors and relays carefully. Be careful not to drop them against other parts.

Rubber Parts And Tubes

Always keep rubber pats and tubing away from gasoline.

Measuring Body Dimensions

1. Basically, all measurements in this manual are taken with a tracking gauge.
2. When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending.
3. For measuring dimensions, both projected dimensions and actual - measurement dimensions are used in this manual.

Dimensions Projected
Page 14 sur 27

1. These are the dimensions measured when the measurement points are projected from the vehicle's surface, and are the reference
dimensions used for body alterations.
2. If the length of the tracking gauge probes is adjustable, measure it by lengthening one of two probes as long as the height difference
between two surfaces.

Measuring Actual Dimensions

1. These dimensions indicate the actual linear distance between measurement points, and are used as the reference dimensions when a
tracking gauge is used for measuring.
2. First adjust both probes to the same length (A=A') before measuring.

Check the probes and gauge it self to make sure that there are no loose parts.

Measurement Point
Measurements should be taken at the center of the hole.

Checking Cables And Wires

1. Check the terminal for tightness.
2. Check terminals and wires for corrosion from battery electrolyte, etc.
3. Check terminals and wires for open circuits.
4. Check wire insulation and coating for damage, cracks and degrading.
5. Check the conductive parts of terminals for contact with other metallic parts (vehicle body and other parts).
6. Check grounded parts to verify that there is complete continuity between their attaching bolt(s) and the vehicle's body.
Page 15 sur 27

7. Check for incorrect wiring.

8. Check that the wiring is so clamped to prevent contact with sharp corners of the vehicle body, etc. or hot parts (exhaust manifold, etc.)
9. Check that the wiring is clamped firmly to provide enough clearance from the fan pulley, fan belt and other rotating or moving parts.
10. Check that the wiring has a little space so that it can vibrate between fixed and moving parts such as the vehicle body and the engine.

Check Fuses
A blade type fuse test taps are provided to allow checking the fuse itself without removing it from the fuse box. The fuse is good if the test
lamp lights up when one lead is connected to the test taps (one at a time) and the other lead is grounded. (Turn the ignition switch so that
the fuse circuit becomes operative)

Servicing The Electrical System

1. Prior to servicing the electrical system, be sure to turn off the ignition switch and disconnect the battery ground cable.

In the course of MFI or ELC system diagnosis, when the battery cable is removed, any diagnostic trouble code retained by the
computer will be cleared. Therefore, if necessary, record the diagnostic data before removing the battery cable.

2. Attach the wiring harnesses with clamps so that there is no slack. However, for any harness which passes the engine or other vibrating
parts of the vehicle, allow some slack within a range that does not allow the engine vibrations to cause the harness to come into contact
with any of the surrounding parts and then secure the harness using a clamp.
Page 16 sur 27

3. If any section of a wiring harness interferes with the edge of a parts, or a corner, wrap the section of the harness with tape or something
similar in order to protect it from damage.

4. When installing any parts, be careful not to pinch or damage any of the wiring harness.

5. Never throw relays, sensors or electrical parts, or expose them to strong shock.

6. The electronic parts used in the computer, relays, etc. are prone to heat. If there is a need for service operations that may cause the
temperature to exceed 80°C (176°F), remove the electronic parts before handling.
Page 17 sur 27

7. Loose connectors cause problems. Make sure that the connectors are always securely fastened.

8. When disconnecting a connector, be sure to grip only the connector, not the wires.

9. Disconnect connector which have catches by pressing in the direction of the arrows as in the illustration.

10. Connect connectors which have lock tabs by insertingthe connectors until they make a clicking sound.
Page 18 sur 27

11. When using a circuit tester to check continuity or voltage on connector terminals, insert the test probe into the harness side. If the
connector is a sealed connector, insert the test probe through the hole in the rubber cap until it touches contacts the terminal, being
careful not to damage the insulation of the wires.

12. To avoid overloading the wires, determine the appropriate wire size considering the electrical current load of the optional equipment.
Permissible current
Nominal size SAE gauge No.
In engine compartment Other areas
0.3mm² AWG 22 - 5A
0.5mm² AWG 20 7A 13A
0.85mm² AWG 18 9A 17A
1.25mm² AWG 16 12A 22A
2.0mm² AWG 14 16A 30A
3.0mm² AWG 12 21A 40A
5.0mm² AWG 10 31A 54A

General Information

Identification Numbers
Page 19 sur 27

Identification Number Description

Vehicle Identification Number

1. World Manufacturer Identifier (WMI)

- KNA : Passenger vehicle, MPV(Multipurpose Passenger Vehicle)/SUV(Sports Utility Vehicle)/RV(Recreational Vehicle)
- KNC : Commercial vehicle (Van)
- KND : MPV/SUV/RV (For U.S.A, Canada, Mexico)
- KNH : Van
2. Vehicle line
- J : SOUL
3. Model & Series
Page 20 sur 27

- M : Low grade (L)

- N : Middle-Low grade (GL)
- P : Middle grade (GLS, JSL, TAX)
- R : Middle-High grade (HGS)
4. Body/Cabin type, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
KNA
- 1 : Limousine
- 2 : Sedan - 2 door
- 3 : Sedan - 3 door
- 4 : Sedan - 4 door
- 5 : Sedan - 5 door
- 6 : Coupe
- 7 : Convertible
- 8 : Wagon
- 9 : Commercial Van
- 0 : Pick-Up
KNC (Commercial vehicle / Van)
Except U.S.A, Canada, Mexico, Gulf Cooperation Council, China
- X : Standard Cabin / Semi-Bonnet
- Y : Double Cabin / Bonnet
- Z : Super Cabin / Box
For U.S.A, Canada, Mexico, Gulf Cooperation Council, China
- 2 : Standard Cabin Class-H 4×2
- 3 : Standard Cabin Class-E 4×2 / Semi-Bonnet Class-E 4×2
- 4 : Standard Cabin Class-E 4×4 / Semi-Bonnet Class-E 4×4
- 5 : Standard Cabin Class-F 4×2 / Semi-Bonnet Class-F 4×2
- 6 : Standard Cabin Class-F 4×4 / Semi-Bonnet Class-F 4×4
- 7 : Double Cabin Class-E 4×2 / Bonnet Class-E 4×2
- 8 : Double Cabin Class-E 4×4 / Bonnet Class-E 4×4
- 9 : Double Cabin Class-F 4×2 / Bonnet Class-F 4×2
- 0 : Double Cabin Class-F 4×4 / Bonnet Class-F 4×4
- A : Super Cabin Class-E 4×2 / Box Class-E 4×2
- B : Super Cabin Class-E 4×4 / Box Class-E 4×4
- C : Super Cabin Class-F 4×2 / Box Class-F 4×2
- D : Super Cabin Class-F 4×4 / Box Class-F 4×4
KND
- 1 : Wagon 4×2 Class-A
- 2 : Wagon 4×2 Class-B
- 3 : Wagon 4×2 Class-C
- 4 : Wagon 4×2 Class-D
- 5 : Wagon 4×2 Class-E
- 6 : Wagon 4×2 Class-F
- 7 : Wagon 4×2 Class-G
- A : Wagon 4×4 Class-A
- B : Wagon 4×4 Class-B
- C : Wagon 4×4 Class-C
- D : Wagon 4×4 Class-D
- E : Wagon 4×4 Class-E
- F : Wagon 4×4 Class-F
- G : Wagon 4×4 Class-G
KNH
- 1 : Box
- 2 : Bonnet
- 3 : Semi-Bonnet
5. Restraint system, Brake system
KNA, KND
Except U.S.A, Canada, Mexico
- 0 : Both side - None
- 1 : Both side - Active belt
- 2 : Both side - Passive belt
Page 21 sur 27

For U.S.A, Canada, Mexico

Front air bag Knee air bag Side air bag Curtain air bag
Code Seat belt
Driver's Passenger's Driver's Passenger's 1st row 2nd row 3rd row 1st row 2nd row 3rd row
A ○ ○ ○ × × ○ × × ○ ○ ×
B ○ ○ ○ × × × × × × × ×
C ○ ○ ○ × × ○ × × ○ ○ ○
D ○ ○ ○ × × ○ ○ × ○ ○ ×
E ○ ○ × × × × × × × × ×
F ○ ○ ○ × × ○ × × × × ×
J ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ × ○ ○ ×
L ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ × × ○ ○ ×
N ○ × × × × × × × × × ×
H ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ × × ○ ○ ○

KNC, KNH
Except U.S.A, Canada, Mexico
- 7 : Hydraulic brake system
- 8 : Pneumatic brake system
- 9 : Mixed brake system
For U.S.A, Canada, Mexico
- X : Hydraulic brake system
- Y : Pneumatic brake system
- Z : Mixed brake system
6. Motor type
- E : Battery [LiPB 350 V, 75 Ah] + Motor [3-phase AC 80 KW]
7. Check digit or Driver’s side & Transmission
Except U.S.A, Canada, Mexico, Gulf Cooperation Council, China, Yemen
- A : LHD & MT
- B : LHD & AT
- C : LHD & MT+Transfer
- D : LHD & AT+Transfer
- E : LHD & CVT
- F : LHD & Decelerator
- G : LHD & DCT
- L : RHD & MT
- M : RHD & AT
- N : RHD & MT+Transfer
- S : RHD & AT+Transfer
- T : RHD & CVT
- U : RHD & Decelerator
- V : RHD & DCT
For U.S.A, Canada, Mexico, Gulf Cooperation Council, China, Yemen
- Check digit : 0 ~ 9, ×
8. Model year
- E : 2014, F : 2015, G : 2016, H : 2017 …
9. Production Plant
- 5 : Hwaseong (Korea)
- 6 : Soha-ri (Korea)
- 7 : Gwangju (Korea)
- T : Seosan (Korea)
10. Vehicle production sequence number
- 000001 ~ 999999

Motor Number
Page 22 sur 27

1. Motor model
2. Motor type
- 80 : 80 KW
3. Production year
- E : 2014, F : 2015, G : 2016, H : 2017...
4. Motor production sequence number
- 000001 ~ 999999
Paint Code
Code Color
ACN Snow White Pearl
AAT Caribbean Blue
ABR Cherry Black
IM Titanium Silver
1D Clear White

General Information

Lift And Support Points

When heavy rear components such as suspension, fuel tank, spare tire, tailgate and trunk lid are to be removed, place additional weight
in the luggage area before hoisting. When substantial weight is removed from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity may change
and can cause the vehicle to tip forward on the hoist.

• Since each tire/wheel assembly weights approximately 14kg (30lbs), placing the front wheels in the luggage area can assist with the
weight distribution.
• Use the same support points to support the vehicle on safety stands.
1. Place the lift blocks under the support points as shown in the illustration.
2. Raise the hoist a few inches (centimeters) and rock the vehicle to be sure it is firmly supported.
3. Raise the hoist to full height to inspect the lift points for secure support.
Page 23 sur 27

General Information

Important Safety Notice

Proper service methods and repair procedures are essential for safe, reliable operation of all motor vehicles as well as personal safety of the
operator. The service procedures and descriptions in this shop manual provide general directions for a service and repair.
Procedure, techniques, tools, and parts for service including the skill of the technician vary. It is impossible to provide advice or caution as to
each case in this manual.
Accordingly, anyone who intends to use a replacement part, service procedure, or tool, which is not recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer, must first assure thoroughly that neither their personal safety nor the safe operation of the vehicle will be jeopardized by the
replacement part, service procedure, or tool they chose to use.

Reminds you to be especially careful in those areas where carelessness will cause death or serious injury.

Reminds you to be especially careful in those areas where carelessness may cause death or serious injury.

Reminds you to be especially careful in those areas where carelessness may cause personal injury.

Gives you information that will prevent you from making errors that could damage the vehicle.

Gives you added information that will help you complete a particular procedure.
The following list contains some general WARNINGS that you should follow while working on a vehicle.
• Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
• Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires you to be under the vehicle.
• Make sure that the ignition switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure.
• Set the parking brake when working on the vehicle. If you have an automatic transaxle, set in park unless instructed otherwise for a
specific operation.
Page 24 sur 27

• Place support against the front and rear surfaces of the tires to help prevent the vehicle from moving.
• Do not smoke while working on a vehicle.
• To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry, and loose clothing before beginning to work on a vehicle.
• When it is necessary to work under the hood, keep hands and other objects clear of the electric fanblades! Care should betaken be
taken to ensure that the electric fan motor is completely disconnected when working under the hood.
General Information

Towing
If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service. Never tow vehicle just on rope or a chain as It is very dangerous.
[Front]

[Rear]

Emergency Towing
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle :
- The operator loads the vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way of transporting the a vehicle.
- The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the tires of the driving axle and lift them off the ground. The other two wheels remain
on the ground.
- The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks wrap around parts of the frame or suspension, and the cables lift
that end of the vehicle off the ground. Attempting this method of towing can seriously damage the vehicle's suspension and body.
If the vehicle cannot be transported by a flat-bed truck, it should be towed by lifting the wheels of the driving axle off the ground. In this case,
the following procedure should be taken :
Reduction Gear Assembly
• Start the motor.
• Shift to [D] position, then [N] position.
• Turn off the motor.

• Improper towing preparation will damage the reduction gear assembly. Precisely the above procedure exactly. If you cannot shift
the reduction gear or start the motor, your vehicle must be transported on a flatbed.
• It is the best partice to tow the vehicle no farther than 30km (19miles), at a speed below 50km/h (30mph).
• Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's
weight.
General Information
Page 25 sur 27

Warning And Caution Labels

1. Reservoir cap caution 3. Auxiliary 12V auxiliary battery caution

2. Cooling fan caution 4. High voltage caution

Auxiliary battery Caution Label

Page 26 sur 27

Warning / Caution Label (Cont'd)

A.
Keep lighted cigarettes and all other flames or sparks away from the auxiliary battery.

B.
Wear eye protection when charging or working near a battery. Always provide ventilation when working in an enclosed space.
• When lifting a plastic-cased auxiliary battery, excessive pressure may result in personal injury as acid may leak. Lift with a battery carrier
or with hands by holding opposite corners.
• Never attempt to change the auxiliary battery when the auxiliary battery cables are connected.
• The electrical ignition system works on high voltage.
Never touch these components with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

C.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children as batteries contain highly corrosive SULFURIC ACID. Do not allow auxiliary battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes, clothing or paint finish.

D.
If any electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If
possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth until medical attention is received.
If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel a pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention
immediately.

E.
Always read the following instructions carefully when handling a auxiliary battery.

F.
Hydrogen, a highly combustible gas, is always present in battery cells and may explode if ignited.

G.
An improperly disposed auxiliary battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.
Always follow(check) local regulations for auxiliary battery disposal.

Handling And Storing The Battery

Auxiliary battery Itself • Auxiliary batteries should be stored in cool, dry (27 degrees Celsius) places and out of direct
sunlight.
• MF batteries are tightly sealed to prevent acid leakage.
Page 27 sur 27

However, tilting the auxiliary battery to an angle of 45 degrees can cause acid to leak through
the vents on the sides. Therefore, auxiliary batteries should always be stored in their upright
positions. Prevent placing any aqueous or solid (i.e. conductors) bodies on top of the auxiliary
battery.
• It is extremely dangerous to use tools, such as hammers, on the auxiliary battery terminals
when connecting cables to the mounted auxiliary battery.
Auxiliary battery on Vehicle • When storing the vehicle for a long period of time, make sure to remove the memory fuse in
the junction box to prevent natural discharging.
• Also, if the memory fuse hasn't been removed at the time of storing the vehicle, run the motor
within a month to chare the auxilary battery.
If the memory fuse has been removed at the time of storing the vehicle, run the motor within 3
months to charge the auxiliary battery.

After reconnecting or recharging a discharged auxiliary battery, the ESC OFF indicator may illuminate.
In this case, turn the handle half way to the left and right whilst the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Then, restart the motor after the ignition is OFF.
The ESC OFF indicator may turn OFF.
If the ESC OFF indicator does not turn OFF, have the system checked according to DTC.
Page 1 sur 22

Maintenance

Inspection
Battery Voltage and Status
Check the battery voltage and status using the battery tester.

Battery Terminal
1. Move back and forth to check that the battery terminals (A) are loose or corroded.
If the terminals are corroded, clean them.

If battery positive connection is loose, disconnect ground(GND) cable first before attempting to remove or tighten plus
connection, to prevent personal injury.
2. If the battery clamp on battery positive (+) terminal is not seated securely:
(1) Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery negative (-) terminal.
(2) Tighten battery clamp (A) on battery positive (+) terminal
Battery positive (+) terminal:
7.8 ~ 9.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.0 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 7.2 lb-ft)

3. If the battery clamp on battery negative (-) terminal is not seated securely:
(1) Tighten battery clamp (A) on battery negative (-) terminal.
Battery negative (-) terminal:
4.0 ~ 6.0 N.m (0.4 ~ 0.6 kgf.m, 3.0 ~ 4.4 lb-ft)
Page 2 sur 22

Battery Condition
Check the battery for damage or deformation. If severe damage, deformation or leakage is found, replace the battery.
Maintenance

Inspection
Radiator hoses
1. Check radiator hoses for the following
(1) Improper attachment
(2) Leaks
(3) Cracks
(4) Damage
(5) Loose connections
(6) Chafing
(7) Deterioration

Coolant level
1. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. Make sure it is between the "F" mark and "L" mark.
2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or below the "L" mark, add coolant to bring it between the "L" and "F" marks, then
inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Coolant quality
1. Remove the radiator cap.
2. Check if there are any excessive deposits of rust or scale around the radiator cap sub-assembly and radiator filler hole. Also, the
coolant should be free of oil.
If it is excessively dirty, clean the coolant passage and replace the coolant.
3. Install the radiator cap.

Coolant Refilling And Bleeding

Never remove the reservoir cap when the high voltage system and electric device radiator are hot. Serious burns may be caused
when hot fluid under high pressure escapes from the reservoir.

When pouring electric device coolant, be sure to shut the relay box lid and not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the paint.
If any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately.
1. Make sure the electric device system and electric device radiator are cool to the touch.
2. Remove reservoir cap (A).
Page 3 sur 22

3. Remove the under cover.

(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Under Cover")
4. Loosen the drain plug (A) and drain the coolant.

5. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.

6. After draining engine coolant in the reservoir tank, clean the tank.
7. Fill the reservoir with water through the reservoir cap and tighten the cap.

To most effectively bleed the air, pour the water slowly and press on the upper/lower radiator hoses.
8. Connect a GDS and then operate the Electric Water Pump (EWP).
Page 4 sur 22
Page 5 sur 22
Page 6 sur 22
Page 7 sur 22

9. Repeat steps 1 to 8 until the drained water runs clear.

10. Fill fluid mixture of coolant and water (50%) slowly through the reservoir cap. Push the coolant hoses of the radiator so as to bleed
air easily.

• Use only genuine antifreeze/coolant.

• For best corrosion protection, the coolant concentration must be maintained year-round at 55% minimum. Coolant
concentrations less than 55% may not provide sufficient protection against corrosion or freezing.
• For best corrosion protection, the coolant concentration must be maintained year-round at 55% minimum. Coolant
concentrations less than 55% may not provide • sufficient protection against corrosion or freezing.
• Do not mix different brands of antifreeze/coolants.
• Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products; they may not be compatible with the coolant.
11. Connect a GDS and then operate the Electric Water Pump (EWP).
Page 8 sur 22
Page 9 sur 22
Page 10 sur 22
Page 11 sur 22

12. When the Electric Water Pump (EWP) operates and electric device coolant circulates, refill electric device coolant through the
coolant filling bottle.
13. Bleeding of the electric device cooling system is completed when the operational sound volume of the Electric Water Pump (EWP)
gets lower and when no air bubbles can be seen in the coolant filling bottle.

After air bleeding is completed, make sure that electric device coolant in the coolant filling bottle flows without air bubbles
during the EWP actuation. If the electric device coolant does not flow or if air bubbles are still visible, repeat steps 10 to 13.
14. After air bleeding is completed, stop the Electric Water Pump (EWP), add electric device coolant to the “F” level on the electric
device reservoir and install the electric device reservoir cap and the electric device reservoir cap.

It takes time to bleed out all the air in the cooling system. Refill coolant when coolant gets cool completely, and then recheck
the coolant level in the reservoir tank 2 - 3 days after replacing coolant.
Coolant capacity
Without Heat Pump : Approx. 4.1 ~ 4.2 L (1.08 ~ 1.11 U.S.gal., 4.33 ~ 4.44 U,S,qt., 3.61 ~ 3.70 lmp.qt)
With Heat Pump : Approx. 4.6 ~ 4.7 L (1.22 ~ 1.24 U.S.gal., 4.86 ~ 4.97 U,S,qt., 4.05 ~ 4.14 lmp.qt)
Maintenance

Inspection
1. Lift the vehicle.
2. Remove the under cover.
(Refer to Traction Motor System - "under cover")
3. Remove the oil filler plug (A).
Page 12 sur 22

4. Check the oil condition and then oil level (A).

If the oil level is low, supplement the oil up to filler plug hole.
5. Install the oil filler plug (A).

Must replace with new gasket when installing the drain plug.

Replacement

Gear differential unit system does not need to be replaced for Normal Usage. If the vehicle is used for any of the Severe Usage
conditions listed below, replace the 120,000 miles. Severe usage is defined as
• Driving in rough road (Bumpy, Gravel, Snowy, Unpaved road, etc)
• Driving in mountain road, ascent/descent
• Repetition of short distance driving
• More than 50% operation in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 32°C(89.6°F) .
• Police, Taxi, Commercial type operation or trailer towing, etc
1. Using the lift raise the car.
2. Remove the under cover.
(Refer to Traction Motor System - "under cover")
Page 13 sur 22

3. Remove the drain plug (A) and drain the oil totally and then reinstall the drain plug.

Must replace with new gasket when installing the drain plug.
4. Remove the oil filler plug (A).

5. Supplement up to oil filler plug hole.

6. Install the oil filler plug (A).

7. Install the under cover.

(Refer to Traction Motor System - "under cover")
Page 14 sur 22

Maintenance

Inspection
1. Check the brake fluid level.

Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your
eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If brake fluid level is lower than the MIN line, check the clutch line or brake line for leaks and inspect the disc brake pads. If
necessary, refill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX line after repair or replacement. Use the specified fluid. Avoid mixing
different brands of fluid.
Specified fluid:SAE J1703 (DOT 3 or DOT 4)

Maintenance

Inspection
Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage
Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Maintenance

Inspection
Check that the brake pedal operates smoothly.

Brake Pedal Height and Stop Lamp Switch clearance Adjustment

1. Disconnect the stop lamp switch connector (A).

2. Adjust the brake pedal height (A) as illustration below.

Pedal height (A):174.2 mm (6.86 in)
Full stroke (C):108 mm (4.25 in)

3. Adjust the stop lamp switch clearance (B).

Stop lamp clearance (B):
1.0 ~ 2.0 mm (0.04 ~ 0.08 in)
Page 15 sur 22

4. Connect the stop lamp switch connector

Maintenance

Inspection
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.
Front Brake

Front Brake Disc Thickness Check

1. Check the brake pads for wear and fade.
2. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks.
3. Remove all rust and contamination from the surface, and measure the disc thickness at 8 points, at least, of same distance (5mm)
from the brake disc outer circle.
Front brake disc thickness
Standard : 23 mm (0.906 in)
Service Limit : 21 mm (0.827 in)
Deviation: Less than 0.005 mm (0.0002 in)

4. If wear exceeds the limit, replace the discs and pad assembly left and right of the vehicle.

Front Brake Pad Check

1. Check the pad wear. Measure the pad thickness and replace it, if it is less than the specified value.
Pad thickness
Standard value: 10.5 mm (0.413 in)
Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.0787 in)

2. Check that grease is applied, to sliding contact points and the pad and backing metal for damage.

Front Brake Disc Runout Check

1. Place a dial gauge about 5mm (0.2 in.) from the outer circumference of the brake disc, and measure the runout of the disc.
Brake disc runout
Page 16 sur 22

Limit: 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.) or less (new one)

2. If the runout of the brake disc exceeds the limit specification, replace the disc, and then measure the runout again.
3. If the runout does not exceed the limit specification, install the brake disc after turning it 180° and then check the runout of the brake
disc again.
4. If the runout cannot be corrected by changing the position of the brake disc, replace the brake disc.
Rear Brake

Rear brake disc thickness check

1. Check the brake pads for wear and fade.
2. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks.
3. Remove all rust and contamination from the surface, and measure the disc thickness at 8 points, at least, of same distance (5mm)
from the brake disc outer circle.
Brake disc thickness
Standard: 10 mm (0.393 in)
Service limit: 8.4 mm (0.331 in)
Deviation: Less than 0.005mm (0.0002in)

4. If wear exceeds the limit, replace the discs and pad assembly left and right of the vehicle.

Rear Brake Pad Check

1. Check the pad wear. Measure the pad thickness and replace it, if it is less than the specified value.
Pad thickness
Standard value: 10 mm (0.394 in)
Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.0787 in)
Page 17 sur 22

2. Check that grease is applied, to sliding contact points and the pad and backing metal for damage.

Rear Brake Disc Runout Check

1. Place a dial gauge about 5mm (0.2 in.) from the outer circumference of the brake disc, and measure the runout of the disc.
Brake disc runout
Limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.) or less (new one)

Replacement
Front brake pads
1. Remove the front wheel & tire.
2. Loosen the guide rod bolt (B) and pivot the caliper body (A) up out of the way.

3. Replace pad shim (D), pad retainers (C) and brake pads (B) in the caliper carrier (A).
Page 18 sur 22

4. Compress the piston into the caliper body using the SST (09581-11000).

5. Place the caliper body (A) on the caliper carrier and tighten the guide rod bolt (B).
Tightening torque :
21.6 ~ 31.4 N.m (2.2 ~ 3.2 kgf.m, 15.9 ~ 23.1 lb-ft)

6. Install the front wheel & tire.

Tightening torque :
88.3 ~ 107.9 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6 lb-ft)

Rear Brake Pads

1. Remove the front wheel & tire.
2. Loosen the guide rod bolt (B) and the remove the rear caliper body (A).
Tightening torque :
21.6 ~ 31.4 N.m (2.2 ~ 3.2 kgf.m, 15.9 ~ 23.1 lb-ft)
Page 19 sur 22

3. Replace pad retainers (C) and brake pads (B) in the caliper carrier (A).

4. Rotate the caliper piston and push the direction of the arrow.

5. Place the caliper body (A) on the caliper carrier and tighten the guide rod bolt (B).
Tightening torque :
21.6 ~ 31.4 N.m (2.2 ~ 3.2 kgf.m, 15.9 ~ 23.1 lb-ft)

Assemble the caliper body so that the piston groove (A) is in-line with the pad center lobe (B).
Page 20 sur 22

* Make sure that the piston and pad are tightly attached.
6. Install the front wheel & tire.
Tightening torque :
88.3 ~ 107.9 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6 lb-ft)
Maintenance

Inspection
1. Check the drive shaft boots for loose clamps, cracks, grease leaks, kinks or damage.

Maintenance

Inspection
1. Check the steering wheel free road.
(1) Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are facing straight ahead.
(2) Measure the distance where the steering wheel can be turned without moving the front wheels.
Standard value:30mm (1.18in.) or less
(3) If the play exceeds standard value, inspect the steering column, shaft, and linkages.

2. Check the steering linkage for looseness or damage.

(1) Check that the dust parking and cap are not damaged.
(2) Check that the Bellows bands are not loose.
Page 21 sur 22

(3) Check that the steering gear box is not damaged.

(4) Check that the column and shaft are properly connected to the steering gear box.
Maintenance

Inspection
1. Check the suspension ball joint.
Check the grease leaks, kinks or damage in the front lower arm ball joint.

2. Check the grease leaks, kinks or damage in the tie rod end ball joint.

Maintenance

Inspection
1. Check the tire pressure.
(230+7 kPa (33psi+1.0psi)
2. Check the tire tread wear.
(Refer to Suspension System - "Tire")
3. Check if the wear of tire tread is uneven.
(Refer to Suspension System - "Alignment")
Maintenance

Description
The climate control air filter is located in the blower unit. It eliminates foreign materials and odor. The particle filter performs a role as an
odor filter as well as a conventional dust filter to ensure comfortable interior environment.
Maintenance

Replacement
1. Open the glove box (A).
Page 22 sur 22

2. Remove the air filter panel (A).

3. Remove the filter cover (A) by pressing the knob.

4. Replace the air filter (A) with a new one according to the direction of air filter.

• To remove the filter easily, press the right side inward then pull out the filter.
• In case of driving in an air-polluted area or rugged terrain, check and replace the air filter as frequently as possible.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1 sur 28

Driveshaft and axle

Safety Precaution

Sinse Electric Vehicle contains a high voltage, battery mishandling the high voltage system or vehicle may lead to a serious accident
including electric shock and electric leakage.

• All the high voltage wiring and connectors are in orange.

• Inform of possible danger of high voltage by placing a "high voltage caution" sign on the vehicle as in the image below.
Page 2 sur 28
Page 3 sur 28

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Insulation gloves Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage
components
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]
Page 4 sur 28

Insulation shoes

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation clothes
components

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses

Used in the following cases :

• During Removal & installation or inspection of the high
voltage battery terminals or wiring, which spark might happen.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

All removed high voltage components are placed on an

Insulation mat
insulation mat to prevent safety accidents.

Insulation sheet is used to cover high voltage components to

Insulation sheet protect people not wearing personal protective equipment from
safety accidents.

Warning tape Used for infomring that it is dangerous to come over this line.
Page 5 sur 28

Personal Protective Equipment Inspection

• Check that the personal protective equipment is not damaged.

• Check that the insulation gloves are not torn or damaged.
• Wear the insulation glove after removing moisture.

Fold the insulation glove as above.

Fold again 3~4 times to make it airtight.
Squeeze the inflated glove to see if the glove is torn or damaged.
Caution when repairing the power cable

Precautions when handling high voltage battery

• Battery Control System - Refer to "High Voltage Battery Handling Guide"

Precautions in case of fire in High Voltage Battery System

Precautions in case of high voltage battery gas and/or electrolyte leakage

Page 6 sur 28

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug.
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• Gas is hydrogen and alkali vapor. If the fire occurred indoor, ventilate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline
solution.
• If leaked vapor or liquid gets in your eye, immediately clean with running water, then get medical attention.
• In case of gas leakage due to high temperature, do NOT use the battery until the high voltage battery cools down to room temperature.

Precautions when handling vehicle after an accident

Preparations when servicing accident affected vehicle

Precautions when EV is unattended for a prolonged period

Hybrid Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery / Charging Precautions

If the POE oil in the system gets mixed with PAG oil, it may result in dielectric breakdown due to decreased volumetric resistivity and
inoperative A/C compressor, disabling the A/C compressor.

Driveshaft and axle

High Voltage Shut-off Procedure

3. After loosening the nut, remove the safety plug service cover (A).
Safety plug service cover mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Remove the safety plug (A).

Remove the safety plug in the follwing order.

Page 8 sur 28

(3) Remove the high voltage cable (A).

(4) Measure the voltage between the inverter terminals.

Less than 30V : High voltage circuit properly shut
More than 30V : Faulty on high voltage circuit
Page 9 sur 28

Specification
Joint type Max. permissible angle
Motor
Outer Inner Outer Inner
80KW BJ#92 TJ#92 45° 21°

Tightening Torques
Item N.m kgf.m Ib.ft
Front Tire wheel hub nuts 88.3 ~ 107.9 9.0 ~ 11.0 65.1 ~ 79.6
Drive shaft coking nut 274.6 ~ 294.2 28.0 ~ 30.0 202.5 ~ 217.0
Strut assembly to knuckle 137.3 ~ 156.9 14.0 ~ 16.0 101.3 ~ 115.7
Caliper guide rod bolt 21.6 ~ 31.4 2.2 ~ 3.2 15.9 ~ 23.1
Brake caliper mounting bolt 78.4 ~ 98.0 8.0 ~ 10.0 57.8 ~ 72.3
Wheel speed sensor mounting bolt 6.8 ~ 10.7 0.7 ~ 1.1 5.0 ~ 7.9
Page 10 sur 28

Brake disc mounting screw 4.9 ~ 5.8 0.5 ~ 0.6 3.6 ~ 4.3
Lower arm to knuckle 58.8 ~ 70.6 6.0 ~ 7.2 43.4 ~ 52.1
Tie rod end ball joint nut 23.5 ~ 33.3 2.4 ~ 3.4 17.4 ~ 24.5
Tire wheel hub nuts 88.2 ~ 107.8 9.0 ~ 11.0 65.0 ~ 79.5
Rear caliper guide rod bolt 21.6 ~ 31.4 2.2 ~ 3.2 15.9 ~ 23.1
Rear Rear caliper to torsion beam axle 63.7 ~ 73.5 6.5 ~ 7.5 47.0 ~ 54.2
Rear hub assembly to torsion beam axle 49.0 ~ 58.8 5.0 ~ 6.0 36.2 ~ 43.3
Disc fixing screw 4.9 ~ 5.9 0.5 ~ 0.6 3.6 ~ 4.3

Lubricants
Motor Joint Lubricants Quantity
BJ GRB006 105g (+10g/0)
80KW
TJ SH06-VX21 140g (+10g/0)

Driveshaft and axle

Special Service Tools

Tool Name / Number Illustration Description

Band installer
Used to install ear type boot band
09495-3K000

Puller
Used to remove spider assembly
09495-33000

Ball joint puller

Used to separate ball joint from the front axle.
09568-34000

Driveshaft and axle

Troubleshooting
Trouble Symptom Probable cause Remedy
Scoring of driveshaft ball joint Replace
Vehicle pulls to one side Wear, rattle or scoring of wheel bearing Replace
Defective front suspension and steering Adjustment or Replace
Wear, damage or bending of driveshaft Replace
Vibration Drive Shaft rattle and hub uneveness Replace
Wear, rattle or scratching of wheel bearing Replace
Defective wheel balance Adjustment or Replace
Shimmy
Defective front suspension and steering Adjustment or Replace
Excessive noise Wear, damage or bending of driveshaft Replace
Rattle of driveshaft and worn hub splines Replace
Wear, rattle or scoring of wheel bearing Replace
Loose hub nut Adjustment or Replace
Page 11 sur 28

Defective front suspension and steering Adjustment or Replace

Driveshaft and axle

Component (1)

1. Driveshaft (RH) 3. Driveshaft (LH)

2. Circlip

Component (2)
[LH]
Page 12 sur 28

1. BJ assembly 5. Shaft 9. Snap ring

2. BJ circlip 6. TJ boot band 10. TJ housing
3. BJ boot band 7. TJ boot 11. TJ circlip
4. BJ boot 8. Spider assembly

[RH]
Page 13 sur 28

1. BJ assembly 5. Shaft 9. Snap ring

2. BJ circlip 6. TJ boot band 10. TJ housing
3. BJ boot band 7. TJ boot 11. TJ circlip
4. BJ boot 8. Spider assembly

Driveshaft and axle

Replacement
1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly.
Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
2. Remove the front wheel and tire (A) from front hub.
Tightening torque:
88.3 ~ 107.9 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6 lb-ft)
Page 14 sur 28

Be careful not to damage to the hub bolts when removing the front wheel and tire (A).
3. Remove the driveshaft coking nut (A).
Tightening torque:
274.6 ~ 294.2 N.m (28.0 ~ 30.0 kgf.m, 202.5 ~ 217.0 lb-ft)

• The driveshaft lock nut should be replaced with new ones.

• After installation driveshaft lock nut, stake the lock nut using a chisel and hammer as shown in the illustration below.

4. Remove the tie rod end ball joint (C) from the knuckle by using the SST (09568-34000).
(1) Remove the split pin (A).
(2) Remove the castle nut (B).
(3) Use the SST (09568-34000).
Tightening torque:
23.5 ~ 33.3N.m (2.4 ~ 3.4kgf.m, 19.4 ~ 24.6lb-ft)
Page 15 sur 28

• When using SST, be sure not to damage the dust cover of lower arm ball joint.
• Keep SST tied to the car because there is arisk of injury by dropping the SST duringremoval of the lower arm ball joint.
• The peripheral parts may be damaged when removing the lower arm ball joint with a general tool such as lever, so be sure to
use SST.
5. Remove the lower arm (A) from the knuckle.
Tightening torque:
58.8 ~ 70.6 N.m (6.0 ~ 7.2 kgf.m, 43.4 ~ 52.1 lb-ft)

6. Using a plastic hammer, disconnect driveshaft (A) from the axle hub (B).
Page 16 sur 28

7. Insert a pry bar (A) between the transaxle case and joint case, and separate the drive shaft (B) from the transaxle case.

8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

9. Check the front alignment.
(Refer to Suspension System - "Front Alignment")

Inspection
1. Check the driveshaft boots for damage and deterioration.
2. Check the ball joint for wear and damage.
3. Check the splines for wear and damage.
4. Check the dynamic damper for cracks, wear and position.

5. Check the driveshaft for cracks and abnormal wear.

Disassembly

• Do not disassemble BJ assembly

• Special grease must be applied to the driveshaft joint. Do not substitute with another type of grease.
• The boot band should be replaced with a new one.
1. Remove the Front Driveshaft.
(Refer to Driveshaft Assembly - "Front Driveshaft")
2. Remove the BJ circlip (B) from the TJ housing (A).
Page 17 sur 28

3. Remove both boot bands from the TJ housing.

4. Pull out the boot from the transaxle side joint (TJ).
5. While separating joint boot (A) of the transaxle side,wipe the grease in VTJ case (B) and lay them in the correct order.

• Make alignment marks (D) on spider roller assembly (A), TJ housing (B), and shaft spline (C) to aid reassembly.
Page 18 sur 28

6. Remove the snap ring (A) from the shaft.

7. Remove the spider assembly (B) from the driveshaft (A) using the special tool (09495-33000).

8. Clean the spider assembly.

9. Remove the TJ boot (A).

• For reusing the boot (A), wrap tape (B) around the driveshaft splines (C) to protect the boot (A).

Reassembly
1. Wrap tape around the driveshaft spline(TJ) to prevent damage to the boot.
2.
Page 19 sur 28

Using the alignment marks (D) made during disassembly as a guide, install the spider assembly (A) and snap ring (B) on the driveshaft
splines (C).

3. Add grease to the joint boot.

4. Install both boot bands.
5. To control the air in the TJ boot, keep the specified distance between the boot bands when they are tightened.
Distance (L) mm (in.)
Motor
LH side RH side
80KW 546.3 804.7

6. Using the SST(09495-3K000), secure the TJ boot bands.

Clearance (A):2.0 mm (0.0787 in.) or less
Page 20 sur 28

7. Install the Front Driveshaft.

(Refer to Driveshaft Assembly - "Front Driveshaft")
8. Check the front alignment.
(Refer to Suspension System - "Front Alignment")
Driveshaft and axle

Components

1. Brake disc 5. Knuckle

2. Wheel hub assembly 6. Hub bearing
3. Hub bolt 7. Snap ring
4. Dust cover

Driveshaft and axle

Page 21 sur 28

Be careful not to damage to the hub bolts when removing the front wheel and tire (A).
3. Loosen the guide rod bolt (B) and pivot the caliper (A) up out of the way.
Tightening torque:
21.6 ~ 31.4 N.m (2.2 ~ 3.2 kgf.m, 15.9 ~ 23.1 lb-ft)

4. Remove the brake pads (A).

5. Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts (A), and then place the brake caliper assembly (B) with wire.
Tightening torque:
78.4 ~ 98.0 N.m (8.0 ~ 10.0 kgf.m, 57.8 ~ 72.3 lb-ft)
Page 22 sur 28

6. Loosen the front brake disc mount screw (B) and then remove the front brake disc (A).
Tightening torque:
4.9 ~ 5.9 N.m (0.5 ~ 0.6 kgf.m, 3.6 ~ 4.3 lb-ft)

7. Remove driveshaft nut (A) from the front hub.

Tightening torque:
274.6 ~ 294.2 N.m (28.0 ~ 30.0 Kgf.m, 202.5 ~ 217.0 lb-ft)

• The driveshaft lock nut should be replaced with new ones.

• After installation driveshaft lock nut, stake the lock nut using a chisel and hammer as shown in the illustration below.
Page 23 sur 28

8. Remove the tie rod end ball joint (C) from the knuckle by using the SST (09568-34000).
(1) Remove the split pin (A).
(2) Remove the castle nut (B).
(3) Use the SST (09568-34000).
Tightening torque:
23.5 ~ 33.3N.m (2.4 ~ 3.4kgf.m, 19.4 ~ 24.6lb-ft)

• When using SST, be sure not to damage the dust cover of lower arm ball joint.
• Keep SST tied to the car because there is arisk of injury by dropping the SST duringremoval of the lower arm ball joint.
• The peripheral parts may be damaged when removing the lower arm ball joint with a general tool such as lever, so be sure to
use SST.
9. Loosen the mount bolt and then remove the wheel speed sensor (A) from knuckle.
Tightening torque:
6.8 ~ 10.7 N.m (0.7 ~ 1.1 kgf.m, 5.0 ~ 7.9 lb-ft)
Page 24 sur 28

10. Loosen the bolt & nut and then remove the lower arm (A).
Tightening torque:
58.8 ~ 70.6 N.m (6.0 ~ 7.2 kgf.m, 43.4 ~ 52.1 lb-ft)

11. Disconnect the driveshaft (A) from the front hub assembly.

12. Loosen the strut mounting bolts (A) and then remove the knuckle assembly (B).
Tightening torque:
137.3 ~ 156.9 N.m (14.0 ~ 16.0 kgf.m, 101.3 ~ 115.7 lb-ft)

Inspection
1. Check the hub for cracks and the splines for wear.
Page 25 sur 28

2. Check the brake disc for scoring and damage.

3. Check the knuckle for cracks.
4. Check the bearing for cracks or damage.

Installation
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Use a SST (09581-11000) when installing the brake caliper assembly.

(Refer to Brake System - "Front Disc Brake")
2. Check the front alignment.
(Refer to Suspension System - "Front Alignment")
Driveshaft and axle

Components

1. Rear dust cover 3. Rear brake disc

2. Rear wheel hub assembly

Driveshaft and axle

Replacement
1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly.
Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
2. Remove the rear wheel and tire (A) from rear hub.
Page 26 sur 28

Tightening torque:
88.3 ~ 107.9 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6 lb-ft)

3. Loosen the guide rod bolt (B) and the remove the rear caliper body (A).
Tightening torque:
21.6 ~ 31.4 N.m (2.2 ~ 3.2 kgf.m, 15.9 ~ 23.1 lb-ft)

4. Remove the pads (B), in the caliper carrier (A).

5. Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts (B), and then place the brake caliper assembly (A) with wire.
Tightening torque:
63.7 ~ 73.5 N.m (6.5 ~ 7.5 kgf.m, 47.0 ~ 54.2 lb-ft)
Page 27 sur 28

6. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector (A).

7. Loosen the screws (B), and then remove the brake disc (A).
Tightening torque:
4.9 ~ 5.8 N.m (0.5 ~ 0.6 kgf.m, 3.6 ~ 4.3 lb-ft)

8. Loosen the bolts and then remove the hub bearing (A).
Tightening torque:
49.0 ~ 58.8 N.m (5.0 ~ 6.0 kgf.m, 36.2 ~ 43.3 lb-ft)

9. Remove the hub bearing by using the rubber hammer.

Page 28 sur 28

10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Inspection
1. Check the hub for cracks and the splines for wear.
2. Check the brake disc for scoring and damage.
3. Check the rear axle carrier for cracks.
4. Check the bearing for cracks or damage.

Installation
1. Install in the reverse order of removal

Use a SST (09581-11000) when installing the brake caliper assembly.

(Refer to Brake System - "Front Disc Brake")
2. Check the front alignment.
(Refer to Suspension System - "Front Alignment")
Page 1 sur 115

Suspension System

Safety Precaution

Sinse Electric Vehicle contains a high voltage, battery mishandling the high voltage system or vehicle may lead to a serious accident
including electric shock and electric leakage.

• All the high voltage wiring and connectors are in orange.

• Inform of possible danger of high voltage by placing a "high voltage caution" sign on the vehicle as in the image below.
Page 2 sur 115
Page 3 sur 115

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Insulation gloves Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage
components
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]
Page 4 sur 115

Insulation shoes

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation clothes
components

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses

Used in the following cases :

• During Removal & installation or inspection of the high
voltage battery terminals or wiring, which spark might happen.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

All removed high voltage components are placed on an

Insulation mat
insulation mat to prevent safety accidents.

Insulation sheet is used to cover high voltage components to

Insulation sheet protect people not wearing personal protective equipment from
safety accidents.

Warning tape Used for infomring that it is dangerous to come over this line.
Page 5 sur 115

Personal Protective Equipment Inspection

• Check that the personal protective equipment is not damaged.

• Check that the insulation gloves are not torn or damaged.
• Wear the insulation glove after removing moisture.

Fold the insulation glove as above.

Fold again 3~4 times to make it airtight.
Squeeze the inflated glove to see if the glove is torn or damaged.
Caution when repairing the power cable

Precautions when handling high voltage battery

• Battery Control System - Refer to "High Voltage Battery Handling Guide"

Precautions in case of fire in High Voltage Battery System

Precautions in case of high voltage battery gas and/or electrolyte leakage

Page 6 sur 115

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug.
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• Gas is hydrogen and alkali vapor. If the fire occurred indoor, ventilate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline
solution.
• If leaked vapor or liquid gets in your eye, immediately clean with running water, then get medical attention.
• In case of gas leakage due to high temperature, do NOT use the battery until the high voltage battery cools down to room temperature.

Precautions when handling vehicle after an accident

Preparations when servicing accident affected vehicle

Precautions when EV is unattended for a prolonged period

Hybrid Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery / Charging Precautions

If the POE oil in the system gets mixed with PAG oil, it may result in dielectric breakdown due to decreased volumetric resistivity and
inoperative A/C compressor, disabling the A/C compressor.

Suspension System

High Voltage Shut-off Procedure

3. After loosening the nut, remove the safety plug service cover (A).
Safety plug service cover mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Remove the safety plug (A).

Remove the safety plug in the follwing order.

Page 8 sur 115

(3) Remove the high voltage cable (A).

(4) Measure the voltage between the inverter terminals.

Less than 30V : High voltage circuit properly shut
More than 30V : Faulty on high voltage circuit
Page 9 sur 115

Specifications
Front Suspension
Item Specification
Suspension type MacPherson Strut
Shock absorber Type Gas
Coil spring Free Height [I.D. color] 327.9mm (12.9842 in.) [Violet - Yellow]

Rear Suspension
Item Specification
Suspension type Torsion Beam Axle
Shock absorber Type Gas (Mono tube)
Coil spring Free Height [I.D. color] 318.0 mm (12.5297 in.) [White - Gray]
Page 10 sur 115

Wheel & Tire

Item Specification
Wheel Aluminum 6.5J * 16
Tire 205/60 R16
Tire pressure 230+7 kPa (33psi+1.0psi)

Wheel Alignment
Specification
Item
Front Rear
Individual 0.05°±0.1° 0.15° (+0.25° / -0.15°)
Toe-in
Total 0.1°±0.2° 0.3° (+0.5° / -0.3°)
Camber angle -0.5°±0.5° -1.5°±0.5°
Caster angle 5.1°±0.5° -
King-pin angle 13.4°±0.5° -
Ride height 395±10mm

Tightening Torques
Front Suspension
Tightening torque (kgf.m)
Item
Nm kgf.m lb-ft
Wheel Hub nuts 88.3 ~ 107.9 9.0 ~ 11.0 65.1 ~ 79.6
Wheel speed sensor mounting bolt 6.8 ~ 10.7 0.7 ~ 1.1 5.0 ~ 7.9
wheel speed sensor wiring bracket bolt 8.8 ~ 13.7 0.9 ~ 1.4 6.5 ~ 10.1
Strut assembly upper mounting nut 44.1 ~ 58.8 4.5 ~ 6.0 32.5 ~ 43.3
Strut assembly lower mounting bolt 137.3 ~ 156.9 14.0 ~ 16.0 101.3 ~ 115.7
Strut assembly lock nut 58.8 ~ 68.6 6.0 ~ 7.0 43.4 ~ 50.6
Lower arm mounting bolt (forward) 117.7 ~ 137.3 12.0 ~ 14.0 86.8 ~ 101.3
Lower arm mounting bolt (rearward) 156.9 ~ 176.5 16.0 ~ 18.0 115.7 ~ 130.2
Lower arm ball joint mounting bolt & nut 58.8 ~ 70.6 6.0 ~ 7.2 43.4 ~ 52.1
Stabilizer link nut (to strut) 98.1 ~ 117.7 10.0 ~12.0 72.3 ~ 86.8
Stabilizer bar nut ( to stabilizer link) 98.1 ~ 117.7 10.0 ~ 12.0 72.3 ~ 86.8
Stabilizer bracket mounting bolts 44.1 ~ 53.9 4.5 ~ 5.5 32.5 ~ 39.8
Tie rod end nut 24.5 ~ 33.3 2.4 ~ 3.4 17.4 ~ 24.5
Universal joint mounting bolt 32.4 ~ 37.3 3.3 ~ 3.8 23.9 ~ 27.5
Roll rod stopper & bracket bolt 107.9 ~ 127.5 11.0 ~ 13.0 79.6 ~ 94.0
Roll rod stopper mounting bolt 49.0 ~ 63.7 5.0 ~ 6.5 36.2 ~ 47.0
Cross member mounting (to body) 156.9 ~ 176.5 16.0 ~ 18.0 115.7 ~ 130.2
Power electric frame support mounting nut [LH] 49.0 ~ 63.7 5.0 ~ 6.5 36.2 ~ 47.0
Power electric frame support mounting nut [RH] 78.5 ~ 98.1 8.0 ~ 10.0 57.9 ~ 72.3
Accumulator mounting bolt 6.8 ~ 10.7 0.7 ~ 1.1 5.0 ~ 7.9

Rear Suspension
Tightening torque (kgf.m)
Item
Nm kgf.m lb-ft
Wheel Hub nuts 88.3 ~ 107.9 9.0 ~ 11.0 65.1 ~ 79.6
Rear caliper guide rod bolt 21.6 ~ 31.4 2.2 ~ 3.2 15.9 ~ 23.1
Rear caliper mounting bolt 63.7 ~ 73.5 6.5 ~ 7.5 47.0 ~ 54.2
Wheel speed sensor mounting bolt 6.8 ~ 10.7 0.7 ~ 1.1 5.0 ~ 7.9
Parking cable bracket 8.8 ~ 13.7 0.9 ~ 1.4 6.5 ~ 10.1
Disc fixing screw 4.9 ~ 5.9 0.5 ~ 0.6 3.6 ~ 4.3
Shock absorber upper bolt 49.0 ~ 63.7 5.0 ~ 6.5 36.2 ~ 47.0
Shock absorber lower bolt 98.1 ~ 117.7 10.0 ~ 12.0 72.3 ~ 86.8
Rear heb assembly 49.0 ~ 58.8 5.0 ~ 6.0 36.1 ~ 43.3
Torsion beam axle to body 98.1 ~ 117.7 10.0 ~ 12.0 72.3 ~ 86.8
Page 11 sur 115

Suspension System

Special Service Tools

Tool Name / Number Illustration Description

Strut spring compressor

Compression of coil spring
09546-26000

Ball joint puller

Remove the ball joint from front axle
09568-34000

Suspension System

Troubleshooting
Vehicle inspection

SYMPTOM CHART
Symptom Suspect Area Remedy (See page)
Front stabilizer bar Under these conditions, the noise is
acceptable.
Page 12 sur 115

Squeak or grunt-noise from the front

suspension, occurs more in cold ambient
temperatures-more noticeable over rough
roads or when turning
Clunk-noise from the front suspension, occurs Loose front struts or shocks Inspect for loose nuts or bolts.
in and out of turns Tighten to specifications.
Clunk-noise from the rear suspension, occurs Loose rear suspension components Inspect for loose or damaged rear suspension
when shifting from reverse to drive components.
Repair or install new components as
necessary.
Click or pop - noise from the front suspension, Worn or damaged ball joints Install new lower arm as necessary.
more noticeable over rough roads or over
bumps
Click or pop - noise occurs when vehicle is Worn or damaged ball joints Install new lower arm as necessary.
turning
Damaged or worn Birfield joint Repair or install a new Birfied joint as
Click or snap - occurs when accelerating necessary.
around a corner
See DS group - driveshaft.
Front suspension noise - A squeak, creak, or Steering components Go to detailed test A.
rattle noise - occurs mostly over bumps or Loose or bent front struts or shock absorbers
rough roads Damaged spring or spring mounts
Damaged or worn arm bushings
Worn or damaged stabilizer bar bushing or
links
Uneven seating surface between the insulator Repair or install a new parts as necessary.
Groaning or grinding - noise from the front
and panel by the burrs around the strut
strut, occurs when driving on bumpy roads or
insulator mounting bolts and the insulator
turning the vehicle
boltes mounting holes
Rear suspension noise - a squeak, creak or Loose or bent rear shock absorbers Go to detailed test B.
rattle noise - occurs mostly over bumps or Damaged spring or spring mounts
rough roads
Damaged or worn control arm bushings
Shudder - occurs during acceleration from a Rear axle assembly mis-positioned Check the axle mounts and rear suspension
slow speed or stop Damaged or worn front suspension for damage or wear. Repair as necessary.
components Check for a loose stabilizer bar, damaged or
loose strut/strut bushings or loose or worn ball
joints. Inspect the steering linkage for wear or
damage. Repair or Install new components as
necessary.
Shimmy - most noticeable on Excessive positive caster Check the caster alignment angle.
coast/deceleration - also hard steering Correct as necessary.
condition
Tire noise - hum/moan at constant speeds Abnormal wear patterns Spin the tire and Check for tire wear. Install a
new tire as necessary. Inspect for
damaged/worn suspension components.
Perform wheel alignment.
Tire noise - noise tone lowers as the vehicle Out-of-balance tire Balance the tire and road test. Install a new
speed is lowered tire as necessary.
Nail puncture or stone in tire tread Inspect the tire. Repair or replace as
Tire noise - ticking noise, change with speed
necessary.
Wheel and tire - vibration and noise concern is Damaged or worn tire Go to detailed test C.
directly related to vehicle speed and is not
affected by acceleration, coasting or
decelerating
Tire wobble or shudder - occurs at lower Damaged wheel bearings Spin the tire and check for abnormal wheel
speeds bearing play or roughness. Adjust or Install
new wheel bearings as necessary.
See DS group - front/rear axle.
Damaged wheel Inspect the wheel for damage. Install a new
wheel as necessary.
Damaged or worn suspension components Inspect the suspension components for wear
or damage. Repair as necessary.
Loosen wheel nuts Check the wheel nuts.
Tighten to specification.
Damaged or uneven tire wear
Page 13 sur 115

Spin the tire and Check for abnormal tire wear

or damage. Install a new tire as necessary.
Tire shimmy or shake - occurs at lower Wheel/tire out of balance
speeds Uneven tire wear Check for abnormal tire wear. Install a new
tire as necessary.
Excessive radial runout of wheel or tire Perform a radial runout test of the wheel and
tire.
Install a new tire as necessary.
Worn or damaged wheel studs or elongate Inspect the wheel studs and wheels.
stud holes Install new components as necessary.
Excessive lateral runout of the wheel or tire Perform a lateral runout test of the wheel and
tire.
Check the wheel, tire and hub. Repair or
Install new components as necessary.
Clean the mounting surfaces of the brake disc
Foreign materal between the brake disc and and hub.
hub.
See DS group - front/rear axle.
High speed shake or shimmy - occurs at high Excessive wheel hub runout Go to detailed test D.
speeds Damaged or worn tires
Damaged or worn wheel bearings
Worn or damaged suspension or steering
linkage
Brake disc or drum imbalance
Drift left or right Tires Go to detailed test E.
Steering linkage
Alignment
Base brake system
Steering wheel Alignment Go to detailed test F.
Steering linkage
Front lower arm ball joint
Tracks incorrectly Rear suspension Go to detailed test G.
Caster
Rough ride Front strut and spring assembly Go to detailed test H.
Rear shock absorber and spring assembly
Excessive noise Front or rear stabilizer bar components Go to detailed test I.
Springs
Suspension components
Shock absorbers
Incorrect tire wear Tire or unbalanced wheels Go to detailed test J.
Tire inflation
Strut
Alignment
Vibration Wheel/tire Go to detailed test K.
Front wheel driveshaft(s)
Steering system
Strut and spring assembly
Spring and strut mounting
Front lower arm ball joint
Front lower arm mounting bolt bushing
Stabilizer bar bushings
Wheel hubs and bearing
Rear suspension arms and bushings
Tire/wheel
Inflate tires to specification.
Vehicle load
Redistribute the load as necessary.
Vehicle leans Suspension components
Visually inspect the suspention system.
Correct the ride height as necessary.
Incorrect ride height
Poor steering returnability High knuckle rotating torque Go to detailed test E.
Alignment
Page 14 sur 115

DETAILED TEST A : FRONT SUSPENSION NOISE

CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
A1. ROAD TEST THE VEHICLE
1. Test drive the vehicle.
2. During the road test, drive the vehicle over a rough road. Determine from which
area/component the noise is originating.
● Is there a squeak, creak or rattle noise ?
→ YES
Go toA2.
→ NO
The suspension system is OK. Conduct a diagnosis on other suspect systems.
A2. INSPECT THE STEERING SYSTEM
1. Check the steering system for wear or damage.
Perform a steering linkage test.
Inspect the tire wear pattern.
● Are the steering components worn or damaged ?
→ YES
Repair the steering system. Install new components as necessary. Test the system for
normal operation.
→ NO
Go toA3.
A3. FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER/STRUT CHECK
1. Check the front shock absorbers/strut mounts for loose bolts or nuts.
2. Check the front shock absorbers/struts for damage. Perform a shock absorber check.
● Are the front shock absorbers/struts loose or damaged ?
→ YES
Tighten to specifications if loose.
Install new front shock absorbers/struts if damaged. Test the system for normal
operation.
→ NO
Go toA4.
A4. CHECK THE FRONT SPRINGS
Check the front spring and front spring mounts/brackets for wear or damage

● Are the front springs or spring mounts/brackets worn or damaged ?

→ YES
Repair or Install new components as necessary. Test the system for normal operation.

→ NO
Go toA5.
A5. CHECK THE STABILIZER BAR
1. Check the stabilizer bar bushings and links for damage or wear.
2. Check the stabilizer bar for damage.
3. Check for loose or damaged stabilizer brackets.
● Are the stabilizer bar/track bar components loose, worn or damaged ?
→ YES
Repair or Install new components as necessary. Test the system for normal operation.
→ NO
Suspension system is OK. Conduct diagnosis on other suspect systems.

DETAILED TEST B : REAR SUSPENSION NOISE

CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
B1. ROAD TEST THE VEHICLE
1. Test drive the vehicle.
2. During the road test, drive the vehicle over a rough road. Determine from which
area/component the noise is originating.
● Is there a squeak, creak or rattle noise ?
→ YES
Go toB2.
Page 15 sur 115

→ NO
The suspension system is OK. Conduct a diagnosis on other suspect systems.
B2. REAR SHOCK ABSORBER/STRUT CHECK
1. Raise and support the vehicle. See GI group - lift support point.
2. Check the rear shock absorber/strut mounts for loose bolts or nuts.
3. Check the rear shock absorbers/strut for damage. Perform a shock absorber check.
● Are the rear shock absorbers/struts loose or damaged ?
→ YES
Tighten to specifications if loose.
Install new rear shock absorbers/struts if damaged. Test the system for normal
operation.
→ NO
Go toB3.
B3. CHECK THE REAR SPRINGS
Check the rear springs and rear spring mounts/brackets for wear or damage.

● Are the rear springs or spring mounts/brackets worn or damaged ?

→ YES
Repair or Install new components as necessary. Test the system for normal operation.

→ NO
Go toB4.
B4. CHECK THE TRAILING ARMS
1. Inspect the trailing arm bushings for wear or damage. Check for loose trailing arm bolts.
2. Inspect for twisted or bent trailing arms.
● Are the trailing arms loose, damaged or worn ?
→ YES
Repair or Install new components as necessary. Test the system for normal operation.
→ NO
Suspension system is OK. Conduct diagnosis on other suspect systems.

DETAILED TEST C : WHEEL AND TIRE

CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
C1. ROAD TEST THE VEHICLE

Wheel or tire vibrations felt in the steering wheel are most likely related to the front
wheel or tire. Vibration felt through the seat are most likely related to the rear wheel or
tire. This may not always be true, but it can help to isolate the problem to the front or
rear of the vehicle.
Test drive the vehicle at different speed ranges.
During the road test, if the vibration can be eliminated by placing the vehicle in neutral or is
affected by the speed of the engine, the cause is not the wheels or tires.

● Is there a vibration and noise ?

→ YES
Go toC2.

→ NO
The wheel and tires are OK. Conduct a diagnosis on other suspect systems.
C2. CHECK THE FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS
Check the front wheel bearings.
Refer to Wheel Bearing Check (See DS group - front axle).

● Are the wheel bearings OK ?

→ YES
Go toC3.
Page 16 sur 115

→ NO
Inspect the wheel bearings. Adjust or Repair as necessary. Test the system for normal
operation.
C3. INSPECT THE TIRES
1. Check the tires for missing weights.
2. Check the wheels for damage.
3. Inspect the tire wear pattern.
● Do the tires have an abnormal wear pattern ?
→ YES
Correct the condition that caused the abnormal wear. Install new tire(s).
Test the system for normal operation.
→ NO
Go toC4.
C4. TIRE ROTATION DIAGNOSIS
1. Spin the tires slowly and watch for signs of lateral runout.
2. Spin the tires slowly and watch for signs of radial runout.
● Are there signs of visual runout ?
→ YES
Go toC5.
→ NO
Check the wheel and tire balance.
Correct as necessary. Test the system for normal operation.
C5. RADIAL RUNOUT CHECK ON THE TIRE
Measure the radial runout of the wheel and tire assembly. A typical specification for total
radial runout is 1.15mm (0.059 inch).

● Is the radial runout within specifications ?

→ YES
Go toC8.

→ NO
Go toC6.
C6. RADIAL RUNOUT CHECK ON THE WHEEL
Measure the radial runout of the wheel. A typical specification for total radial runout is
1.14mm (0.045 inch.).

● Is the radial runout within specifications ?

→ YES
Install a new tire. Test the system for normal operation.

→ NO
Go toC7.
C7. CHECK THE HUB/BRAKE DISC OR DRUM PILOT RUNOUT OR BOLT CIRCLE RUNOUT
Measure the pilot or bolt circle runout. A typical specification for radial runout is :
● pilot runout - less than 0.15mm (0.006 inch.)
● bolt circle runout - less than 0.38 mm (0.015 inch.)

● Is the radial runout within specification ?

→ YES
Install a new wheel. Test the system for normal operation.

→ NO
Repair or Install new components as necessary.
C8. LATERAL RUNOUT CHECK ON THE TIRE
Measure the lateral runout of the wheel and tire assembly. A typical specification for total
lateral runout is 2.5mm (0.098 inch).

● Is the lateral runout within specifications ?

Page 17 sur 115

→ YES
Wheel and tires are OK. Conduct diagnosis on other suspect systems.

→ NO
Go toC9.
C9. LATERAL RUNOUT CHECK ON THE WHEEL
Measure the lateral runout of the wheel. A typical specification for total radial runout is
1.2mm (0.047 inch.)

● Is the lateral runout within specifications ?

→ YES
Install a new tire. Test the system for normal operation.

→ NO
Go toC10.
C10. CHECK THE FLANGE FACE LATERAL RUNOUT
Measure the flange face lateral runout. A typical specification for lateral runout is :
● hub/brake disc - less than 0.13mm (0.005 inch)

● Is the lateral runout within specifications ?

→ YES
Install a new wheel. Test the system for normal operation.

→ NO
Repair or Install new components as necessary.

DETAILED TEST D :
CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
D1. CHECK FOR FRONT WHEEL BEARING ROUGHNESS

1. Raise and support the front end of the vehicle so that the front wheel and tire
assemblies can spin.
See GI group - lift support point.
2. Spin the front tires by hand.
● Do the wheel bearings feel rough ?
→ YES
Inspect the wheel bearings. Repair as necessary. Test the system for normal operation.
→ NO
Go toD2.
D2. CHECK THE END PLAY OF THE FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS
Check the end play of the front wheel bearings.

● Is the end play OK ?

→ YES
Go toD3.

→ NO
Adjust or Repair as necessary. Test the system for normal operation.
D3. MEASURE THE LATERAL RUNOUT AND THE RADIAL RUNOUT OF THE FRONT WHEELS ON THE VEHICLE
Measure the lateral runout and the radial runout of the front wheels on the vehicle. Go to
detailed test C.

● Are the measurements within specifications ?

→ YES
Go toD4.
Page 18 sur 115

→ NO
Install new wheels as necessary and Balance the assembly. Test the system for normal
operation.
D4. MEASURE THE LATERAL RUNOUT OF THE FRONT TIRES ON THE VEHICLE
Measure the lateral runout of the front tires on the vehicle. Go to detailed test C.

● Is the runout within specifications ?

→ YES
Go toD5.

→ NO
Install new tires as necessary and Balance the assembly. Test the system for normal
operation.
D5. MEASURE THE RADIAL RUNOUT OF THE FRONT TIRES ON THE VEHICLE
Measure the radial runout of the front tires on the vehicle. Go to detailed test C.

● Is the runout within specifications ?

→ YES
Balance the front wheel and tire assemblies. If any tire cannot be balanced, Install a new
tire. Test the system for normal operation.

→ NO
Go toD6.
D6. MATCH MOUNT THE TIRE AND WHEEL ASSEMBLY
Mark the high runout location on the tire and also on the wheel. Break the assembly down
and rotate the tire 180 degrees (halfway around) on the wheel. Inflate the tire and measure
the radial runout.

● Is the runout within specifications ?

→ YES
Balance the assembly. Test the system for normal operation.

→ NO
If the high spot is not within 101.6mm (4 inches) of the first high spot on the tire, Go toD7.
D7. MEASURE THE WHEEL FLANGE RUNOUT
Dismount the tire and mount the wheel on a wheel balancer. Measure the runout on both
wheel flanges. Go to detailed test C

● Is the runout within specifications ?

→ YES
Locate and Mark the low spot on the wheel. Install the tire, matching the high spot on the
tire with the low spot on the wheel. Balance the assembly. Test the system for normal
operation. If the condition persists, Go to
D8.

→ NO
Install a new wheel. Check the runout on the new wheel. If the new wheel is within limits,
locate and Mark the low spot. Install the tire, matching the high spot on the tire with the low
spot on the wheel. Balance the assembly. Test the system for normal operation. If the
condition persists, Go to
D8.
D8. CHECK FOR VIBRATION FROM THE FRONT OF THE VEHICLE
Spin the front wheel and tire assemblies with a wheel balancer while the vehicle is raised
on a hoist. Feel for vibration in the front fender or while seated in the vehicle.

● Is the vibration present ?

→ YES
Substitute known good wheel and tire assemblies as necessary.
Test the system for normal operation.
Page 19 sur 115

→ NO
Check the driveline components. Test the system for normal operation.

DETAILED TEST E : DRIFT LEFT OR RIGHT

CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
E1. CHECK THE TIRES
Inspect the tires for excessive wear or damage.

● Are the tires excessively worn or damaged ?

→ YES
Install new tires.

→ NO
Go toE2.
E2. CHECK THE STEERING LINKAGE
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Check the steering components for indications of excessive wear or damage.
See ST group - specification.
● Is there an indication of excessive wear or damage ?
→ YES
Repair or Install new components as necessary.
→ NO
Go toE3.
E3. CHECK THE VEHICLE ALIGNMENT
1. Place the vehicle on an alignment rack.
Check the vehicle alignmnt.
● Is the alignment within specification ?
→ YES
Go toE4.
→ NO
Adjust the alignment as necessary.
E4. BRAKE DRAG DIAGNOSIS
Apply the brakes while driving.

● Does drift or pull occur when the brakes are applied ?

→ YES
See BR group - specification.

→ NO
If the steering wheel is in the center, the vehicle is OK.

If the steering wheel is off-center, Go to Detailed TestF.

DETAILED TEST F : STEERING WHEEL OFF-CENTER

CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
F1. CHECK THE CLEAR VISION
Place the vehicle on an alignment rack.

● Is the clear vision within specification ?

→ YES
Go toF2.

→ NO
Adjust the clear vision to specification.
F2. INSPECT THE STEERING COMPONENTS
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Inspect the steering components for excessive wear or damage.
Page 20 sur 115

See ST group - specification.

● Are the steering components excessively worn or damaged ?
→ YES
Repair or Install new components as necessary.
→ NO
If it tracks corectly, vehicle is OK.
If it tracks incorrectly, Go to Detailed Test

DETAILED TEST G : TRACKS INCORRECTLY

CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
G1. CHECK THE CASTER
Place the vehicle on an alignment rack.

● Is the caster within specification ?

→ YES
Go toG2.

→NO
Replace bent or damaged parts.
G2. CHECK THE REAR SUSPENSION
1. Measure the vehicle wheel base for LH and RH.
2. Compare the measurements.
● Are the measurements the same ?
→ YES
If the ride is smooth, vehicle is OK.
If the ride is rough, Go to Detailed Test
→ NO
Inspect the rear suspension components for wear or damage.
Repair or Install new components as necessary.

DETAILED TEST H : ROUGH RIDE

CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
H1. CHECK THE FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER
1. Raise support the vehicle.
2. Inspect the front shock absorber for oil leaks or damage.
● Are the tires excessively worn or damaged ?
→ YES
Install new front shock absorbers.
→ NO
Go toH2.
H2. CHECK THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBERS
Inspect the rear shock absorbers for oil leaks or damage.

● Are the rear shock absorbers leaking ?

→ YES
Install new rear shock absorbers.

→ NO
The vehicle is OK. Go toTROUBLESHOOTING.

DETAILED TEST I : EXCESSIVE NOISE

CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
I1. INSPECT THE SUSPENSION
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Inspect the shock absorber mounting bolts.
● Are the mounting bolts loose or broken ?
→ YES
Tighten or Install new shock absorber mounting bolts.
Page 21 sur 115

→ NO
Go toI2.
I2. INSPECT THE SPRING AND TORSION BARS
Inspect the springs and stabilizer bars for damage.

● Are the spring or stabilizer bars damaged ?

→ YES
Install new spring and/or stabilizer bars.

→ NO
Go toI3.
I3. INSPECT THE FRONT SUSPENSION
Inspect the front suspension components for excessive wear or damage.

● Are the front suspension components worn or damaged ?

→ YES
Install new front suspension components.

→ NO
The vehicle is OK. Go toTROUBLESHOOTING.

DETAILED TEST J : INCORRECT TIRE WEAR

CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
J1. INSPECT THE TIRES
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Inspect the tires for uneven wear on the inner or outer shoulder.
● Is there uneven tire wear ?
→ YES
Align the vehicle. Install new tires if badly worn.
→ NO
Go toJ2.
J2. UNEVEN TIRE WEAR
Inspect the tires for a feathering pattern.

● Do the tires have a feathering pattern ?

→ YES
Align the vehicle. Install new tires if badly worn.

→ NO
Go toJ3.
J3. CHECK FOR CUPPED TIRE
Inspect the tires for cupping or dishing.

● Are the tires cupped or dished ?

→ YES
Balance and Rotate the tires.

→ NO
The vehicle is OK. Go toTROUBLESHOOTING.

DETAILED TEST K : VIBRATION

CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
K1. ROAD TEST
Accelerate the vehicle to the speed at which the customer indicated the vibration occured.

● Is the vibration present ?

Page 22 sur 115

→ YES
Go toK2.

→ NO
The vehicle is OK. Go toTROUBLESHOOTING.
K2. INSPECT THE TIRES
1. Raise and support the vehicle with a frame contact hoist.
2. Inspect the tires for extreme wear or damage, cupping, or flat spots.
● Are the tires OK ?
→ YES
Go toK3.
→ NO
Check the suspension components for misalignment, abnormal wear, or damage that
may have contributed to the tire wear.
Correct the suspension concerns and Install new tires.
K3. INSPECT THE WHEEL BEARINGS
Spin the tires by hand to check for wheel bearing rougness.

● Is the front wheel bearing OK ?

→ YES
Go toK4.

→ NO
Install new front wheel bearings as necessary.
See Ds group - front axle.
K4. TIRE/WHEEL BALANCE
Check the tire/wheel balance.

● Are the tires balanced ?

→ YES
Go toK5.

→ NO
Balance the tires and wheels as necessary.
K5. MEASURE THE RUNOUTS
For each wheel position measure, locate and mark the following items.
- High point of the tire/wheel assembly total radial runout
- High point of the wheel radial runout
- High point of the wheel lateral runout

● Are the runouts as specified ?

→ YES
Go toTires/Wheels.

→ NO
Go toK6.
K6. SUBSTITUTE THE WHEELS AND TIRE
1. Substitute a known good set of wheels and tires.
2. Perform a road test.
3. If the vehicle still exhibits a shake or vibration, note the vehicle speed and/or engine
rpm which it occurs.
● Is the vibration felt ?
→ YES
Engine/transmission imbalance.
See the specification of TR group, EM group, FL group and EC group.
→ NO
Install the original tire/wheel assemblies one by one, Road testing at each step until the
damaged tire(s)/wheel(s) as necessary. Test the system for normal operation.
Page 23 sur 115

Wheel /tire noise, vibration and harshness concerns are directly related to vehicle speed and are not generally affected by acceleration,
coasting or decelerating. Also, out-of-balance wheel and tires can vibrate at more than one speed. A vibration that is affected by the engine
rpm, or is eliminated by placing the transmission in Neutral is not related to the tire and wheel. As a general rule, tire and wheel vibrations
felt in the steering wheel are related to the front tire and wheel assemblies. Vibrations felt in the seat or floor are related to the rear tire and
wheel assemblies. This can initially isolate a concern to the front or rear.
Careful attention must be paid to the tire and wheels. There are several symptoms that can be caused by damaged or worn tire and wheels.
Perform a careful visual inspection of the tires and wheel assemblies. Spin the tires slowly and watch for signs of lateral or radial runout.
Refer to the tire wear chart to determine the tire wear conditions and actions
WHEEL AND TIRE DIAGNOSIS
Rapid wear at the center Rapid wear at both shoulders Wear at one shoulder

• Center-tread down to fabric due to • Under-inflated tires • Toe adjustment out of specification
excessive over inflated tires • Worn suspension components • Camber out of specification
• Lack of rotation • Excessive cornering speeds • Damaged strut
• Excessive toe on drive wheels • Lack of rotation • Damaged lower arm
• Heavy acceleration on drive
Partial wear Feathered edge Wear pattern

• Caused by irregular burrs on brake drums • Toe adjustment out of specification • Excessive toe on non-drive wheels
• Damaged or worn tie rods • Lack of rotation
• Damaged knuckle

Suspension System

Components Location
[Front Suspension]
Page 24 sur 115

1. Drive shaft 5. Stabilizer bar

2. Lower arm 6. Steering gear box
3. Front axle 7. Sub frame
4. Front strut assembly 8. Front stabilizer link

[Power Electric Frame]

Page 25 sur 115

1. Power Electric Frame

Suspension System

Components
Page 26 sur 115

1. Strut assembly 5. Coil spring

2. Insulator 6. Dust cover
3. Strut bearing 7. Bumper rubber
4. Spring upper pad 8. Spring lower pad

Suspension System

Replacement
1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly.
Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
2. Remove the front wheel and tire (A) from front hub.
Tightening torque:
88.3 ~ 107.9N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6lb-ft)
Page 27 sur 115

• Be careful not to damage to the hub bolts when removing the front wheel and tire (A).
3. Loosen the bolts (A, B), and then remove the wheel speed sensor.
Tightening torque:
6.8 ~ 10.7N.m (0.7 ~ 1.1kgf.m, 5.0 ~ 7.9lb-ft)

4. Loosen the brake hose bracket bolts (A).

Tightening torque:
8.8 ~ 13.7N.m (0.9 ~ 1.4kgf.m, 6.5 ~ 10.1lb-ft)

5. Disconnect the stabilizer link (A) from the front strut assembly after loosening the nut (B).
Tightening torque:
98.1 ~ 117.7N.m(10.0 ~ 12.0kgf.m, 72.3~86.8lb-ft)

6. Remove the cowl top cover.

(Refer to Body - "Cowl Top Cover")
7. Disconnect the front strut assembly (A) from the knuckle by loosening the bolt & nut.
Tightening torque:
137.3 ~ 156.9N.m(14.0 ~ 16.0kgf.m, 101.3 ~ 115.7lb-ft)
Page 28 sur 115

8. Remove the front strut assembly and then loosen the strut mounting nuts (A).
Tightening torque:
44.1 ~ 58.8N.m(4.5 ~ 6.0kgf.m, 32.5~43.4lb-ft)

9. Installation is the reverse of removal.

Disassembly
1. Using the special tool (09546-26000), compress the coil spring (A).
Tightening torque:
58.8 ~ 68.6N.m(6.0 ~ 7.0kgf.m, 43.4 ~ 50.6lb-ft)

2. Remove the self-locking nut (C) from the strut assembly (B).
3. Remove the insulator, spring seat, coil spring and dust cover from the strut assembly.
4. Reassembly is the reverse of the disassembly.

Inspection
1. Check the strut bearing for wear and damage.
2. Check the spring upper and lower seat for damage and deterioration.
3. Compress and extend the piston rod (A) and check that there is no abnormal resistance or unusual sound during operation.
Page 29 sur 115

Disposal
1. Fully extend the piston rod.
2. Drill a hole on the (A) section to remove gas from the cylinder.

• The gas coming out is harmless but be careful of chips that may fly when drilling.
Suspension System

• Be careful not to damage to the hub bolts when removing the front wheel and tire (A).
3. Remove the lower arm (A) from the knuckle.
Tightening torque:
58.9 ~ 70.6N.m (6.0 ~ 7.2kgf.m, 43.4 ~ 52.1lb-ft)
Page 30 sur 115

4. Loosen the bolts (B,C), and then remove the front lower arm (A).
Tightening torque
(B) 117.7 ~ 137.3N.m(12.0 ~ 14.0kgf.m, 86.8 ~ 101.3lb-ft)
(C) 156.9 ~ 176.5N.m(16.0 ~ 18.0kgf.m, 115.7 ~ 130.2lb-ft)

5. Installation is the reverse of removal.

Inspection
1. Check the bushing for wear and deterioration.
2. Check the front stabilizer bar for deformation.
3. Check the all bolts and nuts.
Suspension System

Replacement
1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly.
Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
2. Loosen the bolt (A) and then disconnect the universal joint assembly from the pinion of the steering gear box.
Tightening torque:
32.4 ~ 37.3N.m (3.3 ~ 3.8kgf.m, 23.9 ~ 27.5lb-ft)

Insert to the shaft in order that the center of the bolt and the marking (A) is in a straight line.
3. Remove the front wheel and tire (A) from front hub.
Page 31 sur 115

Tightening torque:
88.2 ~ 107.8N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0kgf.m, 65.0 ~ 79.5lb-ft)

• Be careful not to damage to the hub bolts when removing the front wheel and tire (A).
4. Remove the stabilizer link (A) loosening the nut.
Tightening torque:
98.1 ~ 117.7N.m(10.0 ~ 12.0kgf.m, 72.3~86.8lb-ft)

5. Remove the tie rod end ball joint (C) from the knuckle by using the SST (09568-34000).
(1) Remove the split pin (A).
(2) Remove the castle nut (B).
(3) Use the SST (09568-34000).
Tightening torque:
23.5 ~ 33.3N.m (2.4 ~ 3.4kgf.m, 19.4 ~ 24.6lb-ft)
Page 32 sur 115

• When using SST, be sure not to damage the dust cover of lower arm ball joint.
• Keep SST tied to the car because there is a risk of injury by dropping the SST during removing the lower arm ball joint.
• The peripheral parts may be damaged when removing the lower arm ball joint with a general tool such as lever, so be sure to
use SST.
6. Loosen the bolt & nut and then remove the lower arm (A).
Tightening torque:
58.9 ~ 70.6 N.m (6.0 ~ 7.2 kgf.m, 43.4 ~ 52.1 lb-ft)

7. Loosen the bolt and then separate the roll rod stopper (A).
Tightening torque:
107.9 ~127.5N.m(11.0 ~ 13.0kgf.m, 79.6 ~ 94.0lb-ft)
Page 33 sur 115

8. Install the jack and then remove the bolt and nut.
Tightening torque
Sub frame mounting bolts & nuts :
156.9 ~ 176.5N.m(16.0 ~ 18.0kgf.m, 115.7 ~ 130.2lb-ft)

9. Remove the stabilizer (A) from the front sub frame by loosening the mounting bolts & nuts.
Tightening torque:
44.1 ~ 53.9N.m(4.5 ~ 5.5kgf.m, 32.5 ~ 39.8lb-ft)

10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

11. Check the wheel Alignment.
(Refer to Tires/Wheels - "Alignment")
Page 34 sur 115

Inspection
1. Check the bushing for wear and deterioration.
2. Check the front stabilizer bar for deformation.
Suspension System

Replacement
1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly.
Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
2. Remove the front wheel and tire (A) from front hub.
Tightening torque :
88.3 ~ 107.9N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6lb-ft)

• Be careful not to damage to the hub bolts when removing the front wheel and tire (A).
3. Remove the stabilizer link (A) loosening the nut.
Tightening torque :
98.1 ~ 117.7N.m(10.0 ~ 12.0kgf.m, 72.3~86.8lb-ft)

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Suspension System

Replacement
Page 35 sur 115

1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly.

Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
2. Loosen the bolt (A) and then disconnect the universal joint assembly from the pinion of the steering gear box.
Tightening torque:
32.4 ~ 37.3N.m (3.3 ~ 3.8kgf.m, 23.9 ~ 27.5lb-ft)

Insert to the shaft in order that the center of the bolt and the marking (A) is in a straight line.
3. Remove the front wheel and tire (A) from front hub.
Tightening torque :
88.2 ~ 107.8 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.0 ~ 79.5 lb-ft)

• Be careful not to damage to the hub bolts when removing the front wheel and tire (A).
4. Remove the stabilizer link (A) loosening the nut.
Tightening torque :
98.1 ~ 117.7N.m(10.0 ~ 12.0kgf.m, 72.3~86.8lb-ft)
Page 36 sur 115

• When using SST, be sure not to damage the dust cover of lower arm ball joint.
• Keep SST tied to the car because there is a risk of injury by dropping the SST during removing the lower arm ball joint.
• The peripheral parts may be damaged when removing the lower arm ball joint with a general tool such as lever, so be sure to
use SST.
6. Loosen the bolt & nut and then remove the lower arm (A).
Tightening torque :
58.9 ~ 70.6 N.m (6.0 ~ 7.2 kgf.m, 43.4 ~ 52.1 lb-ft)
Page 37 sur 115

7. Loosen the bolt and then separate the roll rod stopper (A).
Tightening torque :
107.9 ~127.5N.m(11.0 ~ 13.0kgf.m, 79.6 ~ 94.0lb-ft)

8. Install the jack and then remove the bolt and nut.
Tightening torque
Sub frame mounting bolts & nuts :
156.9 ~ 176.5N.m(16.0 ~ 18.0kgf.m, 115.7 ~ 130.2lb-ft)

9. Remove the stabilizer (A) from the front sub frame by loosening the mounting bolts & nuts.
Tightening torque:
44.1 ~ 53.9N.m(4.5 ~ 5.5kgf.m, 32.5 ~ 39.8lb-ft)
Page 38 sur 115

10. Remove the gear box (A) from the front sub frame by loosening the mounting bolts.
Tightening torque:
88.3 ~ 107.9N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0kgf.m, 43.4 ~ 57.9lb-ft)

11. Remove the front lower arm.

(Refer to Front Suspension System - "Front Lower Arm")
12. Installation is the reverse of removal.
13. Check the wheel Alignment.
(Refer to Tires/Wheels - "Alignment")
Suspension System

Removal
1. Remove the motor & gear drive unit.
(Refer to Traction Motor System - "Motor & Gear Differential Unit Assembly")
2. Remove the Electric Water Pump (EWP).
(Refer to Traction Motor System - "Electric Water Pump")
3. Remove the accumulator mounting bolt (A).
Tightening torque :
6.8 ~ 10.7 N.m(0.7 ~ 1.1 kgf.m, 5.0 ~ 7.9 lb-ft)

4. Remove the wiring (A) from the power electric frame.

Page 39 sur 115

5. Remove the LH & RH support bracket mounting nut (A,B) and then remove the Power Electric Frame (A).
Tightening torque
49.0 ~ 63.7 N.m (5.0 ~ 6.5 kgf.m, 36.2 ~ 47.0 lb-ft)
78.5 ~ 98.1 N.m (8.0 ~ 10.0 kgf.m, 57.9 ~ 72.3 lb-ft)

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Suspension System

Components Location
Page 40 sur 115

1. Torsion beam axle 3. Coil spring assembly

2. Shock absorber

Suspension System

Components
Page 41 sur 115

1. Shock absorber assembly 5. washer

2. Dust cover 6. Insulator assembly
3. Bump stopper 7. Lock nut
4. Cup

Suspension System

Replacement
1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
2. Remove the front wheel and tire (A) from front hub.
Tightening torque :
88.2 ~ 107.8 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.0 ~ 79.5 lb-ft)
Page 42 sur 115

• Be careful not to damage to the hub bolts when removing the rear wheel and tire (A).
3. Loosen the rear shock absorber (A) upper mounting bolt.
Tightening torque :
49.0 ~ 63.7N.m (5.0 ~ 6.5kgf.m, 36.2 ~ 47.0lb-ft)

4. Loosen the bolt and then remove the rear shock absorber (A) from the torsion beam axle.
Tightening torque :
98.1 ~ 117.7N.m (10.0 ~ 12.0kgf.m, 72.3 ~ 86.8lb-ft)

Inspection
1. Check the rubber parts for wear and deterioration.
2. Compress and extend the piston rod (A) and check that there is no abnormal resistance or unusual sound during operation.
Page 43 sur 115

Disposal
1. Fully extend the piston rod.
2. Drill a hole on the (A) section to remove gas from the cylinder.

• The gas coming out is harmless but be careful of chips that may fly when drilling.
Suspension System

Components
Page 44 sur 115

1. Spring lower pad 3. Spring upper pad

2. Spring

Suspension System

Replacement
1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
2. Remove the front wheel and tire (A) from front hub.
Tightening torque :
88.2 ~ 107.8 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.0 ~ 79.5 lb-ft)
Page 45 sur 115

• Be careful not to damage to the hub bolts when removing the rear wheel and tire (A).
3. Loosen the bolt and then remove the rear shock absorber (A) from the torsion beam axle.
Tightening torque :
98.1 ~ 117.7N.m (10.0 ~ 12.0kgf.m, 72.3 ~ 86.8lb-ft)

4. Disconnect the eletric parking brake acturator connector.

5. Remove the bolt (A) and then remove the fastener (B) and wheel speed sensor cable from the fixed bracket.

6. Pull the torsion beam axle in the direction of a down and then remove the coil spring (A).

7. Installation is the reverse of removal.

Page 46 sur 115

Inspection
1. Check the coil spring for crack and deformation.
2. Check the coil spring pad for damage and deformation.
Suspension System

Components

1. Rear torsion beam axle

Suspension System

Replacement
1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
2. Remove the front wheel and tire (A) from front hub.
Tightening torque :
88.2 ~ 107.8 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.0 ~ 79.5 lb-ft)
Page 47 sur 115

• Be careful not to damage to the hub bolts when removing the rear wheel and tire (A).
3. Loosen the guide rod bolt (B) and the remove the rear caliper body (A).
Tightening torque :
21.6 ~ 31.4 N.m (2.2 ~ 3.2 kgf.m, 15.9 ~ 23.1 lb-ft)

4. Remove the pads (B), in the caliper carrier (A).

5. Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts (B), and then place the brake caliper assembly (A) with wire.
Tightening torque :
63.7 ~ 73.5 N.m (6.5 ~ 7.5 kgf.m, 47.0 ~ 54.2 lb-ft)
Page 48 sur 115

6. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector (A).

7. Loosen the screws (B), and then remove the brake disc (A).
Tightening torque:
4.9 ~ 5.8 N.m (0.5 ~ 0.6 kgf.m, 3.6 ~ 4.3 lb-ft)

8. Loosen the bolts and then remove the hub bearing (A).
Tightening torque:
58.8 ~ 68.6 N.m (6.0 ~ 7.0 kgf.m, 43.3 ~ 50.6 lb-ft)

9. Remove the hub bearing by using the rubber hammer.

Page 49 sur 115

10. Loosen the rear shock absorber (A) upper mounting bolt.
Tightening torque :
49.0 ~ 63.7N.m (5.0 ~ 6.5kgf.m, 36.2 ~ 47.0lb-ft)

11. Loosen the bolt and then remove the rear shock absorber (A) from the torsion beam axle.
Tightening torque :
98.1 ~ 117.7N.m (10.0 ~ 12.0kgf.m, 72.3 ~ 86.8lb-ft)

12. Remove the bolt (A) and then remove the fastener (B) and wheel speed sensor cable from the fixed bracket.

13. Pull the torsion beam axle in the direction of a down and then remove the coil spring (A).
Tightening torque :
98.1 ~ 117.7 N.m(10.0 ~ 12.0 kgf.m, 72.3 ~ 86.8 lb-ft)
Page 50 sur 115

14. Loosen the mounting bolts (B) and then remove the torsion beam axle (A) from the frame.
Tightening torque :
98.1 ~ 117.7 N.m(10.0 ~ 12.0 kgf.m, 72.3 ~ 86.8 lb-ft)

15. Installation is the reverse of removal.

• Use a SST(09581-11000) when installing the brake caliper assembly.

Inspection
1. Check the hub for cracks and the splines for wear.
2. Check the rear axle carrier for cracks.
Suspension System

Tire Wear
1. Measure the tread depth of the tires.
Tread depth [limit] :1.6 mm (0.0630 in.)
2. If the remaining tread depth (A) is less than the limit, replace the tire.

When the tread depth of the tires is less than 1.6 mm(0.063 in), the wear indicators (B) will appear.
Page 51 sur 115

Tire Rotation
Checking For Pull And Wander

• Using tires and wheel other than the recommended sizes could cause unusual handling characteristics and poor vehicle control,
resulting in a serious accident.
If the steering pulls to one side, rotate the tires according to the following wheel rotation procedure.
1. Rotate the front right and front left tires, and perform a road test in order to confirm vehicle stability.

2. If the steering pulls to the opposite side, rotate the front and rear tires, and perform a road test again.

3. If the steering continues to pull to one side, rotate the front right and left tires again, and perform a road test.
Page 52 sur 115

4. If the steering continues to pull to the opposite side, replace the front wheels with new ones.

Removal

• Using tires and wheel other than the recommended sizes could cause unusual handling characteristics and poor vehicle control,
resulting in a serious accident.
1. Remove valve core and deflate the tire.
2. Remove the side of the tire bead area from the wheel using tire changing machine .

• The tire bead should be broken approx. 90° from the valve side of the wheel. The bead breaker should not be set too deep.
• Avoid tire/tool contact with the valve on dismount.
• Dismount should end near the valve.
3. Rotate the wheel clockwise.
Page 53 sur 115

Installation
1. Apply tire soap or lubrication to the top and bottom tire beads.

2. To fit the bottom bead, position the valve at the 5 o’clock position relative to the head on the tire changing machine.

3. Place the tire on the rim so the bottom bead touches the edge of the rim after the valve (6 o’clock). Rotate the rim clockwise, and push
down on the tire at the 3 o’clock position to fit bottom bead.
Page 54 sur 115

4. After bottom bead is on tire, rotate the rim until the valve is at the 5 o’clock position relative to the head on the tire changing machine.
Push down on the tire at the 3 o’clock position and rotate the rim clockwise to fit the top bead.

5. Inflate the tire until both beads seat.

Tire pressure :2.3kg/cm² (33psi)

Suspension System

Hub nut tightening sequence

Tighten the hub nuts as follows.
Tightening torque:
88.3 ~ 107.9N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6lb-ft)

When using an impact gun, final tightening torque should be checked using a torque wrench.
Page 55 sur 115

Run out inspection

1. Jack up the vehicle.
2. Measure the wheel Run-out by using a dial indicator as illustration below.
Run-out Aluminum
Radial mm(in.) Below 0.3(0.0118)
Lateral mm(in.) Below 0.3(0.0118)

3. If measured value exceeds the standard value, replace the wheel.

Suspension System

Front wheel alignment

When using a commercially available computerized wheel alignment equipment to inspect the front wheel alignment, always position
the vehicle on a level surface with the front wheels facing straight ahead.
Prior to wheel alignment, steering column is approximately in tilt mid position.

Toe

B - A > 0: Toe in (+)

B - A ＜ 0: Toe out (-)

Toe adjustment
1. Loosen the tie rod end lock nut.
2. Remove the bellows clip to prevent the bellows from being twisted.
3. Adjust the toe by screwing or unscrewing the tie rod. Toe adjustment should be made by turning the right and left tie rods by the same
amount.
Toe-in
Page 56 sur 115

Total : 0.1° ± 0.2°

Individual : 0.05° ± 0.1°

4. When completing the toe adjustment, install the bellows clip and tighten the tie rod end lock nut to specified torque.
Tightening torque:
49.0 ~ 53.9 N.m (5.0 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 36.2 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)

Camber and Caster

Camber and Caster are pre-set at the factory, so they do not need to be adjusted. If the camber and caster are not within the standard value,
replace or repair the damaged parts and then inspect again.
Camber angle: -0.5° ± 0.5°
Caster angle: 5.7.° ± 0.5°
Suspension System

Components
Page 57 sur 115

1. TPMS Receiver 4. TPMS Sensor (RR)

2. TPMS Sensor (FL) 5. TPMS Sensor (FR)
3. TPMS Sensor (RL)

Suspension System

Circuit Diagram
Page 58 sur 115

Hamess Connector

Pin No. Description

1 BATT+
2 IG_ON
3 CAN_L
4 CAN_H
5 NC
6 GND

Suspension System

Description
TREAD Lamp
- Tire Under Inflation / Leak Warning.

1. Turn on condition
A. When tire pressure is below allowed threshold
B. When rapid leak is detected by the sensor.
C. Indicates that tire needs to be re-inflated to placard pressure / repaired.
2. Turn off condition
Page 59 sur 115

A. Under-inflation ; When tire pressure is above (warning threshold + hysteresis).

B. Rapid Leak ; When tire pressure is above (leak warning threshold).

DTC Warning
1. Turn on condition
A. When the system detects a fault that is external to the receiver/ sensor.
B. When the system detects a receiver fault.
C. When the system detects a sensor fault.
2. Turn off condition
A. If the fault is considered as 'critical', then the lamp is held on throughout the current Ignition cycle (even if the DTC has been
demoted). This is because it is important to bring the problem to the drivers attention. On the following Ignition cycle, the demotion
conditions will be re-checked. If the demotion conditions occur, the lamp will be turned off. It will be held on until DTC demotion
checking is completed.
B. 'Non critical' faults are those that can occur temporarily e.g. vehicle battery under voltage. The lamp is therefore turned off when the
DTC demotion condition occurs.

System Fault
1. General Function
A. The system monitors a number of inputs across time in order to determine that a fault exists.
B. Faults are prioritized according to which has the most likely cause.
C. Certain faults are not covered through DTC. The main ones are:
1) Sensor thermal shutdown (over 257°F/125°C).
2) Ignition Line stuck ; requires observation of lamps at Ignition ON to diagnose.
Suspension System

Description

Mode of Operation
ASIC Mode
1. Factory Mode
The factory mode is the mode that allows the TPM sensor to transmit RF Frames and sample LF more often in the HKMC factory. The
TPM sensor will send normal RF frames in factory mode.
LF sampling will occur every 1 second, to ensure a rapid response on the production line.
Figure 5 shows the state flow of the ASIC from Off mode through Factory mode to Non-Factory mode.
Factory mode is not a normal mode; it operates over the other customer visible modes to increase the LF sampling rates while the factory
counter is not Zero.
On leaving Off mode the factory counter will be set to 15, each time the sensor moves from Service mode to stationary mode, the counter
will be decremented.
After Factory mode has expired, the Factory_LF command can be used to re-enter Factory mode, in which case the factory counter will
be reset to 15.
If Factory mode is no longer required, it is possible to reset the factory counter, and therefore exit Factory mode by using the
Exit_Factory_LF command.
During 10.8s mode, the sensor will transmit normal RF data frames every 10.8s. In case of high line sensor, the function code will
indicate rotational direction.
Pressure Sample Rate Temperature Sample Rate Rolling detection Sample
Mode Normal Tx Rate (Seconds)
(seconds) (seconds) Rate (seconds)
Page 60 sur 115

Factory 10.8 10.8 10.8 10.8

2. Stationary Mode
In normal operation and while the vehicle is not moving the TPM Sensor will be in STATIONARY mode. In this mode sample and
transmission rates are described below.
Pressure Sample Rate Temperature Sample Rate Rolling detection Sample
Mode Normal Tx Rate (Seconds)
(seconds) (seconds) Rate (seconds)
Non-factory 60 60 15 -
Factory 60 60 15 -

STATIONARY mode is excited when the vehicle begins to move and shock sensor input is verified by the ASIC.
3. AL/ALO Mode
Upon detection of motion, an Unknown / Normal function code is transmitted, then the sensor enters AL Mode (Auto Learn Mode) or ALO
Mode (Auto Location Mode), depending on TPM sensor type (Lowline or Highline).
During AL mode, the sensor will continue to transmit Unknown/Normal function codes every 33 seconds for a duration of 16 RF Blocks
( 1 RF block = 4 RF frames).
During ALO mode the TPM sensor begins to determine which direction the sensor is rotating – clockwise or anticlockwise. For the first
transmission after the Unknown / Normal function code, the data block will contain one of three function codes for ALO Mode. If the ASIC
is unable to make a decision concerning rotational direction, then the sensor shall transmit an Unknown / Normal function code.
During AL/ALO Mode the shock sensors are sampled for motion, every 10.8 seconds. The pressure and temperature samples also occur
every 10.8 seconds. The transmission rate and duration of AL/ALO Mode is set to a one block transmission (4 frames) rate every 33
seconds for a duration of 16 blocks. In ALO Mode rotational direction is acquired every 10.8 seconds. The transmitted function code is
based on all ALO data since its last transmission.
The AL/ALO mode function flag will be set for the transmission of all valid AL/ALO frames.
If the speed of the vehicle drops below the stationary threshold and the sensor detects that there is no motion present, then AL/ALO
Mode will be exited and Service Mode will be entered. If Service Mode exits due to detection of motion and AL/ALO Mode is re-entered
then the AL/ALO Mode continues where it left off i.e. the total AL/ALO duration of 16 blocks is achieved regardless if Service Mode or
Alert Mode has been entered during that AL/ALO Mode.
If a pressure change (Alert Mode) is detected in AL/ALO Mode and DP transmissions occur, AL/ALO Mode is suspended until the DP
transmissions finish.
Sensors with ALO mode have 4 configurable options to optimize the WAL performance based on evaluation with the customer. Sensors
supplied to Hyundai/Kia will have option 2 configured.
Pressure Sample Rate Temperature Sample Rate Rolling detection Sample
Mode Normal Tx Rate (Seconds)
(seconds) (seconds) Rate (seconds)
Non-factory 10.8 10.8 10.8 33
Factory 10.8 10.8 10.8 33

4. Service Mode
Service Mode is the period when the TPM sensor has detected that the vehicle speed has dropped below the stationary threshold.
During this period the pressure and temperature and motion samples occur every 15 seconds but there are no transmissions, the TPM
sensor will only transmit on a pressure change, DP. The DP transmission will consist of two blocks (Total of 8 frames) of pressure
information transmitted over a two second period. The duration of Service Mode is 15 minutes from when the TPM sensor has detected
that there is no rolling detection. If during Service Mode rolling detection is detected again, the sensor will exit Service Mode and re-enter
the mode it was previously in before it entered Service Mode, AL Mode or Normal Mode. Every time Service Mode is entered the 15-
minute timer is reset. If Service Mode is exited before the Service Mode timer expires then the AL Mode counter will not be reset. Upon
expiration of Service Mode the AL Mode counter is reset.
Pressure Sample Rate Temperature Sample Rate Rolling detection Sample
Mode Normal Tx Rate (Seconds)
(seconds) (seconds) Rate (seconds)
Non-factory 15 15 15 -
Factory 15 15 15 -

5. Rolling Mode
When AL Mode expires the TPM sensor enters Rolling Mode. In Rolling Mode the rate of transmissions and rolling detection sampling
are decreased to once every 60s and the rate of pressure and temperature sampling occur every 15 seconds. For the first 16 blocks of
transmissions after a drive begins the TPM sensor transmits the AL Mode function codes Clockwise, Anticlockwise or Normal/Unknown.
After the 16 blocks of AL information have been transmitted, the TPM sensor will transmit the Normal/Unknown function code. If the
speed of the vehicle drops below the stationary threshold and the TPM sensor detects that there is no rolling detection present, then
Rolling Mode will be suspended and Service Mode will be entered.
On entry to Rolling mode the TPM sensor will sample pressure and do a normal RF transmission with a NORMAL/UNKOWN function
code (see 4.1.1.5: Status Byte).
Pressure Sample Rate Temperature Sample Rate Rolling detection Sample
Mode Normal Tx Rate (Seconds)
(seconds) (seconds) Rate (seconds)
Non-factory 15 15 60 60
Page 61 sur 115

Factory 15 15 60 60

When vehicle speed has dropped below minimum vehicle speed threshold, the sensor will remain in Rolling mode until the next
scheduled rolling detection sample occurs. Once the rolling detection sample has confirmed the vehicle speed is below the threshold, the
TPM sensor will enter Service Mode. After the Service Mode period has elapsed the TPM sensor will exit to STATIONARY Mode.
6. Alert Mode
In Stationary mode, Service Mode or Rolling mode, pressure is measured at intervals as described above. During the measurement
routine the current pressure value is compared to the previous transmitted pressure value. If the current pressure sample differs by
greater than 8 counts (>2 psi ) or more from the previous transmitted pressure value, a RE-MEASURE will occur immediately to ensure
the sample is correct. If a delta P is confirmed the TPM Sensor will transmit immediately with an Alert status code. If the RE-MEASURE
transmission occurs coincident with a regular transmission, the RE-MEASURE takes precedence and the regular transmission will be
replaced by the RE-MEASURE transmission.
(1) Stationary Alert Mode
While the sensor is in Stationary Mode, it shall transmit an instantaneous measured data frame, as defined in Section 4.1 of this
document, if a pressure change of 2.0 psi from the last transmission or greater has occurred. All transmissions occurred due to a
pressure change event shall have the Alert status code as specified in Section 4.1.1.5.6.
Stationary Alert mode will be exited if a change in pressure of 2.0p.s.i. or greater is not detected after 2 consecutive pressure
samples.
Pressure Sample Rate Temperature Sample Rate Rolling detection Sample Rate
Normal Tx Rate (Seconds)
(seconds) (seconds) (seconds)
2 (max) 2 (max) N/A ΔP

(2) While the sensor is in Rolling Mode, it shall transmit an instantaneous measured data frame, as defined in Section 4.1 of this
document, if a pressure change of 2.0p.s.i. or greater from the last transmission or greater has occurred All transmissions occurred
due to a pressure change event shall have the Alert status code as specified in Section 4.1.1.5.6.
Rolling Alert mode will be exited if a change in pressure of 2.0p.s.i. or greater is not detected after 2 consecutive pressure samples.
Pressure Sample Rate Temperature Sample Rate Rolling detection Sample Rate
Normal Tx Rate (Seconds)
(seconds) (seconds) (seconds)
2 (max) 2 (max) N/A ΔP

7. OFF Mode
This is a mode primarily used for shipping and storage of the TPM sensor units. When the sensor is de-energized (using the Enter_Off
LF command), it shall transmit one last transmission with the Off Mode function code then enter the Off Mode immediately. When the
TPM sensor is in Off Mode, it shall continue sampling pressure and temperature at the rate specified in Table 13 of this document but it
shall not transmit any transmission until the TPM sensor is re-energized again.
The TPM sensor can be re-energized using the Normal LF command or when it detects a change in pressure of 19p.s.i. or greater.
Temperature Sample Rate Rolling detection Sample Rate
Pressure Sample Rate (seconds) Normal Tx Rate (Seconds)
(seconds) (seconds)
60(max) 60 (max) - -

8. RF Test Mode
The sensor must enter the RF Test Mode and provide the state code specified in 4.1.1.5.6of this document upon the presence of an LF
signal with the LF data command “Test_LF” specified in Table 16 below.
The sensor must react (Transmit and provide data) no later than 700.0 ms after the LF data code has been detected. As soon as the
sensor enters this mode it shall comply with all the sampling and transmission requirements specified in Table 14 of this document,
regarding this specific mode independent of rotating, stationary, or service mode.
The sensor shall count the number of frames (each transmission contains four frames as shown in Table 15 of this document) it has
transmitted since it entered this Mode, and this number shall be transmitted within the data in each frame as shown in Table 15 below.
The Data transmitted shall be in the format shown in Table 15 below. When the counter for the number of frames reach the value 255 (All
of the 8 bits are used), the counter shall reset and restart again until the sensor exits this mode.
When the sensor exits this mode it shall clear the number of frames counter. The sensor shall exit this mode upon the presence of a
Normal_LF command as specified in Section 3.3.2 of this document.
The sensor shall start an eight hours timer from the moment it enters this mode and then shall exit this Mode immediately after the eight
(8.0) hours' timer expires
Temperature Sample Rate Rolling detection Sample Rate
Pressure Sample Rate (seconds) Normal Tx Rate (Seconds)
(seconds) (seconds)
15(max) 15(max) 15(max) 15(max)

RF Test Mode Data Structure = Fram 1 = Fram 2 = Fram 3 = Fram 4

Preamble H/L Bit ID Pressure No. of Frames Status CRC
16 bits 1 bit 31 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits

9. Continuous Wave (CW) Mode

Page 62 sur 115

The TPM sensor must enter the specified CW Mode when it receives the appropriate LF data command ( CW_Low_LF or
CW_High_LF ).
The TPM sensor must react (Transmit) no later than 200.0 ms after the LF data code has been detected. As soon as the sensor enters
this mode it shall start transmitting the specified CW frequency (Carrier Wave Frequency) of the TPM sensor.
There are 2 CW modes available:
A. CW Low will transmit continuously at the lower FSK frequency.
B. CW High will transmit continuously at the upper FSK frequency.
The sensor shall exit this mode upon the presence of a Normal_LF command.
The sensor shall start a four minutes timer from the moment it enters this mode and then shall exit this Mode immediately after the four
(4.0) minutes timer expires.
Suspension System

Removal
1. Remove the tire.
(Refer to Tires/Wheels - "Tire")
2. Remove the screw with torx driver (A).

• When installing the bead brake, make sure that it does not come in contact with the TPMS sensor.
• Be careful not to damage the TPMS sensor when installing the bead brake near the TPMS sensor.

3. Remove the sensor body (A) from the valve (B) in the direction of the arrow.

4. Use the valve mounting tool to pull out the valve until it is entirely out of the lower hole.
Page 63 sur 115

Cut the rubber at the bottom of valve with a knife.

5. Apply lubricant to the surface of the valve, and then mount it through the valve hole of the wheel.

We recommend using regular soapy water as lubricant.

• The TPMS sensor valve bottom is not properly sealed if it is not fully mounted on the wheel, as shown in the following figure:

• Make sure that the valve body is pulled entirely through the hole.
Page 64 sur 115

6. Apply soapy water or lubricant to the upper/lower bead section of the tire.

7. In order to mount lower the beads, place the TPMS sensor at 5 o'clock, starting from the head of the tire replacement equipment.

8. Rotate the rim clockwise and press tire towards 3 o'clock to mount the lower beads.

• Mount the tire on the wheel. Make sure that the beads touch the edge of the rim behind the sensor (towards 6 o'clock).

9. In order to mount the upper beads, press the tire towards 3 o'clock and turn the rim clockwise.

10. Inject air into the tire until the beads are in the correct position.
Page 65 sur 115

11. Adjust the tire pressure according to the recommended tire pressure for the vehicle.
12. If the TPMS sensor malfunctions, you must perform TPMS sensor learning. Replace any faulty sensors and perform TPMS sensor
learning.

Diagnosis procedure by using diagnostic device

As manual for diagnosis methods by using diagnosis device, the main contents are as follows:
1. Connect self-diagnosis connector(16pins) located in the lower of driver side crash pad to self-diagnosis device, and then turn the self-
diagnosis device after key is ON.
2. Select the "vehicle model" and "TPMS" on GDS vehicle selection screen, then select OK.

[System Identification (Wireless)]

Page 66 sur 115

[Sensor ID Writing (Wireless)]

Page 67 sur 115
Page 68 sur 115
Page 69 sur 115
Page 70 sur 115

[VIN input initialization]

Page 71 sur 115
Page 72 sur 115
Page 73 sur 115
Page 74 sur 115

[Vehicle name input initialization]

Page 75 sur 115
Page 76 sur 115
Page 77 sur 115
Page 78 sur 115
Page 79 sur 115

[Sensor Status initialization]

Page 80 sur 115
Page 81 sur 115
Page 82 sur 115
Page 83 sur 115
Page 84 sur 115
Page 85 sur 115

[Register Sensor initialization]

Page 86 sur 115
Page 87 sur 115
Page 88 sur 115

• Write ID Read ID and be sure to check are the same.

• After registering successfully sensor "Sensor Wireless Information" by the execution determines whether the sensor is working
properly.
Suspension System

Description

1. Mode
(1) Virgin State
A. The receiver as a sole part is shipped in this state. Replacement parts should therefore arrive in this state.
B. In this state, there is no sensor monitoring and no DTC monitoring.
C. The state indicates that platform specific parameters must be written to the receiver and that sensors are un-learned.
(2) Normal State
A. In order for tire inflation state and DTC monitoring to occur, the receiver must be in this state.
B. In this state, automatic sensor learning is enabled.
Page 89 sur 115

(3) Test State

A. This state is only used in manufacturing plant to check RF transmission between sensor and receiver.
2. Overview
A. Receives RF data from sensor.
B. Uses sensor data to decide whether to turn on TREAD Lamp.
C. Learn TPM sensor for under inflation monitoring automatically.
D. Uses sensor information, distance travelled, background noise levels, Auto-learn status, short / open circuit output status, vehicle
battery level, internal receiver states to determine if there is a system or a vehicle fault.

Operation
1. General Function
A. Auto-learn takes place only once per Ignition cycle.
B. On successful completion, 4 road wheel sensor ID's are latched into memory for monitoring.
C. Until Auto-learn completes, previously learned sensors are monitored for under inflation / leak warnings.
2. General Conditions to Learn New Sensors:
A. Receiver must determine that it is confident that sensor is not temporary:
1) Uses vehicle speed.
2) Uses confidence reduction of previously learned sensors.
B. Typical time at driving continuously over 15.5 mph(25 kph) to learn a new sensor is up to 20 minutes.
3. General Conditions to Un-Learn a sensor that is removed:
A. It takes less than 20 minutes at 15.5 mph(25 mph).
B. Confidence reduction is dependent on time which vehicle is driven at speed greater than or equal to 12.4 mph(20 kph).
Suspension System

Replacement

When the receiver first arrives for replacement:

1) It will be in Virgin State.
2) It will not be configured for any specific platform.
3) It will not have any sensor ID's memorized.

It is important to make sure that the correct receiver is used to replace the faulty part i.e. it must be Low Line and not High Line in order
to have the correct inflation warning thresholds set.
1. Disconnect vehicle battery.
2. Remove the crash pad garnish.
(Refer to BD group - "Crash Pad")
3. Remove the receiver with bracket.

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

5. Re-connect battery and turn Ignition on.
6. After replacing the receiver, learn by using self-diagnosis device(GDS).

[Wheel Sensor ID Writing (Wireless) initialization]

Page 90 sur 115

[Wheel Sensor ID Writing (Wireless) 1]

Page 91 sur 115

[Wheel Sensor ID Writing (Wireless) 2]

Page 92 sur 115

Diagnosis procedure by using diagnostic device

[System Identification (Wireless)]

Page 93 sur 115
Page 94 sur 115

[Sensor ID Writing (Wireless)]

Page 95 sur 115
Page 96 sur 115
Page 97 sur 115

[VIN input initialization]

Page 98 sur 115
Page 99 sur 115
Page 100 sur 115
Page 101 sur 115

[Vehicle name input initialization]

Page 102 sur 115
Page 103 sur 115
Page 104 sur 115
Page 105 sur 115
Page 106 sur 115

[Sensor Status initialization]

Page 107 sur 115
Page 108 sur 115
Page 109 sur 115
Page 110 sur 115
Page 111 sur 115
Page 112 sur 115

[Register Sensor initialization]

Page 113 sur 115
Page 114 sur 115
Page 115 sur 115

• Write ID Read ID and be sure to check are the same.

• After registering successfully sensor "Sensor Wireless Information" by the execution determines whether the sensor is working
properly.
Page 1 sur 31

Steering System

Safety Precaution

Sinse Electric Vehicle contains a high voltage, battery mishandling the high voltage system or vehicle may lead to a serious accident
including electric shock and electric leakage.

• All the high voltage wiring and connectors are in orange.

• Inform of possible danger of high voltage by placing a "high voltage caution" sign on the vehicle as in the image below.
Page 2 sur 31
Page 3 sur 31

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Insulation gloves Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage
components
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]
Page 4 sur 31

Insulation shoes

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation clothes
components

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses

Used in the following cases :

• During Removal & installation or inspection of the high
voltage battery terminals or wiring, which spark might happen.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

All removed high voltage components are placed on an

Insulation mat
insulation mat to prevent safety accidents.

Insulation sheet is used to cover high voltage components to

Insulation sheet protect people not wearing personal protective equipment from
safety accidents.

Warning tape Used for infomring that it is dangerous to come over this line.
Page 5 sur 31

Personal Protective Equipment Inspection

• Check that the personal protective equipment is not damaged.

• Check that the insulation gloves are not torn or damaged.
• Wear the insulation glove after removing moisture.

Fold the insulation glove as above.

Fold again 3~4 times to make it airtight.
Squeeze the inflated glove to see if the glove is torn or damaged.
Caution when repairing the power cable

Precautions when handling high voltage battery

• Battery Control System - Refer to "High Voltage Battery Handling Guide"

Precautions in case of fire in High Voltage Battery System

Precautions in case of high voltage battery gas and/or electrolyte leakage

Page 6 sur 31

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug.
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• Gas is hydrogen and alkali vapor. If the fire occurred indoor, ventilate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline
solution.
• If leaked vapor or liquid gets in your eye, immediately clean with running water, then get medical attention.
• In case of gas leakage due to high temperature, do NOT use the battery until the high voltage battery cools down to room temperature.

Precautions when handling vehicle after an accident

Preparations when servicing accident affected vehicle

Precautions when EV is unattended for a prolonged period

Hybrid Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery / Charging Precautions

If the POE oil in the system gets mixed with PAG oil, it may result in dielectric breakdown due to decreased volumetric resistivity and
inoperative A/C compressor, disabling the A/C compressor.

Steering System

High Voltage Shut-off Procedure

3. After loosening the nut, remove the safety plug service cover (A).
Safety plug service cover mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Remove the safety plug (A).

Remove the safety plug in the follwing order.

Page 8 sur 31

(3) Remove the high voltage cable (A).

(4) Measure the voltage between the inverter terminals.

Less than 30V : High voltage circuit properly shut
More than 30V : Faulty on high voltage circuit
Page 9 sur 31

Specifications
Item Specification
Type MDPS(Motor Driven Power Steering)
Steering gear Type Rack & Pinion
Rack stroke 154 ± 1mm
Steering angle (Max.) Inner 37.6° (+0.5°/-1.5°)
Outer 31.3°

Tightening Torques
Tightening torque (kgf.m)
Item
Nm kgf.m lb-ft
Wheel Hub nuts 88.3 ~ 107.9 9.0 ~ 11.0 65.1 ~ 79.6
Page 10 sur 31

Steering wheel lock nut 39.2 ~ 49.0 4.0 ~ 5.0 28.9 ~ 36.2
Steering column bolt. (to universal joint) 28.9 ~ 36.2 5.0 ~ 6.0 58.8 ~ 70.6
Steering column mounting nuts 24.5 ~ 29.4 2.5 ~ 3.0 18.1 ~ 21.7
Steering column mounting bolt 44.1 ~ 49.0 4.5 ~ 5.0 32.5 ~ 36.2
Bolt connecting universal joint bolt. (to pinion) 32.4 ~ 38.3 3.3 ~ 3.8 23.9 ~ 27.5
Tie rod end castle nut 23.5 ~ 33.3 2.4 ~ 3.4 17.4 ~ 24.6
Lower arm ball joint bolt & nut (to knuckle) 58.8 ~ 70.6 6.0 ~ 7.2 43.4 ~ 52.1
Steering gear box mounting bolt. (to sub frame) 88.3 ~ 107.9 9.0 ~ 11.0 65.1 ~ 79.6
Sub frame mounting bolts & nuts 156.9 ~ 176.5 16.0 ~ 18.0 115.7 ~ 130.2
Stabilizer bar nut ( to stabilizer link) 98.1 ~ 117.7 10.0 ~ 12.0 72.3 ~ 86.8

Steering System

Special Service Tools

Tool Name / Number Illustration Description

Steering wheel puller

Remove the steering wheel
09561-11001

Ball joint puller

Separate the ball joint from the front axle.
09568-34000

Steering System

Inspection
Steering Wheel Play Inspection
1. Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels can face straight ahead.
2. Measure the distance the steering wheel can be turned without moving the front wheels.
Standard value:30mm (1.18in.) or less

3. If the play exceeds standard value, inspect the steering column, shaft, and linkages.

Checking stationary steering effort

1. Position the vehicle on a level surface and place the steering wheel in the straight ahead position.
2. Attach a spring scale to the steering wheel. With the engine speed 900 ~ 1100rpm, pull the scale and read it as soon as the tires begin to
turn.
Standard value:3.0kgf or less
Page 11 sur 31

3. If the measured value exceeds standard value, inspect the power steering gear box and MDPS system.
Steering System

Components

1. Steering column assembly 3. Steering gear box

2. Universal joint assembly
Page 12 sur 31

Steering System

Schematic Diagrams
MDPS Circuit Diagram

Harness Connector

Connector Pin No. Pin Name

1 Battery +
Battery
2 Battery -
Vehicle signal 1 Ignition
2 N.C.
Page 13 sur 31

3 N.C.
4 N.C.
5 N.C.
6 N.C.
7 CAN_High
8 CAN_Low

Steering System

Description
EPS (Electric power steering, Column assist type) system uses an electric motor to assist the steering force and it is an engine operation
independent steering system.
EPS control module controls the motor operation according to information received from the each sensor and CAN (Controller Area
Network),
resulting in a more precise and timely control of steering assist than conventional engine-driven hydraulic systems. Components (Steering
Angle Sensor, Torque Sensor, Fail-safe relay, etc.) of the EPS system are located inside the steering column. EPS unit assembly, steering
column, and EPS unit assembly must not be disassembled for inspection. They must be replaced if necessary.
Note With Regard to diagnosis
Trouble factor Check item Trouble symptom Explanation Note
Drop, impact, and overload Motor Abnormal noise - Visable or invisible - Do not use the impacted
damage can occur.The EPS.- Do not overload
steering wheel could pull to each parts.
ECU Circuit damage- Wrong one side by using the
welding point- Broken PCB- dropped parts.- Precise
Damaged precise parts parts of motor/ECU are
sensitive to vibration and
impact.- Overload can
cause unexpected damage
Torque sensor Insufficient steering effort Overload to INPUT shaft - Do not impact the
can cause malfunction of connecting parts (When
the torque sensor inserting and torquing)-
Use the specified tool to
remove the steering wheel.
(Do not hammer on it)- Do
not use the impacted EPS
Shaft Insufficient steering effort Do not use the impacted
(Uneven between LH and EPS
RH)
Pull/Dent Harness - Malfunction-impossible Disconnection between Do not overload the
power operation- harness connecting portion harness
Malfunction of EPS and harness
Abnormal storage Motor/ECU Abnormal steering effort by - Waterproof at the normal - Keep the normal
temperature improper operation of the condition- Even a little temperature and proper
motor/ECU moisture can cause moisture, while storaging-
malfunction of the precise Avoid drowning
parts of the motor/ECU

1. Do not impact the electronic parts, if they are dropped or impacted, replace them with new ones.
2. Avoid heat and moisture to the electronic parts.
3. Do not contact the connect terminal to avoid deformation and static electricity.
4. Do not impact the motor and torque sensor parts, if they are dropped or impacted, replace them with new ones.
5. The connector should be disconnected or connected with IG OFF.
Steering System

General Inspection
After or before servicing the EPS system, perform the troubleshooting and test procedure as follows. Compare the system condition with
normal condition in the table below and if abnormal symptom is detected, perform necessary remedy and inspection.
Normal condition: Motor must not supply steering assist.
Test condition
Symptom Possible cause Repair
Motor supplies ASP is not calibrated. Perform the ASP calibration using a scan tool.
IG Off
steering assist. IG power supplies Inspect the IG power supply line.
Page 14 sur 31

Normal condition: Motor must not supply steering assist, Warning lamp is illuminated.
Test condition
Symptom Possible cause Repair
Motor supplies ASP is not calibrated. Perform the ASP calibration using a scan tool.
steering assist. EMS CAN signal is not received. Inspect the CAN line.
IG On/Engine Off
Warning lamp is not
Cluster fault Inspect the cluster and cluster harness
illuminated.

Normal condition: Motor supplies steering assist, Warning lamp is not illuminated.
Test condition
Symptom Possible cause Repair
Warning lamp is Inspect the connector and harness for EPS (Hot
illuminated and EPS (Hot at all times) and IG power supply fault
at all times) and IG power supply line.
Motor dose not
supply steering Perform the self test using a scan tool and repair
DTC is detected by system.
IG On/Engine On assist. or replace.
Warning lamp is ASP is not calibrated. Perform the ASP calibration using a scan tool.
illuminated and
Motor supplies CAN communication between EPS and cluster is
Inspect the CAN line.
steering assist. fault.

ASP: Absolute Steering Position

CAN: Controller Area Network
EMS: Engine Management System

The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation and if there is no EPS warning light illumination, it is not malfunction
of EPS system.
• After turning the ignition switch on, the steering wheel becomes heavier while it performs EPS system diagnostics, for about 2
seconds, then it becomes normal steering condition.
• After turning the ignition switch on or off, EPS relay noise may occur but it is normal.
• When it is steered, while the vehicle is stopped or in low driving speed, motor noise may occur but it is normal operating one.

Caution when ASP (Absolute Steering Position) calibration or EPS type recognition
• Check if the battery is fully charged before ASP calibration or EPS type recognition.
• Be careful not to disconnect any cables connected to the vehicle or scan tool during ASP calibration or EPS type recognition.
• When the ASP calibration or EPS type recognition is completed, turn the ignition switch off and wait for several seconds, then start the
engine to confirm normal operation of the vehicle.

ASP Calibration
1. Select "Steering Angle Sensor".
2. Proceed with the test according to the screen introductions.

EPS Type Recognition Procedure

1. Select "EPS Variant Coding".
2. Proceed with the test according to the screen introductions.
Page 15 sur 31

Steering System

Components
Page 16 sur 31

1. Steering column assembly 2. Steering joint assembly

Steering System

Replacement
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery and then wait for at least 30 seconds.
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels can face straight ahead.
3. Remove the airbag module.
(Refer to Restraint - "Driver Airbag (DAB) Module and Clock Spring")
4. Disconnect the connector & lock nut (A) and then remove the steering wheel by using special service tools (09561-11001).
Tightening torque :
39.2 ~ 49.0N.m (4.0 ~ 5.0kgf.m, 28.9 ~ 36.2lb-ft)
Page 17 sur 31

• Do not hammer on the steering wheel to remove it; it may damage the steering column.
• Do not reuse lock nut.
• Must be replaced with new lock nut when assembling. (SEAL-LOCK has been processed)
5. Loosen the screw and then remove the steering column upper & lower shroud (A).

6. Remove the crash pad lower panel.

(Refer to Body - "Crash Pad Lower Panel)
7. Disconnect the connectors (A) and then remove the clock spring (B).

8. Disconnect the connector (A).

Page 18 sur 31

9. Loosen the screw and then remove the multifunction switches (A).

10. Loosen the bolt and then disconnect the universal joint assembly (A) from the pinion of the steering gear box.
Tightening torque :
32.4 ~ 37.3N.m (3.3 ~ 3.8kgf.m, 23.9 ~ 27.5lb-ft)

Insert to the shaft in order that the center of the bolt and the marking (A) is in a straight line.
11. Disconnect all connectors connected to the steering column.
12. Remove the steering column & EPS unit assembly by loosening the mounting bolt (B) and nuts (A).
Tightening torque :
Nut : 24.5 ~ 29.4 N.m (2.5 ~ 3.0 kgf.m, 18.1 ~ 21.7 lb-ft)
Bolt : 44.1 ~ 49.0N.m (4.5 ~ 5.0kgf.m, 32.5 ~ 36.2lb-ft)
Page 19 sur 31

13. Loosen the bolt (A) and then disconnect the universal joint assembly from the steering column assembly.
Tightening torque :
28.9 ~ 36.2 N.m (5.0 ~ 6.0 kgf.m, 58.8 ~ 70.6 lb-ft)

Must be ASP calibration and EPS type recognition after assembling.

Disassembly
Key lock assembly
1. Make a groove on the head of special bolts (A) by a punch.
Page 20 sur 31

2. Loosen the special bolt using a screw driver and then remove the key lock assembly from the steering column assembly.
3. Reassembly is the reverse of the disassembly.

Inspection
1. Check the steering column for damage and deformation.
2. Check the joint bearing for damage and wear.
3. Check the tilt bracket for damage and cracks.
4. Check the key lock assembly for proper operation and replace it if necessary.
Steering System

Components
Page 21 sur 31

1. Steering Gear box

Steering System

Replacement
1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly.
Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
2. Loosen the bolt and then disconnect the universal joint assembly (A) from the pinion of the steering gear box.
Tightening torque :
32.4 ~ 37.3N.m (3.3 ~ 3.8kgf.m, 23.9 ~ 27.5lb-ft)

Be careful not to damage to the hub bolts when removing the front wheel and tire (A).
4. Remove the stabilizer link (A) loosening the nut.
Tightening torque :
98.1 ~ 117.7N.m(10.0 ~ 12.0kgf.m, 72.3~86.8lb-ft)
Page 22 sur 31

5. Remove the tie rod end ball joint (C) from the knuckle by using the SST (09568-34000).
(1) Remove the split pin (A).
(2) Remove the castle nut (B).
(3) Use the SST (09568-34000).
Tightening torque :
23.5 ~ 33.3N.m(2.4 ~ 3.4kgf.m, 17.4 ~ 24.6lb-ft)

• When using SST, be sure not to damage the dust cover of lower arm ball joint.
• Keep SST tied to the car because there is a risk of injury by dropping the SST during removing the lower arm ball joint.
• The peripheral parts may be damaged when removing the lower arm ball joint with a general tool such as lever, so be sure to
use SST.
6. Loosen the bolt & nut and then remove the lower arm (A).
Tightening torque :
58.9 ~ 70.6 N.m (6.0 ~ 7.2 kgf.m, 43.4 ~ 52.1 lb-ft)
Page 23 sur 31

7. Loosen the bolt and then separate the roll rod stopper (A).
Tightening torque :
107.9 ~127.5N.m(11.0 ~ 13.0kgf.m, 79.6 ~ 94.0lb-ft)

8. Loosen the bolts & nuts and then remove the sub frame (A).
Tightening torque :
Sub frame mounting bolt & nut
156.9 ~ 176.5N.m(16.0 ~ 18.0kgf.m, 115.7 ~ 130.2lb-ft)

9. Remove the stabilizer (A) from the front sub frame by loosening the mounting bolts & nuts.
Tightening torque :
44.1 ~ 53.9N.m(4.5 ~ 5.5kgf.m, 32.5 ~ 39.8lb-ft)
Page 24 sur 31

10. Remove the gear box (A) from the front sub frame by loosening the mounting bolts.
Tightening torque :
88.3 ~ 107.9N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0kgf.m, 43.4 ~ 57.9lb-ft)

11. Installation is the reverse of removal.

• Must be ASP calibration and EPS type recognition after assembling.

12. Check the wheel Alignment.
(Refer to Suspension System - "Alignment")
Steering System

Component
Page 25 sur 31

1. Airbag module 5. Heated unit

2. Remote control upper switch 6. Wiring
3. Remote control lower switch 7. Steering wheel lower cover
4. Steering wheel assembly

Steering System

Replacement
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery and then wait for at least 30 seconds.
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are facing straight ahead.
3. Remove the airbag module.
(Refer to Restraint - "Driver Airbag (DAB) Module and Clock Spring")
4. Disconnect the connector & lock nut (A) and then remove the steering wheel using the special service tool (09561-11001).
Tightening torque :
39.2 ~ 49.0N-m (4.0 ~ 5.0kgf-m, 28.9 ~ 36.2lb-ft)
Page 26 sur 31

• Do not use a hammer when removing the steering wheel as it may damage the steering column.
• Do not reuse lock nuts.
• Lock nuts must be replaced with new ones when assembling. (SEAL-LOCK has been processed)
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Disassembly
1. Loosen the screw (A-6ea) and then remove the lower cover (B) from the steering wheel body.

2. Remove the wiring (A) & Heated unit (B).

Page 27 sur 31

3. Remove the remote control upper switch assembly (A) and wiring.

4. Loosen the screw and then remote control switch assembly (A).

5. Installation is the reverse of the removal.

Steering System

Description
Heated pads in the steering wheel warm up the steering grip.
1. Heate control unit

2. Heated pad
Page 28 sur 31

Specifications
Specification
Item
standard minimum maximum
Voltage 13.5 V 9V 16 V
Heated pad resistance 1.73Ω 1.56Ω 1.90Ω
NTC resistance 10.0 kΩ 9kΩ 11kΩ

Steering System

System Circuit Diagram

Page 29 sur 31

Steering System

Inspection
1. Measure a resistance of NTC and Heated pad.
A. NTC resistance(Yellow / Black) - 10kΩ (9kΩ ~ 11kΩ), 25°C
B. Heated pad resistance (Yellow , Black) - 1.73Ω ( 2.1 ~ 2.5 Ω )
2. Measure a temperature.
A. The temperature of wheel surface grip must rise from -20°C to 20°C within 6 minute
B. The temperature of wheel surface grip must keep 38°C ± 4°C after 25 minute
C. Temperature measurement points (1~8)
Page 30 sur 31

Steering System

Components Location

1. Flex steering swithch

Steering System
Page 31 sur 31

Instruction
Flex Steer is system to choose the three modes power steering depending on driver preference or driving conditions.

• Display on the cluster but power steering is would not changed while operating the steering wheel.
As a safety measures, mode is changed automatically when steering wheel operation is done.
• Be sure to carefully change the mode while driving.
• Electric Power Steering (EPS) is not working due tofailure, "flex steer" may not work.

How to operate
• First input : Display the current mode on cluster. (4 seconds)
• Add input (4 seconds) : Mode is changed sequentially.
• Three steering modes
COMFORT : For the elder and the female drivers: it is mainly used for city driving and stop & parking, and a little lighter power steering.
NORMAL : Basic mode
SPORT : It is mainly used for highway driving, and a little heavy power steering.
Steering System

Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the driver airbag module.
(Refer to Restraint - "Driver Airbag (DAB) Module and Clock Spring")
3. Remove the steering wheel.
(Refer to Steering System - "Steering Column and Shaft")
4. Disengage the steering wheel remote control switch assembly. (Refer to Steering System - "Steering Wheel")
5. Loosen the screw and then remote control switch assembly (A) from the steering wheel body.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Page 1 sur 45

Restraint

Safety Precaution

Sinse Electric Vehicle contains a high voltage, battery mishandling the high voltage system or vehicle may lead to a serious accident including electric
shock and electric leakage.

• Be sure to shut off the high voltage by removing the safety plug before inspecting or repairing the high voltage system(Refer to “High Voltage Shut-
off Procedures”).
• A responsible worker should keep removed safety plugs to prevent it from being connected by mistake.
• Keep away from any metal objects (watch, ring etc.) while working on the high voltage system, as they may cause serious accidents like electric
shock.
• Before beginning to work on the high voltage system, workers should wear personal protective equipment to prevent safety accidents(Refer to
“Personal Protective Equipment”).
• At any time, do not allow workers not wearing personal protective equipment to touch the high voltage system. High voltage components should be
covered with an insulation sheet to prevent safety accidents.
• Use insulation tools when working on the high voltage system.
• Place removed high voltage components on an the insulation mat.
• Check that voltage between the high voltage terminals is below 30V after removing the safety plug.

• All the high voltage wiring and connectors are in orange.

• A caution label for high voltage is attached to the high voltage components
• High voltage components : High Voltage Battery, Power Relay Assembly (PRA), Quick Charge Relay Assembly (QRA), Motor, Power Cable, BMS
ECU, Inverter, LDC, On-Board Charger (OBC), Main Relay, Pre-charge Relay, Pre-charge resistor, Battery Current Sensor, Safety Plug, Main
Fuse, Battery Temperature Sensor, Busbar, Charge Port, A/C Compressor, Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU), High Voltage Heater, High Voltage
Heater Relay etc.

• Inform of possible danger of high voltage by placing a "high voltage caution" sign on the vehicle as in the image below.
Page 2 sur 45

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage components

Insulation gloves
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]

Insulation shoes Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage components
Page 3 sur 45

Insulation clothes

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses

Used in the following cases :

• During Removal & installation or inspection of the high voltage
battery terminals or wiring, which spark might happen.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

All removed high voltage components are placed on an insulation mat

Insulation mat
to prevent safety accidents.

Insulation sheet is used to cover high voltage components to protect

Insulation sheet people not wearing personal protective equipment from safety
accidents.

Warning tape Used for infomring that it is dangerous to come over this line.

Personal Protective Equipment Inspection

• Check that the personal protective equipment is not damaged.

• Check that the insulation gloves are not torn or damaged.
• Wear the insulation glove after removing moisture.
Page 4 sur 45

Fold the insulation glove as above.

Fold again 3~4 times to make it airtight.
Squeeze the inflated glove to see if the glove is torn or damaged.
Caution when repairing the power cable

Precautions when handling high voltage battery

• Battery Control System - Refer to "High Voltage Battery Handling Guide"

Precautions in case of fire in High Voltage Battery System

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• If fire broke out indoors, ventilate the area to clear out hydrogen gas.
• If fire can be put out, then do so using a CO₂ fire extinguisher. If this is not available, then use water or other types of fire extinguisher.
• CO₂has high insulation characteristics against electricity, so it is appropriate for electricity (C Rating) related fire.
• If fire cannot be put out, evacuate to a safe location, notify the fire department and do not approach the vehicle until the fire has been extinguished.
• Turn OFF the vehicle Key in case of vehicle submersion/collision, and then exit the vehicle as quickly as possible.

Precautions in case of high voltage battery gas and/or electrolyte leakage

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug.
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• Gas is hydrogen and alkali vapor. If the fire occurred indoor, ventilate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline solution.
• If leaked vapor or liquid gets in your eye, immediately clean with running water, then get medical attention.
• In case of gas leakage due to high temperature, do NOT use the battery until the high voltage battery cools down to room temperature.

Precautions when handling vehicle after an accident

• Be sure to wear insulated gloves (or rubber gloves), protective goggles, insulated suit, and insulated boots.
• Do NOT touch the bare cable when its insulation covering has been peeled.
(refer to "Precautions When Handling Power Cable")
• In case of fire on the vehicle and if the fire can be put out, then do so by using a CO₂ fire extinguisher. If this is not available, then use water or other
types of fire extinguisher.
• If more than half of the vehicle is submerged, then do not attempt to approach high voltage components, such as the Safety Plug. If such a component
must be handled, then first relocate the vehicle to a safe location, then handle the component.
• if fire broke out indoors, ventillate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location. because the gas id hydorgen and akali fumes.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline solution.
• If high voltage needs to be shut-off, then refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure" when handling relevant components.

Preparations when servicing accident affected vehicle

Page 5 sur 45

Precautions when EV is unattended for a prolonged period

• Turn OFF the Start Button. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start. (This is to prevent rapid
discharging of high voltage battery from dark current.)
• If the high voltage battery state of charge (SOC) is less than 30%, then do not leave the vehicle unattended for a prolonged period.
• If the vehicle is unattended for prolonged period, then fully recharge the battery via normal charging once every 3 months to prevent the high voltage
battery SOC from becoming 0.
• When checking the auxiliary battery for discharge status or when replacing the auxiliary battery, check for problem related to high voltage battery SOC
reset.

Hybrid Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery / Charging Precautions

If the POE oil in the system gets mixed with PAG oil, it may result in dielectric breakdown due to decreased volumetric resistivity and inoperative A/C
compressor, disabling the A/C compressor.

Restraint

High Voltage Shut-off Procedure

High voltage components : High Voltage Battery, Power Relay Assembly (PRA), Quick Charge Relay Assembly (QRA), Motor, Power Cable, BMS
ECU, Inverter, LDC, On-Board Charger (OBC), Main Relay, Pre-charge Relay, Pre-charge resistor, Battery Current Sensor, Safety Plug, Main Fuse,
Battery Temperature Sensor, Busbar, Charge Port, A/C Compressor, Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU), High Voltage Heater, High Voltage Heater
Relay etc.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative (-) terminal of the auxiliary battery.
2. Remove the cover (A) on the floor carpet of the rear seat.

3. After loosening the nut, remove the safety plug service cover (A).
Safety plug service cover mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 6 sur 45

4. Remove the safety plug (A).

Remove the safety plug in the follwing order.

(3) Remove the high voltage cable (A).

Page 7 sur 45

(4) Measure the voltage between the inverter terminals.

Less than 30V : High voltage circuit properly shut
More than 30V : Faulty on high voltage circuit
Page 8 sur 45

If measured voltage is over 30V, check that the safety plug is removed completely. If it is is over 30V even though the safety plug has been
removerd, there may be a serious problem in the high voltage circuit. In this case, check DTC and never touch on the high voltage system.
Restraint

General
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) is designed to supplement the seat belt to help reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and passenger by
activating and deploying the driver, passenger and side airbags and belt pretensioners in certain frontal or side collisions.
The SRS consists of ; a driver side airbag module located in the center of the steering wheel which contains a folded cushion and an inflator unit ; a
passenger side airbag module located in the passenger side crash pad which contains a folded cushion assembled with an inflator unit ; a side airbag
module located in the front seat which contains folded cushions and inflator units ; and curtain airbag modules located inside headliners which contain
folded cushions and inflator units. The impact sensing function of the SRSCM is carried out by electronic accelerometer that continuously measures the
vehicle’s acceleration and delivers a corresponding signal through amplifying and filtering circuitry to the microprocessor.

SRSCM (SRS Control Module)

SRSCM detects front impact from the front impact sensor and side impact from the side impact sensor and determines the airbag module deployment.
1. DC/DC Converter: DC/DC converter in power supply unit includes up/down transformer converter, and provides ignition voltage to 2 front airbag ignition
circuits and internal operation voltage to the SRSCM. If the internal operation voltage is below critical value setting, it will reset.
2. Back up power supply: SRSCM has a separate back up power supply which will instantly supply deployment energy in low voltage condition or upon
power failure due to front crash.
3. Self diagnosis: SRSCM will constantly monitor current SRS operation status and detect system failure when the vehicle power supply is on. System
failure may be checked by trouble codes using GDS.
4. SRS warning lamp on: Upon detecting error, the module will transmit signal to SRSCM indicator lamp located at cluster. MIL lamp will indicate driver
SRS error. Upon ignition key on, SRS lamp will turn on for about six seconds.
5. Trouble code registration: When an error occurs in the system, SRSCM will save DTC corresponding to the error. DTC can be cleared only by Hi-Scan.
However, if an internal fault code is logged or if a crash is recorded, the fault clearing will not happen.
6. Self diagnostic connector: Data stored in SRSCM memory will be viewed using GDS.
7. Once airbag is deployed, SRSCM should be replaced with new SRSCM.
Page 9 sur 45

Restraint

Tightening Torque
Item Nm kgf.m lb-ft
Passenger Airbag (PAB) 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.9 ~ 8.6
Bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.9 ~ 8.6
Curtain Airbag (CAB)
Nut 3.9 ~ 5.9 0.4 ~ 0.6 2.9 ~ 4.4
Side Airbag (SAB) 5.9 ~ 7.8 0.6 ~ 0.8 4.3 ~ 5.8
SRSCM 7.8 ~ 9.8 0.8 ~ 1.0 5.7 ~ 7.3
Front Impact Sensor (FIS) Mounting nut 7.8 ~ 9.8 0.8 ~ 1.0 5.7 ~ 7.3
Pressure Side Impact Sensor (PSIS) Mounting Screw 3.5 ~ 5.7 0.36 ~ 0.58 2.6 ~ 4.2
Side Impact Sensor (SIS) Mounting Bolt 7.8 ~ 9.8 0.8 ~ 1.0 5.7 ~ 7.3

Restraint

Components

1. Driver Airbag (DAB) 8. Front Impact Sensor (FIS)

2. Steering Wheel 9. Curtain Airbag (CAB)
3. Clock Spring 10. Supplemental Restraint System Control Module(SRSCM)
4. Seat Belt Pretensioner (BPT) 11. Airbag Warning Lamp
5. Side Impact Sensor (SIS) 12. Emergency Fastening Device (EFD)
6. Side Airbag (SAB) 13. Pressure Side Impact Sensor (PSIS)
7. Passenger Airbag (PAB)

Components Location
Supplemental Restraint System Control Module (SRSCM)
Page 10 sur 45

Front Impact Sensor (FIS)

Side Impact Sensor (SIS)

Page 11 sur 45

Driver Airbag (DAB) / Passenger Airbag (PAB)

Side Airbag (SAB)

Page 12 sur 45

Curtain Airbag (CAB)

Seat Belt Pretensioner (BPT) / Emergency Fastening Device (EFD)

Page 13 sur 45

Restraint

Warning Lamp Activation

Warning Lamp Behavior after Ignition On
As soon as the operating voltage is applied to the SRSCM ignition input, the SRSCM activates the warning lamp for a lamp check.
The lamp will turn on for 6 seconds during the initialization phase and will then turn off afterward.
If there are any active faults after the operating voltage is applied, the warning lamp will flicker on for 6 seconds and off for 1 second to alert the driver.
1. Active fault or historical fault counter is greater or equal to 10.

2. Normal or historical fault counter is less than 10.

3. When turning the ignition switch ON during variant coding (EOL) mode, the airbag warning lamp is turned on and blinks at intervals of 1 second till the
coding is completed.
When the variant coding is successfully completed, the airbag warning lamp will turn on for 6 seconds and then turn off. Otherwise, the airbag warning
lamp will continuously flicker at intervals of 1 second.
(1) In case the variant coding is successfully completed

(2) In case the variant coding is not completed

When there is active fault in airbag system or SRSCM internal fault, the variant coding (EOL) cannot be completed. In this case, perform the variant
coding (EOL) procedure again after troubleshooting with the GDS.

SRSCM Independent warning lamp activation

Page 14 sur 45

There are certain fault conditions in which the SRSCM cannot function and thus cannot control the operation of the standard warning lamp. In these cases,
the standard warning lamp is directly activated by appropriate circuitry that operates independently of the SRSCM.
These cases include:
1. Loss of battery sypply to the SRSCM : warning lamp stays on
2. Loss of internal operating voltage : warning lamp stays on
3. Loss of Microprocessor operation : warning lamp stays on
4. SRSCM not connected : warning lamp stays on through the shorting bar

Telltale Lamp Activation

The Telltale Lamp indicates whether the Passenger Airbag (PAB) is enabled or disabled according to the occupant status on passenger seat. If the
passenger seat is empty or occupied with a child (or a child seat), the Passenger Airbag is disabled and the Telltale Lamp is turned ON to inform the driver
that the PAB is disabled. As soon as operating voltage is applied to the SRSCM ignition input, the SRSCM activates telltale lamp to prove out. ODS
(Occupant Detection System) will send an unknown status to the SRSCM as a default setting for passenger airbag deployment during the validation period.
After turning the ignition on, talltale lamp will turn on for 4 seconds and turn off for 3 seconds during the initialization phase and will keep ON afterward until
receiving a valid enabling message from ODS system.

Restraint

Special Service Tools

Tool Name / Number Illustration Description

Deployment tool
Used for deploying airbag
0957A-34100A

Deployment adapter Used with the deployment tool (0957A-34100A) to deploy

0957A-3F100 SAB

Deployment adapter Used with the deployment tool (0957A-34100A) to deploy

0957A-3Q100 DAB, PAB, CAB, BPT and EFD

Dummy
A simulator that checks the resistance of each wiring harness
0957A-38200

Dummy adapter Used with the dummy (0957A-38200) to check the resistance
0957A-3F000 of SAB

Dummy adapter Used with the dummy (0957A-38200) to check the resistance
0957A-2G000 of DAB, PAB, CAB, BPT and EFD
Page 15 sur 45

DAB : Driver Airbag

PAB : Passenger Airbag
SAB : Side Airbag
CAB : Curtain Airbag
BPT : Seat Belt Pretensioner
EFD : Emergency Fastening Device
Restraint

Precautions
General Precautions
Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service.
Carefully observe the instructions described in this manual as misuse of airbags may result in accidental deployment of airbags, damage or injuries.
• Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least
three minutes before beginning to work.

The contents in the memory are not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery.
• Use only the replacement parts manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts..
Do not reuse SRS parts removed from other vehicles. Use only new parts when repairing the SRS.
• Carefully inspect any SRS parts before installation. Do not install any parts that show signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents,
cracks or deformation.

• Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always disconnect the SRS connector.

Airbag Handling and Storage

Do not disassemble the airbags as there are no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be repaired nor reused.
For temporary storage of the air bag during service, please observe the following precautions:
• Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up.
• Keep free from any oil, grease, detergent, or water to prevent damage to the airbag assembly.

• Store the removed airbag on secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 85 C/185 F).
• Never perform any electrical inspections, such as measuring resistance, to the airbags.
• Do not position yourself in front of the airbag assembly during removal, inspection, or replacement.
• Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of the damaged airbag.
Page 16 sur 45

• Be careful not to impact or bump on the SRS unit, the side impact sensors or the front impact sensors whenever the ignition switch is ON. Wait for at
least three minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF before beginning to work.
• During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump on the area (by impacting with a wrench, hammer, etc.) around the SRS unit, the side impact
sensor and the front impact sensor as any impact on the airbags may accidentally deploy them to cause possible damage or injury.
• Replace the front airbag module, SRSCM and FIS after the front airbag is deployed. Replace the airbag wiring if it is damaged. Replace the side airbag
module, the curtain airbag module, SRSCM and SIS after the side airbag is deployed. Replace the airbag wiring if it is damaged.
• If the airbags or the side airbags were not deployed in a collision, inspect for any damage or deformation on the SRS unit and the side impact sensors. If
any damage is found, replace the SRS unit, the front impact sensor and/or the side impact sensors.
• Do not disassemble the SRS unit, the front impact sensor or the side impact sensors.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for at least three minutes before beginning to install or replace the SRS
unit.
• Be sure that the SRS unit, the front impact sensor and side impact sensors are installed securely with mounting bolts.
• Be careful not to spill water or oil on the SRS unit, the front impact sensor or the side impact sensors and keep them away from dust.
• Store the SRS unit, the front impact sensor and the side impact sensors in a cool (15 ~ 25 C/ 59 ~ 77 F) and dry (30 ~ 80% relative humidity, no
moisture) area.

Wiring Precautions
SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer covering. Observe the instructions described in this section.
• Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring. If there is an opening or damage on SRS wiring, replace the harness.

• Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched, or interfering with other parts.

• Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean, and grounds are securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal contact. Poor grounding can cause
intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose.

Precautions for Electrical Inspections

• When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector.
Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not tamper with the connector.

• Use a u-shaped probe. Do not force the probe into a connector.

• Use specified service connectors for troubleshooting.
Page 17 sur 45

Using improper tools could cause an error in inspection due to poor metal contact.

Spring-loaded Lock Connector

Some SRS system connectors come with spring-loaded locks.

Airbag Connector

Disconnecting
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) and the slider (B) while holding the opposite half of the connector.
Pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve instead of the connector half.

Connecting
Hold both connector halves and press firmly until the projection(C) of the sleeve-side connector clicks to lock.

Restraint

Component Replacement after Deployment

Before doing any SRS repairs, use the GDS to check for DTCs. Refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code list for repairing of the related DTCs.
When the front airbag(s) deployed after a collision, replace the following items.
- SRSCM
- Deployed airbag(s)
- Seat belt pretensioner(s)
- Emergency fastening device
- Front impact sensors
- SRS wiring harnesses
- Inspect the clock spring for heat damage.
If any damage is found, replace the clock spring.
When the side/curtain airbag(s) deployed after a collision, replace the following items.
- SRSCM
- Deployed airbag(s)
- Side impact sensor(s) on the deployed side(s)
- SRS wiring harnesses
When the vehicle is completely repaired, verify that the SRS airbag system is OK.
- When the ignition switch is turned ON, the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds before going off.
Restraint

Description
Driver Airbag (DAB) is installed inside the steering wheel and is electrically connected to SRSCM with a clock spring. It protects the driver from impact by
deploying a bag when frontal crash occurs. The SRSCM determines the deployment of Driver Airbag (DAB).
Page 18 sur 45

Never attempt to measure the circuit resistance of the airbag module (squib) even if you are using the specified tester. When the circuit resistance is
measured with a tester, accidental deployment of airbag may result in serious personal injury.
Restraint

Components

1. Driver Airbag (DAB) 3. Clock Spring

2. Steering Wheel

Restraint

Removal
1. Set the front tires facing straight ahead before removing the steering wheel.

If any of the steering wheel or the front tires are not set straight ahead together, it may affect the number of circulation of steering wheel and may
damage the cable inside the clock spring.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable.

After disconnecting the battery negative cable, wait for at least thirty seconds.
3. Release the connector locking pin, and then disconnect the driver airbag module connector (B).

The removed airbag module should be stored in a clean, dry place with the pad cover facing up.
4. Remove the steering wheel.
(Refer to Steering System - "Steering Column and Shaft")
5. Loosen the screws and then remove the steering wheel column shroud (A).

6. Disconnect the clock spring and horn connector (A) and then remove the clock spring.
Page 19 sur 45

Inspection
Driver Airbag (DAB)
If any improper parts are found during the following inspection, replace the airbag module with a new one.

Never attempt to measure the circuit resistance of the airbag module (squib) even with a specified tester as measuring circuit resistance with a tester
may result in accidental airbag deployment that leads to serious personal injury.
1. Check pad cover for dents, cracks or deformities.
2. Check the airbag module for dents, cracks or deformities.
3. Check hooks and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binds.
4. Check airbag inflator case for dents, cracks or deformities.

5. Install the airbag module to the steering wheel to check for fit or alignment with the wheel.

Clock Spring
1. With even one abnormality discovered from the following check ups, the clock spring should be replaced with a new one.
2. Check connectors and protective tube for damage, and terminals for deformities.

Installation
1. Set the front tires straight-ahead before assembling the steering wheel.

After disconnecting the battery negative cable, wait for at least thirty seconds.
3. Set the clock spring in the center before assembling it to the steering wheel.
(1) Turn the clock spring clockwise to the stop.
Page 20 sur 45

(2) Make 3 revolutions counterclockwise and make sure to set an array on the mark (▶◀).
(In case of 18ch heating wire, make 2 revolutions counterclockwise).
(Once the array is set on the mark (▶◀), the clock spring is automatically locked.)

4. Connect the clock spring harness connector and horn harness connector to the clock spring.
5. Install the steering wheel column cover and the steering wheel. (Refer to the Steering System group- Steering Column and Shaft)
6. Connect the Driver Airbag (DAB) module connector, and then install the Driver Airbag (DAB) module on the steering wheel.
7. Connect the battery negative cable.
8. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system operation:

- Turn the ignition switch ON; the SRS indicator light should be turned on for about six seconds before going off.
- Make sure that the horn is working.
Restraint

Description
Passenger Airbag (PAB) module is located in the passenger crash pad. The PAB contains 2 firing squibs of airbag and 1 firing squib of active vent. The
deployment timing of both 2 firing squibs of airbag and 1 firing squib of active vent depends on the crash speed or the level of tightening of the seat belt. At
the moment of collision, the firing squib of active vent inflates the airbag, and when the passenger collides with the airbag, the gas inside escapes through a
small vent hole. This operation will reduce the level of injury to the passenger's head.
At first, the active vent instantly deploys the airbag by inflating it at a high pressure, and after the deployment, it slowly discharges the gas from the upper
airbag.The Working Principle of Tether Cutter: On receiving an electrical signal, the Tether Cutter cuts off a strap from the active vent to open a hole in the
upper airbag.
The working range of Active Vent
1. If occupant in passenger seat is not belted, active vent is disposed in the end of crash event regardless of crash severity.
2. If occupant is belted and crash is severe enough to require 2 stage passenger airbag deployment, active vent is activated to optimize occupant
protection.
3. Low-Speed + Belted : Inflator of Primary Fire + 2 Stage & Active Vent disposal in the end of crash event.

Components
Page 21 sur 45

Restraint

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for at least thirty seconds before beginning to work.
2. Remove the glove box housing.
(Refer to Body - "Glove box housing")
3. Remove the passenger airbag mounting bolts (A).

4. Disconnect the passenger airbag connector (B).

5. Remove the crash pad.
(Refer to Body - "Main crash pad assembly")

Replace any crash pads damaged while deploying the PAB.

6. Remove the mounting bolts from the crash pad and then remove the passenger airbag (A).

The removed airbag module should be stored in a clean, dry place with the airbag cushion up.

Installation
1. Remove the ignition key from the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery and wait for at least thirty seconds before beginning to work.
before beginning work.
Page 22 sur 45

3. Place a passenger airbag on the crash pad and tighten the passenger airbag (A) mounting bolts.

4. Install the crash pad.

(Refer to Body - "Main crash pad assembly")
5. Connect the passenger airbag connector (B).

6. Tighten the passenger airbag mounting bolts (A).

Tightening torque :
7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
7. Reinstall the glove box housing.
(Refer to Body - "Glove box housing")
8. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
9. After installing the passenger airbag (PAB), confirm proper system operation:
A. Turn the ignition switch ON; the SRS indicator light should be turned on for about six seconds and then go off.
Restraint

Description
The Side Airbags (SAB) are installed inside the front seat to protect the driver and front passenger from danger when side crash occurs. The SRSCM
determines deployment of side airbag by using Side Impact Sensor (SIS) signal.

Components
Page 23 sur 45

Restraint

Removal

The side airbag cannot be disassembled from the seat back assembly, so replace assembly when replacing the side airbag.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for at least thirty seconds before beginning to work.
2. Remove the front passenger seat assembly.
(Refer to Body - "Front seat")
3. Remove the front seat shield inner cover.
(Refer to Body - "Front seat shield inner cover")
4. Remove the front seat shield outer cover.
(Refer to Body - "Front seat shield outer cover")
5. After loosening the mounting bolts, disconnect the front seat back assembly (A) and front seat cushion assembly (B).
Tightening torque :
44.1 ~ 53.9 N.m (4.5 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 32.5 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)

Installation

When installing the harness wires, be sure that they are not pinched or interfering with other parts.

• Do not open the lid of the side airbag cover.

• Make sure that the airbag assembly cover is installed properly. Improper installation may hinder proper deployment.
1. Remove the ignition key from the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for at least thirty seconds.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
4. Fully recline and slide the front seat forward, and make sure that the harness wires are not pinched or interfering with other parts.
5. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
6. After installing the side airbag (SAB), confirm proper system operation:
A. Turn the ignition switch ON; the SRS indicator light should be turned on for about six seconds and then go off.
Restraint
Page 24 sur 45

Description
Curtain airbags are installed inside the headliner (LH and RH) to protect the driver and passenger from danger when side crash occurs. The SRSCM
determines deployment of curtain airbag by using side impact sensor (SIS) signal.

Never attempt to measure the circuit resistance of the airbag module even with a specified tester as measuring circuit resistance with a tester may
result in accidental airbag deployment that leads to serious personal injury.
Restraint

Components

Restraint

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for at least thirty seconds before beginning to work.
2. Remove the roof trim assembly.
(Refer to Body - "Roof trim assembly")
3. Disconnect the curtain airbag harness connector (A).

4. After loosening the mounting bolts and nuts remove the curtain airbag.

Installation
1. Remove the ignition key from the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for at least thirty seconds.
3. Tighten the curtain airbag mounting bolts and nuts.
Tightening torque
Bolt : 7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Nut : 3.9 ~ 5.9 N.m (0.4 ~ 0.6 kgf.m, 2.9 ~ 4.3 lb-ft)

• Never twist the airbag module during installation as twisted module may result in abnormal operation. (of the airbag module.)
Page 25 sur 45

4. Connect the curtain airbag connector.

5. Install the roof trim assembly.
(Refer to Body - "Roof trim assembly")
6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
7. After installing the curtain airbag (CAB), confirm proper system operation:
A. Turn the ignition switch ON; the SRS indicator light should be turned on for about six seconds and then go off.
Restraint

Airbag Disposal
Special tool required
Deployment tool 0957A-34100A
Before scrapping any airbags or side airbags (including those in a whole vehicle to be scrapped), the airbags or side airbags must be deployed. If the
vehicle is still within the warranty period, before deploying the airbags or side airbags, the Technical Manager must give approval and/or special instruction.
Only after the airbags or side airbags have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If the airbags or side
airbags appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure.

Deploying airbags in the vehicle

If an SRS equipped vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its airbags or side airbags should be deployed while still in the vehicle. The airbags or side airbags
should not be considered as salvageable parts and should never be installed to other vehicles.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for at least three minutes.
2. Confirm that each airbag or side airbag is securely mounted.
3. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check up procedure.
(1) Driver’s Airbag :
A. Remove the driver’s airbag and install the SST (0957A-3Q100).
B. Install the driver’s airbag on the steering wheel.
(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag :
A. Remove the glove box, and then disconnect the 2P connector between the front passenger’s airbag and SRS main harness.
B. Install the SST(0957A-3Q100).
(3) Side Airbag :
A. Disconnect the 2P connector between the side airbag and side wire harness.
B. Install the SST (0957A-3F100).
(4) Curtain Airbag :
A. Disconnect the 2P connector between the curtain airbag and wire harness.
B. Install the SST (0957A-3Q100).
(5) Seat Belt Pretensioner :
A. Disconnect the 2P connector from the seat belt pretensioner.
B. Install the SST (0957A-3Q100).
(6) Emergency Fastening Device :
A. Disconnect the 2P connector from the emergency fastening device.
B. Install the SST (0957A-3Q100).
4. Place the deployment tool at least thirty feet (10meters) away from the airbag.
5. Connect a 12 volt battery to the tool.
6. Push on the tool's deployment switch to deploy the airbag (Deployment is both highly audible and visible: It is characterized by a loud noise and rapid
inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation).
7. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag and seal it securely.

Deploying the airbag out of the vehicle

If an intact airbag has been removed from a scrapped vehicle, or has been found defective or damage during transit, storage or service, it should be
deployed as follows:
1. Confirm that the special tool is functioning properly by following the check up procedure.
2. Position the airbag face up, outdoors on flat ground at least thirty feet (10meters) from any obstacles or people.

Disposal Of Damaged Airbag

1. When disposing damaged airbag already installed in a vehicle, follow the removal procedure of driver's, front passenger's and side airbags.
2. In all cases, make a short circuit by twisting the two airbag inflator wires together.
3. Pack the airbag in exactly the same package that the new replacement part comes in.
Restraint

Description
The Seat Belt Pretensioners (BPT) are installed inside Center Pillar (LH & RH). When a vehicle crashes with a certain degree of frontal impact, the
pretensioner seat belt helps to reduce the severity of injury to the front seat occupants by retracting the seat belt webbing. This prevents the front occupants
from thrusting forward and hitting the steering wheel or the instrument panel when the vehicle crashes.
Page 26 sur 45

Never attempt to measure the circuit resistance of the Seat Belt Pretensioner (BPT) even with a specified tester as measuring circuit resistance with a
tester may result in accidental ignition of the pretensioner that leads to serious personal injury.
Restraint

Components

Restraint

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for at least thirty seconds before beginning to work.
2. To remove the emergency fastening device (C), keep on pushing the lock pin (A) as arrow direction. And then remove the seat belt after pushing the lock
pin (B).

3. Remove the center pillar lower trim.

(Refer to Body - "Center pillar trim")
4. Remove the center pillar upper trim.
(Refer to Body - "Center pillar trim")
5. After loosening the mounting bolt, remove the front seat belt upper anchor (A).

6. Disconnect the seat belt pretensioner connector (A).

Page 27 sur 45

7. Loosen the seat belt pretensioner mounting bolt (B) and remove the seat belt pretensioner.

Installation
1. Remove the ignition key from the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for at least thirty seconds.
3. Install the seat belt pretensioner with bolt (B).
Tightening torque :
39.2 ~ 53.9 N.m (4.0 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 28.9 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)

4. Connect the seat belt pretensioner connector (A).

5. Install the front seat belt upper anchor (A).
Tightening torque :
39.2 ~ 53.9 N.m (4.0 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 28.9 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)

6. Install the center pillar upper trim.

(Refer to Body - "Center pillar trim")
7. Install the center pillar lower trim.
(Refer to Body - "Center pillar trim")
8. Insert the seat belt to the emergency fastening device (A).
Page 28 sur 45

Make sure that the lock pin is connected properly.

9. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
10. After installing the seat belt pretensioner, confirm proper system operation:
A. Turn the ignition switch ON; the SRS indicator light should be turned on for about six seconds and then go off.
Restraint

Description
Emergency Fastening Device (EFD) is deployed concurrently with the Belt Pretensioner to strongly pull down the seat belt during a deployment condition
after a collision. It is located near the anchor on driver and passenger seats to make up for the existing short stroke. EFD is an auxiliary equipment that
gives extra protection to the driver and passenger from breaking away and leaning toward the anchor side during a collision by preventing the seat belts
from getting loose.

Never measure resistance of EFD directly as the electric current from measuring device may cause unexpected deployment of airbag.
Restraint

Components

Restraint

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for at least thirty seconds before beginning to work.
2. To remove the emergency fastening device (C), keep on pushing the lock pin (A) in the direction of arrow. And then remove the seat belt after pushing
the lock pin (B).

3. Remove the center pillar lower trim.

(Refer to Body - "Center pillar trim")
4. Disconnect the emergency fastening device connector (A).
Page 29 sur 45

5. Loosen the mounting bolt (B) and then remove the emergency fastening device.

Installation
1. Remove the ignition key from the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for at least thirty seconds.
3. Install the emergency fastening device with bolt (B).
Tightening torque :
39.2 ~ 53.9 N.m (4.0 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 28.9 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)

4. Connect the emergency fastening device connector (A).

5. Install the center pillar lower trim.
(Refer to Body - "Center pillar trim")
6. Insert the seat belt to the emergency fastening device (A).

Make sure that the lock pin is connected properly.

7. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
8. After installing the emergency fastening device, confirm proper system operation:
A. Turn the ignition switch ON; the SRS indicator light should be turned on for about six seconds and then go off.
Restraint

Description
The primary purpose of the SRSCM (Supplemental Restraints System Control Module) is to determine an event that warrants restraint system air bag
deployment. The SRSCM must decide whether to deploy the restraint system or not. After determining that pretensioners and/or airbag deployment is
required, the SRSCM must supply sufficient power to the pretensioners and airbag igniters to initiate deployment.
The SRSCM determines whether or not an impact requires deployment of pretensioners and/or airbags based on data obtained from impact sensors and
other components in conjunction with safety function.
The SRSCM will not be ready to detect a crash event or to activate the restraint system devices until the signals in the SRSCM circuitry are stabilized.
While it is possible that the SRSCM can activate the safety restraint devices, it is guaranteed to fully function after completing validation.
Page 30 sur 45

The SRSCM must perform a diagnostic routine and light a system readiness indicator at key-on. The system must perform a continuous diagnostic routine
and provide fault annunciation through a warning lamp indicator in the event of fault detection. A serial diagnostic communication interface will be used to
facilitate servicing of the restraint control system.
The yaw and G sensors which are used in ESC are located inside the SRSCM. The sensor signal is sent by a separate CAN signal between the ESC
control module and SRSCM.
Restraint

Components

Restraint

Removal
1. Remove the ignition key from the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for at least three minutes before beginning to work.
3. Disconnect the DAB, PAB, SAB, CAB and BPT connectors.
4. Remove the floor console.
(Refer to Body - "Floor console")
5. Remove the rear heating joint duct (A).

6. Pull up the lock of the SRSCM connector and disconnect the connector (A).

7. Remove the SRSCM mounting bolts (3EA) from the SRSCM, and then remove the SRSCM.
Page 31 sur 45

Installation
1. Remove the ignition key from the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for at least three minutes before beginning to work.
3. Install the SRSCM with the SRSCM mounting bolts.
Tightening torque (SRSCM Mounting Bolt) :
7.8 ~ 9.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.0 kgf.m, 5.7 ~ 7.3 lb-ft)

• Use new mounting bolts when replacing the SRSCM after a collision.
• When installing the airbag wiring harness, ground points(C) must be installed.
4. Connect the SRSCM harness connector.
5. Install the rear heating joint duct.
6. Install the floor console.
(Refer to Body - "Floor console")
7. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
8. After installing the SRSCM, confirm proper system operation:
A. Turn the ignition switch ON; the SRS indicator light should be turned on for about six seconds and then go off.

SRSCM senses vehicle rollovers. SAB, CAB, BPT may deploy if a technician moves the SRSCM from the vehicle in IGN ON state. For this reason,
turn the IGN OFF before safely removing the SRSCM from the vehicle.

Variant coding
After replacing the SRSCM with a new one, one MUST perform the "Variant Coding" procedure.

1. In SRSCM variant coding mode, the airbag warning lamp periodically flickers (ON: 0.5sec., OFF: 0.5sec.) until the coding is normally completed.
2. If the variant coding has failed, DTC B1762 (ACU Coding Error) will be displayed and the warning lamp will be turned on.
In this case, perform the variant coding procedure again after confirming the cause in “DTC Fault State Information”.
Variant Coding can be performed up to 255 times, but if the number of coding work exceeds 255 times, DTC B1683 (Exceed Maximum coding
Number) will be displayed and SRSCM must be replaced.
3. If the battery voltage is low (less than 9V) when attempting the Variant Coding, DTC B1762 will be displayed instead. In this case, charge the
battery as the first thing and then proceed with the variant coding procedure.
This is because although Variant Coding is normally performed, DTC B1762 and low battery will be displayed.

Variant coding Procedure

■ On-Line type on GDS
1. Ignition "OFF", connect scan tool.
2. Ignition "ON" & Engine "OFF" select vehicle name and airbag system.
3. Select Variant coding mode.
4. Follow steps as in screen shots below.
Page 32 sur 45

1) Initial ACU Variant Coding screen

2) VIN Code entering screen

3) Variant coding's proceeding screen-1

4) Variant coding's proceeding screen-2

5) Variant coding is completed

Page 33 sur 45

1)Text display for Incomplete ACU Coding after finiching variant coding

2) Screen of communication failure

■ Off-line type on GDS (This can be used when not connected to the internet)
1) Initial ACU Variant Coding screen

2) ACU CODING Code entering screen

Page 34 sur 45

3) echecking previously entered ACU CODING code

4) Variant coding's proceeding screen-1

5) Variant coding's proceeding screen-2

6) Variant coding is completed

Page 35 sur 45

1) Screen of incomplete ACU coding after finishing variant coding

Restraint

Description
The Front Impact Sensors (FIS) are installed in the Front End Module (FEM). These remote sensors are used to detect acceleration due to a collision at the
mounting location.
The primary purpose of the Front Impact Sensor (FIS) is to provide an indication of a collision. The Front Impact Sensor (FIS) sends acceleration data to the
SRSCM.
Restraint

Components

Restraint

Removal

• Removal of the airbag must be performed according to the precautions / procedures described previously.
• Before disconnecting the front impact sensor connector, disconnect the front airbag connector(s).
• Do not turn the ignition switch ON nor connect the battery cable while replacing the front impact sensor.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for at least thirty seconds before beginning to work.
2. Disconnect the front impact sensor connector (A).
Page 36 sur 45

3. Loosen the mounting bolt and then remove the front impact sensor (B) and extension harness.

Installation

• Do not turn the ignition switch ON nor connect the battery cable while replacing the front impact sensor.
1. Install the new front impact sensor.
2. Tighten the front impact sensor (B) mounting bolt.
Tightening torque :
7.8 ~ 9.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.0 kgf.m, 5.7 ~ 7.3 lb-ft)

3. Connect the front impact sensor connector (A).

4. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
5. After installing the Front Impact Sensor, confirm proper system operation:
A. Turn the ignition switch ON the SRS indicator light should be turned on for about six seconds and then go off.
Restraint

Description
Side Impact Sensor (SIS) system consists of two P-SIS, installed at each center of front door modules (LH and RH), and two SIS, installed at each center of
nearby pillars (LH and RH).
P-SIS or Pressure Side Impact Sensor detects pressure due to collision at its mounting location..
Side Impact Sensor is also called A-SIS as it detects acceleration.
SRSCM determines the deployment of airbag and the time of deployment based on the collision signal from the SIS at the time of collision.
Restraint

Components
Page 37 sur 45

Restraint

Removal
Pressure Side Impact Sensor

• Removal of the airbag must be performed according to the precautions / procedures described previously.
• Before disconnecting the front impact sensor connector, disconnect the front airbag connector(s).
• Do not turn the ignition switch ON nor connect the battery cable while replacing the front impact sensor.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for at least thirty seconds before beginning to work.
2. Remove the front door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Front door trim")
3. Disconnect the pressure side impact sensor connector (A) and remove the pressure side impact sensor mounting screws (B).

Side Impact Sensor

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable and wait for at least three minutes before beginning to work.
Page 38 sur 45

2. To remove the emergency fastening device (C), keep pressing on the lock pin (A) in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the seat belt after
pushing the lock pin (B).

3. Remove the center pillar lower trim.

(Refer to Body - "Center pillar trim")
4. Disconnect the side impact sensor connector (A).

5. Loosen the side impact sensor mounting bolt and then remove the side impact sensor (B).

Installation
Pressure Side Impact Sensor
1. Install the new pressure side impact sensor with the screws (B) and then connect the pressure side impact sensor connector (A).
Tightening torque :
3.5 ~ 5.7 N.m (0.4 ~ 0.6 kgf.m, 2.6 ~ 4.2 lb-ft)

• Use specified screws.

2. Install the front door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Front door trim")
3. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
4. After installing the pressure side impact sensor, confirm proper system operation:
A. Turn the ignition switch ON; the SRS indicator light should be turned on for about six seconds and then go off.

• Comply with the specified tightening torque in order to prevent Pressure - Side Impact Sensors (P-SIS) from damages and screw prommet from
missing.
• Problems may arise in the durability of P-SIS or impact sensing performance may decrease if screw grommet is missing.
• The door module must not be transformed because the SRSCM defines an impact through the pressure sensor in the door module.

Side Impact Sensor

Page 39 sur 45

• Do not turn the ignition switch ON nor connect the battery cable while replacing the front impact sensor.
1. Install the new side impact sensor (B) with the bolt then connect the side impact sensor connector (A).
Tightening torque:
7.8 ~ 9.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.0 kgf.m, 5.7 ~ 7.3 lb-ft)

2. Install the center pillar lower trim.

(Refer to Body - "Center pillar trim")
3. Insert the seat belt to the emergency fastening device (A).

Make sure that the lock pin is connected properly.

4. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
5. After installing the Side Impact Sensor, confirm proper system operation:
A. Turn the ignition switch ON; the SRS indicator light should be turned on for about six seconds and then go off.
Restraint

Description
The SRSCM shall monitor the status of the driver and front passenger seat belt buckle. The SRSCM provides one pin each for the driver and front
passenger seat belt buckle status input. The seat belt buckle circuit operates from internal boost voltage supplied by the SRSCM, and uses chassis ground
for the signal return. The buckle status shall modify the SRSCM deployment. If the buckle status is unbuckled, the corresponding pretensioner will not be
deactivated.
Restraint

Components
Page 40 sur 45

Restraint

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for at least three minutes before beginning work.
2. Remove the front seat assembly.
(Refer to Body - "Front seat")
3. Remove the seat belt buckle switch.
(Refer to Body - "Front seat belt buckle")

Installation

Be sure to install the harness wires so they will not pinch or interfere with other parts.
1. Remove the ignition key from the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for at least three minutes before beginning work.
3. Install the seat belt buckle switch.
(Refer to Body - "Front seat belt buckle")
4. Install the front seat assembly.
(Refer to Body - "Front seat")
5. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
6. After installing the seat belt buckle switch, confirm proper system operation:
A. Turn the ignition switch ON; the SRS indicator should be turned on for about six seconds and then go off.
Restraint

Description
In order to make normal activation of airbag system, SRSCM detects DTC(s) for the Passenger side Body Detection System. If the seat is occupied, Body
sensor detects how measuring electrostatic capacity and send signal to SRSCM via CAN. SRSCM recognizes the signal as 2(two) different classifications;
that is, class #1 (Empty or child seat), class #2 (Small, Large).With these signal, ACU determines whether it needs to deploy PAB(Passenger Airbag) or not.

If you strike or spin the SRSCM with the IG “ON”, the seat-belt pretensioner, curtain-airbag or side-airbag could be deployed. Handle it with care.
Restraint

Components
Page 41 sur 45

Restraint

Removal
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for at least three minutes before beginning work.
2. Remove the front passenger seat assembly. (Refer to the Body group- Seat)
3. Remove the seat cushion assembly. (Refer to the Body group- Seat)

Installation
1. Install the ODS equipped seat cushion assembly. (Refer to the Body group- Seat)
2. Install the front passenger seat assembly.
(Refer to the Body group - seat)
3. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
4. After installing the ODS, confirm proper system operation :
A. Turn the ignition switch ON the SRS indicator should be turned on for about six seconds and then go off.
B. Telltale lamp will turn on for 4 seconds and be turned off for 3 seconds. After the 7 seconds, it shall remain off if the ODS does not require
suppression and the passenger airbag is enabled.
Restraint

Circuit Diagram (1)

Page 42 sur 45

Circuit Diagram (2)

Page 43 sur 45

Circuit Diagram (3)

Page 44 sur 45

SRSCM Connector Terminal

Harness Connector

Pin No. Function (Connector A) Pin No. Function (Connector B)

1 - - 1 - -
2 - - 2 - -
3 - - 3 - -
4 - - 4 - -
B Passenger Side Impact
5 G A/C Control Module (SBR PASS) 5
Sensor (High)
- Y Passenger Side Impact
6 - 6
Sensor (Low)
Page 45 sur 45

7 P Smart Junction Box(Fuse - AIR BAG) 7 O Driver Side Impact Sensor (Low)
8 R Driver Front Impact Sensor (High) 8 G Driver Side Impact Sensor (High)
9 L Driver Front Impact Sensor (Low) 9 - -
10 G Passenger Front Impact Sensor (Low) 10 B Ground (GF07)
11 O Passenger Front Impact Sensor (High) 11 - -
12 - - 12 Gr Driver Side Air Bag (High)
13 - - 13 W/B Driver Side Air Bag (Low)
14 - - 14 P/B Passenger Side Air Bag (Low)
15 - - 15 O/B Passenger Side Air Bag (High)
16 - - 16 - -
17 - - 17 - -
18 - - 18 - -
19 - - 19 - -
20 - - 20 -
- R Passenger Pressure Side
21 - 21
Impact Sensor (Low)
- L Passenger Pressure Side
22 - 22
Passenger Pressure Side
23 - - 23 B Driver Curtain Air Bag (High)
24 - - 24 R Driver Curtain Air Bag (Low)
25 Gr Passenger Air Bag #3 (Low) 25 Y Passenger Curtain Aig Bag (Low)
26 Y Passenger Air Bag #3 (High) 26 W Passenger Curtain Aig Bag (High)
27 - - 27 - -
28 - - 28 - -
29 - - 29 - -
30 - - 30 - -
- G Passenger Seat Balt
31 - 31
Buckle Switch (+)
Br Integrated Brake Actuation Unit
32 32 B/O Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch (+)
(Local CAN Low)
G Integrated Brake Actuation Unit
33 33 B Driver Seat Belt Buckle Switch (-)-
(Local CAN High)
34 O Crash Output 34 L Driver Anchor Pretensioner (High)
35 G Driver Air Bag (2nd Satge (Low)) 35 Br Driver Anchor Pretensioner (Low)
36 O Driver Air Bag (2nd Satge (High)) 36 Y Passenger Anchor Pretensioner(Low)
37 W Passenger Air Bag #2 (High) 37 Gr- Passenger Anchor Pretensioner(High)
38 G Passenger Air Bag #2 (Low) 38 B Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner (High)
39 L Driver Air Bag (1st Satge (Low)) 39 R Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner (Low)
40 Br/O Driver Air Bag (1st Satge (High)) 40 Br Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner (Low)
41 Y Passenger Air Bag #1 (High)v 41 L Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner(High)
42 Gr Passenger Air Bag #1 (Low) 42 B Passenger Seat BaltBuckle Switch (-)
43 Br C-CAN (Low) 43 W Driver Pressure Side Impact Sensor (Low)
44 W C-CAN (High) 44 Br Driver Pressure Side Impact Sensor (High)
Page 1 sur 61

Brake System

Safety Precaution

Sinse Electric Vehicle contains a high voltage, battery mishandling the high voltage system or vehicle may lead to a serious accident including electric
shock and electric leakage.

• Be sure to shut off the high voltage by removing the safety plug before inspecting or repairing the high voltage system(Refer to “High Voltage Shut-
off Procedures”).
• A responsible worker should keep removed safety plugs to prevent it from being connected by mistake.
• Keep away from any metal objects (watch, ring etc.) while working on the high voltage system, as they may cause serious accidents like electric
shock.
• Before beginning to work on the high voltage system, workers should wear personal protective equipment to prevent safety accidents(Refer to
“Personal Protective Equipment”).
• At any time, do not allow workers not wearing personal protective equipment to touch the high voltage system. High voltage components should be
covered with an insulation sheet to prevent safety accidents.
• Use insulation tools when working on the high voltage system.
• Place removed high voltage components on an the insulation mat.
• Check that voltage between the high voltage terminals is below 30V after removing the safety plug.

• All the high voltage wiring and connectors are in orange.

• A caution label for high voltage is attached to the high voltage components
• High voltage components : High Voltage Battery, Power Relay Assembly (PRA), Quick Charge Relay Assembly (QRA), Motor, Power Cable, BMS
ECU, Inverter, LDC, On-Board Charger (OBC), Main Relay, Pre-charge Relay, Pre-charge resistor, Battery Current Sensor, Safety Plug, Main Fuse,
Battery Temperature Sensor, Busbar, Charge Port, A/C Compressor, Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU), High Voltage Heater, High Voltage Heater
Relay etc.

• Inform of possible danger of high voltage by placing a "high voltage caution" sign on the vehicle as in the image below.
Page 2 sur 61

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage components

Insulation gloves
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]

Insulation shoes Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage components
Page 3 sur 61

Insulation clothes

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses

Used in the following cases :

• When removing & installing or inspecting the high voltage battery
terminals or wiring where spark may happen.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

All removed high voltage components are placed on an insulation mat

Insulation mat
to prevent safety accidents.

Insulation sheet is used to cover high voltage components to protect

Insulation sheet people not wearing personal protective equipment from safety
accidents.

Warning tape Used for infomring that it is dangerous to come over this line.

Personal Protective Equipment Inspection

• Check that the personal protective equipment is not damaged.

• Check that the insulation gloves are not torn or damaged.
• Wear the insulation glove after removing moisture.
Page 4 sur 61

Fold the insulation glove as above.

Fold again 3~4 times to make it airtight.
Squeeze the inflated glove to see if the glove is torn or damaged.
Caution when repairing the power cable

Precautions when handling high voltage battery

• Battery Control System - Refer to "High Voltage Battery Handling Guide"

Precautions in case of fire in High Voltage Battery System

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• If fire broke out indoors, ventilate the area to clear out hydrogen gas.
• If fire can be put out, then do so using a CO₂ fire extinguisher. If this is not available, then use water or other types of fire extinguisher.
• CO₂has high insulation characteristics against electricity, so it is appropriate for electricity (C Rating) related fire.
• If fire cannot be put out, evacuate to a safe location, notify the fire department and do not approach the vehicle until the fire has been extinguished.
• Turn OFF the vehicle Key in case of vehicle submersion/collision, and then exit the vehicle as quickly as possible.

Precautions in case of high voltage battery gas and/or electrolyte leakage

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug.
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• Gas is hydrogen and alkali vapor. If the fire occurred indoor, ventilate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline solution.
• If leaked vapor or liquid gets in your eye, immediately clean with running water, then get medical attention.
• In case of gas leakage due to high temperature, do NOT use the battery until the high voltage battery cools down to room temperature.

Precautions when handling vehicle after an accident

• Be sure to wear insulated gloves (or rubber gloves), protective goggles, insulated suit, and insulated boots.
• Do NOT touch the bare cable when its insulation covering has been peeled.
(refer to "Precautions When Handling Power Cable")
• In case of fire on the vehicle and if the fire can be put out, then do so by using a CO₂ fire extinguisher. If this is not available, then use water or other
types of fire extinguisher.
• If more than half of the vehicle is submerged, then do not attempt to approach high voltage components, such as the Safety Plug. If such a component
must be handled, then first relocate the vehicle to a safe location, then handle the component.
• if fire broke out indoors, ventillate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location. because the gas id hydorgen and akali fumes.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline solution.
• If high voltage needs to be shut-off, then refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure" when handling relevant components.

Preparations when servicing accident affected vehicle

• Insulated gloves (or rubber gloves), protective goggles, insulated suit, and insulated boots.
Page 5 sur 61

• Boric Acid Powder or Solution.

• CO₂ fire extinguisher or other fire extinguisher.
• Towel for cleaning electrolyte.
• Vinyl tape (for terminal insulation)
• Megaohm Tester (for checking high voltage insulation resistance)

Precautions when EV is unattended for a prolonged period

• Turn OFF the Start Button. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start. (This is to prevent rapid
discharging of high voltage battery from dark current.)
• If the high voltage battery state of charge (SOC) is less than 30%, then do not leave the vehicle unattended for a prolonged period.
• If the vehicle is unattended for prolonged period, then fully recharge the battery via normal charging once every 3 months to prevent the high voltage
battery SOC from becoming 0.
• When checking the auxiliary battery for discharge status or when replacing the auxiliary battery, check for problem related to high voltage battery SOC
reset.

Hybrid Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery / Charging Precautions

If the POE oil in the system gets mixed with PAG oil, it may result in dielectric breakdown due to decreased volumetric resistivity and inoperative A/C
compressor, disabling the A/C compressor.

Brake System

High Voltage Shut-off Procedure

High voltage components : High Voltage Battery, Power Relay Assembly (PRA), Quick Charge Relay Assembly (QRA), Motor, Power Cable, BMS ECU,
Inverter, LDC, On-Board Charger (OBC), Main Relay, Pre-charge Relay, Pre-charge resistor, Battery Current Sensor, Safety Plug, Main Fuse, Battery
Temperature Sensor, Busbar, Charge Port, A/C Compressor, Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU), High Voltage Heater, High Voltage Heater Relay etc.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative (-) terminal of the auxiliary battery.
2. Remove the cover (A) on the floor carpet of the rear seat.

3. After loosening the nut, remove the safety plug service cover (A).
Safety plug service cover mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Remove the safety plug (A).

Page 6 sur 61

Remove the safety plug in the follwing order.

(3) Remove the high voltage cable (A).

(4) Measure the voltage between the inverter terminals.

Less than 30V : High voltage circuit properly shut
More than 30V : Faulty on high voltage circuit
Page 7 sur 61

If measured voltage is over 30V, check that the safety plug is removed completely. If it is is over 30V even though the safety plug has been
removerd, there may be a serious problem in the high voltage circuit. In this case, check DTC and never touch on the high voltage system.
Brake System

Specifications
Item Specification
Front disc brake Type Ventilated disc
Disc O.D. Ø 300 mm (11.81 in)
Disc thickness 28.5 mm (1.10 in)
Caliper piston Single
Cylinder I.D. Ø 60.6 mm (2.36 in)
Rear disc brake Type Solid disc
Disc O.D. Ø 284 mm (11.18 in)
Page 8 sur 61

Disc thickness 10 mm (0.39 in)

Caliper piston Single
Cylinder I.D. Ø 38 mm (1.34 in)
Parking brake Type EPB

O.D. : Outer Diameter

I.D. : Inner Diameter
Specification (ESC)
Part Item Standard value Remark
Integrated System 4 Channel 4 Sensor (Solenoid)
Total control
Brake Type Motor, valve relay integrated type
(ABS, EBD, TCS,
Actuation Operating Voltage 10 ~ 16 V
ESC)
Unit(IBAU) Operating Temperature -40 ~ 120 °C (-40 ~ 248°F)
Supply voltage DC 4.5 ~ 20 V
Output current low 5.9 ~ 8.4 mA
Output current high 11.8~ 16.8 mA
Active Wheel speed sensor Output range 1 ~ 2500 Hz
Tone wheel Front: 48 teeth, Rear: 47 teeth
Front 0.4 ~ 1.5 mm
Air gap
Rear 0.4 ~ 1.0 mm
Operating Voltage 8 ~ 18 V
Yaw rate& Lateral G
Current Consumption Max. 140 mA
sensor
Yaw rate sensor measurement range ±120 °/sec
(CAN TYPE)
Lateral G sensor measurement range ±1.8g
Pressure System 4 Channel 4 Sensor (Solenoid)
Source Operating Voltage 10 ~ 16 V
Unit Operating Temperature -40 ~ 125 °C (-40 ~ 248°F)
(PSU) Motor Power 170 W

Service Standard
Items Standard value
Brake pedal full stroke 130 mm
Stop lamp switch clearance 1.0 ~ 2.0 mm (0.04 ~ 0.08 in)
Brake pedal free play 1.0 ~ 2.0mm (0.04 ~ 0.08 in)
Front brake disc thickness 28 mm (1.10 in)
Front brake disc pad thickness 11 mm (0.43 in)
Rear brake disc thickness 10 mm (0.39 in)
Rear brake disc pad thickness 10 mm (0.39 in)

Tightening Torque
Items N.m kgf.m lb-ft
Hub nut 88.3 ~ 107.9 9.0 ~ 11.0 65.1 ~ 79.6
Air bleed screw 6.9 ~ 12.7 0.7 ~ 1.3 5.1 ~ 9.4
Brake tube flare nuts 12.7 ~ 16.7 1.3 ~ 1.7 9.4 ~ 12.3
Front caliper guide rod bolts 21.6 ~ 31.4 2.2 ~ 3.2 15.9 ~ 23.1
Rear caliper guide rod bolts 21.6 ~ 31.4 2.2 ~ 3.2 15.9 ~ 23.1
Front caliper assembly to knuckle 78.5 ~ 98.1 8.0 ~ 10.0 57.9 ~ 72.3
Rear caliper assembly to knuckle 63.7 ~ 73.5 6.5 ~ 7.5 47.0 ~ 54.2
Brake hose to caliper 24.5 ~ 29.4 2.5 ~ 3.0 18.1 ~ 21.7
Brake pedal member bracket bolts 16.7 ~ 25.5 1.7 ~ 2.6 12.3 ~ 18.8
Brake pedal shaft nut 24.5 ~ 34.3 2.5 ~ 3.5 18.1 ~ 25.3
Wheel speed sensor mounting bolt 6.9 ~ 10.8 0.7 ~ 1.1 5.1 ~ 8.0
IBAU bracket mounting bolts 10.8 ~ 12.7 1.1 ~ 1.3 8.0 ~ 9.4
Yaw rate&G sensor mounting nuts 6.9 ~ 10.8 0.7 ~ 1.1 5.1 ~ 8.0
IBAU brake tube flare nuts 13.7 ~ 16.7 1.4 ~ 1.7 10.1 ~ 12.3
PSU bracket mounting bolts 19.6 ~ 29.4 2.0 ~ 3.0 14.5 ~ 21.7

Lubricants
Items Recommended Quantity
Brake fluid DOT 3 or DOT 4 As required
Brake pedal bushing and bolt Chassis grease As required
Parking brake shoe and backing plate contacting surface Heat resistance grease As required
Page 9 sur 61

Front Caliper guide rod and boot BG-1(MS511-60) 0.35g ~ 0.8g

Rear Caliper guide rod and boot BG-1(MS511-60) 0.35g ~0.8g

Brake System

Special Service Tools

Tool(Number and Name) Illustration Use

09581-11000 Used to spread the front and rear disc brake

Piston expander pistons.

09580-3D100
Used to bleed air in brake system.
Air bleeding tool

0k585-E8100
Used to bleed air in brake system.
Air bleeding tool

09580 - 0U000
Rear brake piston Used to spread the rear disc brake piston.
adjuster

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage components

Insulation glove
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]

Insulation shoes

Insulation clothes Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage components

Insulation helmet
Page 10 sur 61

Safety glasses

Used in the case below

• During Removal & installation or inspection of the high voltage
battery terminals or wiring, which spark might happen.
• During working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

Putting the removed high voltage components on the insulation mat to

Insulation mat
prevent safety accidents.

Covering the high voltage components with insulation sheet to protect

Insulation sheet people not wearing the personal protective equipment from safety
accidents.

Brake System

Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
1. Integrated Brake Actuation Unit (Air in system) Bleed air
Lower pedal or spongy pedal 2. AHB system (Fluid leaks) Replace
3. Piston seals in IBAU (Worn or damaged) Replace
1. Brake pedal free play (Minimum) Adjust
2. Pad or lining (Cracked or distorted) Replace
3. Piston (Stuck) Replace
Brake drag 4. Piston (Frozen) Replace
5. Anchor or Return spring (Inoperative) Replace
6. Master cylinder (Inoperative) Replace
7. IBAU (Inoperative) Replace
1. Piston (Stuck) Replace
2. Pad or lining (Oily) Replace
Brake pull 3. Piston (Frozen) Replace
4. Disc (Scored) Replace
5. Pad or lining (Cracked or distorted) Replace
1. Brake system (Fluid leaks) Repair
2. Brake system (Air in) Bleed air
3. Pad or lining (Worn) Replace
4. Pad or lining (Cracked or distorted) Replace
5. Rear brake shoe clearance(Out of adjustment) Adjust
Hard pedal but brake inefficient
6. Pad or lining (Oily) Replace
7. Pad or lining (Glazed) Replace
8. Disc (Scored) Replace
9. IBAU (Inoperative) Replace
10. PSU (Inoperative) Replace
1. Pad or lining (Cracked or distorted) Replace
2. Installation bolt (Loose) Adjust
3. Disc (Scored) Replace
Noise from brake 4. Sliding pin (Worn) Replace
5. Pad or lining (Dirty) Clean
6. Pad or lining (Glazed) Replace
7. Brake pad shim (Damaged) Replace
Brake fades 1. Pad or lining (Worn) Replace
Page 11 sur 61

2. Master cylinder (Inoperative) Replace

1. Pedal free play Adjust
2. Master cylinder (Inoperative) Replace
Brake vibration, pulsation 3. Caliper (Damaged) Replace
4. Master cylinder cap seal Replace
5. Damaged brake lines Replace
Heavy pedal 1. Brake pedal stuck (Lack of grease) Repair
(Halt)
Noisy electric motor and/or excessive 2. IBAU (Inoperative) Replace
braking force after 2 - 3 consecutive 1. AHB system (air in system) Bleed air
applications of brake pedal
(When accumulator pressure increase
2. PSU(Inoperative) Replace
rate is below 5bar/sec when sensor data
was inspected after connecting to AHB
module)
Excessive noise when pushing brake
1. IBAU/PSU system (air in system) Bleed air
pedal

The following operations may generate brake motor sound which is considered normal:
- Repeated pushing on brake pedal
- Pushing and releasing brake pedal during power off
- Opening driver side door
The following cases are normal although the brake pedal may seem abnormal:
- Noise when brake pedal is abruptly pushed
- Noise when brake pedal is consecutively pushed
Brake System

Operation and Leakage Check

Check all of the following items:
Component Procedure
Integrated Brake Actuation Unit (IBAU) (A) and Check brake operation by applying the brakes during a test drive. If the brakes do not work properly, check the
Pressure Source Unit (PSU) (B) IBAU and PSU. Replace IBAU and PSU as an assembly if it does not work properly or if there are signs of
leakage.
Piston cup and pressure cup inspection (B) Check brake operation by applying the brakes. Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage. Replace the IBAU
as an assembly if the pedal does not work properly or if there is damage or signs of fluid leakage.
Brake hoses (C) Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage. Replace the brake hose with a new one if it is damaged or leaking.
Caliper piston seal and piston boots (D) Check brake operation by applying the brakes.
Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage. If the pedal does not work properly, the brakes drag, or there is
damage or signs of fluid leakage, disassemble and inspect the brake caliper. Replace the boots and seals with
new ones whenever the brake caliper is disassembled.
Page 12 sur 61

Bleeding of Brake System

AHB Brake System Bleeding procedure

• Do not reuse the drained fluid..

• Always use genuine DOT3/DOT4 brake fluid. Using a non-genuine DOT3/DOT4 brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to prevent contaminating the brake fluid.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle as it may damage the paint. If brake fluid comes in contact with the paint, wash off immediately with water.
• When bleeding air, make sure that the brake fluid is at least 10mm above the "MIN" line.
• To remove the reservoir tank cap to refill the brake fluid, always close the air shut-off valve of the SST.

Air Bleeding Tool Installation Procedure

To prevent the brake fluid reservoir tank from being damaged and to ensure the safety of workers, set the pressure of the gauge to the standard value
before installing the SST.
1. Before installing the SST on the vehicle, close the air shut-off valve (A) to adjust the pressure gauge to the standard value.
Page 13 sur 61

For the safety of workers and correct pressure setting, make sure that the plug (B) is installed correctly.
2. After connecting an air hose and opening the air shut-off valve (A), adjust the pressure gauge (B) to the standard value.
Standard pressure value:0.3 ~ 0.5MPa (43.5 ~ 72.5psi)

3. Close the air shut-off valve (A) and remove the plug (B).

For safety of worker, make sure that the air shut offvalve is closed and remove the plug.
4. Remove the brake reservoir tank cap.
5. Install the cap (A) of SST (0k585-E8100) on the reservoir tank.

6. Make sure that the check valve (A) is closed and then connect SST (09580-3D100) (A) to the adapter (B).

Air Bleeding Tool Removal Procedure

1. To remove the SST (09580-3D100) from the vehicle,close the air shut-off valve (A) first.
Page 14 sur 61

2. After disconnecting the air hose (B), bleed air in the reservoir tank by slowly opening the air shut-off valve (A).

To prevent backflow of brake fluid, be sure to open the air shut-off valve slowly and then bleed air in the reservoir tank.
3. Remove SST (09580-3D100) and the cap of SST(0k585-E8100) on the reservoir tank.

4. Install the brake reservoir tank cap.

AHB Brake System Bleeding Step 1 (IBAU ECU OFF)

IBAU filled with brake oil should be used for bleeding.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal to turn off IBAU ECU.
2. Set the air bleeding tool (SST: 09580-3D100) and the cap of SST (0k585-E8100) to reservoir tank and apply pressure (0.3~0.5MPa (43.5 ~ 72.5psi)) to it.
Page 15 sur 61

3. Initiate air bleeding on all bleed screws in the following sequence until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid.
PSU IBAU (2 bleed srews) 4 wheels (15 seconds for each)
Page 16 sur 61

4. Perform air bleeding while stepping on the brake pedal and opening bleed screws; then, close bleed screws and release the brake pedal. Perform this
procedure 10 times.
A. Bleed screw sequence : IBAU (2 bleed srews) 4 wheels
B. Repeat until air bubbles no longer appear in the fluid
C. Be cautious not to open the bleed screws too much as air may flow into the brake system.

AHB Brake System Bleeding Step 2 (IBAU ECU ON)

1. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal to turn on IBAU ECU.
2. Set the ECU S/W to air bleeding mode on the brake system.

Setting the ECU S/W to air bleeding mode in 30 seconds.

(1) After turning IGN ON with the engine start button, set the front wheels straight forward and the shift lever knob in Parking.
(2) With the VDC switch in the ""OFF"" position, press and release the brake pedal 10 times. Make sure to press the brake pedal more than 40 mm deep
and release fully.
(3) Turn off the engine start button, and then restart the engine and turn the VDC switch to the ""ON"" position by pressing down on the VDC OFF switch
for 3 sec.
The air bleeding mode is disabled in each of the following conditions:
(1) IGN OFF and shift lever knob in D/R/N
(2) Detecting DTC
(3) Brake fluid level under "MIN"
(4) "VDC off" switch turned off
3. Use the air bleeding tool (SST: 09580-3D100, 0K585-E8100) and feed oil pressure of 0.3 ~ 0.5MPa (43.5 ~ 72.5psi) into the reservoir.
While pushing the brake pedal halfway, loosen the bleed screws on 4 wheels to release the brake fluid, and then close the bleed screws. Repeat this 10
times and then release the pedal.
Page 17 sur 61

4. Connect the GDS to the data link connector located underneath the dash panel to perform "Fluid Circulation Mode" on GDS.
Fluid Circulation Mode removes air bubbles in the brake fluid and releases into the air by circulating the brake fluid inside the IBAU to the reservoir tank.
Brake System

Components
Page 18 sur 61

Brake System

Removal
1. Disconnect the brake fiuid level switch connector, and remove the reservoir cap.
2. Remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder reservior with a syringe.

Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle as it may damage the paint. If brake fluid comes in contact with the paint, wash off immediately with water.
3. Remove the wheel & tire.
Tightening torque :
88.3 ~ 107.9 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6 lb-ft)
4. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket bolt (A).

5. Disconnect the brake tube by loosening the tube flare nut (B).
Tightening torque:
Page 19 sur 61

12.7 ~ 16.7 N.m (1.3 ~ 1.7 kgf.m, 9.4 ~ 12.3 lb-ft)

Front

Rear

6. Remove the brake hose clip (A).

7. Disconnect the brake hose from the brake caliper by loosening the bolt (A).
Tightening torque:
24.5 ~ 29.4 N.m (2.5 ~ 3.0 kgf.m, 18.1 ~ 21.7 lb-ft)

Front

Rear

Inspection
1. Check the brake tubes for cracks, crimps and corrosion.
2. Check the brake hoses for cracks, damage and fluid leakage.
Page 20 sur 61

3. Check the brake tube flare nuts for damage and fluid leakage.
4. Check brake hose mounting bracket for crack or deformation.

Installation
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Use a new washer (A) whenever installing.

2. After installation, bleed the brake system.

(Refer to Brake system bleeding)
3. Check for brake fluid leaks.
Brake System

Components

1. Brake pedal stroke sensor

3. Brake pedal
2. Stop lamp switch

Brake System

Removal
Page 21 sur 61

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.
2. Remove the crash pad lower panel and reinforcing panel. (Refer to the Body group - crash pad)
3. Remove the lower duct (A).

4. Pull down steering column shaft after removing bolts and nuts. (Refer to the steering group - Steering columm & shaft)
5. Disconnect the stop lamp switch connector (A) and the brake pedal stroke sensor connector (B).

6. Remove the brake pedal member mounting nut (A).

7. Remove the snap pin (A) and clevis pin (B).

8. Remove the brake pedal member assembly mounting nuts (A) and then remove the brake pedal assembly.
Tightening torque:10.8 ~ 12.7 N.m (1.1 ~ 1.3 kgf.m, 8.0 ~ 9.4 lb-ft)
Page 22 sur 61

Installation
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.
2. Check the brake pedal operation.
3. Conduct calibration after removing the brake pedal assembly.

Brake pedal sensor Calibration

The brake pedal sensor calculates the pedal full stroke according to the preset zero. Therefore, zeroing adjustment is necessary when first installed.
Calibration must be performed in the following cases:
• After changing the brake pedal assembly (you cannot change only the sensor)
• After changing the BAU (Brake Actuation Unit)
• When error codes C1380 (calibration) or C1379 (signal error) are detected.
• After bleeding IBAU & PSU lines.

Calibration procedure
The calibration must be done while the vehicle is parked without stepping on the brake pedal and while there is no vibration on the vehicle.
1. Connect the GDS. (CAN line or OBD connector)
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Select calibration of the brake pedal sensor.
4. Follow prompts displayed on the GDS screen to complete brake pedal sensor calibration.

5. Turn ignition switch off after calibration procedure.

6. Confirm success or failure of calibration.

Stop lamp switch clearance adjustment

Removal
Page 23 sur 61

6. Pull the locking plate (A) as indicated by the arrow.

7. Turn brake switch 45° counterclockwise and remove it.

Inspection
1. Check the stop lamp switch.
(1) Connect a circuit tester to the connector of stop lamp switch, and check whether or not there is continuity when the plunger of the stop lamp switch is
pushed in and when it is released.
(2) The stop lamp switch is in good condition if there is no continuity when plunger is pushed.
Page 24 sur 61

Installation
1. With brake pedal fully released, insert the brake switch fully in contact with brake pedal arm.

2. After inserting, turn the brake switch 45° clockwise, and then push in the locking plate to assemble.

3. Confirm the gap between brake switch and bracket.

Brake clearance (A):
1.0 ~ 2.0 mm (0.04 ~ 0.08 in.)

4. Connect the brake switch connector (A).

Page 25 sur 61

Adjustment
Brake switch clearance adjustment
If the gap between brake switch and bracket does not fall between 1.0 ~ 2.0mm (0.04~ 0.08in), conform to the following:
1. Disconnect the brake switch connector (A).

2. Pull the locking plate (A) as indicated by the arrow.

3. Turn brake switch 45° counterclockwise and remove it.

4. With brake pedal fully released, insert the brake switch fully in contact with brake pedal arm.
Page 26 sur 61

5. After inserting, turn the brake switch 45° clockwise, and then push in the locking place to assemble.

6. Confirm the gap between brake switch and bracket.

Brake clearance (A):
1.0 ~ 2.0 mm (0.04 ~ 0.08 in.)

7. Connect the brake switch connector (A).

Brake System

Components
Page 27 sur 61

1. Guide rod bolt 5. Inner pad shim

2. Bleed screw 6. Brake pad
3. Caliper carrier 7. Pad retainer
4. Caliper body

Brake System

Removal
Brake caliper assembly
1. Remove the front wheel & tire.Remove the front wheel & tire.
Tightening torque :
88.3 ~ 107.9 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6 lb-ft)
2. Loosen the hose eyebolt (C) and guide rod bolts (B) and then remove the front caliper body (A).
Tightening torque
Brake hose to caliper (C):
24.5 ~ 29.4 N.m (2.5 ~ 3.0 kgf.m, 18.1 ~ 21.7 lb-ft)
Guide rod bolts (B):
21.6 ~ 31.4 N.m (2.2 ~ 3.2 kgf.m, 15.9 ~ 23.1 lb-ft)
Page 28 sur 61

3. Remove the pad shim (D), pad retainers (C) and brake pads (B) in the caliper carrier (A).

4. Loosen the caliper mounting bolts (B) and then remove the caliper carrier (A).
Tightening torque :
78.5 ~ 98.1 N.m (8.0 ~ 10.0 kgf.m, 57.9 ~ 72.3 lb-ft)

Front Wheel Brake disc

1. Remove the front wheel & tire.
Tightening torque :
88.3 ~ 107.9 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6 lb-ft)
2. Loosen the guide rod bolt (B) and pivot the caliper body (A) up out of the way.

3. Remove the pad shim (D), pad retainers (C) and brake pads (B) in the caliper carrier (A).
Page 29 sur 61

4. Loosen the caliper mounting bolts (B) and then remove the caliper carrier (A).
Tightening torque :
78.5 ~ 98.1 N.m (8.0 ~ 10.0 kgf.m, 57.9 ~ 72.3 lb-ft)

5. Remove the front brake disc by loosening the screws (A).

Tightening torque :
4.9 ~ 5.9 N.m (0.5 ~ 0.6 kgf.m, 3.6 ~ 4.3 lb-ft)

Replacement
Front brake pads
1. Remove the front wheel & tire.
2. Loosen the guide rod bolt (B) and pivot the caliper body (A) up out of the way.

3. Replace pad shim (D), pad retainers (C) and brake pads (B) in the caliper carrier (A).
Page 30 sur 61

4. Compress the piston into the caliper body using the SST (09581-11000).

5. Place the caliper body (A) on the caliper carrier and tighten the guide rod bolt (B).
Tightening torque :
21.6 ~ 31.4 N.m (2.2 ~ 3.2 kgf.m, 15.9 ~ 23.1 lb-ft)

6. Install the front wheel & tire.

Tightening torque :
88.3 ~ 107.9 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6 lb-ft)

Inspection
Front brake disc thickness check
1. Check the brake pads for wear and fade.
2. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks.
3. Remove all rust and contamination from the surface, and measure the disc thickness at 8 points, at least, at the same distance (5mm) from the brake disc
outer circle.
Brake disc thickness
Standard: 23 mm (0.906 in)
Service Limit: 21 mm (0.827 in)
Deviation: Less than 0.005mm (0.0002in)
Page 31 sur 61

4. If the level of wear exceeds the limit, replace the discs and pad assembly on the left and right of the vehicle.

Front Brake Pad Check

1. Check for the pad wear and if the measured pad thickness is below the specified value, replace the pad assembly.
Pad thickness
Standard value: 10.5 mm (0.413 in)
Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.0787 in)

2. Check that grease is applied to sliding contact points and inspect the pad and backing metal for damage.

Front brake disc runout check

1. Place a dial gauge at approximately 5mm (0.2 in.) from the outer circumference of the brake disc, and measure the runout of the disc.
Brake disc runout
Limit: 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.) or less (new one)

2. If the runout of the brake disc exceeds the limit specification, replace the disc, and then measure the runout again.
3. If the runout does not exceed the limit specification, install the brake disc after turning it 180° and then check the runout of the brake disc again.
4. If the runout cannot be corrected by changing the position of the brake disc, replace the brake disc.

Installation
Brake caliper assembly
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.
2. Compress the piston into the caliper body using the SST (09581-11000).
Page 32 sur 61

• Do not hit the piston end with a hammer or pry directly against piston face with a screwdriver to push in the piston.
• Push in wood or a used pad to protect the piston end.
• When spreading a piston, the whole area of piston end face should be protected from the SST.
3. After installation, bleed the brake system. (Refer to Brake system bleeding)

Front Wheel Brake disc

1. Install in the reverse order of removal.
2. Compress the piston into the caliper body using the SST (09581-11000).

• Do not hit piston end by hammer or prying directly against piston face with screwdriver to push in piston.
• Use wood or a used pad to protect piston end.Pushing piston with piece of wood or used pad is recommended.
• When spreading a piston, all area of piston end face should be protected from using the SST.
Brake System

Components
Page 33 sur 61

1. Guide rod bolt 4. Caliper body

2. Bleed screw 5. Brake pad
3. Caliper carrier 6. Pad retainer

Brake System

Removal
1. Remove the rear wheel & tire.
Tightening torque :
88.3 ~ 107.9 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6 lb-ft)
2. Release parking brake (EPB).
3. Disconnect the electric parking brake actuator connector (A).

4. Remove the hose eyebolt (B). Loosen the caliper mounting bolts (C) and remove the rear caliper body (A).
The hose eyebolt (A) tightening torque :
24.5 ~ 29.4 N.m (2.5 ~ 3.0 kgf.m, 18.1 ~ 21.7 lb-ft)
The caliper mounting bolts (B) tightening torque :
63.7 ~ 73.5 N.m (6.5 ~ 7.5 kgf.m, 47.0 ~ 54.2 lb-ft)
Page 34 sur 61

5. Remove the rear brake disc by loosening the screws (A).

Replacement
Rear brake pads
1. Remove the rear wheel & tire.
2. Connect the GDS to the data link connector located underneath the dash panel.
3. Ignition "ON" & Engine "OFF".
4. Release the electric parking brake.
5. Select vehicle name and EPB system.
6. Select the “PAD change mode”.

7. Perform the " PAD change mode (Before pad change)" procedure with GDS.

When disengaging while the motor is in operation, be sure to press down on the brake pedal.
8. Ignition "OFF".
9. Disconnect the electric parking brake actuator connector (A).
Page 35 sur 61

10. Loosen the guide rod bolts (B) and then remove caliper body (A).

11. Replace pad retainers (C) and brake pads (B) in the caliper carrier (A).

12. Insert the piston in the cylinder using SST (09580-0U000).

13. Place the caliper body (A) on the caliper carrier and tighten the guide rod bolts (B).
Tightening torque:
21.6 ~ 31.4 N.m (2.2 ~ 3.2 kgf.m, 15.9 ~ 23.1 lb-ft)
Page 36 sur 61

14. Connect the electric parking brake actuator connector (A).

15. Ignition "ON".

16. Select the “PAD change mode”.

17. Perform the " PAD change mode (Before pad change)"procedure with GDS.

Check that the parking brake operates normally.

18. IGN switch “OFF” and remove the GDS.
19. Install the rear wheel & tire.
Tightening torque:
88.3 ~ 107.9 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6 lb-ft)

Inspection
Rear brake disc thickness check
1. Check the brake pads for wear and fade.
2. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks.
3. Remove all rust and contamination from the surface, and measure the disc thickness at 8 points, at least, at the same distance (5mm) from the brake disc
outer circle.
Brake disc thickness
Standard: 10 mm (0.393 in)
Page 37 sur 61

Service limit: 8.4 mm (0.331 in)

Deviation: Less than 0.005mm (0.0002in)

4. If the level of wear exceeds the limit, replace the discs and pad assembly on the left and right of the vehicle.

Rear Brake Pad Check

1. Check for the pad wear and if the measured pad thickness is below the specified value, replace the pad assembly.
Pad thickness
standard value : 10 mm (0.394 in)
service limit : 2.0 mm (0.0787 in)

2. Check that grease is applied to sliding contact points and inspect the pad and backing metal for damage.

Rear brake disc runout check

1. Place a dial gauge at approximately 5mm (0.2 in.) from the outer circumference of the brake disc, and measure the runout of the disc.
Brake disc runout
limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.) or less (new one)

2. If the runout of the brake disc exceeds the limit specification, replace the disc, and then measure the runout again.
3. If the runout does not exceed the limit specification, install the brake disc after turning it 180° and then check the runout of the brake disc again.
4. If the runout cannot be corrected by changing the position of the brake disc, replace the brake disc.

Installation
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.
2. Insert the piston in the cylinder using SST (09580-0U000).
Page 38 sur 61

3. After installation, bleed the brake system.

(Refer to Brake system bleeding)
Brake System

Components

1. EPB Unit 4. EPB Warning Lamp

2. EPB Switch 5. Brake Warning Lamp
3. Brake Caliper

Brake System

Description
Page 39 sur 61

Description of EPB
EPB is an electronic parking brake. Unlike existing parking systems that operate by brake pedals or levers, the EPB system sends a signal to the ECU when
the driver operates the EPB switch. The ECU then operates the EPB actuator with motor gears to push the piston in the caliper to generate braking force. The
main functions of EPB are as follows:
- Static application
- Emergency braking when hydraulic brake malfunctions
- Auto application
EPB Function
1. Switch Operation at Stationary Condition (Static Park)
A. Manually engage the parking brake by operating the EPB switch at stationary condition.
B. With the ignition switch ON, the parking brake is engaged by the Reduced Clamp Force on a slope of less than 8%.
C. Otherwise, it is always engaged by the Full Clamp Force.
2. Switch Release at Stationary Condition (Static Release)
A. Release the parking brake by manually operating the EPB switch at stationary condition.
B. To secure safety, it is only released with ignition switch ON and the brake pedal pressed.
3. Dynamic Emergency Braking (Dynamic Braking)
A. Electric Controlled Deceleration (ECD)
When operating the EPB switch while driving, the operation request is sent to VDC only when the switch is in operation so that hydraulic braking is
performed by the VDC instead of the EPB actuator.
B. Rear Wheel Unlocker (RWU)
: If the VDC does not normally operate (VDC Fail) when the EPB switch is operated while driving and wheel speed information can be obtained, the
EPB actuator will independently maintain the safe movement of the vehicle to perform braking only during the switch operation.
C. Slow Ramp Up (SRU)If the VDC does not normally operate (VDC Fail) when the EPB switch is operated while driving and wheel speed information
cannot be obtained, the EPB will independently and gradually increase the parking force to perform braking only during the switch operation.
gradually to perform braking only during the
4. Automatic Application of EPB Force (Auto Apply)
A. When the vehicle is stopped while the Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) is switched ON, the EPB will be automatically applied after the engine has turned off.
5. Automatic Release of EPB Force (Drive Away Release)
A. The parking brake will be automatically released when pressing the accelerator pedal with the EPB engaged.
B. To secure safety for automatic release, it will be automatically released only when all of the following conditions are met:
1. Engine turned on
2. Seatbelt fastened
3. Door, trunk and hood closed
- To prevent the vehicle from being moved downwards on a slope way, it will be automatically released only when driving torque above specific level
based on the slope has been obtained.
6. Reapplication of EPB Force When Vehicle Moves Downwards (Roll Away Reclamp)
A. Additional EPB force is generated when a downward vehicle movement is detected after applying EPB force.
B. With the engine OFF, this function is enabled only when the wheel speed information can be received (i.e., for 3 minutes after the engine has turned
off).
7. P to X (Automatic Release of EPB Force for Gear Shifting)
When moving the gearshift lever from the P or N position to the D or R position, the parking brake will be automatically released.
However, it will be possible only with the engine ON and the brake pedal pressed, in order to secure safety for automatic release.
Brake System

EPB Circuit Diagram (1)

Page 40 sur 61

EPB Circuit Diagram (2)

Page 41 sur 61

EPB connector input/output

Pin Description Pin Description

G/B Center Fascia Switch
1 W C-CAN (High) 21
(ElectronicParking Brake Switch (SW3))
2 Br C-CAN (Low) 22 - -
3 - - 23 - -
4 - - 24 - -
5 - - 25 - -
6 - - 26 - -
G Center Fascia Switch
7 - - 27
(ElectronicParking Brake Switch (SW2))
8 - - 28 - -
G/O Center Fascia Switch
9 - - 29
(ElectronicParking Brake Switch (SW4))
10 - - 30 - -
Page 42 sur 61

11 - - 31 - -
12 - - 32 - -
13 - - 33 R Electronic Parking Brake Actuator LH (-)
14 - - 34 B Ground (GF05)
15 - - 35 B Ground (GF05)
16 - - 36 G Electronic Parking BrakeActuator RH (-)
17 - - 37 L/R Electronic Parking BrakeActuator RH (+)
R Smart Junction Block
18 38 B Electronic Parking BrakeActuator LH (+)
(Fuse - MODULE 2)
W Center Fascia Switch
19 39 W PCB Block (Fuse - EPB 1)
(ElectronicParking Brake Switch (SW1))
20 - - 40 R PCB Block (Fuse - EPB 2)

Brake System

Removal
1. Turn ignition OFF and disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.
2. Remove the floor console assembly.(Refer to Body - “Floor console assembly")
3. Disconnect the EPB control unit mounting nuts and then remove EPB control unit.
Tighten torque:
3.9 ~ 5.9 N.m (0.4 ~ 0.6 kgf.m, 2.9 ~ 4.3 lb-ft)

4. Disconnect the EPB control unit connector (A).

Installation
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.
2. After replacing the EPB control unit with a new one, “Variant Coding” procedure must be performed.
3. Perform the “G-Sensor Calibration” with GDS.
4. Check that the brake operates normally by pushing the EPB switch more than 3 times after installing the EPB module.

Variant coding
1. Turn ignition "OFF" and connect GDS.
2. While ignition "ON" & engine "OFF", select vehicle name and EPB system.
3. Select EPB Variant coding mode.

4. Perform the "EPB Variant Coding" procedure with GDS.

Page 43 sur 61

5. Complete the “Variant Coding” procedure.

Brake System

Removal
1. Turn ignition OFF and disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.
2. Remove the floor console upper cover.
(Refer to Body group - "Console")
3. Remove the EPB switch assembly.

Installation
1. Install the EPB switch assembly to the floor console upper cover.
2. After connecting the EPB switch connecter, install the floor console upper cover. (Refer to Body group - "Console")
3. Connect the negative (-) battery cable.
Brake System

Description
Regeneration Brake System
During deceleration or braking of an electric vehicle or HEV, the drive motor acts as an alternator and charges the battery by converting the vehicle’s kinetic
energy generated during braking into electrical energy.
Regenerative braking amount depends on the vehicle speed, battery SOC, etc.
Achieve significant improvement in fuel efficiency in city driving with repeated acceleration and deceleration.
Regenerative Braking Cooperation Control (RBC)
Page 44 sur 61

The brake force application is distributed by controlling hydraulic braking. The total brake force output that the driver demands is achieved by combining
hydraulic and regenerative brakes. In the case of regenerative brake failure, the total brake force that the driver demands is supplied by the hydraulic brake
system.

The AHB system is composed of the Pressure Source Unit (PSU) and the Integrated Brake Actuation Unit (IBAU).
First, the PSU generates the hydraulic pressure required for braking.
Similar to the boosting effect when the driver steps on the brake pedal in a system equipped with a vacuum booster, the hydraulic pressure stored in the
cylinder is supplied to provide pressure throughout the entire brake line.
Second, the IBAU delivers pressure generated by the PSU to a caliper on each wheel. Also, it is connected to the brake pedal to detect the brake force
demanded by the driver and to generate the braking feeling.
The IBAU carries out the ABS, TCS, and ESC functions as in conventional vehicles.

AHB System Operation Principles

1. Initial Status
Page 45 sur 61

High pressure (180 bar) is generated between the PSU and the IBAU at all times. Therefore, before removing the PSU or the IBAU, high pressure between
them should be reduced for safety by conducting"High pressure releasemode" of GDS connected to SOUL EV.
2. Brake operation
Page 46 sur 61

Apply Mode: When the driver presses down the brake pedal, the IN valve turns ON, delivering the high pressure generated from PSU to the caliper by IBAU to
engage in brake operation.

The level of brake force is determined by the pedal simulator according to the measurement of the pedal stroke sensor signal.Release Mode: When the
driver releases the brake pedal, the OUT valve opens and the IN valve closes, returning the high pressure of brake oil back to PSU. At the same time,
the CUT valve turns ON to prevent backflow of brake oil into the IBAU.
2. Brake malfunction

When either PSU or IBAU is faulty, both IN and OUT valves will close and the CUT valve will turn off. In this case, brake force can only be generated by
pressing down the brake pedal manually.

Integrated Brake Actuation Unit (IBAU) System (1)

Page 47 sur 61

Integrated Brake Actuation Unit (IBAU) System (2)

Page 48 sur 61

Integrated Brake Actuation Unit (IBAU) System (3)

Page 49 sur 61

Integrated Brake Actuation Unit (IBAU) System (4)

Page 50 sur 61

IBAU connector input/output

Description Description
1. R E/R Junction Block (Fuse - IBAU 1) 24. - -
2. R PSU Motor (+) 25. - -
3. - - 26. - -
4. B PSU Motor (Shield Ground 2) 27. G Rear Wheel Sensor LH (SIG)
5. G Smart Junction Block (Fuse - IBAU) 28. B Front Wheel Sensor LH (SIG)
6. R Brake Pedal Sensor(PDT Input (Power)) 29. L Smart Junction Block(IPS Control Module)
7. P Brake Pedal Sensor(PDF Input (Power)) 30. Y E/R Junction Block (Fuse - IBAU 2)
8. G/O Stop Signal Electronic Module(HAC Signal) 31. B Brake Pedal Sensor(PDF (Ground))
9. - - 32. - -
10. G/Y Brake Pedal Sensor(PDT (Ground)) 33. O Rear Wheel Sensor LH (VCC)
Page 51 sur 61

11. B PSU Motor (Shield Ground 1) 34. Y Rear Wheel Sensor RH (VCC)
12. - - 35. - -
Stop Signal Electronic Module
13. W PSU Motor (-) 36. G
(Stop Lamp Signal)
14. B Ground (GE06) 37. L Stop Signal Electronic Module(Stop Lamp)
15. - - 38. G SRS Control Module(Local CAN (High))
16. O/B Crash Pad Switch(ESC OFF Switch) 39. Br SRS Control Module(Local CAN (Low))
Y Smart Key Control Module
17. P Front Wheel Sensor LH (VCC) 40.
(Wheel Sensor Signal)
18. Br Front Wheel Sensor RH (VCC) 41. - -
19. W C-CAN (High) 42. P Front Wheel Sensor RH (SIG)
20. Br C-CAN (Low) 43. B Rear Wheel Sensor RH (SIG)
21. - - 44. L Stop Lamp Switch (B)
22. W Brake Pedal Sensor(PDT Output (Signal)) 45. - -
23. Br Brake Pedal Sensor(PDF Output (Signal) 46. B Ground (GE06)

Brake System

Components

IBAU must not be disassembled.

3. Master cylinder Assembly

1. ECU
4. Valve block
2. Reservoir

Brake System

Removal
Page 52 sur 61

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.
2. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector (A), and remove the reservoir cap.

Be sure to completely remove foreign substances around brake fluid reservoir and cap before opening the reservoir cap to prevent any contamination
of brake fluid and deterioration in braking performance.
3. Using a syringe, remove the brake fluid from the reservoir.

• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle as it may damage the paint. If brake fluid comes in contact with the paint, wash off immediately with water.
• To prevent dust entering the reservoir, the reservoir cap should be closed again after removing brake fluid.
4. Disconnect reservoir hose from the reservoir and IBAU connecter (A).

5. Disconnect the brake tube from the IBAU by loosening the tube flare nut (B).

Before removing the IBAU, high pressure in an accumulator of PSU should be reduced for safety by conducting "High pressure release mode" of
GDS connected to SOUL EV.
Tightening torque:
13.7 ~ 16.7 N.m (1.4 ~ 1.7 kgf.m, 10.1 ~ 12.3 lb-ft)

6. Remove the brake pedal assembly. (Refer to the brake system group - brake pedal)
7. Remove the IBAU mounting nuts (A) and then remove the IBAU.
Tightening torque:
12.7 ~ 15.7 N.m (1.3 ~ 1.6 kgf.m, 9.4 ~ 11.6 lb-ft)
Page 53 sur 61

Components

PSU must not be disassembled.

1. Motor connector 4. Accumulator

2. Bracket 5. Damper
3. Block 6. Motor

Brake System

Removal
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.
2. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector (A), and remove the reservoir cap.
Page 54 sur 61

- Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle as it may damage the paint. If brake fluid comes in contact with the paint, wash off immediately with water.
- To prevent dust entering the reservoir, the reservoir cap should be closed again after removing brake fluid.
4. Remove the IBAU (Refer to the AHB system - Intergrated Brake Actuation Unit (IBAU))
5. Disconnect the connector (A) and after removing a mounting clip, disconnect the reservoir hose(B).

6. Disconnect the brake tube from the PSU by loosening the bolt (B).

Before removing the PSU, high pressure in an accumulator of PSU should be reduced for safety by conducting "High pressure release mode" of GDS
connected to SOUL EV.
Tightening torque:
13.7 ~ 16.7 N.m (1.4 ~ 1.7 kgf.m, 10.1 ~ 12.3 lb-ft)

7. After disconnecting a connecter, Loosen the PSU bracket bolts and remove the PSU.
Tightening torque:
19.6 ~ 29.4 N.m (2.0 ~ 3.0 kgf.m, 14.5 ~ 21.7 lb-ft)
Page 55 sur 61

Installation
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.
2. Check the brake pedal operation.
3. After filling the brake fluid in the reservoir, perform the air bleed. (Refer to the AHB system - AHB system air bleeding)
4. Conduct calibration after removing the brake pedal assembly. (Refer to the brake pedal - calibration)
5. Tighten the PSU bracket bolts and brake tube to the specified torque.
6. Conduct calibration after removing or installing the PSU.
Pressure sensor Calibration
The pressure sensor mounted within the PSU calculates the pressure according to initial zeroing. Therefore, initial zero adjustment is required when installed
for the first time. After replacing the PSU (cannot replace sensor only), the calibration must be performed.
Calibration procedure
1. Connect the GDS. (CAN line or OBD connector)
2. Turn ignition switch on.
3. Press pressure sensor calibration button.
4. Pressure sensor calibration procedure is performed (Calibration recorded & DTC erased).

5. Turn ignition switch off and on after calibration procedure.

6. Confirm successful calibration.
Brake System

Components
Page 56 sur 61

1. Front wheel speed sensor

2. Front wheel speed sensor connector

Brake System

Removal
1. Remove the front wheel & tire.
Tightening torque:
88.3 ~ 107.9 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6 lb-ft)
2. Remove the front wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (A).
Tightening torque:
6.9 ~ 10.8 N.m (0.7 ~ 1.1 kgf.m, 5.1 ~ 8.0 lb-ft)

3. Disconnect the front wheel speed sensor connector (A).

Page 57 sur 61

4. Loosen the mounting bolt (A) and then remove the front wheel speed sensor.
Tightening torque :
8.8 ~ 13.7 N.m (0.9 ~ 1.4 kgf.m, 6.5 ~ 10.1 lb-ft)

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Brake System

Components
Page 58 sur 61

1. Rear wheel speed sensor

2. Extension cable assembly

Brake System

Removal
1. Remove the rear wheel & tire.
Tightening torque:
88.3 ~ 107.9 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6 lb-ft)
2. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor.
(Refer to Driveshaft and axle - "Rear Hub - Carrier")
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Brake System

Description
The yaw rate and G sensor is included inside the air bag control module (SRSCM).
When the vehicle is turning with respect to a vertical axis the yaw rate sensor detects the yaw rate electronically by the vibration change of plate fork inside
the yaw rate sensor.
If yaw velocity reaches the specific velocity after it detects the vehicle's yawing, the ESC control is reactivated.
The lateral G sensor senses vehicle's lateral G. A small element inside the sensor is attached to a deflectable lever arm by the lateral G
Direction and magnitude of lateral G loaded to vehicle can be known by the change in electrostatic capacity according to lateral G.
Page 59 sur 61

Specifications
Description Specification Remarks
Operating voltage 8 ~ 16V
Output signal CAN Interface
Operating temperature -40 ~ 85°C (-40 ~ 185°F)
Yaw-rate sensor Measurement range ± 100°/sec
G sensor Measurement range ± 1.8 g

Brake System

6. Pull up the lock of the SRSCM connector and disconnect the connector (A).

7. Remove the SRSCM mounting bolts(3EA) from the SRSCM, then remove the SRSCM.
Page 60 sur 61

• SRSCM senses the vehicle rollover. SAB, CAB and BPT may be deployed if SRSCM was shaken up and down or left and right during IGN ON state.
For this reason, make sure that the IGN is turned OFF before removing the SRSCM from the vehicle.
• If the SRSCM is replaced always perform variant coding. Also, perform the lateral G sensor calibration.
(Refer to Restraint - "SRS Control Module")

G-Sensor Calibration
1. Turn ignition "OFF" and connect GDS.
2. While ignition "ON" & engine "OFF", select vehicle name and ESC system.
3. Perform G-sensor calibration.
4. Perform the "G-Sensor Calibration" procedure with GDS.

5. Complete the "G-Sensor Calibration" procedure.

Brake System
Page 61 sur 61

Description
1. The ESP OFF switch is used by users to turn off the ESP system.
2. The ESP OFF lamp is on when ESP OFF switch is engaged.
Brake System

Removal
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.
2. Remove the crash pad lower panel.
(Refer to Body - "Crash Pad Lower Panel")
3. Remove the lower crash pad switch assembly (A) by pushing it.

4. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the lower crash pad switch assembly.

5. Check the continuity between the switch terminals as the ESP OFF switch is engaged.

Brake System

Description
Installed in MDPS (Motor Driven Power Steering), the Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) sends signals to HECU through CAN communication line.
The SAS is used to determine turning direction and speed of the steering wheel.
The HECU uses the signals from the SAS when performing ESP-related calculations.
Components (Steering Angle Sensor, Torque Sensorm Failsafe relay, etc.) of the EPS system are located inside the steering column and EPS control unit
assembly. Steering column and EPS control unit assembly must not be disassembled for inspection or replacement (Refer to "ST (Steering system) Gr.").
Page 1 sur 233

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Safety Precaution

Sinse Electric Vehicle contains a high voltage, battery mishandling the high voltage system or vehicle may lead to a serious accident
including electric shock and electric leakage.

• All the high voltage wiring and connectors are in orange.

• Inform of possible danger of high voltage by placing a "high voltage caution" sign on the vehicle as in the image below.
Page 2 sur 233
Page 3 sur 233

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Insulation gloves Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage
components
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]
Page 4 sur 233

Insulation shoes

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation clothes
components

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses

Used in the following cases :

• During Removal & installation or inspection of the high
voltage battery terminals or wiring, which spark might happen.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

All removed high voltage components are placed on an

Insulation mat
insulation mat to prevent safety accidents.

Insulation sheet is used to cover high voltage components to

Insulation sheet protect people not wearing personal protective equipment from
safety accidents.

Warning tape Used for infomring that it is dangerous to come over this line.
Page 5 sur 233

Personal Protective Equipment Inspection

• Check that the personal protective equipment is not damaged.

• Check that the insulation gloves are not torn or damaged.
• Wear the insulation glove after removing moisture.

Fold the insulation glove as above.

Fold again 3~4 times to make it airtight.
Squeeze the inflated glove to see if the glove is torn or damaged.
Caution when repairing the power cable

Precautions when handling high voltage battery

• Battery Control System - Refer to "High Voltage Battery Handling Guide"

Precautions in case of fire in High Voltage Battery System

Precautions in case of high voltage battery gas and/or electrolyte leakage

Page 6 sur 233

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug.
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• Gas is hydrogen and alkali vapor. If the fire occurred indoor, ventilate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline
solution.
• If leaked vapor or liquid gets in your eye, immediately clean with running water, then get medical attention.
• In case of gas leakage due to high temperature, do NOT use the battery until the high voltage battery cools down to room temperature.

Precautions when handling vehicle after an accident

Preparations when servicing accident affected vehicle

Precautions when EV is unattended for a prolonged period

Hybrid Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery / Charging Precautions

If the POE oil in the system gets mixed with PAG oil, it may result in dielectric breakdown due to decreased volumetric resistivity and
inoperative A/C compressor, disabling the A/C compressor.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

High Voltage Shut-off Procedure

3. After loosening the nut, remove the safety plug service cover (A).
Safety plug service cover mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Remove the safety plug (A).

Remove the safety plug in the follwing order.

Page 8 sur 233

(3) Remove the high voltage cable (A).

(4) Measure the voltage between the inverter terminals.

Less than 30V : High voltage circuit properly shut
More than 30V : Faulty on high voltage circuit
Page 9 sur 233

Specifications
Items Specification
Hood Type Rear hinged, gas lifter type
Front Door Structure Front hinged, frame door Structure
Regulator system Wire drum type
Locking system Pin-fork system
Rear Door Construction Front hinged, frame door Structure
Regulator system Wire drum type
Locking system Pin-fork system
Tail Gate Type Front hinged, gas lifter type
Seat Belts Front 3 point type with Convertible Locking Retractor (C.L.R)
Rear 3 point type with Convertible Locking Retractor (C.L.R)
Page 10 sur 233

Sealant
Applied parts Bead width
Height : 13.5 mm (0.53 in.)
Panorama Sunroof
Width : 12 mm (0.47 in.)
Height : 12 mm (0.4724 in.)
Windshield Glass
Width : 8 mm (0.3150 in.)

Tightening Torque
Items N.m Kgf.m lb-ft
Front and rear doors Door hinge to body 34.2 ~ 41.2 3.5 ~ 4.2 25.3 ~ 30.4
Door hinge to door 21.6 ~ 26.5 2.2 ~ 2.7 15.9 ~ 19.5
Door checker to door 3.9 ~ 5.9 0.4 ~ 0.6 2.9 ~ 4.3
Door checker to body 16.7 ~ 21.6 1.7 ~ 2.2 12.3 ~ 15.9
Door glass mounting bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Outside handle base mounting bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Door channel mounting bolt 6.9 ~ 10.8 0.7 ~ 1.1 5.1 ~ 8.0
Door channel mounting nut 3.9 ~ 5.9 0.4 ~ 0.6 2.9 ~ 4.3
Door latch mounting bolts 7.8 ~ 10.8 0.8 ~ 1.1 5.8 ~ 8.0
Door module mounting bolts 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Door striker mounting bolts 16.7 ~ 21.6 1.7 ~ 2.2 12.3 ~ 15.9
Tail gate Tail gate hinge to body 21.6 ~ 26.5 2.2 ~ 2.7 15.9 ~ 19.5
Tail gate hinge to tail gate 21.6 ~ 26.5 2.2 ~ 2.7 15.9 ~ 19.5
Tail gate latch mounting bolts 6.9 ~ 10.8 0.7 ~ 1.1 5.1 ~ 8.0
Tail gate striker mounting bolts 21.6 ~ 26.5 2.2 ~ 2.7 15.9 ~ 19.5
Hood Hood hinge to body 21.6 ~ 26.5 2.2 ~ 2.7 15.9 ~ 19.5
Hood hinge to hood 21.6 ~ 26.5 2.2 ~ 2.7 15.9 ~ 19.5
Hood latch to body 6.9 ~ 10.8 0.7 ~ 1.1 5.1 ~ 8.0
Seat Front seat mounting bolts 34.3 ~ 53.9 3.5 ~ 5.5 25.3 ~ 39.8
Front seat frame mounting bolts 44.1 ~ 53.9 4.5 ~ 5.5 32.5 ~ 39.8
Rear seat mounting bolts 16.7 ~ 25.5 1.7 ~ 2.6 12.3 ~ 18.8
Rear seat latch mounting bolts 19.6 ~ 29.4 2.0 ~ 3.0 14.5 ~ 21.7
Seat belt Height adjuster mounting bolts 39.2 ~ 53.9 4.0 ~ 5.5 28.9 ~ 39.8
Front seat belt upper anchor mounting bolt 39.2 ~ 53.9 4.0 ~ 5.5 28.9 ~ 39.8
Front seat belt pretensioner mounting bolt 39.2 ~ 53.9 4.0 ~ 5.5 28.9 ~ 39.8
Rear seat belt retractor mounting bolt 39.2 ~ 53.9 4.0 ~ 5.5 28.9 ~ 39.8
Rear center seat belt retractor mounting nut 39.2 ~ 53.9 4.0 ~ 5.5 28.9 ~ 39.8
Seat belt buckle mounting bolt 39.2 ~ 53.9 4.0 ~ 5.5 28.9 ~ 39.8
Outside rearview mirror Outside rearview mirror mounting nuts 6.9 ~ 10.8 0.7 ~ 1.1 5.1 ~ 8.0
Wiper arm Wiper arm mounting nuts 22.6 ~ 26.5 2.3 ~ 2.7 16.6 ~ 19.5
Roof rack Roof rack mounting nuts 3.9 ~ 4.4 0.4 ~ 0.45 2.9 ~ 3.3
Quarter fixed glass Quarter fixed glass mounting nuts 3.9 ~ 4.4 0.4 ~ 0.45 2.9 ~ 3.3
Panorama sunroof Panorama sunroof mounting nuts 9.8 ~ 14.7 1.0 ~ 1.5 7.2 ~10.8
Panorama sunroof mounting bolts 19.6 ~ 29.4 2.0 ~ 3.0 14.5 ~ 21.7

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Special Service Tools

Tool Name / Number Illustration Description
Hog ring clip installer Used to install hog ring clip
09880-4F000
Page 11 sur 233

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation gloves components
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]

Insulation shoes

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation clothes
components

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses
Used in the following cases :
• When removing & installing or inspecting the high
voltage battery terminals or wiring where spark may
happen.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack
assembly.
Face shield

Removed high voltage components are placed on the

Insulation mat
insulation mat to prevent safety accidents.

High voltage components are covered with insulation

Insulation sheet sheet to protect people not wearing personal protective
equipment from safety accidents.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Page 12 sur 233

Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy (Refer to page)
Water leaks from panorama Deteriorated roof lid weatherstrip Replace
sunroof Excessive roof lid-to-body clearance and improperly fitted Adjust
weatherstrip
Wind noise around panorama Loose or deformed deflector, gaps in body work Retighten adjust or replace
sunroof
Noise heard when opening/ Foreign particles lodged in guide rail Check drive cable and guide rails
closing panorama sunroof for foreign particles
Loose guide rails and lid Retighten
Motor runs but panorama sunroof Foreign particles lodged in guide rail Adjust or replace
does not move or moves only Incorrect engagement of motor pinion with drive cable
partially
Decrease in motor`s clutch slipping force
Increased panorama sunroof sliding resistance or interference of
panorama sunroof with drive cables, weatherstrip, etc. due to
maladjustment of panorama sunroof
Noise in motor (clutch slipping Incorrect engagement of motor pinion with drive cable Check pinion installation and
noise from motor when panorama Re-tighten motor
sunroof is fully opened or closed is
considered normal) Worn out or damaged motor pinion bearing Replace motor assembly
Worn out or deformed drive cable Replace
Door glass fails to operate up and Incorrect window glass installation Adjust position
down Damaged or faulty regulator arm or regulator Correct or replace
Door does not open or close Incorrect door installation Adjust position
completely Defective door check assembly Correct or replace
Door hinge requires grease Apply grease
Hood does not open or close Striker and latch not properly aligned Adjust
completely Incorrectly installed hood Adjust
Incorrect hood bumper height Adjust
Water leaks through windshield Defective seal Fill with sealant
end rear window Defective flange Correct

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• Replace the roof side moulding with a new one.

Page 13 sur 233

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• Replace the A pillar garnish with a new one.

Page 14 sur 233

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape, and apply protective tape around the related parts, to prevent
damage.
• Take care not to scratch the body surface.
1. Remove the front tire.
2. After loosening the mounting clips and screws, remove the front wheel guard (A).

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
Page 15 sur 233

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape, and apply protective tape around the related parts, to prevent
damage.
• Take care not to scratch the body surface.
1. Remove the rear tire.
2. After loosening the mounting clips and screws, remove the front wheel guard (A).

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape, and apply protective tape around the related parts, to prevent
damage.
• Take care not to scratch the body surface.
1. Loosen the side sill moulding mounting screws.
2. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the side sill moulding (A).
Page 16 sur 233

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 17 sur 233

1. Cowl top cover

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the cap (A), the nuts and the wiper arm (B).
Tightening torque :
22.6 ~ 26.5 N.m(2.3 ~ 2.7 kgf.m, 16.6 ~ 19.5 lb-ft)
Page 18 sur 233

2. Remove the glue from both ends (A) of the hood weatherstrip.

3. Disconnect the cowl top cover nozzle hose (A).

4. Detach the clips, then remove the cowl top cover (A).
Page 19 sur 233

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Components
Page 20 sur 233

1. Main crash pad assembly 5. Knee bolster panel

2. Crash pad side cover [LH] 6. Steering column shroud lower panel
3. Crash pad side cover [RH] 7. Center support floor mounting bracket
4. Crash pad lower panel

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 21 sur 233

1. Cluster fascia panel

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 23 sur 233

1. Center fascia panel

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Disconnect the A/C & heater controller connectors (A).

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 24 sur 233

1. Crash pad lower panel

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

3. After loosening the mounting screws, remove the crash pad lower panel (A) using a screw driver.

4. Disconnect the diagnosis connector (A).

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 26 sur 233

1. Glove box housing

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Loosen the glove box housing mounting bolts (A).

3. After loosening the mounting screws, remove the crash pad lower panel (A) using a screw driver.

4. Disconnect the glove box lamp connector (A).

Page 28 sur 233

5. Remove the glove box housing mounting clip (A).

• When installing glove box housing, be sure to insert lock pin (A) into wiring tape (B).

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 29 sur 233

1. Steering column shroud lower panel 2. Steering column shroud upper panel

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
[Steering column shroud lower panel]

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. After loosening the mounting screws, remove the steering column shroud lower panel (A) using a screw driver.

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

[Steering column shroud upper panel]

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
[LH]
Page 31 sur 233

1. Crash pad side cover [LH]

[RH]
Page 32 sur 233

1. Crash pad side cover [RH]

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

[LH]
1. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the crash pad side cover [LH] (A).
Page 33 sur 233

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

[RH]
1. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the crash pad side cover [RH] (A).

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 34 sur 233

1. Crash pad center lower panel

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 36 sur 233

1. Main crash pad assembly

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

(Refer to Crash Pad - "Crash Pad Lower Panel")

6. Remove the glove box housing.
(Refer to Crash Pad - "Glove Box Housing")
7. Remove the audio unit or AVN head unit.
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "Audio Unit")
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "AVN Head Unit")
8. Remove the crash pad center lower panel.
(Refer to Crash Pad - "Crash Pad Center Panel")
9. Remove the steering column shroud lower panel.
(Refer to Crash Pad - "Steering Column Shroud Panel")
10. Remove the steering wheel.
(Refer to Steering System - "Steering Wheel")
11. Remove the multifunction switch assembly.
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "Multifunction Switch")
12. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the crash pad lower switch panel (A).

13. Disconnect the crash pad lower switch connector (A).

14. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the crash pad center air vent panel (A).
Page 38 sur 233

15. Disconnect the hazard switch connector (A).

16. After loosening the mounting screws, remove the charging notification lamp assembly using a screw driver.
Page 39 sur 233

17. Disconnect the charging notification lamp connector (A).

18. Remove the twitter speaker.

(1) Insert the flat-tip screwdriver (C) to the hole (B) and remove the twitter speaker grill (A) by raising it with the screwdriver.

(2) Remove the twitter speaker grill (A).

Page 40 sur 233

(3) After loosening the mounting screws, remove the twitter speaker (A).

(4) Disconnect the twitter speaker connector (A).

(5) After loosening the mounting screws, remove the crash pad side air vent panel (A) using a screw driver.
Page 41 sur 233

19. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the photo sensor (A).

20. Disconnect the photo sensor connector (B).

21. Loosen the mounting bolts (A).

22. Disconnect the passenger's airbag connector (B).

23. Remove the center fascia panel side's mounting clip (A).
24. After loosening the mounting bolts and nuts, remove the main crash pad assembly (B).
Page 42 sur 233

• When installing main crash pad, be sure to pull out the twitter speaker connector wiring (A) through the hole on the side air vent
panel.
Page 43 sur 233

25. Right before removing the main crash pad, slightly lift the main crash pad and remove the twitter speaker connector mounting clips (A)
located at both ends.

[LH]

[RH]

26. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the crash pad fits onto the guide pins correctly.
• Before tightening the bolts, make sure that the crash pad wire harnesses are not pinched.
• Make sure that the connectors are plugged in properly, and the antenna lead is connected properly.
• Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, and then enter the customer`s radio station presets.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 44 sur 233

1. Cowl cross bar assembly

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

6. Remove the bolts, and then expansion valve (A) from the evaporator core.
Tightening torque :
7.8 ~ 11.7 N.m ( 0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.7 ~ 8.6 Ib-ft)

• Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust contamination.
• When installing, replace with a new O-ring (B).
7. Loosen the cowl cross member mounting bolts (A).

8. Remove both sides of front seat assembly.

(Refer to Front Seat - "Front Seat Assembly")
9. Remove the main crash pad assembly.
(Refer to Crash Pad - "Main Crash Pad Assembly")
10. Disconnect the steering column connectors.
(Refer to Steering System - "Steering Column and Shaft")
11. Lower the steering column after loosening the mounting bolts.
(Refer to Steering System - "Steering Column and Shaft")
12. Remove the rear airduct assembly (A).

[LH]
(1) Remove the accelerator pedal fixed cap (A).
Page 46 sur 233

(2) Remove the mounting bolt (A), and then remove the accelerator pedal module.

(3) Remove the floor carpet fixing clip (A), floor stripping and wire clips (B).

(4) Remove the carpet floor.

(5) Loosen the nut and then remove the rear air duct assembly (A).

[RH]
Page 47 sur 233

(1) Remove the floor carpet fixing clip (A), floor stripping and wire clips (B).

(2) Remove the carpet floor (A).

(3) Loosen the nut and then remove the rear air duct assembly (A).

13. Remove the shift lever assembly.

(Refer to Automatic Transaxle System - "Shift lever")
14. Disconnect the airbag control module (SRSCM) connector (A).

15. After loosening the mounting bolts and nuts, remove the cowl cross bar center bracket (A).
Page 48 sur 233

16. Disconnect the passenger compartment junction box connectors (A).

17. Remove the passenger compartment junction box mounting clips (A).

18. Disconnect the multi box connectors (A).

[Driver's]

[Passenger's]
Page 49 sur 233

19. Disconnect the connector (A) and the mounting clips (B) in the front pillar.
[Driver's]

[Passenger's]

20. Remove the drain hose (A).

21. Untie locking pin and then remove the high voltage PTC heater cable (A).
Page 50 sur 233

(1) Pull the pin (A) in the direction of the arrow.

(2) Press the fixed pin (-) and then pull it while inserting the driver (A) into the hole (B).

22. After loosening the nuts and bolts, remove the cowl cross bar and heater & blower unit (A) altogether.
Page 51 sur 233

23. Disconnect the heater & blower unit connectors.

(1) Remove the bolt (A) and clip (B), and then remove the high voltage PTC heater Ground.

(2) Disconnect the Intake actuator connector (A) and then remove the wiring mounting clips.
Page 52 sur 233

(3) Disconnect the blower unit (A) and then remove the wiring mounting clips.

(4) Disconnect PWM unit (A) and then remove the wiring mounting clips.

(5) Disconnect the blower motor (A) and then remove the wiring mounting clips.

(6) Disconnect the temperature control actuator (A) and duct sensor (B) connectors.
Page 53 sur 233

(7) Disconnect the mode control actuator (A) connectors and then remove the wiring mounting clips.

(8) Remove the screw (A) and fastener (B) and then remove the virtual engine sound control unit.

24. Disconnect the heater & blower unit connectors.

(1) Disconnect the Intake actuator connector (A) and then remove the wiring mounting clips.

(2) Disconnect the blower motor (A), temperature control actuator (B), mode control actuator (C) connectors and then remove the wiring
mounting clips.
Page 54 sur 233

(3) Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor (A), field effect transistor air conditioning resistor (B) connectors and then remove the
wiring mounting clips.

(4) Disconnect the cluster ionizer connector (A) and then remove the wiring mounting clips.

(5) Remove the heater & blower unit wiring mounting clips (A).
Page 55 sur 233

25. Loosen the heater and blower unit mounting bolts (A) and then remove the mounting clips (B).

26. Remove the heater and blower unit (A) from the cowl cross bar (B) after loosening the mounting nuts.
Page 56 sur 233

27. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Component Location
Page 57 sur 233

1. Fender assembly

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Be careful not to damage the fender and body.

• When removing the clips, use a clip remover.

1. Remove the head lamps.
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "Head Lamps")
2. Remove the A pillar garnish.
(Refer to Body Side Moulding - "A Pillar Garnish")
3. Remove the side sill moulding.
(Refer to Body Side Moulding - "Side Sill Moulding")
4. Using a clip remover, detach the clip, and remove the A pillar guard (A).
Page 58 sur 233

5. Detach the clips and then remove the insulator pad (A).

6. Loosen the front wheel guard mounting screws and bolt.

7. Remove the front bumper side bracket (A) after loosening the screw and bolt.

8. After loosening the mounting bolts and nuts, remove the fender assembly (A).
Page 59 sur 233

9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are plugged in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape, and apply protective tape around the related parts, to prevent
damage.
• Use a plastic panel removal tool to remove interior trim pieces to protect from marring the surface.
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels.
1. Remove both sides of front seat assembly.
(Refer to Front Seat - "Front Seat Assembly")
2. Remove the rear seat assembly.
(Refer to Rear Seat - "Rear Seat Assembly")
3. Remove the floor console assembly.
(Refer to Floor Console - "Floor Console Assembly")
4. Remove both sides of center pillar lower trim.
(Refer to Interior Trim - "Center Pillar Trim")
5. Remove both sides of cowl side trim.
(Refer to Interior Trim - "Cowl Side Trim")
6. Remove both sides of luggage side trim.
(Refer to Interior Trim - "Luggage Side Trim")
7. Remove the safety plug cover (A).
8. Remove the floor carpet assembly (B).
9. Remove the rear tunnel pad (B).
10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Page 60 sur 233

1. Floor carpet assembly 2. High voltage safety plug cover

2. Rear tunnel pad

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Components
[A/T]
Page 61 sur 233

1. Console rear cover assembly 7. Console side pad [RH]

2. Floor console assembly 8. Supplement cup hold
3. EPB switch assembly 8. Ashtray
4. Wiring assembly 9. Floor console mat
5. Cup Hold assembly 10. Console storage box
6. Console side pad [LH] 11. Hole cover

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 62 sur 233

1. Floor console assembly

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the console upper cover (A).

3. Disconnect the indicator connector (A), start/stop button switch connector (B) and multimedia jack connector (C).

4. Press the locking pin and disconnect EPB connector.

5. Remove the hole cover (A).

Page 64 sur 233

6. Remove the console side cover (A) by pushing it backward.

[LH]

When installing, insert the front of console side cover (B) to hook (A).

[RH]
Page 65 sur 233

When installing, insert the front of console side cover (B) to took (A).

7. After loosening the mounting screws and bolts, remove the floor console assembly (A).
Page 66 sur 233

8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are plugged in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 67 sur 233

1. Rear console cover

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

3. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the rear console cover (A).

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are plugged in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 69 sur 233

1. Console armrest

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Components
Page 71 sur 233

1. Front bumper cover 3. Charge door opener cover

2. Front bumper side bracket

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 72 sur 233

1. Front bumper cover

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Loosen the charge door opener cover mounting bolts (A).

3. Remove the engine room under cover.

(Refer to Motor System - "under cover")
4. Loosen the front bumper side's mounting screws to separate the side part.

• Remove the front bumper by pulling it out in the direction of the arrow while slightly lifting the side of the front bumper.

• When pulling out the front bumper, be careful not to damage the side part of the front bumper.

5. Push the locking pin to disconnect the fog lamp connector (A) and front bumper main connector (B).
[LH]
Page 74 sur 233

[RH]

6. Remove the front bumper cover.

(1) Lift up the lower side of the front bumper cover (A).
(2) Remove the front bumper cover (A) by pushing it backward to release the locking pins (B) located upper side of the front bumper
cover.

(3) Remove the front bumper cover (A).

Page 75 sur 233

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are plugged in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location

1. Radiator grill

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

Page 76 sur 233

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace the damaged clip.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Components (1)
Page 77 sur 233

1. Front door pull cap 6. Front door belt outside weatherstrip

2. Front door inside handle cap 7. Front door panel
3. Front door quadrant inner cover 8. Front door body side weatherstrip
4. Front door trim 9. Front door side weatherstrip
5. Front door belt inside weatherstrip 10. Front door hinge

Components (2)
Page 78 sur 233

1. Front door module 7. Front door lock assembly

2. Front door latch assembly 8. Front door outside handle pad
3. Front door panel 9. Front door outside handle
4. Front door checker assembly 10. Front door window glass run
5. Front door striker 11. Front door window glass
6. Front door outside handle cover

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Adjustment
Glass Adjustment

• Check the glass run channel for damage or deterioration, and replace if necessary.
1. Remove the front door trim.
(Refer to Front Door - "Front Door Trim")
2. Remove the front door window glass mounting hole plug (A).
Page 79 sur 233

3. After loosening the mounting bolts, carefully move the front door window glass (A) left and right to adjust the gap until the glass mounting
bolts are visible.

4. Check that the glass moves smoothly.

Door Striker Adjustment

• Make sure that the door latches securely without slamming it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker nuts are fixed. The
striker can be fine adjusted up and down, or in and out.
1. Loosen the screws (B) just enough for the striker to move.
Tightening torque :
(B) : 16.7 ~ 21.6 N.m (1.7 ~ 2.2 kgf.m, 12.3 ~ 15.9 lb-ft)

2. Tap on the striker with a plastic hammer to adjust the striker. The striker will not move much, but will give some adjustment.
3. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door against the body to be sure the striker allows a flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten
the screws and recheck.

Door Position Adjustment

• After installing the door, check for a flush fit with the body, then check for equal gaps between the front, rear, and bottom, door
edges and the body. Check that the door and body edges are parallel. Before adjusting, replace the mounting bolts.
1. Check that the door and body edges are parallel.

2. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when adjusting the doors.
Page 80 sur 233

3. Adjust at the hinges (A) :

A. Loosen the door mounting bolts slightly, and move the door in or out until it aligns flush with the body.
B. Loosen the hinge mounting bolts slightly, and move the door backward or forward, up or down as necessary to equalize the gaps.
C. Place a shop towel on the jack to prevent damage to the door when adjusting the door.
Tightening torque :
(B) : 21.6 ~ 26.5 N.m (2.2 ~ 2.7 kgf.m, 15.9 ~ 19.5 lb-ft)
(C) : 34.2 ~ 41.2 Nm (3.5 ~ 4.2 kgf.m, 25.3 ~ 30.4 lb-ft)

4. Grease the pivot portions of the hinges indicated.

5. Check for water leaks.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 81 sur 233

1. Front door trim

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape, and apply protective tape around the related parts, to prevent
damage.
• Be careful not to scratch the door trim and other parts.
1. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the front door quadrant inner cover (A).
Page 82 sur 233

2. Using a flat-tip screwdriver (A), remove the front door inside handle cap (B) and front door pull cap (C).

3. After loosening the mounting screws, remove the front door trim (A) using a flat-tip screwdriver (B).
Page 83 sur 233

4. Remove the front door inside handle cage (A).

5. Disconnect the outside rear view mirror switch connector (A) and power window switch connector (B).

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.

• Make sure that the door locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.
• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the front door trim.
(Refer to Front Door - "Front Door Trim")
2. Loosen the front door inside handle mounting screws (A).
3. Using a flat-tip screwdriver (B), pull up the front door inside handle lock pin (C).
Page 84 sur 233

4. Remove the front door inside handle (A).

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the door locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 85 sur 233

1. Front door window glass

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the front door trim.
(Refer to Front Door - "Front Door Trim")
2. Remove the front door belt inside weatherstrip (A).
Page 86 sur 233

3. Remove the front door window glass mounting hole plug (A).

4. Before removing the front door glass (C), loosen the mounting bolt (A) as loosely as possible and loosen the mounting bolt (B)
completely.
Tightening torque :
7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

• Be careful not to drop the glass and/or scratch the glass surface.

• Use the door switch to align the mounting hole/bolt with the hole in the door.
• If unable to operate the window motor, remove the motor and align the hole by hand.
5. Carefully adjust the front door window glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then loosen them. Separate the glass from the glass run and
carefully pull the glass out through the window slot.

• When removing the front door glass, be careful not to separate the glass mounting bracket (B).
Page 87 sur 233

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding.
• Adjust glass position as needed.
• Make sure that the door locks and opens properly.
• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 88 sur 233

1. Front door module

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the front door window glass.
(Refer to Front Door - "Front Door Window Glass")
2. Remove the front door outside handle.
(Refer to Front Door - "Front Door Outside Handle")
3. Disconnect the front door main connector (A).
Page 89 sur 233

4. Loosen the front door outside handle base mounting bolt (A).

5. Disconnect the outside rear view mirror connector (A).

6. Loosen the front door latch (B) mounting screws.

7. After loosening the mounting bolts, remove the front door module (A).
Tightening torque :
Bolt : 7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Screw : 7.8 ~ 10.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.1 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.0 lb-ft)
Page 90 sur 233

8. Remove the front door main connector mounting clips (A).

9. Remove the front door module wiring harness mounting clips (A).

10. Disconnect the front door latch connector (A) and then remove the mounting clip (B).

11. Disconnect the connectors and front door module wiring harness (A).
Page 91 sur 233

12. Remove the front door latch assembly.

(Refer to Front Door - "Front Door Latch")
13. Remove the front speaker.
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "Speakers")
14. Remove the front power window motor.
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "Power Window Motor")
15. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Apply sufficient grease on all rolling friction parts and springs.

• Make sure that connectors are connected properly and each rod is connected securely.
• Make sure that the door locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 92 sur 233

1. Front door outside handle

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the hole plug (A).
2. After loosening the mounting bolt, remove the front door outside handle cover (B).
Tightening torque :
7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 93 sur 233

3. Remove the front door outside handle (A) by sliding it backward.

4. Disconnect the front door outside handle connector (A).

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Be sure to install the outside handle pad (A) between the outside handle and the door panel.

• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.

• Make sure that the door locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 94 sur 233

1. Front door latch

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the front door module.
(Refer to Front Door - "Front Door Module")
2. Remove the front door outside handle base (A) by pushing in the lock pins located in the back.
Page 95 sur 233

3. Remove the front door outside handle connector wiring harness (A).

4. Remove the front door outside handle cable (A).

5. To remove the front door outside handle base connector (A), turn it counter clockwise and pull it forward.
Page 96 sur 233

6. Remove the front door outside handle connector wiring harness (A).

7. Disconnect the front door latch connector (A).

8. Remove the front door latch assembly (B) by pulling it in the direction of the arrow.

9. Remove the front door inside handle cage (A).

10. Remove the front door inside handle cable (A) by pushing it backward.
Page 97 sur 233

11. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.

• Make sure that the door locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.
• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the front door trim.
(Refer to Front Door - "Front Door Trim")
2. Remove the front door belt inside weatherstrip (A).

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Loosen the front door checker (B) mounting bolt.
Tightening torque :
16.7 ~ 21.6 N.m (1.7 ~ 2.2 kgf.m,12.3 ~ 15.9 lb-ft)
2. Detach the clips, and then remove the front door side weatherstrip (A).
Page 98 sur 233

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Components
Page 99 sur 233

1. Front seat headrest 8. Front seat back board 15. Front seat shield outer cover
2. Front seat headrest guide 9. Front seat cushion cover 16. Height lever
3. Front seat back cover 10. Front seat cushion heater 17. Height lever cap
4. Front seat back heater 11. Front seat cushion pad 18. Recliner lever
5. Front seat back pad 12. Front seat cushion frame assembly 19. Front seat shield inner cover
6. Front seat back lumbar assembly 13. Front seat inside cover [RH] 20. Front seat belt buckle
7. Front seat back frame assembly 14. Front seat inside cover [LH]

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location

1. Front seat assembly

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Loosen the front seat assembly mounting bolts (A).
Tightening torque :
34.3 ~ 53.9N.m (3.5 ~ 5.5kgf.m, 25.3 ~ 39.8lb-ft)
[Front]
Page 100 sur 233

[Rear]

2. Remove the front seat assembly (A).

3. Disconnect the airbag connector (A), seat heater & power seat switch connector (B) and front seat belt buckle connector (C).
[Driver's]

[Passenger's]
Page 101 sur 233

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

SEAT MOUNTING BOLT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

• Set the seat in the rearmost position. Check that each slide is locked, and then temporarily tighten the front mounting bolts.
• Set the seat in the foremost position. Check that each slide is locked, and then completely tighten the rear mounting bolts.
• Set the seat in the rearmost position again and then completely tighten the front mounting bolts.
• Check that the seat operates to and fro smoothly and that the locking portion locks properly.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 102 sur 233

1. Front seat shield outer cover

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Loosen the screw locking pin (A), and then remove the recliner lever (B).

3. After loosening the screws, remove the shield outer cover (A).

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace the damaged clip.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 104 sur 233

1. Front seat shield inner cover

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location

1. Front seat back cover

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Page 106 sur 233

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

3. Remove the front seat lower protector (A).

4. Push the lock pins (B) to remove the front seat back board (A).

• Push the middle area of clip using a flat head screwdriver.

• Be careful not to damage the lock pins.
Page 107 sur 233

5. Disconnect the connectors (A).

6. Detach the air ventilation seat back duct (B) by pulling the lock pin (A).

7. Pull out the hooks (A) from the front seat back frame.
Page 108 sur 233

8. Remove the protectors (A) on both sides.

9. Turn the front seat back cover inside out. Then pull out the headrest guides (A) while pinching both side of the lower part of the guides.

10. Remove the front seat back cover (A) from the front seat back frame.

11. After removing the velcro tape (A) and hog-ring clips (B) on the front of seat back, remove the front seat back cover (C).
Page 109 sur 233

12. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• To prevent wrinkles, make sure that the material is stretched evenly over the cover (B) before securing the hog-ring clips (A).
• Replace the hog-ring clips with new ones using special tool (C) (09880-4F000).

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 110 sur 233

1. Front seat cushion cover

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

4. Disconnect the connectors (A).

5. Detach the air ventilation seat cushion duct (B) by pulling the lock pin (A).

6. Pull out the hooks (A) and front seat cushion cover (C) from the front seat cushion frame (B).

7. Remove the front seat cushion cover (A) from the front seat cushion frame.
Page 112 sur 233

8. After removing the velcro tape (A) and hog-ring clips (B) from inside the front seat cushion cover, separate the front seat cushion cover
(C).

9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 113 sur 233

1. Front seat back frame assembly 2. Front seat cushion frame assembly

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Remove the side air bag to replace the side air bag installation seat.
(Refer to Restraint - "Side Airbag (SAB) Module")
• Before servicing, be fully aware of precautions and service procedures relevant to air bag.
(Refer to Restraint - "Side Airbag (SAB) Module")
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Components
Page 115 sur 233

1. Front seat belt pretensioner 4. Rear seat belt buckle [LH]

2. Height adjuster 5. Rear seat belt buckle [RH]
3. Rear seat belt retractor

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 116 sur 233

1. Front seat belt pretensioner

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• When installing the belt, make sure not to damage the pretensioner.
1. Remove the center pillar upper trim.
(Refer to Interior Trim - "Center Pillar Trim")
2. After loosening the mounting bolt, remove the front seat belt upper anchor (A).
Tightening torque :
39.2 ~ 53.9 N.m (4.0 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 28.8 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)
Page 117 sur 233

3. After disconnecting the pretensioner connector lock pin, remove the front seat belt pretensioner connector (A), loosen the mounting bolt,
and then remove the front seat belt pretensioner (B).
Tightening torque :
39.2 ~ 53.9 N.m (4.0 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 28.8 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are plugged in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 118 sur 233

1. Height adjust

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the front seat belt upper anchor.
(Refer to Front Seat Belt - "Front Seat Belt Pretensioner")
2. After loosening the mounting bolts, remove the height adjust (A).
Tightening torque :
39.2 ~ 53.9 N.m (4.0 ~ 5.5kgf.m, 28.9 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)
Page 119 sur 233

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 120 sur 233

1. Front seat belt buckle

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the front seat assembly.
(Refer to Front Seat - "Front Seat Assembly")
2. Disconnect the front seat belt buckle connector wiring (A).

3. After loosening the mounting bolt, remove the front seat belt buckle (A).
Tightening torque :
39.2 ~ 53.9 N.m (4.0 ~ 5.5kgf.m, 28.9 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 121 sur 233

1. Charge door opener cover

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the front bumper.
(Refer to Front Bumper - "Front Bumper Cover")
2. Loosen the screws, and then remove the charge door open cover lamp (A).
Page 122 sur 233

3. Disconnect the notification for charge door open cover actuator (A) and charge door opener cover lamp connector (B).

4. Loosen the screws, and then remove the charge door opener cover assembly (A).

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Adjustment
1. After loosening the hinge (A) mounting bolt, adjust the hood (B) clearance by moving it up and down, or left and right.
2. Adjust the hood height by turning the hood overslam bumpers (C).
3. After loosening the hood latch (D) mounting bolts, adjust the latch by moving it up and down, or left and right.
Page 123 sur 233

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 124 sur 233

1. Hood assembly

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Be careful not to damage the hood and body.

• When removing and installing the hood, work in a group of two or more.
• When removing the clips, use a clip remover.
1. Using a screwdriver, lift the socket clips (A) up slightly on both ends of the lifter (B).
Page 125 sur 233

2. After loosening the hood hinge (B) mounting bolts, remove the hood assembly (A).
Tightening torque :
21.6~26.5 N.m (2.2~2.7 kgf.m, 15.9~19.5 lb-ft)

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the hood locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.

• Adjust the hood alignment.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• When removing and installing the hood lifter, work in a group of two or more.
• When removing the clips, use a clip remover.
1. Using a screwdriver (A), lift the socket clips (B) up slightly on both ends of the lifter (D), and then remove the lifter from the bracket (C).

2. Push the socket of the lifter into the bracket for installation.
Page 126 sur 233

• Make sure that the hood locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips, and remove the hood insulator pad (A).

• Be careful not to scratch the hood panel.

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the glue on both ends (A) of the hood weatherstrip (B).

• Be careful not to scratch the hood weatherstrip.

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 127 sur 233

1. Hood latch release handle

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the hood release handle (A).

• Use a 6mm hex bit to press the center until the handle easily pulls off the post.
Page 128 sur 233

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the hood latch cable is connected properly.

• Make sure that the hood locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 129 sur 233

1. Hood upper latch assembly 2. Hood lower latch assembly

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the charge door handle (A).
Page 130 sur 233

2. Loosen the front bumper upper cover mounting bolts and clips.

3. Gently lift the bumper upper cover.

4. Loosen the screw (B), and then remove the front bumper upper cover (A).

5. Loosen the bolts, and then remove the hood latch assembly (B).

6. Disconnect the hood latch cable (A) and remove the hood lower latch assembly (B).

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the hood latch release cable is connected properly.
• Make sure that the hood locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.
• Adjust the latch alignment.
Page 131 sur 233

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Components

1. Front pillar trim 5. Rear pillar trim

2. Cowl side trim 6. Front door scuff trim
3. Center pillar lower trim 7. Rear door scuff trim
4. Center pillar upper trim

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 132 sur 233

1. Front door scuff trim 2. Rear door scuff trim

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Remove the rear seat cushion assembly.

(Refer to Rear Seat - "Rear Seat Assembly")
3. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the rear door scuff trim (A).
[Rear]

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 134 sur 233

1. Cowl side trim

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 136 sur 233

1. Front pillar trim

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

(2) Slightly spread open the front pillar trim and then place the tool (A) on the mounting clip (B) as in the picture below.
After placing the tool (A) on the mounting clip (B), push it forward.

• Once the front pillar trim has been removed, replace the clips to new ones.

(3) Remove the front pillar trim (A).

A. How to mount front pillar trim

Page 138 sur 233

• Remove the mounting clip (A) by turning it clockwise.

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 139 sur 233

1. Center pillar lower trim 2. Center pillar upper trim

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
[Center pillar lower trim]

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

(Refer to Interior Trim - "Door Scuff Trim")

3. Carefully remove the front door body side weatherstrip.
4. Carefully remove the rear door body side weatherstrip.
5. Remove the center pillar lower trim.
(1) To remove the seat belt anchor pretensioner (C), keep pushing the lock pin (A) in the direction of the arrow. Then, push in the lock
pin (B) and remove the seat belt.

(2) Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the center pillar lower trim (A).

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

[Center pillar upper trim]

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 142 sur 233

1. Rear transverse trim

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

(2) Remove the luggage cover board (A).

(3) Remove the luggage box (A).

2. Using a clip remover, detach the rear transverse trim mounting clips (A).
3. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the rear transverse trim (B).
Page 144 sur 233

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 145 sur 233

1. Luggage side trim

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

4. Remove the rear transverse trim.

(Refer to Interior Trim - "Rear Transverse Trim")
5. After loosening the mounting bolts, remove the rear seat lower side bracket (A) [LH,RH].

6. Carefully remove the rear door body side weatherstrip.

7. Carefully remove the tail gate weatherstrip.
8. After loosening the mounting bolt, remove the rear seat belt lower anchir (A).
Tightening torque :
39.2 ~ 53.9 N.m (4.0 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 28.8 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)

9. After loosening the mounting screw, remove the luggage side trim (A).

10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Page 147 sur 233

• Make sure that the connectors are connected in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location

1. Rear pillar trim

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

1. Remove the luggage side trim.

(Refer to Interior Trim - "Luggage Side Trim")
2. After loosening the mounting bolts, remove the rear pillar trim (A).

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 149 sur 233

1. Outside rear view mirror

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Loosen the outside rear view mirror mounting screw (A).

3. After loosening the mounting bolts, remove the outside rear view mirror (A).
4. Disconnect the outside rear view mirror connector (B).
Tightening torque :
6.9~10.8 N.m(0.7~1.1 kgf.m, 5.1~8.0 lb-ft)

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are connected in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 151 sur 233

1. Inside rear view mirror

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

1. Remove the ECM mirror cover (A).
2. Disconnect the ECM mirror connector (B).
Page 152 sur 233

3. Loosen the ECM mirror mounting screw (B).

4. Push the ECM mirror base up to remove the ECM mirror assembly (A).

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are connected in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 153 sur 233

1. Quarter fixed glass

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Removal

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.

1. Remove the rear pillar trim.
(Refer to Interior Trim - "Rear Pillar Trim")
2. Loosen the quarter fixed glass (A) mounting nuts.
Tightening torque :
3.9 ~ 4.4 N.m (0.4 ~ 0.45 kgf.m, 2.9 ~ 3.3 lb-ft)
Page 154 sur 233

3. Cut out the quarter fixed glass sealant using the utility knife.

• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body as damaged paint may interfere with proper bonding.

• Remove the rubber dam and fastereners from the body.

• Mask off surrounding surfaces before painting.
4. Remove the quarter fixed glass.

Installtion
1. Using a utility knife, scrape off the old adhesive to a thickness of about 2mm (0.08 in.) to smooth out the bonding surface around the
entire quarter fixed glass flange.

• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body as damaged paint may interfere with proper bonding.
• Mask off surrounding surfaces before painting.
• Remove the fasteners from the body.
2. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water away from the surface.
3. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer along the edge of the quarter fixed glass as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or
cheese cloth :

• Do not apply body primer to the quarter fixed glass and be careful not to mix up body and glass primer sponges.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands as this may result in the adhesive not bonding to the quarter fixed glass
properly causing a leak after it has been installed.
• Keep water, dust and abrasive materials away from the primed surface.
4. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to the original adhesive remaining around the flange. Let the body primer dry for at least
10 minutes.

• Do not apply glass primer to the body, and be careful not to mix up glass and body primer sponges.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
5. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of
sealant around the edge of the quarter fixed glass (A) as shown. Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer.
Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner.

6. Install the quarter fixed glass.

Page 155 sur 233

7. Let the adhesive dry for at least one hour, then spray water over the quarter fixed glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking areas, let
the quarter fixed glass dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least four hours after installing the quarter fixed glass.
8. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
9. Install the rear pillar trim.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Components

1. Rear bumper cover 2. Rear bumper side bracket

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 156 sur 233

1. Rear bumper cover

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Disconnect the rear combination lamp connector (A).

3. Loosen the rear bumper upper mounting clip (A).

4. Loosen the bolts and nuts, and then remove the rear under cover (A).

5. Loosen the mounting bolts (A).

Page 158 sur 233

6. Disconnect the rear bumper main connector (A).

7. After loosening the rear bumper side's mounting screws and clip, separate the sides.

• Slightly lift up the side of the rear bumper and pull in the direction of the arrow to remove.

• When pulling out the front bumper, be careful not to damage the side part of the rear bumper.

8. Remove the rear bumper cover (A).

Page 159 sur 233

9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are plugged in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 160 sur 233

1. Rear bumper beam assembly

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

4. Remove the rear bumper wiring harness mounting clips (A).

5. Remove the mounting clips (B) and the rear bumper beam assembly (C), and then loosen the clips.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are plugged in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Components (1)
Page 161 sur 233

1. Rear door pull cap 7. Rear door delta garnish

2. Rear door inside handle cap 8. Rear door belt outside weatherstrip
3. Rear door delta inner cover 9. Rear door body side weatherstrip
4. Rear door trim 10. Rear door side weatherstrip
5. Rear door belt inside weatherstrip 11. Rear door hinge
6. Rear door panel

Components (2)
Page 162 sur 233

1. Rear door module 7. Rear door outside handle

2. Rear door latch assembly 8. Rear door outside handle pad
3. Rear door panel 9. Rear door window glass run
4. Rear door checker assembly 10. Rear door channel
5. Rear door striker 11. Rear door window glass
6. Rear door outside handle cover

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Adjustment
Glass Adjustment

• Check the glass run channels for damage or deterioration, and replace them if necessary.
1. Remove the rear door trim.
(Refer to Rear Door - "Rear Door Trim")
2. Remove the rear door window glass mounting hole plug (A).
Page 163 sur 233

3. Carefully move the rear door window glass (A) until the glass mounting bolt are visible, then loosen them.

4. Check that the glass moves smoothly.

Door Striker Adjustment

• Make sure that the door latches securely without slamming it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A) by moving it up and down or in and
out before fixing the striker nuts.
1. Loosen the screws (B) just enough for the striker to move.
Tightening torque :
(B) : 16.7 ~ 21.6 N.m (1.7 ~ 2.2 kgf.m, 12.3 ~ 15.9 lb-ft)

2. Lightly tap on the striker with a plastic hammer just enough to give some adjustment.
3. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door against the body to be sure the striker allows a flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten
the screws and recheck.

Door Position Adjustment

• After installing the door, check for a flush fit with the adjacent body panels, then check for equal gaps between the front, rear, and
bottom, door edges and the body. Check that the door and body edges are parallel. Before adjusting, replace the mounting bolts.
1. Check that the door and body edges are parallel.
Page 164 sur 233

2. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when adjusting the doors.
3. Adjust at the hinges (A):
A. Loosen the door mounting bolts slightly, and move the door in or out until it aligns flush with the body.
B. Loosen the hinge mounting bolts slightly, and move the door backward or forward, up or down as necessary to equalize the gaps.
C. Place a shop towel on the jack to prevent damage to the door when adjusting the door.
Tightening torque :
(B) : 21.6 ~ 26.5 N.m (2.2 ~ 2.7 kgf.m, 15.9 ~ 19.5 lb-ft)
(C) : 34.2 ~ 41.2 N.m (3.5 ~ 4.2 kgf.m, 25.3 ~ 30.4 lb-ft)

4. Grease the pivot portions of the hinges as indicated by the arrows.

5. Check for water leakage.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 165 sur 233

1. Rear door trim

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Using a flat-tip screwdriver (A), remove the rear door inside handle cap (B).

3. After loosening the mounting screws, remove the rear door trim (A) using a flat-tip screwdriver (B).
Page 167 sur 233

4. Remove the rear door inside handle cage (A).

5. Disconnect the power window switch connector (A).

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.

• Make sure that the door locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.
• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the rear door trim.
(Refer to Rear Door - "Rear Door Trim")
2. Loosen the rear door inside handle mounting screws (A).
3. Using a flat-tip screwdriver (B), pull up the rear door inside handle lock pin (C).
Page 168 sur 233

4. Remove the rear door inside handle (A).

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the door locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 169 sur 233

1. Rear door window glass

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the rear door trim.
(Refer to Rear Door - "Rear Door Trim")
2. Remove the rear door belt inside weatherstrip (A).
Page 170 sur 233

3. Hold down the power window glass switch to pull down the rear door window glass to the maximum level.
4. After loosening the mounting screws, remove the rear door belt outside weatherstrip (A).

5. After loosening the mounting screws, remove the rear door delta garnish (A).

6. Completely loosen the rear door channel mounting bolt and loosen the nuts as much as possible until they are just enough to hold the
rear door panel.
7. Slightly push the rear door channel in the direction of the arrow in the illustration below.
Page 171 sur 233

8. Remove the rear door window glass mounting hole plug (A).

• Be careful not to drop the glass and/or scratch the glass surface.

• Use the door switch to align the mounting hole/bolt with the hole in the door.
• If unable to operate the window motor, remove the motor and align the hole by hand.
9. Carefully adjust the rear door window glass (A) until you can see the bolt, then loosen them. Separate the glass from the glass run and
carefully pull the glass out through the window slot.
Tightening torque :
7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Component Location
Page 172 sur 233

1. Rear door module

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the rear door window glass.
(Refer to Rear Door - "Rear Door Window Glass")
2. Remove the rear door outside handle.
(Refer to Rear Door - "Rear Door Outside Handle")
3. After loosening the mounting bolt and nuts, remove the rear door channel (A).
Tightening torque :
Bolt : 6.9 ~ 10.8 N.m (0.7 ~ 1.1 kgf.m, 5.1 ~ 8.0 lb-ft)
Nut : 3.9 ~ 5.9 N.m (0.4 ~ 0.6 kgf.m, 2.9 ~ 4.3 lb-ft)
Page 173 sur 233

4. Disconnect the rear door main connector (A).

5. Loosen the rear door outside handle base mounting bolt (A).

6. Loosen the rear door latch (A) mounting screws.

7. After loosening the mounting bolts, remove the rear door module (B).
Tightening torque :
Bolt : 7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Screw : 7.8 ~ 10.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.1 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.0 lb-ft)
Page 174 sur 233

8. Remove the rear door main connector mounting clips (A).

9. Remove the rear door module wiring harness mounting clips (A).

10. Disconnect the rear door latch connector (A) and then remove the mounting clip (B).

11. Disconnect the connectors and rear door module wiring harness (A).
Page 175 sur 233

12. Remove the rear door latch assembly.

(Refer to Rear Door - "Rear Door Latch")
13. Remove the rear speaker.
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "Speakers")
14. Remove the rear power window motor.
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "Power Window Motor")
15. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Apply sufficient grease on all rolling friction parts and springs.

• Make sure that connectors are connected properly and each rod is connected securely.
• Make sure that the door locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 176 sur 233

1. Rear door outside handle

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the rear door trim.
(Refer to Rear Door - "Rear Door Trim")
2. Remove the hole plug (A).
3. After loosening the mounting bolt, remove the rear door outside handle cover (B).
Tightening torque :
7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 177 sur 233

4. Remove the rear door outside handle (A) by sliding it backward.

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Be sure to install the outside handle pad (A) between the outside handle and the door panel.

• Make sure that the door locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 178 sur 233

1. Rear door latch

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the rear door module.
(Refer to Rear Door - "Rear Door Module")
2. Remove the rear door outside handle base (A) by pushing in the lock pins located in the back.
Page 179 sur 233

3. Remove the rear door outside handle cable (A).

4. Disconnect the rear door latch connector (A).

5. Remove the rear door latch assembly (B) by pulling it in the direction of the arrow.

6. Remove the rear door inside handle cage (A).

7. Remove the rear door inside handle cable (A) by pushing it backward.
Page 180 sur 233

8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.

• Make sure that the door locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.
• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Pull down rear door window glass by pressing the power window glass switch.
2. After loosening the mounting screws, remove the rear door belt outside weatherstrip (A).

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the rear door trim.
(Refer to Rear Door - "Rear Door Trim")
2. Remove the rear door belt inside weatherstrip (A).

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Page 181 sur 233

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Loosen the rear door checker (B) mounting bolt.
Tightening torque :
16.7 ~ 21.6 N.m (1.7 ~ 2.2 kgf.m, 12.3 ~ 15.9 lb-ft)
2. Detach the clips, then remove the rear door side weatherstrip (A).

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Components (1)
(Rear Seat Back Assembly)
Page 182 sur 233

1. Rear seat headrest [LH] 13. Rear seat lower side bracket [LH] 25. Rear seat back structure [RH]
2. Rear seat headrest [Center] 14. Rear seat back striker [LH] 26. Rear seat lower side bracket [RH]
3. Rear seat headrest [RH] 15. Rear seat back cover [LH] 27. Rear seat back bush hinge [RH]
4. Rear seat headrest guide [RH] 16. Rear seat back pad [LH] 28. Rear center seat belt retractor
5. Rear seat headrest guide [Center] 17. Tether anchor garnish [RH] 29. Rear seat lower side bracket [Center]
6. Rear seat headrest guide [LH] 18. Rear seat back structure [LH] 30. Rear seat back cover [RH]
7. Rear seat folding bezel [LH] 19. Center hinge cover 31. Rear seat back pad [RH]
8. Rear seat folding lever [LH] 20. Rear seat folding bezel [RH] 32. Rear seat belt center cover
9. Tether anchor garnish [LH] 21. Rear seat folding lever [RH]
10. Rear seat latch assembly [LH] 22. Rear seat latch rod support bracket [RH]
11. Rear seat latch rod support bracket [LH] 23. Rear seat latch assembly [RH]
12. Rear seat back bush hinge [LH] 24. Rear seat back striker [RH]

Components (2)
(Rear Seat Cushion Assembly)
Page 183 sur 233

1. Rear seat cushion cover 3. Rear seat cushion pad

2. Rear seat cushion heater 4. Heater ECU unit

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 184 sur 233

1. Rear seat back assembly [LH] 3. Rear seat cushion assembly

2. Rear seat back assembly [RH]

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
[Rear seat back assembly]
1. Detach the rear seat belt lower anchor (C) by pushing the lock pin (B) of center mini buckle (A) with flat-tip driver.
Page 185 sur 233

2. Fold the rear seat back assembly.

3. Remove the center hinge cover (A).

4. Loosen the rear seat back mounting bolt (A).

Tightening torque :
16.7 ~ 25.5N.m (1.7 ~ 2.6kgf.m, 12.3~18.8lb-ft)

5. Remove the rear seat back assembly (A).

Page 186 sur 233

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

[Rear seat cushion assembly]

1. Remove the trunk trim.
(1) Remove the luggage cover board (A).

(2) Remove the luggage box (A).

2. Remove the rear seat back[LH].

(Refer to Rear Seat - "Rear Seat Assembly")
3. Loosen the rear seat cushion mounting bolt (A).
Tightening torque :
16.7 ~ 25.5N.m (1.7 ~ 2.6kgf.m, 12.3~18.8lb-ft)
Page 187 sur 233

4. Remove the rear seat cushion assembly (A) by pushing it up.

5. Disconnect the heater cushion connector (A).

[LH]

[RH]

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 188 sur 233

1. Rear seat back cover [LH] 2. Rear seat back cover [RH]

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
[LH]

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

3. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the rear seat folding bezel (A).

4. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the rear seat belt center cover (A).

5. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the tether anchor garnish (A).

6. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the rear seat back bush hinge (A).
Page 190 sur 233

7. Remove the protector (A) located in the bottom side of the rear seat back.

8. Zip off the rear seat back cover located in the side (A), and then pull it up.

9. Pull out the hooks (A) by the rear seat back frame.

10. Turn the rear seat back cover inside out. Then pull out the headrest guides (A) while pinching both sides of the lower part of the guides,
and remove them.
Page 191 sur 233

11. Remove the rear seat back cover (A) from the rear seat back frame (B).

12. Remove the hog-ring clip (A) velcro tape (B) on the rear of seat back and then remove the rear seat back cover (C).

13. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• To prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the cover (B) before securing the hog-ring clips (A).
• Replace the hog-ring clips with new ones using special tool (C) (09880-4F000).

[RH]

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

Page 192 sur 233

3. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the rear seat folding bezel (A).

4. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the tether anchor garnish (A).

5. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the rear seat back bush hinge (A).
Page 193 sur 233

6. Remove the protector (A) located in the bottom side of the rear seat back.

7. Zip off the rear seat back cover located in the side (A), and then pull it up.

8. Pull out the hook (A) by the rear seat back frame.

9. Turn the rear seat back cover inside out. Then pull out the headrest guides (A) while pinching both sides of the lower part of the guides,
and remove them.
Page 194 sur 233

10. Remove the rear seat back cover (A) from the rear seat back frame (B).

11. Removing the hog-ring clips (A), Velcro tape (B) on the rear of seat back and then remove the seat back cover (C).

12. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 195 sur 233

1. Rear seat cushion cover

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

[RH]

4. Remove the hog-ring clip (A), Velcro tape (C) on the rear of seat back and then remove the rear seat cushion cover (B).
[Rear side]

[Front side]

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 198 sur 233

1. Rear seat latch assembly

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

3. Remove the rear seat latch rod (A) to direction of the arrow.

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 199 sur 233

1. Rear seat folding lever

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. After loosening the mounting screws, then remove the rear seat folding lever (A).

3. Remove the rear seat latch rod (A) to direction of the arrow.

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 201 sur 233

1. Rear seat belt retractor

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• When installing the belt, be careful not to damage the retractor.

1. Remove the rear pillar trim.
(Refer to Interior Trim - "Rear Pillar Trim")
2. Loosen the rear seat belt upper anchor (A) mounting bolt.
3. After loosening the mounting bolt, remove the rear seat belt retractor (B).
Tightening torque :
39.2 ~ 53.9 N.m (4.0 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 28.8 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)
Page 202 sur 233

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are plugged in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 203 sur 233

1. Rear center seat belt retractor

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• When installing the belt, be careful not to damage the retractor.

1. Remove the rear seat back cover [LH].
(Refer to Rear Seat - "Rear Seat Back Cover")
2. After loosening the mounting nut, remove the rear center seat belt retractor (A).
Tightening torque :
39.2 ~ 53.9 N.m (4.0 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 28.8 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)
Page 204 sur 233

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 205 sur 233

1. Rear seat belt buckle [LH] 2. Rear seat belt buckle [RH]

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
[LH]
1. Detach the rear seat belt lower anchor (C) by pushing the lock pin (B) of center mini buckle (A) with flat-tip driver.
Page 206 sur 233

2. Remove the rear seat cushion assembly.

(Refer to Rear Seat - "Rear Seat Assembly")
3. Loosen the mounting bolt, and then remove the rear seat belt buckle [LH] (A).
Tightening torque :
39.2 ~ 53.9 N.m (4.0 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 28.8 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

[RH]
1. Remove the rear seat cushion assembly.
(Refer to Rear Seat - "Rear Seat Assembly")
2. Loosen the mounting bolt, and then remove the rear seat belt buckle [RH] (A).
Tightening torque :
39.2 ~ 53.9 N.m (4.0 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 28.8 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Components (1)
Page 207 sur 233

[General Type]

1. Roof trim 3. Sunvisor [RH]

2. Sunvisor [LH]

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 208 sur 233

1. Sunvisor 2. Retainer

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 210 sur 233

1. Assist handle

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location

1. Roof Trim Assembly

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Page 212 sur 233

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape, and apply protective tape around the related parts, to prevent
damage.
• Use a plastic panel removal tool to remove interior trim pieces to protect from marring the surface.
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels.
1. Remove the rear seat assembly.
(Refer to Rear Seat - "Rear Seat Assembly")
2. Remove both sides of the front pillar trim.
(Refer to Interior Trim - "Front Pillar Trim")
3. Remove both sides of the center pillar upper trim.
(Refer to Interior Trim - "Center Pillar Trim")
4. Remove both sides of the rear pillar trim.
(Refer to Interior Trim - "Rear Pillar Trim")
5. Remove both sides of the sunvisor and retainer.
(Refer to Roof Trim - "Sunvisor")
6. Remove both sides of the assist handle.
(Refer to Roof Trim - "Assist Handle")
7. Remove the overhead console lamp.
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "Overhead Console Lamp")
8. Remove the room lamp.
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "Room Lamp")
9. Recline the front seat towards the rear of the vehicle as far back as possible.
10. Remove the auto defog sensor cover (A).

11. Remove the ECM mirror cover (A), and then remove the auto defog sensor connector (B).

12. Disconnect the ECM mirror connector (B).

Page 213 sur 233

13. Disconnect the roof trim main connector (A) and the mounting clips (B) in the front pillar.

[Driver's]

[Passenger's]

14. Using a clip remover, detach the roof trim assembly mounting clips (A).

15. Carefully remove the tail gate weatherstrip.

16. Carefully lower the rear side of the roof trim.
17. To remove the roof trim, press the lock pin (A) in the direction of the arrow.
Page 214 sur 233

18. Before removing the roof trim, slightly lower the roof trim and disconnect the roof antenna connectors (A).

19. Remove the roof trim assembly (A) from the vehicle through the tail gate.

20. Remove the room lamp.

(Refer to Body Electrical System - "Room Lamp")
21. Remove roof trim wiring harness (A) from the roof trim assembly (B).

• Take care not to damage the roof trim wiring harness (A) when removing.
Page 215 sur 233

1. When installing the roof trim wiring harness (A) on the roof trim (B), keep applying the hot melt using a hot melt gun tool.
2. Attach the anti-noise pad (C) on the roof trim (B) to prevent noise.
22. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are plugged in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Adjustment
1. After loosening the tail gate hinge (A) mounting bolt, adjust the tail gate by moving it up and down, or right and left.
2. Adjust the tail gate height by turning the tail gate overslam bumpers (B).
3. After loosening the tail gate striker (C) mounting bolts, adjust the tail gate striker by moving it up and down, or right and left.
Page 216 sur 233

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 217 sur 233

1. Tail gate assembly

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Wear gloves to protect hands from injury.

• When removing and installing the tail gate, work in a group of two or more.
1. Remove the tail gate trim.
(Refer to Tail Gate - "Tail Gate Trim")
2. Disconnect the washer nozzle hose (A).
Page 218 sur 233

3. Disconnect the connectors (A) and tail gate wiring harness (B).
4. Loosen the ground bolts (C).
5. After loosening the mounting bolts, remove the tail gate assembly (D).
Tightening torque :
21.6~26.5 N.m (2.2~2.7 kgf.m, 15.9~19.5 lb-ft)

6. Using a screwdriver, lift the socket clips (A) up slightly on both ends of the tail gate lifter (B).
Page 219 sur 233

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the tail gate locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.
• Adjust the tail gate alignment.
• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.
• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 220 sur 233

1. Tail gate trim

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 222 sur 233

1. Tail gate latch assembly

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape, and apply protective tape around the related parts, to prevent
damage.
• Take care not to scratch the body surface.
1. Remove the tail gate trim.
(Refer to Tail Gate - "Tail Gate Trim")
2. After loosening the mounting bolts, remove the tail gate latch assembly (A).
Tightening torque :
6.9~10.8 N.m (0.7~1.1 kgf.m, 5.1~8.0 lb-ft)
Page 223 sur 233

3. Disconnect the tail gate latch connector (A).

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the tail gate locks/unlocks and opens/closes properly.
• Adjust the tail gate alignment.
• Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Component Location
Page 224 sur 233

1. Tail gate back panel

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape, and apply protective tape around the related parts, to prevent
damage.
• Take care not to scratch the body surface.
1. Remove the tail gate trim.
(Refer to Tail Gate - "Tail Gate Trim")
2. Disconnect the back view camera connector (A).
Page 225 sur 233

3. Loosen the tail gate back panel mounting nuts (A).

4. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the tail gate back panel (A).
Page 226 sur 233

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are plugged in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Take care to not let the tail gate fall on you as the lifts are removed. Have a helper hold the tail gate open, or use a secure method
to hold it open.
1. Using a screwdriver (A), lift up slightly the socket clips (B) of both ends on the lifter (D), and then remove the lifter from the bracket (C).
Page 227 sur 233

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the tail gate locks and opens properly and locks securely.
Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement
1. Remove the tail gate weatherstrip (A).

• Do not apply sealant to the body.

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Install the weatherstrip aligned with center line (B).

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

(Refer to Interior Trim - "Door Scuff Trim")

4. Remove the luggage cover board (A).
5. Remove the luggage box (B).
6. Remove the rear luggage mat (C).
7. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the rear transverse trim (D).
8. After loosening the mounting screws, remove the luggage side trim (E).
9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Replace any damaged clips.

1. Luggage cover board 5. Luggage side trim [LH]

2. Luggage box 6. Luggage side trim [RH]
3. Rear luggage mat 7. Shelf covering
4. Rear transverse trim

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Components
Page 229 sur 233

1. Windshield glass 2. Windshield glass moulding

Body (Interior and Exterior)

Removal

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.

1. Remove both sides of the front pillar trim.
(Refer to Interior Trim - "Front Pillar Trim")
2. Remove both sides of the A pillar garnish.
(Refer to Body Side Moulding- "A Pillar Garnish")
3. Remove the cowl top cover.
(Refer to "Cowl Top Cover")
Page 230 sur 233

4. Remove the inside rear view mirror assembly.

(Refer to Mirror - "Inside Rear View Mirror")
5. Remove the LDWS unit.
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Unit")
6. Cut out the adhesive using a utility knife (A).

• Use a utility knife with blade length of 8-12 inches.

7. Cut off the sealant on the edge (B) by pulling the piano wire (A) to the left and right.

8. If the piano wire (A) is visible from the chassis, push it into the edges.

9. Cut off the sealant on (A-A), (B-B) and (C-C) by pulling the piano wire (A) to the left and right.

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• Be careful not to burn your hands as friction heat may be generated while working on the wires.
• Be careful not to disconnect the piano wire.
Page 231 sur 233

10. Remove the windshield glass (B) carefully using the glass holder (A).

Installtion
1. Using a utility knife, scrape off and smooth out old adhesives to a thickness of about 2mm (0.08 inc.) on the bonding surface around the
entire windshield opening flange:

A. Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body as damaged paint may interfere with proper bonding.

• Remove the rubber dam and fastereners from the body.

• Mask off surrounding surfaces before painting.
2. Clean the bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease and water away from the surface.
3. After installing the spacer (A), temporarily install the windshield glass (B) by positioning it in the center and place the alignment mark (C).

4. Peel off the tape from the windshield glass moulding (A) and install the moulding on the windshield glass (B).
Page 232 sur 233

5. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to the original adhesive remaining around the windshield opening flange. Let the body
primer dry for at least 10 minutes.

• Do not apply glass primer to the body, and be careful not to mix up glass and body primer sponges.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
• Mask off the dashboard before painting the flange.

6. Apply a light coat of glass primer to the outside of the fasteners.

• Never touch the primed surface with your hand. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the glass properly, causing a leak after
the windshield glass is installed.
• Do not apply body primer to the glass.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from the primer.

7. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead of
adhesive (B) around the edge of the windshield glass (A) between the fastener and moulding as shown. Apply the adhesive within 30
minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner.
Sealant Bead width
Height : 12 mm (0.4724 in.)
Width : 8 mm (0.3150 in.)
Page 233 sur 233

8. Use suction cups (A) to hold the windshield glass (B) over the opening, align it with the alignment marks (C) as in step 15, and set it
down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the windshield until its edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do not open or
close the doors until the adhesive is dry..

9. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted surface or the windshield, wipe
with a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol.
10. Let the adhesive dry for at least one hour, then spray water over the roof and check for leaks. If a leak occurs, let it dry, then seal with
sealant :
A. Let the vehicle stand for at least four hours after windshield installation. If the vehicle must be driven within 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.
B. Keep the windshield dry for the first hour after installation.
11. Install the LDWS unit.
12. Install the inside rear view mirror assembly.
13. Install the cowl top cover.
14. Install the A pillar garnish.
15. Install the front pillar trim.
Page 1 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Safety Precaution

Sinse Electric Vehicle contains a high voltage, battery mishandling the high voltage system or vehicle may lead to a serious accident
including electric shock and electric leakage.

• All the high voltage wiring and connectors are in orange.

• Inform of possible danger of high voltage by placing a "high voltage caution" sign on the vehicle as in the image below.
Page 2 sur 295
Page 3 sur 295

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Insulation gloves Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage
components
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]
Page 4 sur 295

Insulation shoes

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation clothes
components

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses

Used in the following cases :

• During Removal & installation or inspection of the high
voltage battery terminals or wiring, which spark might happen.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

All removed high voltage components are placed on an

Insulation mat
insulation mat to prevent safety accidents.

Insulation sheet is used to cover high voltage components to

Insulation sheet protect people not wearing personal protective equipment from
safety accidents.

Warning tape Used for infomring that it is dangerous to come over this line.
Page 5 sur 295

Personal Protective Equipment Inspection

• Check that the personal protective equipment is not damaged.

• Check that the insulation gloves are not torn or damaged.
• Wear the insulation glove after removing moisture.

Fold the insulation glove as above.

Fold again 3~4 times to make it airtight.
Squeeze the inflated glove to see if the glove is torn or damaged.
Caution when repairing the power cable

Precautions when handling high voltage battery

• Battery Control System - Refer to "High Voltage Battery Handling Guide"

Precautions in case of fire in High Voltage Battery System

Precautions in case of high voltage battery gas and/or electrolyte leakage

Page 6 sur 295

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug.
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• Gas is hydrogen and alkali vapor. If the fire occurred indoor, ventilate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline
solution.
• If leaked vapor or liquid gets in your eye, immediately clean with running water, then get medical attention.
• In case of gas leakage due to high temperature, do NOT use the battery until the high voltage battery cools down to room temperature.

Precautions when handling vehicle after an accident

Preparations when servicing accident affected vehicle

Precautions when EV is unattended for a prolonged period

Hybrid Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery / Charging Precautions

If the POE oil in the system gets mixed with PAG oil, it may result in dielectric breakdown due to decreased volumetric resistivity and
inoperative A/C compressor, disabling the A/C compressor.

Body Electrical System

High Voltage Shut-off Procedure

3. After loosening the nut, remove the safety plug service cover (A).
Safety plug service cover mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Remove the safety plug (A).

Remove the safety plug in the follwing order.

Page 8 sur 295

(3) Remove the high voltage cable (A).

(4) Measure the voltage between the inverter terminals.

Less than 30V : High voltage circuit properly shut
More than 30V : Faulty on high voltage circuit
Page 9 sur 295

General Troubleshooting Information

Before Troubleshooting
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box.
2. Using KIA approved battery tester, check the battery condition. Check the battery for damage and clean / tight connections.
(Refer to Engine Electrical System - "Battery")

• Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator
diodes.
• Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring.
3. Check the alternator belt tension (D).

Handling Connectors
Page 10 sur 295

1. Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals.
2. Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with grease (except watertight connectors).
3. All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).

4. Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on another component. This clip has a
pull type lock.
5. Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the connector from its mount bracket
(A).

6. Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
7. Always reinstall plastic covers.

8. Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
Page 11 sur 295

9. Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B).

10. The backs of some connectors are packed with grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease (A) is contaminated, replace it.

11. Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked.
12. Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down.

Handling Wires And Harnesses

1. Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
2. Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).

3. Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, and then squeeze the expansion tabs to release the clip.
Page 12 sur 295

4. After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts.
5. Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and holes, and from exposed screws
and bolts.
6. Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B).

Testing And Repairs

1. Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation.
Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break with electrical tape.
2. After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them.
3. When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described in this manual.
4. If possible, insert the remover tool from the wire side (except waterproof connector).

5. Use a probe with a tapered tip.

Refer to the user's guide in the wiring repair kit (Pub No. : TRK 015.)
Page 13 sur 295

Five-step Troubleshooting
1. Verify the complaint
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to verify the customer complaint. Note the symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or
testing until you have narrowed down the problem area.
2. Analyze the schematic
Look up the schematic for the problem circuit.
Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by tracing the current paths from the power feed through the circuit components to ground.
If several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or ground is a likely cause.
Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit operation, identify one or more possible causes of the problem.
3. Isolate the problem by testing the circuit.
Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple procedure is the key to efficient
troubleshooting.
Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to make tests at points that are easily accessible.
4. Fix the problem
Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe procedures.
5. Make sure the circuit works
Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire problem. If the problem was a blown fuse,
be sure to test all of the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur.

Battery Reset

Description
When reconnecting the battery cable after disconnecting, recharging battery after discharged or installing the memory fuse located on the
driver's side panel after removing, be sure to reset systems mentioned on the below table.
In addition, when replacing or reinstalling their fuses after removing, they should be reset according to the below table. Please refer to the
below table when servicing.
System Resetting
Whenever the battery is disconnected, discharged or the related fuse is replaced or reinstalled, reset the Auto
up/down window system according to the procedure below.
Auto up/down
1) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
window
2) Pull up the power window switch in order that the window can close completely, and then keep pulling up the
power switch for about 1 second.
Whenever the battery is disconnected, discharged or the related fuse is replaced or reinstalled, the
panoramaroof system must be reset according to the procedure below.
1) Turn the ignition key to the ON position and then close the panoramaroof completely.
2) Release the panoramaroof control lever.
3) Press and hold the CLOSE button for more than 10 seconds until the sunroof has moved slightly.
Panoramaroof
4) Release the panoramaroof control lever.
5) Press and hold the CLOSE button once again until the sunroof do as follows.
• Tilt → Slide Open → Slide Close
Then, release the lever.
6) Reset procedure of panorama system is finished.
When the battery is disconnected and reconnected, the set functions of the trip computer become initialized. So,
Trip computer
you need to explain this information to the customer.
Whenever the battery terminals or related fuses are disconnected, you must reset the time in audio head unit.
Clock
(Refer to Audio owner's manual)
Audio
Page 14 sur 295

When the battery is disconnected and reconnected, the customer's radio stations become initialized. So, you
need to record the customer's radio stations prior to service, and after service, set the customer's radio stations
into the audio.

Body Electrical System

Special Service Tools

Tool Name / Number Illustration Description

RKE Battery Checker Measuring the RKE battery

09954-2P100 voltage

Body Electrical System

Specifications
Items Specifications
Rated voltage DC 5V
Load Max. 1.5mA (When head lamp lighting)
100 1.89 ± 0.42(V)
Illuminations (LUX)
200 3.55 ± 0.78(V)

Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 15 sur 295

1. Auto light sensor 4. Tail lamps

2. Head lamps 5. BCM (Body Control Module)
3. Lighting switch (Auto)

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
Page 16 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Inspection
1. Operate the auto light switch, then check for continuity between terminals of multi-function switch connector.
Page 17 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Inspection
In the state of IGN1 ON, when the multi function switch module detects auto light switch on, tail lamp relay output and head lamp low relay
output are controlled according to auto light sensor's input.
If IGN1 ON, The BCM monitors the range of this supply and raises up a failure as soon as the supply’s voltage is out of range. Then this
failure occurs and as long as this is present, the head lamp must be turned on without taking care about the sunlight level provided by the
sensor.
This is designed to prevent any head lamp cut off when the failure occurs during the night.

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the photo & auto light sensor (A) from crash pad upper side by using screw (-) driver.
3. Remove the auto light connector (B).

Installation
1. Reconnect the auto light connector.
2. Install the auto light sensor.
Body Electrical System

Specifications
AVN Head Unit
Item Specification
Power supply DC 14.4V Negative ground
ACC OFF & ADM OFF and then after 96 hours : Max. 0.5mA
Dark current USA ACC OFF & ADM OFF and then before 96 hours (average) : Max. 10mA
(Head unit only) After ACC OFF & ADM OFF, Within 20 seconds (average) : Max. 70mA
CANADA When ACC OFF & ADM OFF : Max. 0.5mA
Frequency range / FM 87.5 ~ 107.9 MHz / 200 kHz
Channel space AM 530 ~ 1,710 kHz / 9 kHz
FM MIN 50 dB (20kHz LPF)
S/N
AM MIN 45 dB (20kHz LPF)
Active area 176.4mm(H) × 99.36mm(V)
Dislpay
Resolution 800 × RGB × 480
GPS receiver Frequency 1.57542 Ghz
Storage Capacity Flash Memory (NAND) : 16GB

Speaker
Page 18 sur 295

Item Specification
Front MAX 40W
Input power (W or V) Rear MAX 40W
Tweeter MAX 40W
Front 4.0 ± 0.6
Impedance (Ω) Rear 4.0 ± 0.6
Tweeter 4.0 ± 0.6
Number of speaker 6

Body Electrical System

Components Location

1. AVN (A/V & Navigation head unit) 5. Rear door speaker

2. Tweeter speaker 6. Antenna feeder cable
Page 19 sur 295

3. Roof antenna 7. Back view camera

4. Front door speaker 8. Feeder cable joint connector

Body Electrical System

Description
Limitations Of The Navigation system
GPS Signal Reception State
As the GPS satellite frequency is received/transmitted in straight lines, reception may not work if hiding devices are placed on or near the
GPS antenna or when traveling through the following locations.
• Tunnels
• Basement parking structures
• Underneath an overpass
• Roads within forested areas
• Areas near high rise buildings
• Roads within canyons

Vehicle Position Display

1. If multipass errors occur due to reflections from buildings or related causes, the current position mark on the navigation may differ from
the actual position of the vehicle.
2. The position of the vehicle on the navigation may be different from the actual position if the vehicle is under the occur, driving for a short
period of time will vehicle through map matching or GPS information (several minutes may be necessary in certain cases).
A. When driving on a Y-shaped road with a narrow angle, the current position may be displayed in the opposite direction.
B. If the vehicle is loaded onto a car transport vehicle, the current position mark may be stalled on the last position prior to loading.
C. When driving on a spiral-shaped road.
D. When driving in mountain regions with sharp turns or sudden brakes.
E. When entering a road after having been in an underground parking structure, building parking structure, or turnable with many
rotations.
F. When the tires have recently been replaced (Especially upon use of spare or studless tires)
G. If the battery terminal is removed.
H. When driving in city streets, the current position may be displayed on the opposite side or on an off-road position.
I. When changing the zoom level from the maximum zoom in level to a different zoom level, the current position mark may be displayed
on a different road.
J. When driving in heavy traffic with frequent go · stops in traffic or intersections.
K. When driving under slippery conditions, such as heavy sand, snow, etc.
L. When driving with the tire chain in place.
M. When using a tire with an incorrect size specification.
N. When the tire pressure for the 4 tires are different.
O. When the replacement tire is a worn or used tire (Especially studless tires having passed a 2nd seasons, etc.)
P. When driving near high-rise buildings
Q. If a roof carrier has been installed
R. When driving under high speeds or having calculated a long-distance route.

Route Guidance
Suitable route guidance may not occur caused by search conditions or the driving position.
• Guidance to go straight may be given while driving on a straight road.
• Guidance may not be given even when having turned at an intersection.
• There are certain intersections in which guidance may not occur.
• A route guidance signaling entrance into a no enter zone may occur (No enter zone, road under construction, etc.)
• Guidance may be given to a position removed from the actual destination if roads to reach the actual destination do not exist or are too
narrow.
• Faulty voice guidance may be given if the vehicle breaks from the designated route (ex : if a turn is made at an intersection while the
navigation provided guidance to go straight).
• Map Data may be missing or incorrect causing route guidance to not be given.
Page 20 sur 295

Route Re-calculation
The following events may occur after conducting route recalculation.
• Guidance may be given to a position differing from the current position when turning at an intersection.
• Route recalculation may take a longer period of time when driving under high speeds.
• A route guidance signaling for a U-Turn in a No U-Turn location may occur.
• A route guidance signaling entrance into a no enter zone may occur (No enter zone, road under construction, etc).
• Guidance may be given to a position removed from the actual destination do not exist or are too narrow.
• Faulty voice guidance may be given if the vehicle breaks from the designated route (ex : if a turn is made at an intersection while the
navigation provided guidance to go straight)
Body Electrical System

Components

AVN (A/V & Navigation) Head Unit Connector

Page 21 sur 295

Connector Pin Information

No. Connector A Connector B Connector C
1 Rear left speaker (+) MM CAN high C CAN (-)
2 Front left speaker (+) - C CAN (+)
3 Front right speaker (+) Parking -
4 Rear right speaker (+) Steering remocon -
5 - - OBC wake up
6 - MTS key -
7 ALT L AUX video -
8 Illumination (+) AUX right input -
9 R position AUX ground -
10 Rear left speaker (-) MIC (+) -
11 Front left speaker (-) Battery (+) B CAN (+)
12 Front right speaker (-) Battery (+) B CAN (-)
13 Rear right speaker (-) MM CAN low -
14 Ignition 3 Auto light Airbag
15 - P position -
16 Door unlock Speed -
17 Illumination (-) Remocon ground -
18 Remote antenna ACC Door open
19 AUX video ground -
20 AUX DETECT -
21 AUX left input Ground
22 MIC (-) Video ground
23 Ground Camera video input
24 Ground Camera battery (+)
Page 22 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Removal

Put on gloves to protect your hands.

3. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the center fascia panel.

4. Remove the AVN head unit (A) after loosening the mounting screws.

5. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the AVN heat unit.

Page 24 sur 295

Installation
1. Connect the AVN head unit connectors.
2. Install the AVN head unit.
3. Install the center fascia panel.
4. Connet the negative (-) battery terminal.

Make sure the AVN Head unit connectors are plugged in properly and the antenna cable is connected properly.

Inspection
1. Check the specified value of AVN head unit connectors in specified condition.
Connector A
No. Name Terminal Description Condition Specified Condition
A1 Rear left speaker (+) Loudspeaker Rear Left+ Needed connection to the car Analog output
A2 Front left speaker (+) Loudspeaker Front Left+ Needed connection to the car Analog output
A3 Front right speaker (+) Loudspeaker Front Right+ Needed connection to the car Analog output
A4 Rear right speaker (+) Loudspeaker Rear Right+ Needed connection to the car Analog output
A5 - -
A6 - -
A7 - -
A8 Illumination (+) Rheostat from vehicle + Needed connection to the car
A9 Detent Detent Needed connection to the car
A10 Rear left speaker (-) Loudspeaker Rear Left- Needed connection to the car Analog output
A11 Front left speaker (-) Loudspeaker Front Left- Needed connection to the car Analog output
A12 Front right speaker (-) Loudspeaker Front Right- Needed connection to the car Analog output
A13 Rear right speaker (-) Loudspeaker Rear Right- Needed connection to the car Analog output
A14 - -
A15 - -
A16 - -
A17 Illumination (-) Rheostat from vehicle - Needed connection to the car
Remote Power supply for
A18 Remote antenna Acc on 9V ~ 18V
Antenna

Connector B
No. Name Terminal Description Condition Specified Condition
Communication with
B1 MM CAN high MM_CAN_HIGH Needed connection to the car
external amp
B2 - - - -
B3 Parking PARKING from vehicle - -
B4 Steering remocon Steering Wheel Remote Control Steering Wheel switch pushed 0.5V ~ 3V
B5 - - - -
B6 MTS key - - -
B7 AUX video AUX Video Needed connection to the MultiJack -
B8 AUX right input AUX Right Sound Signal A waveform synchronized
with sound is output
Page 25 sur 295

External Auxiliary device is Audio

playing
(At time of Aux jack use)
B9 AUX ground AUX Reference Ground Needed connection to the MultiJack Below 1 ohm
A waveform synchronized
B10 MIC (+) Bluetooth MIC+ Input the Voice Signal via MIC
with Voice data via MIC
B11 Battery (+) Battery Always 11 ~ 14 V
B12 Battery (+) Battery Always 11 ~ 14 V
Communication with
B13 MM CAN low MM_CAN_LOW Needed connection to the car
external amp
B14 Auto light AUTO-LIGHT from vehicle - -
B15 P position P-POSITON from vehicle - -
Engine switch on(IGN), car is moved Approx. 5V Level Pulse
B16 Speed Speed Sensor Signal
slowly Generation
Steering Wheel Remote Control
B17 Remocon ground Always Below 1 ohm
GND
B18 ACC Accessory Engine switch on(ACC) 11 ~ 14 V
B19 AUX video ground AUX Video GND Always Below 1 ohm
B20 AUX DETECT AUX Signal Input Detect Auxiliary device is inserted 0V(Low) → 5V(High)
External Auxiliary device is Audio
playing A waveform synchronized
B21 AUX left input AUX Left Sound Signal
with sound is output
(At time of Aux jack use)
A waveform synchronized
B22 MIC (-) Bluetooth MIC- Input the Voice Signal via MIC
with Voice data via MIC
B23 Ground Ground Always Below 1 ohm
B24 Ground Ground Always Below 1 ohm

Connector C
No. Name Terminal Description Condition Specified Condition
C1 C CAN (-) CHASSIS_CAN_LOW Needed connection to the car -
C2 C CAN (+) CHASSIS_CAN_HIGH Needed connection to the car -
C3 - - - -
C4 - - - -
C5 OBC wake up - - -
C6 - - - -
C7 - - - -
C8 - - - -
C9 - - - -
C10 - - - -
C11 B CAN (+) BODY_CAN_HIGH Needed connection to the car -
C12 B CAN (-) BODY_CAN_LOW Needed connection to the car -
C13 - - - -
C14 Airbag AIRBAG from vehicle - -
C15 - - - -
C16 Navigation voice (-) NAVI_VOICE- Needed connection to the AMP Analog Audio Output
C17 Navigation voice (+) NAVI_VOICE+ Needed connection to the AMP Analog Audio Output
C18 Door open DOOR OPEN from vehicle - -
C19 - - - -
C20 - - - -
C21 Ground Ground Always Below 1 ohm
C22 Video ground CARMERA Video Ground Needed connection to the CARMERA Below 1 ohm
C23 Camera video input CARMERA Video Needed connection to the CARMERA NA
C24 Camera battery (+) CARMERA Video POWER Needed connection to the CARMERA 5V~5.5V

USB Connector
No. Name Terminal Description Condition Specified Condition
1 USB VCC USB / iPod power USB/iPod device is inserted 4.9V ~ 5.1V
2 USB D (-) USB D- USB device is inserted 3.2V ~ 3.45
Page 26 sur 295

3 USB D (+) USB D+ USB device is inserted 3.2V ~ 3.45

4 USB ground USB / iPod Ground USB/iPod device is inserted Below 1 ohm

Body Electrical System

Inspection
1. Troubleshooting for Speaker
(1) Basic inspection of speaker
Inspect the sound from speaker after verifying that the speaker mounting screws is removed and the wiring connector is connected
precisely to remove vibration transmitted from body trims and surrounding parts.

(2) Case Troubleshooting

No. Case Inspection/Remedy
1. Before replacing the speaker, inspect that the mounting screw is installed normally.
1 Trembling sound 2. After re-installing the speaker, verify that no trembling sound is heard.
3. When hearing a trembling sound again, replace the speaker with new one.
1. Check if the wiring connector is connected normally. If not, reconnect the wiring connector.
2 Noise
2. When a noise is heard on turning radio on, replace the speaker with new one.
Inspection of the wiring connection between the battery and the speaker
1. Before replacing the speaker, inspect the wiring and connections in the speaker circuit.
2. Check the supplying power to the speaker and the resistance, and then inspect the sound quality.

3 Poor working

3. If the speaker works poorly, replace it with new one.

When handling the speaker :

- Dropping or rough handling of the speaker can cause damage.
- Be careful not to spill water or oil on the speaker.
- Caution when dealing with speaker because the diaphragm is paper and can be easily torn by impact and external force.
- Electrical mishandling of speakers is not covered by manufacturers warranty.

Removal

Put on gloves to protect your hands.

Page 27 sur 295

Front Speaker
1. Remove the front door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Front Door Trim")
2. Remove the front speaker (A) after loosening the screws.

Rear Speaker
1. Remove the rear door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Rear Door Trim")
2. Remove the rear speaker(A) after loosening the screws.

Tweeter Speaker
1. Using a screwdriver or remover (A), remove the speaker grill (B) from the side air vent.
Page 28 sur 295

2. Separate the tweeter speaker (A) after loosening the mounting screws.

3. Remove the tweeter speaker (B) after disconnecting the connector (A).

Installation
Front Speaker
1. Install the front speaker.
2. Install the front door trim.

Rear Speaker
1. Install the rear speaker.
2. Install the rear door trim.

Tweeter Speaker
1. Connect the connector.
2. Install the tweeter speaker and tweeter speaker grill.
Body Electrical System

Components
Page 29 sur 295

1. Audio switch 3. Bluetooth hands free switch

2. Cruise switch 4. Trip switch

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
Page 30 sur 295
Page 31 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Inspection
1. Check for resistance or output voltage between terminals in each switch position.

[Audio]

Switch Connector terminal Resistance (±5%) Output voltage

Seek up 2-4 430 Ω 0.4 V ± 0.22
Seek down 2-4 1.1 kΩ 1.0 V ± 0.22
Mode 2-4 2.11 kΩ 1.5 V ± 0.22
Mute 2-4 3.11 kΩ 2.0 V ± 0.22
Volume up 2-4 4.61 kΩ 2.5 V ± 0.22
Volume down 2-4 6.81 kΩ 3.0 V ± 0.22

[Cruise]
Page 32 sur 295

Switch Connector terminal Resistance (±5%) Output voltage

Cancel 2-4 180 Ω 0.8 V ± 0.17
Set 2-4 330 Ω 1.2 V ± 0.17
Resume 2-4 550 Ω 1.8 V ± 0.22
Cruise 2-4 880 Ω 2.3 V ± 0.22
Speed limit 2-4 2.54 kΩ 3.6 V ± 0.22

[Voice + Bluetooth]

Switch Connector terminal Resistance (±5%) Output voltage

Voice 2-4 10.71 kΩ 3.5 V ± 0.22
Call off 2-4 18.91 kΩ 4.0 V ± 0.22
Call 2-4 40.91 kΩ 4.5 V ± 0.22

[Flex steer + Trip + Reset]

Switch Connector terminal Resistance (±5%) Output voltage

Flex steer 2-4 180 Ω 0.8 V ± 0.17
Trip 2-4 330 Ω 1.2 V ± 0.17
Reset 2-4 550 Ω 1.8 V ± 0.22
Page 33 sur 295

Removal
[Upper Steering Wheel Remote Control Switch]
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the driver airbag module.
(Refer to the RT group)
3. Remove the steering wheel.
(Refer to the ST group - "Steering column & shaft")
4. Loosen the mounting screws from the rear steering wheel cover.

5. Separate the upper steering wheel remote control switch (A) from the steering wheel.

[LH]

[RH]

6. Remove the upper steering wheel control switch (B) disconnecting the connector (A).

[LH]
Page 34 sur 295

[RH]

[Lower Steering Wheel Remote Control Switch]

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the driver airbag module.
(Refer to the RT group)
3. Remove the steering wheel.
(Refer to the ST group - "Steering column & shaft")
4. Loosen the mounting screws from the rear steering wheel cover.

5. Separate the upper steering wheel remote control switch (A) from the steering wheel.

[LH]
Page 35 sur 295

[RH]

6. Remove the upper steering wheel control switch (B) disconnecting the connector (A).

[LH]

[RH]

7. Separate the lower steering wheel control switch (A) loosening the mounting screws.

[LH]
Page 36 sur 295

[RH]

8. Remove the lower steering wheel control switch (B) disconnecting the connector (A).

[LH]

[RH]

Installation
1. Install the remote control switch on the steering wheel.
Page 37 sur 295

2. Install the steering wheel.

3. Reconnect the remote control switch connector and airbag connectors.

Make sure that the switch connector is plugged in properly.

4. Install the driver airbag module.
5. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.
Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram

Body Electrical System

Description
Page 38 sur 295

The multimedia jack on the console upper cover is for customers who like to listen to external portable music players like the MP3, iPod and
etc., through the vehicle's sound system when it is linked to this jack. The customer has this added option.
In case of distortions from media connected to the AUX source, the audio unit may not be defective but the output level of the used media
does not match the specification of the AUX input.

Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the floor console upper cover.
(Refer to Body - "Floor Console Assembly")
3. Remove the multimedia jack (A).
Page 39 sur 295

Installation
1. Install the multimedia jack.
2. Install the floor console upper cover.
3. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.
Body Electrical System

Components
Page 40 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Disconnect the roof antenna connectors (A).
Page 41 sur 295

3. Disconnect the roof antenna power connector (A).

4. Remove the roof antenna after loosening a nut (A).

Installation
1. Connect the roof antenna connectors.
2. Install the rear roof trim.
3. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.

- Make sure that the cables and connectors are plugged in properly.
- Check the AVN system.
Body Electrical System

Troubleshooting Guide
Troubleshooting (Step type)

Symptom Suspected area Repairment

Radio receiver power source circuit R-1
Pressing power switch does not turn on system
LCD module R-1
Steering pad switch circuit R-3
Panel switch does not function AVN head unit front PCB ass'y R-1
Radio receiver power source circuit R-1
Page 42 sur 295

Radio receiver power source circuit R-1

No sound can be heard from speakers
Check the wiring between speakers and AVN H/U R-6
Noise occurs Proceed to "noise occurs" R-5
Radio broadcast cannot be received (poor Proceed to "radio broadcast cannot be received"
R-4
reception) (poor reception)
Illumnination for radio receiver does not come on Illumination circuit R-6
within light control switch on Radio receiver power source circuit R-1
Display does not dim with light control switch
Illumination circuit R-6
turned on
Power does not turn off AVN H/U R-1
AVN H/U R-1
Bluetooth voice recognition fault
MIC input R-7
AVN head unit R-1
USB I/F error USB device fault R-8
Check the multimedia connector R-8
AVN H/U R-1
iPod I/F error
Check the multimedia connector R-8
AVN H/U R-1
AUX connection error
Check the multimedia connector R-8

R-1 : Replace the AVN head unit

1. Check the same problem after replacing the AVN H/U.
OK ▶ If AVN is normal operating, replace the AVN H/U.

NG ▶ Check the vehicle wiring. (Refer to removal procedure, R-2)

R-2 : Check the power connection of AVN H/U

1. Remove the AVN H/U.
2. Check the specified condition of terminal.

Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition

CON-B11/B12 ↔ GND (B+) Always 9 ~ 16 V
CON-B18 ↔ GND (ACC) Always 9 ~ 16 V
CON-B23 ↔ GND Always Below 1Ω
CON-B24 ↔ GND Always Below 1Ω

NG ▶ Check again after repairing or replacing the cable harness or connector.

Page 43 sur 295

R-3 : Check the steering wheel remote control

1. Check the steering wheel remote control connector specification (Refer to “Audio remote control inspection”)
OK ▶ Replace the AVN H/U

NG ▶ Replace the steering wheel remote control switch

R-4 : Radio broadcast cannot be received (Bad reception)

1. Check the radio broadcast reception after replacing the AVN H/U
OK ▶ If AVN is normal operating, replace the AVN H/U

NG ▶ Go to step 2

2. Check the antenna jack

OK ▶ Check again the radio broadcast reception after connecting the antenna jack

NG ▶ Go to step 3

3. Check the antenna amp input voltage (Refer to “Antenna –Glass antenna circuit inspection”)
OK ▶ Check the antenna amp input voltage (Refer to “Antenna –Antenna cable”)

NG ▶ Go to step 4

4. Check the feeder cable connection (Refer to “Antenna –Antenna cable”)

OK ▶ Check again after repairing or replacing the antenna feeder cable.

NG ▶ Go to step 5

5. Check and repair the roof antenna.

R-5 : Check that speakers are installed tightly

OK ▶ Install the speakers tightly

NG ▶ Install the speakers tightly

1. Noise source description

Condition in Which Noise Occurs Noise Type
Depressing accelerator pedal increases noise, and stopping engine stops noise Generator nosie
immediately
When A/C or heater is operating Blower motor noise
• When rapidly accelerating on unpaved road Fuel pump noise
• When engine switch is turned on (IG)
• When horn switch is pressed and released Horn noise
• When horn switch is pressed and held down
Running engine causes soft noise, and stopping engine stops noise immediately Ignition noise
Noise occurs synchronously with turn signal flash Flasher noise
Noise occurs during window washer operation Washer noise
Running engine causes noise, but stopping engine does not stop noise Engine coolant temperature sensor noise
When wiper is operating Wiper noise
When brake pedal is depressed Stop light switch noise
Other Static electricity on vehicle

R-6 : Check again after replacing the AVN H/U

Page 44 sur 295

OK ▶ Removed the AVN H/U

NG ▶ Go to step 1

1. Check the input signal of illumination (+)

Tester Connection Condition Specificed Condition
CON-A8 ↔ GND Always 9~16 V

OK ▶ Check the vehicle wiring

NG ▶ Go to step2

2. Check the illumination (-) input signal using the oscilloscope

Tester Connection Condition Specificed Condition
CON-A17 ↔ GND Always Check the PWM waveform

OK ▶ Check the vehicle wiring and cluster PWM output

NG ▶ Go to step3

3. Check the vehicle illumination control unit

R-7 : Check the microphone input condition

Tester Connection Condition Specificed Condition

CON-B10 ↔ MIC (+) Always Below 1Ω
CON-B22 ↔ MIC (-) Always Below 1Ω
CON-B22 ↔ GND Always Open
Page 45 sur 295

OK ▶ Check the vehicle wiring and microphone

NG ▶ Go to step1

1. Test again after replacing the microphone

R-8 : Test after replacing the AVN H/U

1. Test after replacing the multimedia jack

OK ▶ Replace the multimedia jack

NG ▶ Go to step 2

2. Check the vehicle USB cable.

OK ▶ Replace the vehicle USB cable

NG ▶ Go to step 3

3. Check the multimedia jack connector

Tester Connection Condition Specificed Condition
AVN H/U CON-B8 ↔ Multimedia jack CON-C2 Always Below 1Ω
AVN H/U CON-B21 ↔ Multimedia jack CON-C1 Always Below 1Ω
AVN H/U CON-B20 ↔ Multimedia jack CON-C3 Always Below 1Ω
AVN H/U CON-B9 ↔ Multimedia jack CON-C7 Always Below 1Ω

Troubleshooting (Flow chart type)

There are six areas where a problem can occur
: the power system, the LCD/LED system, the sound system, the radio system, the USB/iPod/AUX system, and the bluetooth system.
Troubleshooting enables you to confine the problem to a particular area.
Page 46 sur 295
Page 47 sur 295
Page 48 sur 295
Page 49 sur 295
Page 50 sur 295
Page 51 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 52 sur 295

1. Back view camera 2. AVN head unit

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
Page 53 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Description
Back view camera will activate when the backup light is ON with the ignition switch ON and the shift lever in the R position.
This system is a supplemental system that shows behind the vehicle through the monitor while backing-up.

This system is a supplementary function only. It is the responsibility of the driver or always check the inside/ outside rearview mirror and
the area behind the vehicle before and while backing up because there is a dead zone that can't see through the camera.
Body Electrical System

Removal
Page 54 sur 295

1. Remove the tailgate trim.

(Refer to Body - "Tailgate Trim")
2. Remove the tailgate back panel.
(Refer to Body - "Tailgate Back Panel")
3. Remove the back view camera (A) after loosening the mounting screws.

Installation
1. Install the back view camera.
2. Install the tailgate back panel and tailgate trim.
Body Electrical System

Specifications
Items Specifications
Rated voltage DC 12V
Operating voltage DC 9 ~ 16V
Operating temperature -30°C ~ 80°C (-4°F ~ 176°F)
BCM & Receiver : Max. 4 mA
Dark current
BCM : Max. 3 mA

Body Electrical System

Components
Page 55 sur 295

Connector Pin Information

No. Connector A (24 pin) Connector B (20 pin) Connector C (26 pin) Connector D (16 pin)
1 Battery (+) LIN (PAS) Washer motor power -
Fuel filler (Charge door)
2 IGN 1 Front washer motor -
actuator relay
3 IGN 2 LS CAN high - -
4 Brake switch LS CAN low Mirror unfold relay Mirror unfold switch
5 Wiper mist switch Mood lamp unlock state DRL lamp LH Mirror fold switch
6 Crash unlock input (PWM) Horn relay DRL lamp RH -
7 - - Room lamp -
Fuel filler (Charge door) open
8 HS CAN low - -
switch
Page 56 sur 295

9 Wiper washer switch HS CAN high - Auto ligth switch

10 Wiper INT switch Ground (Auot light) - Defogger switch
11 Wiper low switch Auto light signal - -
12 Rear washer switch Auto light power Wiper low relay Head lamp high switch
Safety power window enable
13 ACC - Head lamp low switch
high
14 Wiper high switch - DRL lamp power -
15 Front fog lamp switch ATM solenoid Rear washer motor -
16 Rear wiper switch - Mirror fold relay -
17 Rear INT switch Fuel filler (Charge door) lamp MTS Tx
18 - - -
19 - - Head lamp low signal
20 - Ground (Power) AV tail
21 Tail switch Wiper high relay
22 Wiper INT volume -
23 LIN (Intelligent Battery Sensor) -
24 Ground (Signal) -
25 -
26 Ground (Power)

Body Electrical System

Description
BCM CAN Communication

Function
Function Description
Defroster When IGN ON, Rear Heater Control Function
Timer
Safety Power Window According to the position of key, Power Window Output Control
Tailgate Tailgate Open and Open Prohibition Control Function
Panic Alarm Using the RKE My Vehicle Searching Function
Driving ATM Solenoid Shift Lever Automatic Release Protection Control Function
Interior Lamp Room Lamp Room Lamp Control Function
Exterior Lamp Tail Lamp Interior Illumination Control and Tail Lamp Control Function
H/Lamp Low & High Head Lamp Low/High/Passing Control Function
Front Fog Lamp Front Fog Lamp Control Function
AV Tail Autolight Interlock Illumination Control Fucntion
Page 57 sur 295

DRL When the Key turns IGN ON in the daytime. Dedicated DRL Illumination
Control Function
Wiper Low/High Front Wiepr Low/High Control Function
Wiper MIST Front Wiper MIST Control Function
Wiper Washer (FRONT, REAR) When Front/Rear Washer switchs ON, Washer Motor Output Function
Wiper Washer
Wiper INT According to Intermittent Volume input signal, Front Wiper Control Function
Rear Low Rear Wiper Low Control Function
Rear INT Rear INT Wiper Control Function
DRV SBR Driver Seat Belt Reminder Warning Function
Key Operated Warning When the key turns ACC ON and Driver Door Open, Warning Function
Warning Parking Brake Warning When the Parking brake switchs ON and vehicle drives, Warning Function
SMK System Warning SMK Warning Function
Key Teaching Warning When the RKE Teaching is completed, Warning Function
Door CRASH When vehicle crashes, All Door Unlock Control Function
Auto Door Lock/Unlock According th USM setting, Door Lock/Unlock Automatic Control Function
Out side Mirror Out Side Mirror Folding / Unfolding Output Function

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
Page 58 sur 295
Page 59 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the audio/ AVN head unit assembly.
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "Audio Unit")
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "AVN Head Unit")
3. Remove the glove box housing assembly.
(Refer to Body - "Glove Box Housing")
4. Separate the wiring fixed clip (A) on the BCM bracket.
Page 60 sur 295

5. Loosen the mounting nuts from the BCM unit.

6. Disconnect the connectors from the BCM (in the order as below)

(1) Disconnect the connectors (A) from the direction of removing the Audio/ AVN head unit.

(2) Disconnect the connectors (A) from the direction of removing the glove box housing.
Page 61 sur 295

Installation
1. Connect the connectors and install the BCM.
2. Install the glove box housing and audio/AVN head unit.
3. Connect the negative (-) battery teriminal.

BCM Diagnosis With GDS

1. The body control module can diagnose by using the GDS more quickly.
The BCM communicates with the GDS and then reads the input/output value and drives the actuator.
2. To diagnose the BCM function, select the menu of model and body control module.
3. Select "Input/output monitoring", if you will check current data of body network system. It provides input/output status of each module.
A. BCM service data, CLU service data, SJB service data
4. If you will check each module data operation forcefully, select "Actuation test".

5. If you want to change user option, select “user option”.

Page 62 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 63 sur 295

1. Start Stop Button(SSB) 5. Interior antenna 2

2. FOB key 6. Bumper antenna
3. Smart key unit 7. Door handle & door antenna
4. Interior antenna 1 8. Tailgate open switch

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
Page 64 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Description
System Overview
The System offers the following features:
- Human machine interface through a 1-stage button, for terminal switching and engine start.
- Control of external relays for ACC / IGN1 / IGN2 terminal switching and STARTER, without use of mechanical ignition switch.
- Indication of vehicle status through LCD or explicit messages on display.
- Immobilizer function by LF transponder communication between fob and start/stop button.
- Redundant architecture for high system dependability .
- Interface with Low Speed CAN vehicle communication network.
- Interface with LIN vehicle communication network depending on platform .
The RKE and SMART KEY functions are not considered part of this Button Engine Start system and are specified in separated system.

System Main Function

- Switching of ACC / IGN1 / IGN2 terminals.
-
Page 65 sur 295

Control of the STARTER relay BAT line (high side) based on communication with EMS ECU.
- Management of the Immobilizer function.
- Management of BES warning function.

Button Engine Start System

The Button Start System allows the driver to operate the vehicle by simply pressing a button (called as SSB) instead of using a standard
mechanical key.
When the driver pushes the SSB, upon authentication of the smart key, if the brake signal and the shift signal (P) have been received
correctly, the SMK System will proceed with the unlocking of the steering column, the control of the terminal, and enable READY mode.
The driver can release the SSB as soon as this sequence initiated. After positive response from immobilizer interrogation, the system will
communicate with the VCU and turns on the READY lamp and puts the vehicle to "standby" for drive.
The driver will be able to shut-off EV by a short push on the SSB if the vehicle is already in standstill and shift position on either P or N.
Emergency engine stop will be possible by a long press of the SSB or 3 consecutive presses in case the vehicle is in READY mode.
If the conditions for READY mode are not received correctly while pushing the SSB is detected and a valid fob authenticated, the system will
unlock the steering column and switch the terminals to IGN. Another push on the SSB will be necessary to go into READY mode.
In case of a vehicle equipped with SMART KEY system, fob authentication will not require any action from the driver. For limp home start or
in case of vehicle without SMART KEY, the driver will have to push the start / stop button.

• Control Ignition and engine ON/OFF by Sending signal to IPM.

• Display status by LED Lamp ON/OFF. (Redish orange or Amber)
Indicator ON/OFF Condition At Ignition Button OFF Condition
No. Character lamp Conditions
1 Indicator Lamp ON Door open, Tail lamp ON, ACC, IG ON
2 Indicator Lamp 30sec ON → Lamp OFF Door close, Tail lamp OFF, IG OFF
3 Indicator Lamp OFF Remote LOCK, Passive LOCK
4 Rheostat at tail lamp ON (Illumination lamp)

Indicator ON/OFF Condition According To Ignition

No. Ignition conditions Start Button LED status
1 IG OFF LED OFF
2 IG ACC Amber color LED ON
3 IG ON (Engine OFF) Redish orange color LED ON
4 Cranking Maintain LED status before cranking
5 Engine running LED OFF
Page 66 sur 295

Wireless Communication
Electromagnetic waves are used to exchange information between the vehicle and the FOB. Two types of RKE Key can supplement the
BES system:
- Non-smart key RKE
- SMART KEY FOB
Currently the BES system comprises with SMART KEY FOB always.
The transmitter, receiver and antennas required for the communication between the fob and the vehicle will differ depending on
functionalities and regional areas.
The RKE and SMART KEY functions are in separated documents. Refer to Smart key system for more detailed information about SMART
KEY function.

Smart Key
The SMK manages all function related to:
• "Start Stop Button (SSB) monitoring",
• "Immobilizer communication" (with Vehicle Control Unit for immobilizer release),
• "ESCL control",
• "Authentication server" (Validity of Transponder and in case of Smart Key option Passive Fob authentication ),
• "System consistency monitoring",
• "System diagnosis",
• Control of display message / warning buzzer .
Page 67 sur 295

The unit behaves as Master role in the whole system.

In case of SMART KEY application, for example “Passive Access”, “Passive Locking” and “Passive Authorization are integrated for
ESCL/Terminal switching Operations”.
It collects information about vehicle status from other modules (vehicle speed, alarm status, driver door open...), read the inputs (e.g. SSB,
Lock Button and PARK position Switch), controls the outputs (e.g. exterior and interior antennas), and communicates with others devices via
the CAN network as well as a single line interfaces.
The diagnosis and learning of the components of the BES System are also handled by the SMK.

Transponder

Terminal And Starter Relays

Relays will be used to switch the terminals ACC / IGN1 / IGN2. Those normally-open relays will be driven by the SMK unit and located either
in the passenger or engine compartment depending on the vehicle architecture.
Only one relay coil is connected to the terminal outputs of the SMK unit.
Those relays should integrate a resistor connected in parallel to the coil in order to reduce the transients during commutation.

Start/Stop Button(SSB)
A single stage push button is used for the driver to operate the vehicle. Pressing this button allows:
• To activate the power modes ‘Off’, ’Accessory’, ‘Ignition’ and 'Start' by switching the corresponding terminals
• To go into READY mode (standby)
• To shut-off EV vehicle
The contact will be insured by a micro-switch and a backlighting is provided to highlight the marking of the button whenever necessary.
Two (2) LED colors are located in the center of the button to display of the status of the system. Another illumination LED is also integrated
into the SSB for the lighting of the "Engine Start/Stop" characters.
Page 68 sur 295

BES System State Chart

System STATES in LEARNT MODE
In learnt mode, the BES System can be set in 6 different sates, depending on the status of the terminals and Engine status:
System State Terminal Status Engine status
1. OFF - Locked OFF Stopped
2. OFF - Unlocked OFF Stopped
3. ACC ACC Stopped
4. IGN IGN1, IGN2, ACC Stopped
5. Start IGN1, Start Cranking
Running
6. IGN - Engine IGN1, IGN2, ACC
(means "self-running")

Referring to the terminals, the system states described in the table above are same as those one found in a system based on a mechanical
ignition switch. The one of distinction with Mechanical-Ignition-Switch based system is that the BES system allows specific transition from
[OFF] to [START] without going through [ACC] and [IGN] states.

System STATES IN VIRGIN MODE

The BES System can be set in 5 different states (OFF LOCKED is not available in virgin mode), depending on the status of the terminals
and Engine status:
System State Terminal Status Engine status
1. OFF - UNLOCKED OFF Stopped
2. ACC ACC Stopped
3. IGN IGN1, IGN2, ACC Stopped
IGN1, START with special pattern of
4. Start Cranking
activation see Chap 6.2.1 for details
Running
5. IGN - Engine IGN1, IGN2, ACC
(means "self-running")

Component
Page 69 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the gear knob (A) from the console upper cover after pulling out it to upward.

3. Using the screw driver or remover, remove the console upper cover (A).
Page 70 sur 295

4. Disconnect the indicator connector (A) and start/stop switch connector (B).

5. Disconnect the multimedia jack connector (A).

6. Diconnect the gear lever lamp connector (A) and wiring.

7. Remove the start/stop button (A) after loosening the mounting screws.
Page 71 sur 295

Installation
1. Install the start/stop button.
2. Install the console upper cover and gear knob.
3. Connect the negative (-) battery termninal.
Body Electrical System

Components Location
Page 72 sur 295

1. Charge door opener actuator switch 3. Charge door opener cover

2. Charge door opener actuator

Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front bumper cover.
(Refer to Body - "Front Bumper Cover")
3. Remove the charge door opener cover assembly.
(Refer to Body - "Charge Door Opener Cover")
4. Remove the charge door opener actuator cabel (A).
Page 73 sur 295

5. Remove the charge door opener actuator © after loosening the mounting bolts (A) and screw (B).

Installation
1. Install the charge door opener actuator and cable.
2. Install the charge door opener cover assembly on the front bumper cover.
3. Install the front bumper cover.
4. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.

Inspection
1. Remove the connector from the charge door opener actuator.
Page 74 sur 295

2. Connect battery positive (+) and negative (-) cables to terminals 1 and 2 respectively.
3. Check that the motor operates normally. Replace the motor if it operates abnormally.

Body Electrical System

Components
Page 75 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the crash pad lower panel.
(Refer to Body - "Crash Pad Lower Panel")
3. Remove the crash pad lower switch assembly (A) by pushing it.
Page 76 sur 295

4. Disconnect the connector (A) from the crash pad lower switch assembly.

5. Remove the crash pad lower switch (A).

6. If it is necessary to check the switch, check for continuity and measure the resistance between terminals.

Installation
1. Install the crash pad lower switch.
2. Install the crash pad lower panedl after connecting the connector.
3. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.
Body Electrical System

Components
Page 77 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Description
The Electro Chromatic inside rear view Mirror (ECM) is intended dim the reflecting light in the rear view mirror. The forward facing sensor
detects brightness of the surroundings, while the rearward looking sensor is for the light from the rear. The strength of the light in the rear
sensor is used by the mirror to adjust the shading. It ranges from 7 to 85%. When the reverse gear is engaged, it stops functioning.
1. The forward facing sensor sees if the brightness of the surroundings is low enough for the mirror to operate its function.
2. The rearward looking sensor detects glaring of the reflecting light from a vehicle behind.
3. The ECM is darkened to the level as determined by the rearward looking sensor. When the glaring is no longer detected, the mirror stops
functioning.
(1. LED indicator , 2. ON/OFF Switch , 3. Rearward looking sensor , 4. Forward looking sensor )
Page 78 sur 295

Automatic-dimming Function
To protect your vision during nighttime driving, your mirror will automatically dim upon detecting glare from the vehicles traveling behind you.
The auto-dimming function can be controlled by the Dimming ON/OFF Button :
1. Pressing and holding the Feature Control button for more than 3 but less than 6 seconds turns the auto-dimming function OFF which is
indicated by the green Status Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing and holding the Feature Control button again for more than 3 but less than 6 seconds turns the auto-dimming function ON
which is indicated by the green Status Indicator LED turning on.

The mirror defaults to the "ON" position each time the vehicle is started.
Body Electrical System

Inspection
Check it by the procedure below to see if the function of the ECM is normal.
1. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position.
2. Cover the forward facing sensor.
3. Head a light to the rearward looking sensor.
4. The ECM should be darkened as soon as the rearward looking sensor detects the light.

If this test is performed in daytime, the ECM may be darkened as soon as the forward facing sensor is covered.
5. When the reverse gear is engaged, the ECM should not be darkened.
When heading lights to both the forward facing and rearward looking sensors, the ECM should not be darkened.

Removal
1. Remove the mirror wiring cover (A).
2. Disconnect the ECM mirror connector (B).
Page 79 sur 295

3. Loosen the mounting screw (B).

4. Push the ECM mirror base up to remove the ECM mirror assembly (A).

Make sure not to damage the mounting bracket when removing the mirror.

Installation
1. Install the mirror making sure the mounting bracket not to be damaged.
2. Install the mirror wiring cover after reconnecting the connector and tightening the screw.

• Make sure the connector is connected properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 80 sur 295

1. Power outlet relay 4. Cooling fan relay 2

2. Cooling fan relay 1 5. EMS Box
3. Defroster relay
Page 81 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 82 sur 295
Page 83 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Inspection
Page 84 sur 295

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Pull out the relay from the engine compartment relay box.

Power Relay (Type A)

- Do not use pliers.

- Pliers will damage the relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not start.
- Carefully remove the relay using the relay puller.
Check for continuity between the terminals.
A : Power outlet relay
B : Cooling fan relay 1
C : Defroster relay
1. There should be continuity between the No.30 and No.87 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.85 and No.86
terminals.
2. There should be no continuity between the No.30 and No.87 terminals when power is disconnected.

Power Relay (Type C)

Check for continuity between the terminals.
A : Cooling fan relay 2
1. There should be continuity between the No.30 and No.87 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.85 and No.86
terminals.
2. There should be no continuity between the No.30 and No.87 terminals when power is disconnected.
Page 85 sur 295

Replacement of EMS box

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Loosen the mounting nut (A) and bolt (B).

3. Reomve the engine room fuse & relay box from the hole (A).

4. Separate the engine room upper box (A) and lower cover (B).
Page 86 sur 295

5. Remove the wire cover (A) on the engine room lower box.

6. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the EMS box.

Fuse
1. Be sure there is no play in the fuse holders, and that the fuses are held securely.
2. Are the fuse capacities for each circuit correct?
3. Are there any blown fuses?
If a fuse is to be replaced, be sure to use a new fuse of the same capacity. Always determine why the fuse blew first and completely
eliminate the problem before installing a new fuse.

Multi Fuse
Page 87 sur 295

- Multi fuse (A) is needed to replace in the mass when it damaged only one fuse.
- When replace the multi fuse, refer to the "Engine compartment - component location" diagram exactly.
- Use the multi fuse capacities for each circuit correctly.
Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 88 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Description
Smart Junction Box(SJB)
1. General function : Interior Junction Box + some functions of BCM
It controls loads with CAN communication and IPS.
2. Main function
A. Low speed CAN communication(100 kbps)
B. Self diagnostics(Lamp open/short)
C. Fail safe(When MCU/CAN is fail, Head lamp / Tail lamp directly drive)
D. Protection of bulb over-voltage(PWM function)
E. Cut of Over-load and Short : PCL(Program Current Limit)

Auto Cut System Of Dark Current

Page 89 sur 295

1. Description : It cuts automatically power to be provided with load for reducing useless dark current according to vehicle state.

2. SJB had 3 modes, "Normal Mode", "Sleep Mode", "Power Off Mode". Auto cut of dark current practice in "Sleep Mode".
A. "Sleep" condition : IG OFF, constant input switch, CAN network doesn't activate.
B. "Sleep" resolutive condition : Any switch inputs, CAN network activates, KEY ON, IGN ON
C. "Power OFF" condition : The setting time of timer which is used by cutting a load power expires.
D. "Normal Mode" : SJB function normally activates.
E. "Sleep Mode" : It is low power mode and activates for reducing electricity consumption of SJB or IPM. Auto cut of dark current
function activates.
F. "Power OFF Mode" : Power of MCU and circumferential circuit is cut for minimizing electricity consumption. Operation stops.
3. The explanation - The auto cut of dark current
Page 90 sur 295

Before delivering to customer Fuse switch OFF

•All door close & RKE door lock or Constant switch state
(Auto cut of dark current scenario starts.)
-After "sleep" state is for 20 min.
-SJB power down(SJB dark current : 200 μA) and cutting power of Lamp/Body Load/Wake up

After delivering to customer Fuse switch ON

•All door close & Constant switch state : C_BAState=OFF
(Auto cut of dark current scenario starts.)
-After "sleep" state is for 20 min.
-SJB power down(SJB dark current : 200 μA) and cutting power of Lamp Load
•In case RKE door lock : C_BAState=ON & Trunk SW=CLOSE
(Auto cut of dark current scenario starts.)
-After "Sleep" state 35s~65s (Waiting time of other unit : 30~60s + SJB sleep counts 5s)
-SJB Powerdown(SJB dark current : 200 μA) and cutting power of Lamp Load
Page 91 sur 295

4. Problem when mode switch setting is wrong

: If a fuse switch is set to OFF(Before delivering to customer) by a customer or technician and auto cut function of dark current activates,
below problems may happen.
Symptom Related part
•Door lock/unlock, trunk open don't activate by RKE. BCM
(Wakeup of each module don't activate.)
•Digital clock is reset.(Memory is reset.) Digital clock
•Setting value of audio(Volume, Frequency setting) is reset. Audio
(Memory is reset.)

*If fuse switch OFF(before delivering to customer) is set, power of BCM, Digital clock and audio is shut off.
Body Electrical System

Fuse Inspection
1. Be sure there is no play in the fuse holders, and that the fuses are held securely.
2. Are the fuse capacities for each circuit correct?
3. Are there any blown fuses?
If a fuse is to be replaced, be sure to use a new fuse of the same capacity. Always determine why the fuse blew first and completely
eliminate the problem before installing a new fuse.

Inspection
1. The SJB can be diagnosed by using the GDS. The SJB communicates with the GDS which then displays inputs and outputs along with
codes.
2. To diagnose the SJB function, select the vehicle model, BCM and SJB.
Page 92 sur 295

3. To consult the present input/out value of SJB, "Current DATA". It provides information of SJB input/output conditions.

4. To perform functional test on SJB outputs, select "Actuation Test"

Removal
Passenger Compartment Junction Box (SJB)
Page 93 sur 295

1. Disconnect the negative(-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the crash pad lower panel.
(Refer to Body - "Crash Pad Lower Panel")
3. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the smart junction box.
4. Remove the smart junction box (A) after loosening the mounting nuts and bolt.

5. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the smart junction box.

Installation
1. Install the smart junction box.
2. Install the crash pad lower panel.
3. Check that all system operates normally.
Body Electrical System

Component
Page 94 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Description
The ICM relay is united with (outside mirror fold/unfold relay, front deicer relay, rear fog lamp relay) which installed inside the lower crash
pad.
Page 95 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Inspection
Normal Charge Port Relay
Check for continuity between the terminals.
1. There should be continuity between the No.20 and No.10 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.10 and No.9 in the
ICM-A.

Folding Motor Relay

Check for continuity between the terminals.
1. There should be continuity between the No.16 and No.17 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.4 and No.8 in the
ICM-A.

Unfolding Motor Relay

Check for continuity between the terminals.
1. There should be continuity between the No.15 and No.17 terminals when power and ground are connected to the No.6 and No.8 in the
ICM-A.
Body Electrical System

Components
Page 96 sur 295

1. Hands free call switch 4. Front right speaker

2. Mic 5. AVN head unit (hands free control)
3. Front left speaker

※ There is no hands free jack. This system supports Bluetooth (wireless system).

Body Electrical System

Function
Audio Bluetooth System

General Features
• This audio system supports Bluetooth® hands-free and stereo-headset features.
- HANDS-FREE feature : Making or receiving calls wirelessly.
- STEREO-HEADSET feature : Playing music from cellular phones (that supports A2DP feature) wirelessly.

• The phone must be paired to the system before using Bluetooth® features.
• Only one selected (connected) cellular phone can be used with the system at a time.
• Some phones are not fully compatible with this system.
Body Electrical System
Page 97 sur 295

Circuit Diagram

Body Electrical System

Inspection
1. Check for resistance between terminals in each switch position.

[Voice + Bluetooth]
Page 98 sur 295

[Voice + Bluetooth]
Resistance Output voltage
Switch Connector terminal
(±5%) (± 0.22)
Voice 2-4 10.71 kΩ 3.5 V ± 0.22
Call off 2-4 18.91 kΩ 4.0 V ± 0.22
Call 2-4 40.91 kΩ 4.5 V ± 0.22

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the driver airbag module.
(Refer to the RT group)
3. Remove the steering wheel.
(Refer to the ST group - "Steering column & shaft")
4. Loosen the mounting screws from the rear steering wheel cover.

5. Separate the upper steering wheel remote control switch (A) from the steering wheel.

[LH]

[RH]
Page 99 sur 295

6. Remove the upper steering wheel control switch (B) disconnecting the connector (A).

[LH]

[RH]

7. Separate the lower steering wheel control switch (A) loosening the mounting screws.

[LH]

8. Remove the lower steering wheel control switch (B) disconnecting the connector (A).
Page 100 sur 295

[LH]

Installation
1. Install the remote control switch on the steering wheel.
2. Install the steering wheel.
3. Reconnect the remote control switch connector and airbag connectors.

Make sure that the switch connector is plugged in properly.

4. Install the driver airbag module.
5. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.
Body Electrical System

Inspection
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the overhead console lamp.
(Refer to Body Electrical - "Overhead Console Lamp")
3. Remove the hands free mic (A) from the overhead console lamp loosening the mounting screws.

No. Description
1 Mic (+)
2 Mic (-)

4. Check the continuity of mic between terminals.

Body Electrical System

Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause Solution
Not pairing Bluetooth device of Car is not discoverable mode Enter Bluetooth pairing (searching) mode
User’s phone is Bluetooth off mode User’s phone set Bluetooth on
Making an attempt pairing others bluetooth system
Page 101 sur 295

Check Bluetooth device name and address (12 word) to

attempt paring
Ex) 000B24FFF123
Pass key error Input the passkey displayed on the audio screen into
the phone.
5 phones have already been registered. Delete paired phone list
Bluetooth system cannot communicate with the phone. Refer to IOP sheet
※IOP : Inter-operability
Not connection User’s phone or Bluetooth device of Car does not Retry pairing
register
Bluetooth device to connect
Bluetooth system cannot communicate with the phone. Waiting 1minute then Retry connection or phone power
off/on.
Refer to IOP sheet
Not redial User phone system issue Push the 2 times Send button
Not accept call User phone system issue Refer to IOP sheet
Not dialing User’s phone playing other menu (internet, mp3, game, Stop other menu then set normal mode
etc..)
Bluetooth system cannot communicate with the phone Refer to IOP sheet

Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 102 sur 295

1. Horn switch 3. Horn

2. Horn relay (EMS box) 4. Clock spring

Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove engine room under cover.
(Refer to Motor System - "Under Cover")
3. Remove the horn (A) after disconnecting the mounting bolt and connector.
Page 103 sur 295

Installation
1. Install the horns after connecting the horn connectors.
2. Install the engine room under cover.

Inspection
Test the horn by connecting battery voltage to the 1 terminal and ground the 2 terminal.
The horn should make a sound. If the horn fails to make a sound, replace it.
Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 104 sur 295

1. Cluster assembly 5. Door switch

2. Seat belt switch 6. Tailgate switch
3. Brake fluid level warning switch 7. Wheel speed sensor
4. Parking brake switch 8. ABS ECU

Body Electrical System

Components
Page 105 sur 295

Connector Pin Information

No. Description No. Description
1 Ground signal 3 (Power ground) 21 Trip switch (-) input
2 Illumination output (-) 22
Page 106 sur 295

Trip switch 1 (+) input

(Trip button)
Trip switch 2 (+) input
3 Rheostat switch down input 23
(Cruise button)
4 Rheostat switch up input 24 -
5 Detent output (+) 25 -
6 P output (+) (A/T) 26 Low washer level input (-)
7 R output (+) (A/T) 27 -
8 N output (+) (A/T) 28 Heated wheel indicator input
9 D output (+) (A/T) 29 M CAN low
10 S output (+) (A/T) 30 M CAN high
11 ALT L output 31 -
12 - 32 C CAN high
13 - 33 C CAN low
14 - 34 -
15 Airbag (+) input 35 -
16 - 36 -
17 - 37 Ground signal 1
18 Speed output (4P output) 38 -
19 IGN 3 39 IGN 1
Tail lamp input
20 40 Battery (+)
(Illumination (+))

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
Page 107 sur 295
Page 108 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Description
Mian Features
1. Power and charge guage

(1) It displays the degree of economic driving by identifying the status of a driver's operation, depending on a vehicle's driving conditions
(e.g., required power, system efficiency and charging).
(2) It leads to economic driving by informing the driver of the optimal driving conditions depending on the vehicle's conditions.
(3) It displays that ECO guide and power segment will operate during driving, and also indicates the state of regenerative braking when a
charge zone is instructed while driving.
2. SOC (State Of Charge) guage
Page 109 sur 295

(1) It displays the amount of charge of high-voltage battery.

(2) It displays the charged amount of SOC received from BMS module on the digital gauge in the instrument cluster. (as the below)
Display Increase (%) Decrease (%)
Seg0 0 0
Seg1 5 3
Seg2 10 8
Seg3 15 13
Seg4 20 18
Seg5 25 23
Seg6 30 28
Seg7 35 33
Seg8 40 38
Seg9 45 43
Seg10 50 48
Seg11 55 53
Seg12 60 58
Seg13 65 63
Seg14 70 68
Seg15 75 73
Seg16 80 78
Seg17 85 83
Seg18 90 88

3. ECO Level Display

(1) It displays the degree of the driver's economic driving via ECO level.
(2) It displays the ECO level in OLED from Step 1 to 8.
4. Energy Flow
Page 110 sur 295

(1) It displays graphical energy flow of an EV vehicle to inform the driver of the vehicle information.
(2) It leads to economic driving by showing the energy flow diagram by means of intuitive images.
(3) It displays three states of energy flow of the EV vehicle graphically.
(4) VCU module receives operation mode CAN signals to implement any relevant animation.
5. Other indicators and warning lamps
The status between C-CAN transmission modules, operating various indicator and warning lamps on the PS EV cluster, is shown.
Referring to the descriptions below, any checking point or operating point can be identified in the event of a relevant function is
inoperable.

Body Electrical System

Removal
Page 111 sur 295

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the cluster fascia panel.
(Refer to Body - "Cluster Fascia Panel")
3. Remove the cluster (A) after removing screws.

4. Disconnect the cluster connector (A) from the cluster.

Installation
1. Connect the cluster connector.
2. Install the cluster assembly.
3. Install the cluster facia panel.
4. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.

- After replacing the cluster with a new one, must be performed the "Variant Coding" procedure.

Inspection
1. Check point (Warning indicator)
Ref Signal Control
NO Color Name Signal Input Check Point
Symbol (Unit / Sensor)

1 Green Turn Left C-CAN

GWAY 1. CAN line failure

2 Green Turn Right C-CAN

3 Green Front Fog C-CAN GWAY 1. CAN line failure

Page 112 sur 295

4 Blue High Beam C-CAN GWAY 1. CAN line failure

5 Green Low Beam C-CAN GWAY 1. CAN Line failure

6 Green Tail Lamp C-CAN GWAY 1. CAN Line failure

7 Green Cruise C-CAN VCU 1. CAN line failure

8 Green SET C-CAN GWAY 1. CAN line failure

9 Red Seat Belt C-CAN GWAY 1. CAN line failure

10 Red Air Bag C-CAN ACU 1. CAN line failure

11 Yellow Trunk Open C-CAN GWAY 1. CAN line failure

12 Red Door Open C-CAN BGWAY 1. CAN line failure

1. CAN line failure

13 Yellow Immobilizer C-CAN GWAY
2. Wiring failure

14 Yellow ABS C-CAN ESC 1. CAN line failure

15 Yellow ESC C-CAN TCS 1. CAN line failure

Page 113 sur 295

16 Yellow ESC OFF C-CAN TCS 1. CAN line failure

17 Yellow TPMS C-CAN TPMS 1. CAN line failure

GWAY
18 Red Parking Brake C-CAN TCS 1. CAN line failure
AHB

19 Red Battery Charge C-CAN LDC 1. Wiring failure

20 Yellow Check Engine C-CAN EMS 1. CAN line failure

21 Yellow Low Washer Hardwire Water Level Sensor 1. Wiring failure

1. CAN line failure

22 Green Active ECO C-CAN VCU
2. Wiring failure

1. MDPS unit failure

23 Red MDPS C-CAN MDPS
2. CAN line failure

24 Green READY C-CAN VCU 1. CAN line failure

25 EV battery charge Hardwire+C-CAN

1. CAN line failure

Green ＢＭＳ
2. Wiring failure

Red EMS 1. CAN line failure

Page 114 sur 295

VCU, MCU, BMS,

26 Yellow EV System C-CAN 1. CAN line failure
LDC, FACT, OBC

27 Yellow Power Down C-CAN VCU 1. CAN line failure

28 Yellow RBS C-CAN EBS

1. CAN line failure

29 Yellow Low Power C-CAN VCU 1. CAN line failure

30 Yellow EPB C-CAN EPB 1. CAN line failure

2. Check point (Gauge)

Signal Control
No. Name Signal Input Check Point
(Unit/Sensor)
1 Speedometer C-CAN MCU 1. CAN Line failure
2 SOC Gauge C-CAN BMS 1. CAN Line failure
3 Power and Charge Gauge C-CAN VCU 1. CAN Line failure

3. Check the specified value of cluster connector in specified condition.

No. Description Input/Output Communication Value (V) Specified Conditions
1 GND_Signal3 Input Hardware Above 5V IGN switch ON ,
IGN switch ON, Tail switch ON,
Below 1V
Rheostat Max
2 ILL(-)_OUT- Output Hardware
IGN switch ON, Tail switch ON,
9~16V
Rheostat Min
3 RheostatSWDown_IN Input Hardware Below 1.5V Rheostat switch down button push
4 RheostatSWUp_IN Input Hardware Below 1.5V Rheostat switch up button push
5 Detent_OUT+ Output Hardware 9~16V IGN switch ON, Rheostat Max
6 P_OUT+ Output Hardware 9~16V IGN On, P position
7 R_OUT+ Output Hardware 9~16V IGN On, R position
8 N_OUT+ Output Hardware 9~16V IGN On, N position
9 D_OUT+ Output Hardware 9~16V IGN On, D position
10 B_OUT+ Output Hardware 9~16V IGN On, B position
11 ALTL_OUT Output Hardware
12 - - - - -
13 - - - - -
14 - - - - -
Page 115 sur 295

15 AirBag(+)_IN Output Hardware Above 5V IGN switch ON

16 - - - - -
17 - - - - -
IGN switch ON/ Vehicel speed
18 SPEED_OUT- Input Hardware 9~16V
over 1 km/h
19 IGN3 Input Hardware Above 9V Battery charge
20 TailLamp_IN Input Hardware 9~16V Tail switch On
21 TripSW(-)_IN Input Hardware Below 1V Always
22 TripSW1(+)_IN Output Hardware 0.56~5V IGN ON, Push Trip button
23 TripSW2(+)_IN Output Hardware 0.56~5V IGN ON, Push Trip button
24 - - - - -
25 - - - - -
9~16V IGN switch ON
26 LowWasherLevel_IN- Output Hardware
Below 1V Washer level low
27 - - - - -
9~16V IGN switch On
28 HeatedWheelIND_IN Output Hardware
Below 1V Heated wheel switch Push
29 MM_CAN_Low Input CAN - -
30 MM_CAN_High Input CAN - -
31 - - - - -
32 C_CAN_High Input CAN - -
33 C_CAN_Low Input CAN - -
34 - - - - -
35 - - - - -
36 - - - - -
37 GND_Signal1 Input Hardware Below 1V Always
38 - - - - -
39 IGN1 Input Hardware 9~16V IGN switch ON
40 B+ Input Hardware 9~16V Always

Diagnosis with GDS

1. It will be able to diagnose defects of CLU with GDS quickly. GDS can operates actuator forcefully, input/output value monitoring and self
diagnosis.
2. Select model and "BCM".
3. Select the "Cluster Module" to check.
4. Select "Input/output monitoring", if you will check current data of instrument cluster.
5. If you will check each module data operation forcefully, select "Actuation test".
Page 116 sur 295

6. To check the DTC of the each module, select "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES".

CLU Variant Coding

After replacing the cluster with a new one, must be performed the “Variant Coding” procedure.
1. Connect the cable of GDS to the data link connector in driver side crash pad lower panel, turn the power on GDS.
2. Select model and "BCM".
3. Select Variant coding mode to perform.
Page 117 sur 295

4. If the trouble codes occurred when performing variant coding, try the CLU variant coding again after checking the installation status of
CLU system.
Page 118 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Troubleshooting
Fault item Symptom Check point Related parts
1. Check the connection between connectors
Connectors, Wiring, Fuse
Display OLED-LCD NOT displaying 2. Check th Batter (+), Igntion and Ground wiring
and Cluster
3. Check the parts
1. Check the Airbag (+) signal (Connector)
Airbag Warning Airbag warning indicator NOT ACU connector, Wiring,
2. Check the C-CAN signal
indicator light Fuse and Cluster
3. Check the connection stuts of FPC
1. Check the switch input terminal (Connector)
Switch connector, Wiring
Mode change Trip mode malfunction 2. Chech the signal input (Open or short)
and Cluster
3. Check the mode change of cluster
1. Check whehter rheostat input signal input by connector
Switch connector, Wiring
Illumination Illumination NOT changing 2. Check Illumination (-) and Detent signal output
and Cluster
3. Check Tail (+) signal input
Cluster Warning Cluster warning sound NOT 1. Check the connector of speaker output terminal Switch connector, Wiring
sound sound 2. Check the intalled speaker on the vehicel and Cluster

Body Electrical System

Specification
Item Specification
Rating voltage DC 3V
Operating voltage DC 2.7V ~ 3.3V
Operating temperature -20°C ~ +60°C (-4°F ~ +140°F)
RF Modulation FSK
LF Modulation ASK
RF frequency 433.92 MHz
Battery CR2032 (3V / 1EA)
Page 119 sur 295

Transmissible distance 30m or more

Life of battery 2 years or more (at 20 times per day)
Button number 3
Door lock
Function Door unlock
Tailgate open

Body Electrical System

Component Location

1. BCM & RF receiver 4. Rear door lock actuator & switch

2. Key warning switch 5. Tailgate open switch
3. Front door lock actuator & switch

Body Electrical System

Page 120 sur 295

Inspection
Front Door Lock Module Inspection
1. Remove the front door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Front Door Trim")
2. Remove the front door module.
(Refer to Body - "Front Door Module")
3. Disconnect the connectors from the actuator.

4. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery
voltage only momentarily.

[Central Lock]

5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.
Page 121 sur 295

Rear Door Lock Module Inspection

1. Remove the rear door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Rear Door Trim")
2. Remove the rear door module.
(Refer to Body - "Rear Door Module")
3. Disconnect the connectors from the actuator.

4. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery
voltage only momentarily.

[Central Lock]
Page 122 sur 295

5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.

Tailgate Lock Module Inspection

1. Remove the tailgate trim.
(Refer to Body - "Tailgate Trim")
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the actuator.

3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery
voltage only momentarily.

Tailgate Open Switch

1. Remove the tailgate trim.
(Refer to Body - "Tailgate Trim")
2. Disconnect the connector from the actuator.
Page 123 sur 295

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.

Body Electrical System

Specifications
Items Bulb Wattage (W) Bulb Type
Head lamp (High) H7LL 55
Head lamp (Low) H7LL 55
Turn signal lamp LED LED
Position lmap LED LED
Front
Fog lamp 55 9006
DRL LED LED
Side marker 5 W5W
Side repeater lamp (O/S mirror) LED LED
Tail/Stop lamp LED LED
Tail lamp and side marker LED LED
Rear Turn signal lamp 27 PY27W
Back up lamp 16 W16W
License plate lamp 5 W5W
High mounted stop lamp LED LED
Map lamp 8 FESTOON
Room lamp 8 FESTOON
Vanity lamp 5 FESTOON
Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON
Luggage lamp 8 FESTOON

Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 124 sur 295

1. Head lamp (Low) 6. Turn signal lamp (Outside mirror)

2. Head lamp (High) 7. Over head console lamp
3. DRL & Position lamp 8. Room lamp
4. Turn signal lamp 9. Personal lamp
5. Front fog lamp 10. Side marker
Page 125 sur 295

1. Tail lamp and side marker 5. High mounting stop lamp

2. Tail / Stop lamp and side marker 6. License plate lamp
3. Turn signal lamp 7. Luggage lamp
4. Back up lamp

Body Electrical System

Component
Page 126 sur 295

1. Head lamp lens & housing assembly 5. Head lamp low beam bulb
2. Head lamp high beam bulb 6. Head lamp low beam bulb socket
3. Head lamp high beam bulb socket 7. Dust cap (Low)
4. Dust cap (High) 8. Side maker

Body Electrical System

Removal

Head lamps become very hot during use; do not touch them or any attaching hardware immediately after they have been turned off.

The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp assembly until just before a new bulb is installed.
Removing bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb performance.
Contaminants may enter the headlamp assembly where they can settle on the lens and reflector.
Never turn on the head lamps with the bulb removed from the headlamp assembly.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front bumper cover.
(Refer to Body - "Front Bumper Cover")
3. Loosen the mounting bolts (3EA) of head lamp. Remove the head lamp assembly (B) after disconnecting the lamp connectors (A).

[LH]
Page 127 sur 295

[RH]

Take care that retaining clip (A) is not to be damaged.

Installation
1. Install the head lamp bulbs.
2. Reassemble the head lamp bulb covers.
3. Reassemble the head lamp assembly after connecting the lamp connector.
Page 128 sur 295

Replacement
Head Lamp Low Beam (Bulb)
1. Turn the head lamp switch off.
2. Disconnect the power connector from the lamp.
3. Remove the dust cap (A).

4. Remove the sockect (A) from the head lamp assembly.

5. Remove the bulb (A) from the connector.

6. Installation is the reverse of removal.

Head Lamp High Beam (Bulb)

1. Turn the head lamp switch off.
2. Disconnect the power connector from the lamp.
3. Remove the dust cap (A).
Page 129 sur 295

4. Disconnect the connector (A) from the bulb.

5. Remove the head lamp high beam bulb (A).

6. Installation is the reverse of removal.

Head Lamp Aiming Instructions

The head lamps should be aimed with the proper beam-setting equipment, and in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.

If there are any regulations pertinent to the aiming of head lamps in the area where the vehicle is to be used, adjust so as to meet those
requirements.
Alternately turn the adjusting gear to adjust the head lamp aiming. If beam-setting equipment is not available, proceed as follows:
1. Inflate the tires to the specified pressure and remove any loads from the vehicle except the driver, spare tire, and tools.
2. The vehicle should be placed on a flat floor.
3. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines passing through respective head lamp centers) on the screen.
4. With the head lamp and battery in normal condition, aim the head lamps so the brightest portion falls on the vertical lines.
A : Low/High beam vertical
Page 130 sur 295

Front Fog Lamp Aiming

The front fog lamps should be aimed as the same manner of the head lamps aiming.
With the front fog lamps and battery normal condition, aim the front fog lamps by turning the adjusting screw hole (A) with a driver.

Head Lamp And Fog Lamp Aiming Point

Page 131 sur 295

General / Euroupe
1. Head Lamp (Low beam)
A. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
B. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.

2. Turn the front fog lamp on without the driver aboard.

The cut-off line should be projected in the allowable range (shaded region)

Body Electrical System

Page 132 sur 295

Removal
Door Mirror Turn Signal Lamp
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the mirror holder (A) from the outside mirror assembly.

3. Remove the door mirror cover (A).

Be careful not to damage the fixing clip

4. Loosen the mirror turn signal lamp mounting screw (A).

5. Remove the door mirror turn signal lamp (B) after disconnecting the connector (A).
Page 133 sur 295

Installation
Door Mirror Turn Signal Lamp
1. Install the door mirror turn signal lamp.
2. Install the door mirror cover.
3. Install the door mirror.
4. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.
Body Electrical System

Inspection
1. Check that the switch operates properly after disconnecting the room lamp connector (A).

Room Lamp

Removal
Room Lamp
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
Page 134 sur 295

2. Detach the lamp lens (A) from the room lamp with a flat-tip screwdriver.

3. Separate the room lamp (A) from the roof trim after loosening the screws (2EA).

4. Remove the room lamp (B) after disconnecting the connector (A).

5. If it is necessary to replace the bulb, replace the bulb (A) after detching the lamp lens.

Vanity Lamp
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the vanity lamp assembly (A).
Page 135 sur 295

3. Remove the vanity lamp assembly (B) after disconnecting the connector (A).

4. If it is necessary to replace the bulb, replace the bulb (A).

Installation
Room Lamp
1. Install the room lamp assembly after connecting the lamp connector.
2. Install the lens after assembling the bulb.

Vanity Lamp
1. Install the vanity lamp assembly after connecting the lamp connector.
Body Electrical System

Inspection
1. Remove the overhead console lamp assembly then check for continuity between terminals. If the continuity is not as specified, replace
the map lamp switch.
Page 136 sur 295

No. Description
1 Ground (-)
2 Door (-)
3 Room/ Door (-)
4 Battery (+)

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the mounting screws (2EA).
And then remove the overhead console (A).

3. Remove the overhead console after disconnect the connectors (A).

Page 137 sur 295

4. If it is necessary to replace the bulb, replace the bulb (in the order as below).
(1) Remove the overhead console lens (A).

(2) Remove the bulb (A).

Installation
1. Install the overhead console lamp after connecting the connector.
2. Install the lens after tightening 2 screws.
Body Electrical System

Inspection
1. The SJB can be diagnosed by using the GDS. The SJB communicates with the GDS which then displays inputs and outputs along with
codes.
It will be able to diagnose defects of hazard lamp switch with GDS quickly. GDS can operates actuator forcefully, input/output value
monitoring and self diagnosis.
2. To diagnose the SJB function, select the vehicle model, BCM and SJB.
Page 138 sur 295

3. To consult the present input/output value of SJB, "Current DATA", provides information of SJB input/output conditions.

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the center airvent assembly (A).
Page 139 sur 295

3. Disconnect the connector (A) from the center airvent assembly.

4. Remove the hazard switch (A) from the center airvent assembly.

Installation
1. Install the hazard switch in the center airvent assembly.
2. Connect the connector and install the center airvent assembly.
Page 140 sur 295

3. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.

Body Electrical System

Inspection
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the crash pad lower panel.
(Refer to Body - "Crash Pad Lower Panel")
3. Remove the lower crash pad switch assembly (A) by pushing it.

4. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the lower crash pad switch assembly.

5. Remove the rheostat switch (A).

6. Check for intensity of rheostat switch. If the light intensity of the lamps changes smoothly without any flickering when the rheostat is
turned, it can be assumed that the rheostat is normal.
Page 141 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Inspection
Fog Lamp Switch
1. With the fog lamp switch in each position, make sure that continuity exists between the terminals below. If continuity is not as specified,
replace the multifunction switch.

Removal
Front Fog Lamp
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front bumper.
(Refer to Body - "Front Bumper Cover")
3. Remove the front fog lamp assembly (A) after loosening the mounting screws.

4. Remove the front fog lamp bulb (A) by turning in the counter clock-wise direction.
Page 142 sur 295

Installation
1. Install the front fog lamp bulb.
2. Connect the front fog lamp connector.
3. Install the front bumper cover.
Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the license lamp assembly (A).

3. Replace the bulb (B) after removing the license lamp (A).
Page 143 sur 295

Installation
1. Install the bulb.
2. Install the license lamp assembly.
Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the high mounted stop lamp trim (A).

3. Detach the high mounted stop lamp (A) from the tailgate after loosening the mounting bolts.
Page 144 sur 295

4. Remove the high mounted stop lamp (C) after disconnecting the connector (B) and hose (A).

Installation
1. Install the high mounted stop lamp.
2. Install the high mounted stop lamp trim.
3. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.
Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Using a screwdriver or remover, remove the luggage lamp (A).
3. Remove the luggage lamp (A) after disconnecting the connector (B).

Installation
1. Install the luggage lamp assembly after connecting the lamp connector.
Body Electrical System

Removal
Rear Combination Lamp
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the rear combination lamp (A) after loosening the mounting screws.
Page 145 sur 295

3. Disconnect the rear combination lamp connector (A).

Turn Signal Lamp Bulb

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the rear combination lamp assembly.
3. Remove the turn signal lamp socket (A) by turning the socket counterclockwise.

4. Remove the turn signal lamp bulb (A).

Back Up Lamp Bulb

Page 146 sur 295

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Remove the rear combination lamp assembly.
3. Remove the back up lamp socket (A) by turning the socket counterclockwise.

4. Remove the back up lamp bulb (A).

Installation
1. Install the rear combination lamp assembly.
2. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.
Body Electrical System

Components
Page 147 sur 295
Page 148 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
Page 149 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Removal
[Sound Mood Lamp Unit]
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the audio head unit.
(Refer to Body Electrical - "Audio unit")
3. Disconnect the connector (A) from the mood lamp unit.

4. Remove the sound mood lamp unit (A) after loosening the mounting nut.
Page 150 sur 295

[Sound Mood Lamp Switch]

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the crash pad lower panel.
(Refer to Body - "Crash Pad Lower Panel")
3. Remove the lower crash pad switch assembly (A) by pushing it.

4. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the lower crash pad switch assembly.

5. Remove the rheostat switch (A).

Installation
Page 151 sur 295

[Sound Mood Lamp Unit]

1. Install the mood lamp unit.
2. Install the audio head unit.
3. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.

[Sound Mood Lamp Switch]

1. Connect the connectors and install the mood lamp switch.
2. Install the crash pad lower panel.
3. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.
Body Electrical System

Components
Page 152 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Using the flat screw driver or remover, remove the crash pad center air vent panel (A).
Page 153 sur 295

3. Disconnect the hazard switch connector (A).

4. Remove center fascia upper panel (A) after loosening the mounting screws.
Page 154 sur 295

5. Disconnect the charge information lamp connector (A).

6. Remove the charge information lamp assembly (A) after loosening the mounting screws.

Installation
1. Install the charge information lamp assembly, center fascia upper panel and crash pad center air vent panel.
2. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.
Body Electrical System

Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible cause Remedy
One lamp does not light Bulb burned out Replace bulb
(all exterior) Socket, wiring or ground faulty Repair if necessary
Head lamps do not light Bulb burned out Replace bulb
Ignition fuse (LOW:10A, HIGH:20A) blown Check for short and replace fuse
Head lamp fuse (15A) blown Check for short and replace fuse
Head lamp relay faulty Check relay
Lighting switch faulty Check switch
Page 155 sur 295

Wiring or ground faulty Repair if necessary

Bulb burned out Replace bulb
Tail lamp fuse (10A) blown Check for short and replace fuse
Tail lamps and license plate lamps do not light Tail lamp relay faulty Check relay
Lighting switch faulty Check switch
Wiring or ground faulty Repair if necessary
Bulb burned out Replace bulb
Stop lamp fuse (15A) blown Check for short and replace fuse
Stop lamps do not light
Stop lamp switch faulty Adjust or replace switch
Wiring or ground faulty Repair if necessary
Stop lamps do not turn off Stop lamp switch faulty Repair or replace switch
Instrument lamps do not light Rheostat faulty Check rheostat
(Tail lamps light) Wiring or ground faulty Repair if necessary
Bulb burned out Replace bulb
Turn signal lamp does not flash on one side Turn signal switch faulty Check switch
Wiring or ground faulty Repair if necessary
Bulb burned out Replace bulb
Turn signal lamp fuse (10A) blown Check for short and replace fuse
Turn signal lamps do not light Flasher unit faulty Check flasher unit
Turn signal switch faulty Check switch
Wiring or ground faulty Repair if necessary
Bulb burned out Replace bulb
Hazard warning lamp fuse (15A) blown Check for short and replace fuse
Hazard warning lamps do not light Flasher unit faulty Check flasher unit
Hazard switch faulty Check switch
Wiring or ground faulty Repair if necessary
Lamps' wattages are smaller or larger than
Replace lamps
Flasher rate too slow or too fast specified
Flasher unit faulty Check flasher unit
Bulb burned out Replace bulb
Back up lamp fuse (10A) blown Check for short and replace fuse
Back up lamps do not light Back up lamp switch (M/T) faulty Check switch
Transaxle range switch (A/T) faulty Check switch
Wiring or ground faulty Repair if necessary
Bulb burned out Replace bulb
Room lamp fuse (10A) blown Check for short and replace fuse
Room lamp does not light
Room lamp switch faulty Check switch
Wiring or ground faulty Repair if necessary
Bulb burned out Replace bulb
Front fog lamp fuse (15A) blown Check for short and replace fuse
Front fog lamps do not light Front fog lamp relay faulty Check relay
Front fog lamp switch faulty Check switch
Wiring or ground faulty Repair if necessary
Wiring or ground faulty Repair if necessary
Bulb burned out Replace bulb
Room lamp fuse (10A) blown Check for short and replace fuse
Map lamp does not light
Map lamp switch faulty Check switch
Wiring or ground faulty Repair if necessary
Bulb burned out Replace bulb
Room lamp fuse (10A) blown Check for short and replace fuse
Trunk room lamp does not light
Trunk room lamp switch faulty Check switch
Wiring or ground faulty Repair if necessary

Body Electrical System

Specifications
Page 156 sur 295

Items Specifications
Rated voltage DC 12V
Operating temperature range -30°C ~ +80°C (-22 ~ +176°F)
High : 1A (Relay load)
Dimmer & passing switch Low : 1A (Relay load)
Passing : 1A (Relay load)
Lighting switch/ Auto lighting switch 1A (Relay load)
Turn signal & lane change switch 6.6 ± 0.5A (Lamp load)
Front / Rear fog lamp switch 1A (Relay load)
Rated load
Low, High : 4.0A (Motor load)
Wiper switch Intermittent : 0.22 ± 0.05A (Relay load)
Lock : Max. 28A (Motor load)
Mist switch Mist : 4A (Motor load)
Front/Rear washer switch 4A (Motor load)
Rear wiper 0.2A (Relay load)

Body Electrical System

Component
Page 157 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the steering wheel.
(Refer to Steering System - "Steering Wheel")
3. Remove the steering column upper and lower shrouds.
(Refer to Body - "Steering Column Shroud Panel")
4. Remove the clock spring.
(Refer to Restraint - "Driver Airbag (DAB) Module and Clock Spring")
5. Disconnect the light switch connector (A) and the wiper switch connector (B).
Page 158 sur 295

6. Remove the wiper switch (A) by pushing the lock pin (B).

When removing the wiper & washer switch only, release the lock of wiper switch without removing the steering wheel.

7. Loosen the screws from the multifunction switch assembly (A).

Installation
1. Install the multifunction switch.
2. Install the clock spring.
3. Install the steering column upper and lower shrouds.
4. Install the steering wheel.
Page 159 sur 295

5. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.

Make sure the multifunction switch connectors are plugged in properly.

Inspection
Lighting Switch Inspection
1. With the multi function switch in each position, make sure that continuity exists between the terminals below.
If continuity is not as specified, replace the multi-function switch

Lighting switch (Auto light)

Lighting Switch

Dimmer And Passing Switch

Turn Signal Switch

Page 160 sur 295

Front Fog Lamp

Wiper And Washer Switch Inspection

1. With the multi function switch in each position, make sure that continuity exists between the terminals below.
If continuity is not as specified, replace the multi-function switch.

Wiper Switch

Washer Switch

Rear Wiper Switch

Page 161 sur 295

Rear Washer Switch

Inspection (With GDS)

1. Check IPM input/output specification of multifunction switch using the GDS. If the specification is abnormal, replace the lamp or wiper
switch.
2. If diagnosis is required on the multifunction switch, select model and "IPM".

3. Select "Current data" and check the input/output condition of "Multifunction switch".
Page 162 sur 295

4. To perform test on "Multifunction switch" outputs, select "Actuation test".

Body Electrical System

Specifications
Item Specification
Rated voltage DC 12V
Operation range 30~120 cm(11.8~47.2 in)
Operation voltage DC 9V~16V
Front/Rear parking assist system control Operation current Max. 300 mA
unit Operation temperature -30~+80 °C
Operation frequency 48 ± 5 KHz
Front : 4EA(Left, Right, Center left, Center right)
Number of sensors
Rear : 4EA(Left, Right, Center left, Center right)
Page 163 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Component Location

1. BCM 2. Ultrasonic sensor

※ Parking assist control unit function and buzzer are built in BCM (body control unit).

Body Electrical System

System Configuration
PAS consists of 8 sensors(Front 4 EA, Rear 4EA) which are detecting the obstacles and transmit the result separated into three warning
levels, the first, second and third to IPM(BCM) by Lin communication. IPM(BCM) decides the alarm level by the transmitted communication
message from the slave sensors, then operate the buzzer or transmits the data for display.

Block Diagram
Page 164 sur 295

System Operation Specification

1. Initial mode - Front sensor
(1) System initializing time is 500ms after IGN1+ initial D Gear + below 10 Km/h .
(2) PAS recognizes LID and sets the sensor ID up during initialization.
(3) PAS activates each sensor and then executes the diagnosis after finishing initialization of IPM(BCM).
(4) PAS Starting buzzer” is normally worked, when sensor does not send an error message and after finishing error diagnosis.
(5) If any failure is received from the any sensors, PAS Starting Buzzer” does not work but the failure alarm is operated for a moment.
If you have display option, warning sign is also shown on it.
(6) Buzzer for sensor failure is operated once, but display is shown continuously until it is repaired completely.
(7) IPM(BCM) memorizes the completed initializing status of front sensor until IGN 1 is OFF. It doesn't activate initializing when next D
gear input.
(8) In case of PAS SW OFF, system initializing does not be activated.
(9) If PAS switch is ON like as below status, it activates initializing.
A. PAS switch OFF when IGN1 is On.
B. PAS switch ON when vehicle speed is below 10 km/h
(10) Initializing has nothing to do with parking brake operation.
2. Initial mode - Rear sensor
(1) System initializing time is 500ms after IGN1+ initial R Gear.
(2) PAS recognizes LID and sets the sensor ID up during initialization.
(3) PAS activates each sensor and then executes the diagnosis after finishing initialization of IPM(BCM).
(4) PAS Starting buzzer” is normally worked, when sensor does not send an error message and after finishing error diagnosis.
(5) If any failure is received from the any sensors, PAS Starting Buzzer” does not work but the failure alarm is operated for a moment.
If you have display option, warning sign is also shown on it.
(6) Buzzer for sensor failure is operated once, but display is shown continuously until it is repaired completely.
(7) IPM(BCM) memorizes the completed initializing status of rear sensor until IGN 1 is OFF. It doesn't activate initializing when next R
gear input.
(8) Initializing has nothing to do with parking brake operation.
Page 165 sur 295

3. Normal mode - Front sensor

(1) Lin communication starts and keeps the routine after IGN1 ON+D gear + below 10 km/h.
(2) After initializing, the routine starts at once without PAS starting warning sound.
(3) Alarms of obstacle consists of 3 level 1,2,3 step and 1,2 alarm sounds intermittently and 3 alarm sounds continuously. 1 level alarm
doesn't exist in the front ultrasonic sensor.
A. Type with display
• 2 level alarm : Display is only operated without alarm.
• 3 level alarm : Alarm + Display
B. Type without display : Alarm only
(4) In display, the data of each sensor is sent from IPM(BCM) to display, for example cluster. CAN communication is used for
transmission and maximum gateway time is 50ms.
(5) The efficient vehicle speed of RPAS operation is under 10Km/h.
(6) It doesn't work at PAS SW OFF.
(7) It has nothing to do with parking brake operation.
(8) Operation doesn't start or stops at gear N, P.
4. Normal mode - Rear sensor
(1) Lin communication starts and keeps the routine after IGN1 ON+R gear
(2) BCM send a message once to each sensor for operating request to check the initial status of the system and four sensors response
at a time. At this time, if there is no problem, the alarm starts after 500ms of R gear shifting at 300ms intervals.
(3) After initialization, normal mode starts 100ms later after finishing alarm output.
(4) Alarm for obstacles is divided into 3 levels.
The first and second are intermittent sound, and the third alarms continuously
(5) In display, the data of each sensor is sent from BCM to display, for example Cluster.
CAN communication is used for transmission and maximum gateway time is 50ms.
(6) It has nothing to do with vehicle speed.
(7) When PAS SW is OFF, if gear R signal is inputted, PAS SW is changed to ON.
(8) It has nothing to do with parking brake operation.
(9) Operation doesn't start or stops at gear N, P.

Sensing Area
1. Measurement condition – PVC pole (diameter 75mm, length 3m), normal temperature
2. Distance range detected objects (Measured directly in front of sensor)
Distance range
Position Level
cm inch
1st 61 ~100 (±15) 24.0 ~ 39.4 (±5.9)
Front 2nd 31 ~ 60 (±15) 12.2 ~ 23.6 (±5.9)
3rd Less than 30 (±10) Less than 11.8 (±3.9)
1st 61 ~120 (±15) 24.0 ~ 47.2 (±5.9)
Rear 2nd 31 ~ 60 (±15) 12.2 ~ 23.6 (±5.9)
3rd Less than 30 (±10) Less than 11.8 (±3.9)

Horizontal Sensing Area

Page 166 sur 295

Vertical Sensing Area

Distance Measurement

Direct Measurement
Transmission and Reception are executed with one sensor
(FL, FCL, FCR, FR, RL, RCL, RCR, RR each sensor execution)
Page 167 sur 295

Indirect Measurement
(FCL → FL, FCL → FCR, FCR → FCL, FCR → FR, RCL → RL, RCL → RCR, RCR → RCL, RCR → RR Execution in order)
With two or three sensors, one of them sends the transmission and the others get the reception.

Direct and Indirect Measurement at once

With two or three sensors, the one sensor performs both transmission and reception, and the others perform only reception.
Page 168 sur 295

RPAS alarm system

When the RPAS sensor detects the object, warning is operated by audible alarm device as like buzzer. RPAS sensor sends data to BCM
with LIN communication and BCM implements audible warning for each RPAS SENSOR by priority. And it performs a role of gateway only
when it sends visible alarm device such as Cluster.
- Sensor buzzer/display information processing method of BCM In case of RL/RR sensor information, the BCM handles each sensor
information directly about Display and buzzer output function. Buzzer output of CL/CR sensor, BCM handles center combination
information by priority both sensor, Otherwise, about fail display information,BCM send that to cluster each sensor information.

System operation Spec - Front sensor

When the system has the power (after IGN ON and D gear), MICOM checks every sensor channel. In case it is not find any error, it sounds
500ms afterward. But it finds any error even a sensor, it sounds buzzer corresponding fault sensor instead of initial starting alarm. If PAS ON
switch in OFF, system doesn't work. Function for normal mode entrance is as below.

* In the initial mode, IPM(BCM) judges only sensor fail.

With D gear, system function is as below.
Page 169 sur 295

With D gear releasing, system function is as below

System Operation Spec - Rear sensor

When the system has the power (after IGN ON and R gear), MICOM checks every sensor channel.In case it is not find any error, it sounds
300ms buzzer 500ms afterward.But it finds any error even a sensor, it sounds buzzer corresponding fault sensor instead of initial starting
alarm. Function for normal mode entrance is as below

With R Gear, system function is as below

Page 170 sur 295

With R gear releasing, system function is as below

※acceptable error range on waveform ±10%

Alarm Output Specification classified by distance between sensors

Condition logic according to priority of alarm level is as below. (the identical sensor)

*α value definition
1. low priority sensor off : α = 0ms
2. low priority sensor is 1st warning level : α < 340ms
3. low priority sensor is 2nd warning level : α < 170ms
*β value definition
1. low priority sensor is 1st warning level : β = 1700ms
2. low priority sensor is 2nd warning level : β = 1700ms
3. low priority sensor is 3rd warning level : β = 700ms
Alarm control by sensing distance is as below
1. First warning area (Front: 61cm(24in) ~ 100cm(39.4in), Rear: 81cm(31.9in) ~ 120cm(47.2in) )
Page 171 sur 295

2. Second warning area (Front: 31cm(12.2in) ~ 60cm(23.6in), Rear: 41cm(16.1in) ~ 80cm(31.5in) )

3. Third warning area (Front: less than 20cm(7.9in). Rear: less than 40cm(15.7in))

4. Period of fault alarm

(1) With visible display

Visible Alarm Indicator Specification.

Front alarm display

When the system operates, cluster lights the indicator as below figure.
When the system finds an object, it lights indicator immediately.
1. Alarm level per distance - Front sensor
A. First step alarm : 61~100 cm(24~39.4 in)
B. Second step alarm : 31~60 cm(12.2~23.6 in)
C. Third step alarm : Less than 30 cm(11.8 in)
* It only displays the position of detected obstacle.
* Indicator blinks every 1 second at third step alarm.
Rear alarm display
1. Alarm level per distance - Rear sensor
When the gear is applied to R, cluster lights the indicator as below figure.When the system finds an object, it lights indicator immediately.
During sensing an object, if there is no object, it lights indicator that is no alarm status for two seconds and then turns out afterward
detecting an object.(But when it turns third step alarm to No alarm status, it lights third step alarm for two second and turns out.)
A. First step alarm : 61~120 cm(24~39.4 in)
B. Second step alarm : 31~60 cm(12.2~23.6 in)
C. Third step alarm : Less than 30 cm(11.8 in)
Page 172 sur 295

* It only displays the position of detected obstacle.

* Indicator blinks every 1 second at third step alarm.
* Integrated display(FCL/FCR, RCL/RCR)

Error Handling
LIN BUS Off error case

Section Error recognition condition Error releasing condition

Initial Routine LIN BUS OFF sensing once Error is not released in initial mode.
The fault is released when BCM or LIN Master senses
Normal Routine LIN BUS OFF is sensed times in a row
LIN BUS ON four times in a row in normal mode

※ Remark :
1. In fault counting, output message or signal should be transmitted as a Last Valid value.
2. Error in initial mode, fault buzzer (BCM) is operated with fault display(Cluster)
3. Error in normal mode, fault is only displayed on Cluster without buzzer.
Sensor fault (LIN Msg : 0x08)

Section Error recognition condition Error releasing condition

Initial Routine Sensor fault Message sensing once Error is not released in initial mode.
The fault is released when BCM or LIN Master senses
Normal Routine Sensor fault Message sensing four times in a row
LIN BUS ON four times in a row in normal mode

※ In fault display, RCR/RCL indicator is displayed individually

※ Remark :
1. In fault counting, output message or signal should be transmitted as a Last Valid value.
2. Error in initial mode, fault buzzer (BCM) is operated with fault display (Cluster)
3. Error in normal mode, fault is only displayed on Cluster without buzzer
4. When the error occurs in direct condition, the sensors sent the same status of error for indirect condition
Page 173 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
Page 174 sur 295
Page 175 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front/rear bumper cover.
(Refer to Body - "Front Bumper Cover")
(Refer to Body - "Rear Bumper Cover")
3. Disconnect the connector (A) from the ultrasonic sensor.

[Front sensor, Rear center sensor]

Page 176 sur 295

[Rear side sensor]

4. Pull out ths ultrasonic sensor (A) by opening the sensor holder out.

[Front sensor, Rear center sensor]

[Rear side sensor]

Installation
1. Install the PAS sensor and connector.
Page 177 sur 295

2. Install the front/rear bumper cover.

Body Electrical System

Component Location

1. Driver power window main switch 4. Front door lock actuator & switch
2. BCM (Body Control Module) 5. Rear door lock actuator & switch
3. Door lock switch 6. Tailgate lock actuator & switch

Body Electrical System

Inspection
Front Door Lock Module Inspection
1. Remove the front door trim.
Page 178 sur 295

(Refer to Body - "Front Door Trim")

2. Remove the front door module.
(Refer to Body - "Front Door Module")
3. Disconnect the connectors from the actuator.

4. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery
voltage only momentarily.

[Central Lock]

5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.
Page 179 sur 295

Rear Door Lock Module Inspection

1. Remove the rear door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Rear Door Trim")
2. Remove the rear door module.
(Refer to Body - "Rear Door Module")
3. Disconnect the connectors from the actuator.

4. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery
voltage only momentarily.

[Central Lock]
Page 180 sur 295

5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.

Tailgate Lock Module Inspection

1. Remove the tailgate trim.
(Refer to Body - "Tailgate Trim")
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the actuator.

3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table. To prevent damage to the actuator, apply battery
voltage only momentarily.

Tailgate Open Switch

1. Remove the tailgate trim.
(Refer to Body - "Tailgate Trim")
2. Disconnect the connector from the actuator.
Page 181 sur 295

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.

Hood Switch
1. Disconnect the connector (A) and bolts from the hood switch.

2. Check for continuity between the terminals and ground according to the table.

Body Electrical System

Diagnosis With GDS

1. The BCM can be diagnosed by using the GDS. The BCM communicates with the GDS which then displays inputs and outputs along with
codes.
It will be able to diagnose power door lock/unlock defects with GDS quickly. GDS can operates the actuator forcefully,monitor
input/output values and self diagnosis.
2. To diagnose the SJB function, select the vehicle model, BCM and DDM.
3. Select "Input/output monitoring", if you will check current data of power door lock system. It provides input/output status of DDM.
Page 182 sur 295

4. To perform functional test on SJB outputs, select "Actuation Test".

Page 183 sur 295

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Front Door Trim")
3. Remove the power window switch assembly (A) loosening the mounting screws (8EA).

4. Remove the power window switch (A) after loosening the mounting screws (4EA).

Installation
Page 184 sur 295

1. Install the power window switch assembly.

2. Install the front door trim after connect the connector.
Body Electrical System

Component Location

1. Power door mirror 3. Power folding mirror switch

2. Power door mirror switch

Body Electrical System

Components
Page 185 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
Page 186 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front left door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Front Door Trim")
3. Remove the power window switch assembly (A) loosening the mounting screws (8EA).
Page 187 sur 295

4. Remove the power window switch (A) after loosening the mounting screws (4EA).

5. Remove the power mirror switch (A) after loosening the mounting screw (1EA).

Installation
1. Install the power mirror switch.
2. Install the front door trim after connecting the connector.
3. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.

Inspection
1. Remove the front left door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Front Door Trim")
2. Remove the power mirror switch connector (A) from the door trim.
Page 188 sur 295

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.

[Power Mirror Switch]

[Power Folding Mirror Switch]

Body Electrical System

Inspection
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front door quadrant cover (A).
Page 189 sur 295

3. Disconnect the power door mirror connector (A) from the harness.

4. Apply battery voltage to each terminal as shown in the table and verify that the mirror operates properly.

[Actuator]
Page 190 sur 295

Mirror Heater

Turn Signal Lamp

Folding Mirror

Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 191 sur 295

1. Drive power window switch 4. Rear window motor

2. Passenge power window switch 5. Rear window switch
3. Front window motor

Body Electrical System

Function Of Safety Power Window

When driver door power window auto-up switch is operated, safety function is activated.
1. Safety function condition
When detect the force of 100N (using the 10N/mm spring) during the window rising, window is reversed.
2. Length of window reversing (except holding the auto-up switch)
A. When detect the jamming during the 4mm ~ 250mm from top of the door.
→ Window is reversed until 300mm from top of the door.
Page 192 sur 295

B. When detect the jamming over the 250mm from top of the door.
→ Window is reversed until 20mm from jamming position.

3. Length of window reversing (holding the auto-up switch)

A. When detect the jamming during holding the auto-up switch.
→ Window is reverse until 25mm from jamming position.
B. Auto-up function is not available during the 5 seconds from above condition.
→ When holding the auto-up switch, window is operated as a manual-up function. (Safety function is not activated.)
C. When holding the auto-up switch after 5 seconds from above condition.
→ Window is reverse until 25mm from jamming position.

4. Safety function is not available area

Safety function is not available during the 4mm from top of the door.

Initializing Method Of The Safety Power Window

1. Initializing of Battery Connection
When the battery power is removed for over 5 minutes, safety power window switch need the initializing.
(1) Power window operation before initializing
A. Manual-Up/Down function is available
B. Auto-Up function is not available
(When holding the auto-up/down switch, window is operated as a manual-up/down.)
(2) Initializing method
Close the window in window open position, and holding the switch in window full close position over the 0.2 second.
(If start the closing the window in window full close position, initializing could be failed.)
Page 193 sur 295

(3) If the initialize state of the safety power window is in jamming status, the condition below can occur.
A. Safety function is not available
2. Initializing of fail safe mode
(1) If the window moved by compulsion and motor have a problem, power window switch could be entering the fail safe mode for user’s
safety.
(2) Power window operation in fail mode
A. Auto/Manual-Down function is available
B. Auto/Manual-Up function is not available
(When auto/manual-up is operated, window is rising 20mm and is stopped the moving.)
Body Electrical System

Components
Page 194 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Inspection
Front Power Window Motor
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Front Door Trim")
3. Disconnect the connector (A) from the motor.
(A : Safety, B : Standard)
Page 195 sur 295

4. Connect the motor terminals directly to battery voltage (12V) and check that the motor operates smoothly. Next, reverse the polarity and
check that the motor operates smoothly in the reverse direction. If the operation is abnormal, replace the motor.

[General Window Motor]

5. Connect the terminal No. 2 and No. 3 to battery voltage (12V) and check that the motor operates smoothly when connecting the terminals
below.

[Safety Window Motor]

Rear Power Window Motor

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the rear door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Rear Door Trim")
3. Disconnect the connector (A) from the motor.
Page 196 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Components
Driver Power Window Switch
Page 197 sur 295

Assist Power Window Switch

Page 198 sur 295

Rear Power Window Switch

Page 199 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
Driver Power Window Switch
Page 200 sur 295

Assist Power Window Switch

Page 201 sur 295

Rear Power Window Switch

Page 202 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Inspection
Power Window Main Switch Inspection
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Front Door Trim")
3. Disconnect the connector (A) from the power window switch module.
Page 203 sur 295

4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.

[Driver/Assist Safety]

[Driver Auto Down]

Assist Power Window Switch Inspection

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front door trim panel.
(Refer to Body - "Front Door Trim")
3. Disconnect the connector (A) from the switch.
Page 204 sur 295

4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If the continuity condition is not normal, replace
the switch.

[Safety]

[Manual]

Rear Power Window Switch Inspection

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the rear door trim panel.
(Refer to Body - "Rear Door Trim")
3. Disconnect the connector (A) from the switch.
Page 205 sur 295

4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If the continuity condition is not normal, replace
the switch.

[With Seat Heater]

[Without Seat Heater]

Removal
Driver Power Window Switch
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Front Door Trim")
3. Remove the power window switch assembly (A) loosening the mounting screws (8EA).
Page 206 sur 295

4. Remove the power window switch assembly (A) after loosening the mounting screws.

Assist Power Window Switch

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Front Door Trim")
3. Remove the power window switch assembly (A) loosening the mounting screws (7EA).

4. Remove the power window switch assembly (A) after loosening the mounting screws.
Page 207 sur 295

Rear Power Window Swtich

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the rear door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Rear Door Trim")
3. Remove the power window switch assembly (A) loosening the mounting screws (7EA).

4. Remove the power window switch assembly (A) after loosening the mounting screws.

Installation
Driver Power Window Switch
1. Install the power window switch assembly.
2. Install the front door trim after connect the connector.

Assist Power Window Switch

1. Install the power window switch assembly.
2. Install the front door trim after connect the connector.

Rear Power Window Swtich

1. Install the power window switch assembly.
2. Install the rear door trim after connect the connector.
Body Electrical System

Inspection
Diagnosis With GDS
1. It will be able to diagnose defects of power window with GDS quickly. GDS can operates actuator forcefully, input/output value monitoring
and self diagnosis.
2. Select model and "BCM".
3. Select the "SJB" to check.
4. Select "Current data", if you will check current data of power window system. It provides input/output status of SJB.
Page 208 sur 295

5. If you will check the power door lock operation forcefully, select "Actuation test".

Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 209 sur 295

1. Rear glass defogger relay (Buil-in smart junction box) 3. Rear glass defogger
2. Rear glass defogger switch (FATC type)

Body Electrical System

Inspection

Wrap tin foil around the end of the voltmeter test lead to prevent damaging the heater line. Apply finger pressure on the tin foil, moving
the tin foil along the grid line to check for open circuits.
Page 210 sur 295

1. Turn on the defogger switch and use a voltmeter to measure the voltage of each heater line at the glass center point. If a voltage of
approximately 6V is indicated by the voltmeter, the heater line of the rear window is considered satisfactory.

2. If a heater line is burned out between the center point and (+) terminal, the voltmeter will indicate 12V.

3. If a heater line is burned out between the center point and (-) terminal, the voltmeter will indicate 0V.

4. To check for open circuits, slowly move the test lead in the direction that the open circuit seems to exist. Try to find a point where a
voltage is generated or changes to 0V. The point where the voltage has changed is the open-circuit point.
Page 211 sur 295

5. Use an ohmmeter to measure the resistance of each heater line between a terminal and the center of a grid line, and between the same
terminal and the center of one adjacent heater line. The section with a broken heater line will have a resistance twice that in other
sections. In the affected section, move the test lead to a position where the resistance sharply changes.

Repair Of Broken Heater Line

Prepare the following items :
1. Conductive paint.
2. Paint thinner.
3. Masking tape.
4. Silicone remover.
5. Using a thin brush :
Wipe the glass adjacent to the broken heater line, clean with silicone remover and attach the masking tape as shown. Shake the
conductive paint container well, and apply three coats with a brush at intervals of about 15 minutes apart. Remove the tape and allow
sufficient time for drying before applying power. For a better finish, scrape away excess deposits with a knife after the paint has
completely dried. (Allow 24 hours).

Body Electrical System

Inspection
1. The windshield deicer switch inputs can be checked using the GDS.
2. To check the input value of windshield deicer switch, select option "Body Control Module".
3. Select option "Current Data".
Page 212 sur 295

4. To perform functional test on SJB outputs, select "Actuation Test".

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the heater and A/C control unit.
Page 213 sur 295

(Refer to Heating, Ventilation, Air Condition - "Heater & A/C Control Untit (FATC))

Installation
1. Install the heater and A/C control unit.
2. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.
Body Electrical System

Component Location

1. Head cap 4. Grommet

2. Rear wiper arm nut 5. Rear wiper motor assembly
3. Rear wiper arm & blade 6. Rear wiper motor bolt

Body Electrical System

Inspection
Rear Wiper Motor
1. Remove the connector from the rear wiper motor.
Page 214 sur 295

2. Connect battery positive (+) and negative (-) cables to terminals 2 and 1 respectively.
3. Check that the motor operates normally. Replace the motor if it operates abnormally.
No. Description
1 Battery (+)
2 Parking
3 Ground
4 Signal

Automatic Stop Operation Check

1. Operate the motor at low speed using the stalk control.
2. Stop the motor operation anywhere except at the off position by disconnecting terminal 2.
3. Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 2 and the negative (-) lead to terminal 1.
4. Check that the motor stops running at the off position.

Removal
1. Detach the rear wiper cap (A).
Page 215 sur 295

2. Remove the rear wiper arm & blade (B) after removing rear wiper HEX nut (A).

3. Remove the rear wiper grommet (A).

4. Remove the tailgate trim after opening the tailgate.

(Refer to Body - "Tailgate Trim")
5. Disconnect the rear wiper motor connector (A) then remove the rear wiper motor (B) after loosening bolts.
Page 216 sur 295

Installation
1. Install the rear wiper motor assembly.
Tightening torque Bolt :
6.9~10.8 Nm (0.7~1.1 kgf.m, 5.1~8.0 lbf.ft)
2. Install the tailgate trim.
3. Install the rear wiper arm cap after tighting the nut.
Tightening torque Nut :
3.9~6.9 N.m (0.4~0.7 kgf.m, 2.9~5.1 lbf.ft)
4. Set the rear wiper blade and to the lowest defogger heat line and tailgate glass.
A : Auto stop position

Body Electrical System

Inspection
1. Check for continuity between the terminals while operating the wiper and washer switch. If it is not normal condition, replace wiper and
wiper switch.
Page 217 sur 295

Rear Wiper Switch

Rear Washer Switch

Body Electrical System

Inspection
1. With the washer motor connected to the reservoir tank, fill the reservoir tank with water.

Before filling the reservoir tank with water, check the filter for foreign material or contamination. if necessary, clean the filter.
2. Remove the front bumper cover.
(Refer to Body - "Front Bumper Cover")
3. Connect positive (+) and negative (-) battery cables to terminals 1 and 2 respectively to see that the washer motor runs and water is
pumped.
4. Check that the motor operates normally.
Replace the motor if it operates abnormally.
Page 218 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Components
[First Row Seat]
Page 219 sur 295

Connector Pin Information

Pin No. Connector A Connector B Connector C
1 Illumination (+) Ground Electric compressor - interlock (+)
2 Sensor REF (+5V) Sensor ground Electric compressor - interlock (-)
3 C_CAN High PWM blower IN High voltage PTC heater - interlock (+)
4 C_CAN LOW Cluster ionizer diagnosis High voltage PTC heater - interlcok (-)
5 Driver mode actuator (VENT) - PAB IGN3
6 Driver mode actuator (DEF) CLEAN signal PAB ON signal
7 Driver mode actuator F/B Assist mode actuator (VENT) PAB OFF signal
8 Intake actuator (FRE) Assist mode actuator (DEF) SBR
9 Intake actuator (REC) Assist mode actuator F/B Rr LEFT SBR
10 Extake actuator F/B DEF actuator (OPEN) Rr CENTER SBR
Page 220 sur 295

11 K-LINE DEF actuator (CLOSE) Rr RIGHT SBR

12 HTD DEF actuator F/B -
13 Rear defog switch Vent left duct sensor (+) -
14 Temperature control actuator (COOL) Floor left duct sensor (+) -
15 Temperature control actuator (WARM) IGN3 -
16 Temperature control actuator F/B IGN2 -
17 Driver seat heater indicator - LOW -
18 Driver seat heater indicator - MID 2 WAY valve #1 (+)
19 Driver seat heater indicator - HIGH 3 WAY valve #1 (+)
20 Illumination (RHEO) 3 WAY valve #2 (+)
21 DETENT OUT (+) 2 WAY valve #2 (+)
22 Driver seat heater switch CLIMATE_CAN HIGH
23 Driver cooler seat indicator - LOW CLIMATE_CAN LOW
24 Driver cooler seat indicator - MID HUMIDITY (PWM)
25 Driver cooler seat indicator - HIGH Air pressor tranduser signal
Refrigerant temperature sensor signal
26 Assist seat heater switch
#1
Refrigerant temperature sensor signal
27 Ambient sensor (+)
#2
28 EVAP sensor (+) Coolant 3way valve output
29 Assist cooler seat indicator - LOW IGN3
30 Assist cooler seat indicator - MID Blower IS
31 Assist cooler seat indicator - HIGH Battery
32 Photo sensor (-) Battery
33 Assist cooler switch
34 Driver cooler switch
35 Blower INH
36 MM_CAN HIGH
37 MM_CAN LOW
38 Assist seat heater indicator - LOW
39 Assist seat heater indicator - MID
40 Assist seat heater indicator - HIGH

Second Row Seat

Page 221 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
[First Row Seat]
Page 222 sur 295

Second Row Seat

Page 223 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Removal
First Row Seat
1. Remove the heater & A/C control unit.
(Refer to Heating, Ventilation And Air Conditioning - "Heater & A/C Control Unit (FATC)")

Second Row Seat

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the rear door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Rear Door Trim")
3. Remove the power window switch assembly (A) loosening the mounting screws (7EA).

Installation
First Row Seat
1. Install the heater & A/C control unit.
(Refer to Heating, Ventilation And Air Conditioning - "Heater & A/C Control Unit (FATC)")

Second Row Seat

Page 224 sur 295

1. Install the power window switch.

2. Install the rear door trim.
3. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.

Inspection
First Row Seat
1. Disconnect the negative (-) batttery terminal.
2. Disconnect the A/C & heater controller connectors (A).
(Refer to Heating, Ventilation And Air Conditioning - "Heater & A/C Control Unit (FATC)")

3. Operate switch and check that continuity exists between the terminals.
If there is no continuity, replace the seat heater switch.

Second Row Seat

1. Disconnect the negative (-) batttery terminal.
2. Remove the rear door trim.
(Refer to Body - "Rear Door Trim")
3. Operate driver seat heater switch and check that continuity exists between the terminals.
If there is no continuity, replace the seat heater switch.
Page 225 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Components
Page 226 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
[First Row Seat]

[Second Row Seat]

Page 227 sur 295
Page 228 sur 295
Page 229 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Inspection
First Row Seat
1. Check for continuity and measure the resistance between terminals.
Page 230 sur 295

Resistanc
Connector
(± 10%)
Cushion (C) 1-2 4.54 Ω
Back (B) 1-2 5.16 Ω
Set (A) 1-4 9.70 Ω

Second Row Seat

1. Check for continuity and measure the resistance between terminals.
[LH]

[RH]

Resistanc
Connector
(± 10%)
Cushion (A) 1-4 4.13 Ω

Performance of heater is the average temperature of seat surface.

The temperature of seat surface according to pushing the seat heater switch is as below.

Type 1st 2nd 3rd

First row seat 38°C 42°C
HI-Low -
Cushion (100°F) (107.6°F)
(±2°C/±35.6°F) 36°C 39°C 42°C
3 Step
(96.8°F) (102.2°F) (107.6°F)
Back 45°C 50°C
HI-Low -
(±2°C/±35.6°F) (113°F) (122°F)
Page 231 sur 295

3 Step 40°C 45°C 50°C

(104°F) (113°F) (122°F)
Cushion 38°C 42°C
Second row seat HI-Low -
(±2°C/±35.6°F) (100.4°F) (107.6°F)

Body Electrical System

Components

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
Page 232 sur 295
Page 233 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Inspection
Front Seat
1. Check for continuity and measure the resistance between terminals.
Page 234 sur 295

Resistanc
Connector
(± 10%)
Cushion (C) 1-4 4.54 Ω
Back (B) 1-4 5.16 Ω
Set (A) 3-4 9.70 Ω

Performance of heater is the average temperature of seat surface.

The temperature of seat surface according to pushing the seat heater switch is as below.

Type 1st 2nd 3rd

Cushion 36°C 39°C 42°C
(±2°C/±35.6°F) (96.8°F) (102.2°F) (107.6°F)
First row seat 3 Step
Back 40°C 45°C 50°C
(±2°C/±35.6°F) (104°F) (113°F) (122°F)

Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 235 sur 295

1. Seat back blower 3. Air ventilation seat control unit

2. Seat cushion blower

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
Page 236 sur 295
Page 237 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Description
The ventilated seat system uses a Push method to cool the seat. A blower mounted in the seat generates the cool air, which then travels
through ducts to the seat back and cushion.
Page 238 sur 295

1. Make sure not to spoil drink or water on the seat when equipping with ventilation system seat
2. Because of inhaling the slight air, it is difficult to feel the air strength by the sense of touch.
Body Electrical System

Removal
Cushion Blower
1. Remove the front seat assembly.
(Refer to Body - "Front Seat Assembly")
2. Remove the cushion blower (B) after loosening the screws and disconnecting the connector (A).

Back Blower
1. Remove the front seat assembly.
(Refer to Body - "Front Seat Assembly")
2. Remove the front seat back cover.
(Refer to Body - "Front Seat Back Cover")
3. Disconnect the connector (A) and fastners (B).
Page 239 sur 295

4. Remove the back blower (A) after loosening the mounting screws.

Air Ventilation Unit

1. Remove the front seat assembly.
(Refer to Body - "Front Seat Assembly")
2. Remove the air ventilation unit (A) after loosening the screws and disconnecting the connector.

[Drive's Side]

[Passenger's Side]
Page 240 sur 295

Installation
Cushion Blower
1. Install the cushion blower.
2. Install the front seat assembly.

Back Blower
1. Install the back blower.
2. Install the front seat back cover.
3. Install the front seat assembly.

Air Ventilation Unit

1. Install the air ventilation unit.
2. Install the front seat assembly.
Body Electrical System

Specification
Smart Key Unit
Items Specification
Rated voltage DC 12V
Operating voltage DC 9 ~ 16V
Operating temperature -30°C ~ 75°C (-22°F ~ 167°F)
Dark current Max. 4mA (When welcome light function off)
Frequency 433 Mhz

Smart Key FOB

Items Specification
Battery Lithium battery 3V 1EA
Distance 30m
More than 2 years

Battery life An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human
health.
Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.
Push buttons 4 (Door lock / unlock, Trunk lid, Panic)
Frequency(Rx) 134.2 kHz
Frequency(Tx) 433.92 MHz
Numbers 2EA

Antenna
Items Specification
Rated voltage DC 12V
Operating voltage DC 9 ~ 16V
Page 241 sur 295

Operating temperature -30°C ~ 80°C (-22°F ~ 176°F)

Frequency 134.2 kHz
Numbers Interior(1EA), Door(2EA), Trunk(1EA), Bumper(1EA)

Body Electrical System

Component Location (1)

1. Smart key unit 3. Door outside handle

2. External buzzer 4. Interior antenna 1

Component Location (2)

Page 242 sur 295

1. Bumper antenna 3. Trunk lid open switch

2. Interior antenna 2

Body Electrical System

Description
The SMART KEY system is a system that allows the user to access and operate a vehicle in a very convenient way. To access the vehicle,
no traditional key or remote control unit is needed.
The user carries a SMART KEY FOB which does not require any conscious actions by the user (e.g. operate a RKE button). The SMART
KEY system is triggered by pressing a push button in the door handle.
After being triggered the vehicle sends out a request in a limited range. If the SMART KEY FOB receives this request, it automatically sends
a response to the vehicle. Then the system decides whether to perform a particular action (unlocking, locking…) or remain inactive.
Again, a communication between the vehicle and the SMART KEY FOB is needed before any actions will be performed.
The System offers the following features :
• Passive unlock via door driver side and passenger side
• Passive locking via door driver side and passenger side
• Passive start
Page 243 sur 295

• Passive access trunk via the trunk lid switch at the trunk
• Passive locking via tailgate
• Max. 2 fobs can be handled by the system
• Immobilizer backup antenna integrated into SSB for TP authentication (i.e. limp home mode)
• Communication with engine management system
• LF-RF communication
1. Passive unlock
The system allows the user to access (unlock) the vehicle without performing any actions with the SMART KEY FOB. This feature could
be different depending on platform as follows:
A. Pressing Push button in door handle
2. Passive locking
The system allows the user to lock the vehicle by pushing a button on door handle with the SMART KEY FOB.
3. Button start
The system allows to switch the power modes (Off, Accessory, Ignition), as well as to start and stop the vehicle’s engine without
performing any actions with the SMART KEY FOB. See Button Engine Start system specification.
4. LIMP HOME Mode
Additionally, the system offers so called “limp home mode”, which is the user can operate all vehicle functions by pushing the key into the
SSB.

Smart Key ECU (SMK ECU)

The SMK ECU manages all functions related to “Passive Unlock”, “Passive Lock” and “Passive Authorization for Engine Start Operation”.
It reads the inputs (Push button in door handle, Start Stop Button (SSB), PARK position Switch), controls the outputs (e.g. exterior and
interior antennas), and communicates via the CAN (depends on the vehicle) as well as a single line interface to further devices of the car.
For communication with the SMART KEY FOB, SMK ECU generates a request (challenge) as an encoded and modulated 134.2 kHz signal
at the inductive antenna outputs and receives the SMART KEY FOB’s response via the external RF receiver.
The main functional blocks of the SMK ECU are:
• Power supply
• Microcontroller with FLASH Memory
• Single Line Interface to EMS
• Input stage
• LF antenna amplifier/driver
• CAN communication with BCM
The LF antenna amplifier/driver generates a 134.2 kHz sinusoidal carrier signal which is distributed to the different antennas.

Smart Key FOB

The system supports up to 2 SMART KEY FOBs.
The main functions of the SMART KEY FOB are:
• Passive functionality: receives LF-challenge and sends automatically RF response.
• Classic RKE function by action up to 3 push buttons.
• Transponder-functionality in case of a flat battery or a disturbed communication.
• LED for operation feedback and battery monitoring.

The FOB's LED indicator may continue to light even with a low transmitter battery.
If the performance or range of the FOB is less than expected, check the transmitter battery.

Antennas
1. Emitting LF Antennas:
Inductive antennas in and at the vehicle are used to transform the current, driven by the SMK ECU antenna driver, into a 134.2 kHz
magnetic field, which is the carrier for the SMART KEY challenge.
Three antennas cover the vehicle’s exterior: two antennas in the Door Handles (DS and PS) cover the area around the doors; one
antenna in the rear bumper covers the area around the trunk.
Up to two antennas cover the vehicle’s interior and the trunk interior: one in the passenger compartment and one in the trunk.
2. Bidirectional Immobilizer Antenna (for Limp Home):
The Immobilizer Backup Antenna is used for sending and receiving data: it emits a magnetic field (134.2 kHz challenge) and receives
changes in the field strength (response of Transponder).

Door Handle
Page 244 sur 295

The front door handles of the two doors (driver door / passenger door) are equipped with emitting LF-antennas to emit the 134.2 kHz signals.
The front door handles are also equipped with a push button.

Push Button
The push button in door handle serves as a trigger to indicate the user’s intent to unlock or lock the vehicle.
The push buttons are installed at front doors, integrated into the door handles.
Another button is installed at the trunk lid.

Operation
Passive Functions
The system allows the user to access the vehicle without having to perform any actions (e.g. RKE button pressing) with the SMART KEY
FOB. It is sufficient that a valid SMART KEY FOB is located within a defined and limited range with respect to the vehicle. So the system is
capable of detecting and authenticating a SMART KEY FOB in the ranges as specified below.
Operating Range
The SMART KEY FOB receives and interprets a challenge sent from the vehicle via the exterior antennas in a free space range of min. 0.7m
measured around the exterior antennas which are integrated in the door handles. The trunk access range is also min. 0.7m measured from
the antenna position.

Passive Access (Passive Entry)

Pressing one of the push buttons in the door handles when all doors locked indicates the operator’s intent to access the vehicle and thus
triggers the system for unlock

Passive Locking (Exit)

Pressing one of the push buttons in the door handles when one of the following condition is fulfilled:
• All door is closed and at least one door is unlocked.
indicates the operator’s intent to lock the vehicle and thus triggers the system for a lock.

Passive Open Trunk

Pressing the Trunk Lid Switch when trunk is closed indicates the operator’s intent to open the trunk and thus triggers the system.
Subsequently, the SMK ECU sends a LF-challenge to the SMART KEY FOB via the exterior bumper antenna. The SMART KEY FOB
answers with a RF-response. If the received response matches the expected answer, SMK ECU sends a “trunk open” message via the CAN
network.

Passive Trunk Warning

Whenever the trunk is closed, SMK ECU uses a suitable search strategy to avoid trunk buzzer warning by a fob inside the vehicle. Then
SMK searches for a SMART KEY FOB in the interior of the trunk. If a valid SMART KEY FOB is found in the trunk, the SMK ECU activates
SMK external buzzer (TBD) to inform the user that the trunk has been closed with a fob inside the trunk.
SMK will send the trunk open command to BCM for trunk reopening if trunk reopening bit is set(BK)For this functionality, a “valid” SMART
KEY FOB means any SMART KEY FOB that belongs to the vehicle, even if it’s DEACTIVATED.

- A blind spot in the trunk similar to any RF disturbance may lead to no trunk warning. Due to the penetration of the bumper antenna
into the trunk area the lid may open without an Identification Device outside.

Smart Key Reminder 1

1. Preconditions:
All terminals OFF & at least one door open & locking status is not locked checked by SMK periodically every 100ms, as long as CAN/LIN
active.
2. Event:
At least 1 door knob status changed from unlock to lock.
3. SMK actions:
A. IF NO FOB-IN ACTIVE
SMK performs a search for the fobs in the interior of the vehicle. The same LF-strategy has to be used as it is defined for the ID out
warning (registering only, no authentication)
B. IF FOB-IN ACTIVE
SMK searches valid TP
If no fob or no TP has been found, no action is required.
If any valid fob or valid TP has been found, SMK unlocks the vehicle by sending a CAN Key Reminder unlock message with the fob
number.
Page 245 sur 295

If any valid fob has been found, SMK unlocks the vehicle by sending a CAN/LIN Key Reminder unlock message with the fob number.

Smart Key Reminder 2

1. Preconditions:
All terminals OFF & any door (including trunk) open & no FOB-IN & no locking status (checked by SMK periodically every 100ms, as long
as CAN/LIN active)
2. Vehicle action:
Closing last door or trunk with knobs locked state, or with a locking in progress
3. SMK actions:
Before elapsing 500ms after the closing if all doors are locked then:
A. IF NO FOB-IN ACTIVE
SMK performs a search for the fobs in the interior of the vehicle.
The same LF-strategy has to be used as it is defined for the ID out warning (registering only, no authentication)
B. IF FOB-IN ACTIVE
SMK searches valid TP
If no fob has been found, no action is required.
If any valid fob or valid TP has been found, SMK sends unlock command via CAN and activates ext. buzzer warning.
If any valid fob has been found, SMK sends unlock command via CAN/LIN and activates ext. buzzer warning.

Smart Key Door Lock Warning

Door Lock Warning 1
1. Preconditions:
While (at least one door knob is unlocked) & (ACC ON or IGN ON) & (No FOB-IN) :
A. (All doors are closed) & (trunk closed)
2. Event:
A. User presses the push button in door handle or trunk
3. SMK actions:
SMK performs a search for the fobs outside of the vehicle; the same LF-strategy has to be used as it is defined for "Scenario Access with
I/O Distinction".

Door Lock Warning 2

1. Preconditions:
Same as passive locking precondition but with at least one door open.
2. Event:
User presses the door handle Push button .
3. SMK actions:
SMK performs a search for the fobs outside of the vehicle; the same LF-strategy has to be used as it is defined for "Scenario Access with
I/O Distinction".
If no fob has been found, no action is required.
If the preconditions are no longer valid during buzzer active time (3 seconds), the SMK ECU stops the buzzer immediately.

Door Lock Warning 3

1. Preconditions:
Same as passive locking precondition
2. User action:
A. User presses the door handle Push button
3. SMK ECU actions:
A. If ATWS(Anti Theft Warning System) is in DISARM status, SMK ECU performs a search for the fob inside of the vehicle (use "Door
Lock Warning 3" scenario)
If no fob has been found, the passive locking is performed.
If any valid fob has been found, SMK ECU activates the external buzzer.
If the activity timer elapsed or ACC ON or IGN1 ON or NOT All door closed or FOB-IN, the SMK ECU stops the buzzer immediately.
After searching of inside fob, SMK ECU also performs a search for fobs outside of the vehicle.

Smart Key Lamp Warning

1. SMK actions:
Page 246 sur 295

As long as the preconditions are valid, the SMK ECU performs a periodical search for the fobs in the interior of the vehicle; the same LF-
strategy has to be used as it is defined for the ID out warning (registering only, no authentication); periodical means, the search is done
every 3 seconds.
If no fob has been found, the SMK ECU starts Key out indicator lamp activation as all preconditions are valid and will perform another
search 3 seconds later.
If any valid fob has been found, the SMK ECU stops the Key out indicator lamp and will (if one door is open) perform another search 3
seconds later; if no door is open then it’s only at the next When the preconditions are still valid, the search resumes by opening of one door.

Failsafe Functions (Backup For Limp Home)

In case of a discharged battery of the SMART KEY FOB or disturbed transmission, the following functions are available:
• Unlocking / locking of doors or trunk (or tailgate depending of the vehicle configuration): use of mechanical key

User Information Functions

ID OUT Warning
1. Preconditions:
A. (ACC or IGN1) & (any door open or trunk open)
2. Event:
The last opened door is closed
3. SMK action:
SMK searches for a SMART KEY FOB in the interior.
A. If no valid SMART KEY FOB is found, the SMK activates external buzzer and also sends ID OUT warning via CAN (exterior buzzer
warning and internal buzzer warning).
B. If a door is opened and closed again during terminals on and inside valid fob, SMK re-enables the authentication and stops the
warning. If the terminal is in ACC, SMK shall turn on immobilizer lamp.

If there is a LF error (LF overheating or LF antenna failure), the system will have the same behavior as it is with no fob found.

Immobilizer Lamp
Removing the PIF from the MSL and reinserting the PIF and pushing the MSL Knob will switch the lamp on again.

Fob Battery Low Voltage Detection

To detect fob low battery condition, certain battery voltage measurement and low voltage detection strategy are implemented into fob. The
measurement of the battery voltage will be done if fob button is pressed or if a LF measurement command is received.
If the fob has detected a low battery voltage, the LED will not be switched on at button press.

Learning Description
In this chapter, the learning procedure for SMK, FOBs is described.
For the learning of the SMK, FOBs, it's necessary to have a connection to the diagnostic tool.

Learning MODE
Whatever the mode, the learning procedures are managed by the SMK.
Prior to start learning service, Fob-In signal must be active and the vehicle secret code (called as PIN code) should be known.

Teaching MODE
This mode is used by the dealers in order to replace SMK and/or the set of keys, or to register additional keys for an existing system. That
means the system already has been learnt with certain PIN Code. The PIN Code is fixed for the life time of the vehicle, therefore the same
PIN Code must be used in this mode. Otherwise learning will be failed

Teaching MODE Procedure Description (Step By Step)

Objective: Key teaching procedure at service station
Initial state:
- SMK replacement: SMK is not learnt, SMART FOB are already learnt with same PIN code
- Additional or new keys teaching: SMK is already learnt with same PIN code
Body Electrical System

Inspection
Page 247 sur 295

1. Check that the red light flickers when the door lock or unlock button is pressed on the transmitter.
2. Remove the battery (A) and check voltage if the red light doesn't flicker.
Standard voltage :3V

3. Insert the battery (A) into the tester (09954-2P100).

4. Push the test button and If "0.00" is displayed on screen, it means that the battery voltage is 2V or less.
5. If "L" is displayed on screen, it means that the battery is low power and it needs to replace.
6. To prevent the discharge of electricity, turn the tester power off.
7. Replace the transmitter battery with a new one, if voltage is low power then try to lock and unlock the doors with the transmitter by
pressing the lock or unlock button five or six times.
8. If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is O.K, but if the doors don't lock and unlock, register the transmitter code, then try to lock
and unlock the doors.
9. If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is O.K, but if the doors don't lock and unlock, replace the transmitter.

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

Smart Key Code Registration (Using GDS)

1. Connect the DLC cable of GDS to the data link connector (16 pins) in driver side crash pad lower panel, turn the power on GDS.

2. Select the vehicle model and then do "CODE SAVING"

Page 248 sur 295

3. After selecting "CODE SAVING" menu, button "ENTER" key, then the screen will be shown as below.

4. After pushing the SSB to "OFF", push "ENTER" key to proceed to the next mode for code saving. Follow steps 1 to 4 and then code
saving is completed.
Page 249 sur 295
Page 250 sur 295
Page 251 sur 295
Page 252 sur 295
Page 253 sur 295

Smart Key Code Saving

1. Connect the DLC cable of GDS to the data link connector in driver side crash pad lower panel, turn the power on GDS.

2. Select the vehicle model and then do "Smart key code saving".
Page 254 sur 295

3. After selecting "Smart key teaching" menu, push "Enter" key, then the screen will be shown as below.

4. After pushing the SSB with the teaching key, press "OK" button.
5. Input the "Pin code" for first key teaching.
Page 255 sur 295

6. Confirm the message "First key teaching completed".

Page 256 sur 295
Page 257 sur 295

7. Confirm the message "Second key teaching completed".

Page 258 sur 295

8. Then the screen will be shown as below when key teaching process is completed.
Body Electrical System

Component (1)
Page 259 sur 295

Connector Pin Information

No. Connector A Connector B Connector C
1 V_BAT CPU Assistant side antenna ground Immobilizer antenna ground
2 V_BAT Load Assistant side antenna power Immobilizer antenna power
3 Ignition 1 Driver side antenna ground -
4 Ignition 2 relay Driver side antenna power -
5 Ignition 1 relay Wheel speed -
6 - P position SSB LED ON
7 - - SSB LED ACC
8 EMS COM C CAN low SSB illumination power
9 - C CAN high -
10 B CAN high Interior 1 antenna ground -
Page 260 sur 295

11 B CAN low Interior 1 antenna power -

12 ACC Bumper antenna ground -
13 Ignition 2 Bumper antenna power Stop lamp fuse
14 ACC relay Interior 2 antenna ground Brake switch
15 Starter relay Interior 2 antenna power -
16 Start feedback - Immobilizer indicator
17 ESCL battery RPM Exterior buzzer
18 - - SSB illumination ground
19 - SSB switch 2
20 Assistant toggle button SSB switch 1
21 Driver toggle button
22 -
23 Power ground 2
24 Power ground 1

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
Page 261 sur 295
Page 262 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Inspection
Smart Key Unit
- Refer to Smart key System - "Smart key Diagnostic"

Smart Key Switch

- Refer to Smart key System - "Smart key Diagnostic"

Antenna
- Refer to Smart key System - "Smart key Diagnostic"

Trunk Lid Open Switch

1. Check for continuity between the trunk lid open switch terminal.
Page 263 sur 295

2. If continuity is not specified, inspect the switch.

Removal
Smart Key Unit
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the main crash pad assembly.
(Refer to Body - "Main Crash Pad Assembly")
3. Loosen the mounting bolts and nut from the smart key unit bracket.

4. Remove the smart key unit (B) after disconnecting the connector (A) from the smart key unit.

Interior Antenna 1
1. Disconnect the negative(-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the floor console assembly.
Page 264 sur 295

(Refer to Body - "Floor Console Assembly")

3. Disconnect the connector (A) from the interior antenna.

4. Remove the interior antenna (A) after loosening the mounting nuts.

Interior Antenna 2
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the interior antenna 2.
3. Remove the interior antenna 2 (B) after loosening the mounting nuts.

When removing the interior antenna 2, the rear seat back assembly does not need removal.

Exterior Bumper Antenna

1. Disconnect the negative(-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the rear bumper cover.
(Refer to Body - "Rear Bumper Cover")
3. Disconnect the connector (A), then remove the rear bumper antenna (B) with loosening the mounting screws.
Page 265 sur 295

Buzzer
1. Disconnect the negative(-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front left wheel guard.
3. Remove the buzzer (B) after disconnecting the connector (A).

Door Outside Handle

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front door module.
(Refer to Front Door - "Front Door Module")
3. Remove the hole plug (A).
4. After loosening the mounting bolt, then remove the front door outside handle cover (B).

5. Remove the front door outside handle (A) by sliding it rearward.

Page 266 sur 295

Tailgate Open Switch

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the tailgate trim.
(Refer to Body - "Tail Gate Trim")
3. Disconnect the tailgate open switch connector (A).

4. Remove the tailgate switch (A).

Installation
Smart Key Unit
1. Install the smart key unit.
2. Connect the connector and install the smart key unit.
3. Install the main crash pad assembly.
4. Install the negative (-) battery terminal and check the smart key system.

Interior Antenna 1
1. Install the interior antenna.
2. Install the floor console assembly.
3. Install the negative (-) battery terminal and check the smart key system.

Interior Antenna 2
Page 267 sur 295

1. Install the interior antenna 2.

2. Install the rear seat cushion assembly.
3. Install the negative (-) battery terminal and check the smart key system.

Exterior Bumper Antenna

1. Install the exterior bumper antenna.
2. Install the rear bumper cover.
3. Install the negative (-) battery terminal and check the smart key system.

Buzzer
1. Install the buzzer.
2. Install the front left wheel guard.
3. Install the negative (-) battery terminal and check the smart key system.

Door Outside Handle

1. Install the door outside handle.
2. Install the door trim.
3. Install the negative (-) battery terminal and check the smart key system.

Tailgate Open Switch

1. Install the tailgate open switch.
2. Install the tailgate trim.
3. Install the negative (-) battery terminal and check the smart key system.
Body Electrical System

Inspection
Self Diagnosis With GDS
Smart key system defects can be quickly diagnosed with the GDS. GDS operates actuator quickly to monitor, input/output value and self
diagnosis.
The following three features will be major problem in SMART KEY system.
1. Problem in SMART KEY unit input.
2. Problem in SMART KEY unit.
3. Problem in SMART KEY unit output.
The following three diagnostic solutions will be the main solution process to a majority of concerns.
1. SMART KEY unit Input problem : switch diagnosis
2. SMART KEY unit problem : communication diagnosis
3. SMART KEY unit Output problem : antenna and switch output diagnosis

Switch Diagnosis
1. Connect the cable of GDS to the data link connector in driver side crash pad lower panel, turn the power on GDS.
2. Select the vehicle model and then SMART KEY system.
Page 268 sur 295

3. Select the "SMART KEY unit".

4. After IG ON, select the "Current data".

5. You can see the situation of each switch on scanner after connecting the "current data" process.
Display Description
FL Toggle switch ON : Push button is ON in the driver door handle.
FR Toggle switch ON : Push button is ON in the assist door handle.
Trunk switch ON : Trunk button is ON.
Gear P Position ON : Shift lever is P position.
IGN 1 ON : IGN switch is IG position.
ACC ON : IGN switch is ACC position.
Push Knob switch ON : Push knob switch is ON.
External Buzzer ON : Buzzer is ON.

Communication Diagnosis With GDS (Self Diagnosis)

1. Communication diagnosis checks that the each components operates normal.
2. Connect the cable of GDS to the data link connector in driver side crash pad lower panel.
3. After IG ON, select the "DTC".
Page 269 sur 295

Antenna Actuation Diagnosis

1. Connect the cable of GDS to the data link connector in driver side crash pad lower panel.
2. After IG ON, select the "ACTUATION TEST".
3. Set the smart key near the related antenna and operate it with a GDS.

4. If the LED of smart key is blinking, the smart key is normal.

5. If the LED of smart key is not blinking, check the voltage of smart key battery.
6. Antenna actuation
A. INTERIOR Antenna
B. Trunk antenna
C. BUMPER/Antenna
D. DRV_DR Antenna
E. AST_DR Antenna
Page 270 sur 295

Antenna Status Check

1. Connect the cable of GDS to the data link connector in driver side crash pad lower panel.
2. Select the "Antenna Status Check".

3. After IG ON, select the "Antenna Status Check".

4. Set the smart key near the related antenna and operate it with a GDS.
Page 271 sur 295

5. If the smart key runs normal , the related antenna, smart key(transmission, reception) and exterior receiver are normal.
6. Antenna status
A. INTERIOR Antenna
B. Trunk antenna
Page 272 sur 295

C. BUMPER/Antenna
D. DRV_DR Antenna
E. AST_DR Antenna

Serial Communication Status Check

1. Connect the cable of GDS to the data link connector in driver side crash pad lower panel.
2. Select the "Serial Communication Line Check".

3. After IGN ON, select the "Receiver Communication Line Check".

4. Check the serial communication line with a GDS.

5. If the smart key runs normal, the communication of smart key unit, exterior receiver are normal.
6. If the smart key runs abnormal, check the following items.
A. Disconnection or no response of the exterior receiver communication line.
B. The exterior receiver communication line disconnection and ground connection.
Page 273 sur 295

Interior Antenna Actuation Check

1. Set the smart key in the following shade area and check the IG ON.

2. If the ignition is ON, the antenna runs normal.

3. Check the interior antenna ignition mode.
4. Set the smart key in the following shade area and actuate the antenna. Check the LED of smart key is blinking.

5. If the LED of smart key is not blinking, check the antenna in shade area.

FOB Status Check

1. Connect the cable of GDS to the data link connector in driver side crash pad lower panel.
2. After IGN ON, select the "FOB KEY STATUS INFORMATION".
Page 274 sur 295

Smart Key Status Check

1. Connect the cable of GDS to the data link connector in driver side crash pad lower panel.
2. After IGN ON, select the "SMK STATUS INFORMATION".
Page 275 sur 295

Neutralization Status Check

1. Connect the cable of GDS to the data link connector in driver side crash pad lower panel.
2. After IGN ON, select the "Neutralization mode".
Page 276 sur 295
Page 277 sur 295
Page 278 sur 295
Page 279 sur 295

Input Signal List

No. Item name Unit
1 SSB SW1 -
2 SSB SW2 -
3 ACC -
4 IGN1 -
5 IGN2 -
Gear 'P' Position (A/T)
6 -
Clutch SW (M/T)
7 Brake SW -
8 FL Door Lock Button -
9 FR Door Lock Button -
10 Battery Voltage -
11 Wheel Speed -
12 RPM -
13 Stop Lamp Fuse -
14 Start Feed Back -

Actuator List
No. Item name Condition
Ignition switch ON
1 Immobilizer indicator Lamp (Cluster)
Engine off
Ignition switch ON
2 External Buzzer
Engine off
Ignition switch ON
3 Interior Antenna Active
Engine off
Ignition switch ON
6 Bumper/trunk Antenna Active
Engine off
Ignition switch ON
7 DRV_DR Antenna Active
Engine off
Ignition switch ON
8 AST_DR Antenna Active
Engine off
Ignition switch ON
9 SSB Illumination (OFF/ACC/ON)
Engine off
10 ACC/IGN1/IGN2 Relay
Page 280 sur 295

Ignition switch ON
Engine off

Body Electrical System

Component Location

1. Virtual engine sound system unit 2. Virtual engine sound speaker

Body Electrical System

Description
The VESS (Virtual engine sound system) generates engine sound when you start the hybrid system.
This sound is for pedestrians to hear vehicle sound because there is no engine sound in hybrid driving.
VESS operates when vehicle speed is between 0~20km/h (0~12mph)
Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 281 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Circuit Diagram
Page 282 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative(-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the AVN head unit.
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "AVN System")
3. Disconnect the VESS unit connector (A).
Page 283 sur 295

4. Remove VESS unit (A) after loosening the mounting nut and screw.

Installation
1. Install the VESS unit and connect the connector.
2. Install the AVN head unit.
3. Connect the negative(-) battery terminal.
Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 284 sur 295

Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Disconnect the negative(-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front wheel guard.
(Refer to Body - "Front Bumper")
3. Disconnect the VESS connector (A).

4. Remove the VESS speaker (A) after loosening the mounting bolts.

Installation
Page 285 sur 295

1. Install the VESS speaker and connector.

2. Install the front wheel guard.
3. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal.
Body Electrical System

Component Location

1. Windshield wiper arm & blade 5. Washer motor

2. Wiper & washer switch 6. Washer reservoir
3. Windshield washer hose 7. Wiper relay (Engine room relay box)
4. Windshield wiper motor & linkage

Body Electrical System

Inspection
Check for continuity between the terminals while operating the wiper and washer switch. If it is not normal condition, replace wiper and wiper
switch.
Page 286 sur 295

Wiper Switch

Washer Switch

Removal
1. Remove the steering column shroud lower / upper panel.
(Refer to Body - "Steering Column Shroud Panel")
2. Disconnect the connector (A).

3. If necessary of removing the wiper & washer switch (A), release the lock of wiper switch using tool without removing the steering wheel
and the clock spring.
Page 287 sur 295

4. Remove the steering wheel.

(Refer to Steering System - "Steering Wheel")
5. Remove the clock spring.
(Refer to Restraint - "Driver Airbag (DAB) Module and Clock Spring")
6. Remove the multifunction switch assembly (A) after loosening 2 screws.

Installation
1. Install the multifunction switch after connecting the connector.
2. Install the clock spring and steering.
3. Install the upper and lower shroud.
4. Install the steering wheel.
Body Electrical System

Component Location
Page 288 sur 295

1. Cap 5. Cowl top cover

2. Nut 6. Bolt
3. Wiper arm & blade 7. Wiper motor & linkage assembly
4. Rivet

Body Electrical System

Removal
1. Loosen the windshield wiper arm nut (B) after removing a wiper cap (A).
Page 289 sur 295

2. Remove the windshield wiper arm and blade.

3. If necessary, release the wiper blade fixing clip by pulling up and remove the wiper blade from the inside radius of wiper arm.

4. Disconnect the washer hose (A) connected to cowl top cover.

5. Remove the weather strip and the cowl top cover (A) after removing 5 rivets.

6. Remove the windshield wiper motor and linkage assembly (A) after removing 2 bolts.
Page 290 sur 295

7. Disconnect the wiper motor connector (A) from the wiper motor & linkage assembly.

8. Hold the wiper motor crank arm and remove the upper linkage (A) from the wiper motor crank arm.

9. Remove the lower linkage (A) from the wiper motor crank arm.
Page 291 sur 295

10. Hold the arm to use the plyer, remove the crank arm (A) after loosening the mounting nut.

Before removing the wiper motor and linkage assembly, make sure that the linkage is stopped at auto stop position.
To install the wiper motor crank arm exactly, check that the linkage is aligned with the crank arm in straight line and the angle of
each linkages.
Be careful not to bend the linkage.
11. Remove the wiper motor (A) after loosening the mounting bolts.

Be careful not to miss the mounting nuts.

Page 292 sur 295

Installation
1. Install the wiper motor.
2. Install the crank arm.

To install the wiper motor crank arm, make sure that the linkage is aligned with the crank arm in straight line and set the angle of
each linkages exactly.
3. Install the lower and upper linkage to the wiper motor crank arm.

To install the wiper motor crank arm, make sure that the linkage is aligned with the crank arm in straight line and set the angle of
each linkages exactly.
Be careful not to bend the linkage.
4. Install the wiper motor and linkage assembly and then connect the wiper motor connector.
Tightening torque:
6.9 ~ 10.8Nm (0.7 ~ 1.1, kgf.m, 5.0 ~ 7.9 lb-ft)
5. Install the cowl top cover.
6. Install the windshield wiper arm and blade.
Tightening torque:
22.6 ~ 26.5 Nm (2.3 ~ 2.7 kgf.m, 16.6 ~ 19.5 lb-ft)

- The windshield wiper motor must be cycled to make sure that it is in the auto stop position.
If necessary, adjust the wiper arm and blade.
7. Install the wiper arm and blade to the auto stop position.
A : Auto stop position (Blade)

Inspection
Speed Operation Check
1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the wiper motor.

2. Attach the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 2 and the negative (-) lead to terminal 5.
Page 293 sur 295

3. Check that the motor operates at low or high speed as below table.

Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the
blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with clean water.
Body Electrical System

Inspection
1. With the washer motor connected to the reservoir tank, fill the reservoir tank with water.

Before filling the reservoir tank with water, check the filter for foreign material or contamination. if necessary, clean the filter.
2. Connect positive (+) battery cables to terminal 1 and negative (-) battery cables to terminal 2 respectively.
3. Check that the motor operates normally and the washer motor runs and water sprays from the front nozzles.
4. If they are abnormal, replace the washer motor.

Washer Fluid Level Sensor Switch

1. Disconnect the negative(-) battery terminal.
2. Drain the washer fluid less than 600 cc.
3. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No.2 terminal in each float position.
There should be continuity when the float is down.
There should be no continuity when the float is up.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the washer fluid level switch
Page 294 sur 295

Removal

- When servicing the washer pump, be careful not to damage the washer pump seal.
- Do not operate the washer pump before filling the washer reservoir.
Failure to do so could result in premature pump failure.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the front bumper cover.
(Refer to Body - "Front Bumper Cover")
3. Disconnect the washer motor connector (A) after removing the washer hose from the motor.

4. Remove the reservoir (A) after loosening 2 bolts.

Installation
1. Reassemble the washer reservoir.
Tightening torque:
Page 295 sur 295

6.9 ~ 10.8Nm (0.7 ~ 1.1, kgf.m, 5.0 ~ 7.9 lb-ft)

Before installing the pump motor, check the filter for foreign material or contamination. if necessary, clean the filter into the pump
motor.
2. Connect the washer motor connector and washer hose.
3. Reassemble the front bumper cover.
Page 1 sur 127

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Safety Precaution

Sinse Electric Vehicle contains a high voltage, battery mishandling the high voltage system or vehicle may lead to a serious accident
including electric shock and electric leakage.

• All the high voltage wiring and connectors are in orange.

• Inform of possible danger of high voltage by placing a "high voltage caution" sign on the vehicle as in the image below.
Page 2 sur 127
Page 3 sur 127

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Insulation gloves Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage
components
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]
Page 4 sur 127

Insulation shoes

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation clothes
components

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses

Used in the following cases :

• During Removal & installation or inspection of the high
voltage battery terminals or wiring, which spark might happen.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

All removed high voltage components are placed on an

Insulation mat
insulation mat to prevent safety accidents.

Insulation sheet is used to cover high voltage components to

Insulation sheet protect people not wearing personal protective equipment from
safety accidents.

Warning tape Used for infomring that it is dangerous to come over this line.
Page 5 sur 127

Personal Protective Equipment Inspection

• Check that the personal protective equipment is not damaged.

• Check that the insulation gloves are not torn or damaged.
• Wear the insulation glove after removing moisture.

Fold the insulation glove as above.

Fold again 3~4 times to make it airtight.
Squeeze the inflated glove to see if the glove is torn or damaged.
Caution when repairing the power cable

Precautions when handling high voltage battery

• Battery Control System - Refer to "High Voltage Battery Handling Guide"

Precautions in case of fire in High Voltage Battery System

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 7feet(2m) or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• If fire broke out indoors, ventilate the area to clear out hydrogen gas.
• If fire can be put out, then do so using a CO₂ fire extinguisher. If this is not available, then use water or other types of fire extinguisher.
• CO₂has high insulation characteristics against electricity, so it is appropriate for electricity (C Rating) related fire.
• If fire cannot be put out, evacuate to a safe location, notify the fire department and do not approach the vehicle until the fire has been
extinguished.
• Turn OFF the vehicle Key in case of vehicle submersion/collision, and then exit the vehicle as quickly as possible.

Precautions in case of high voltage battery gas and/or electrolyte leakage

Page 6 sur 127

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 7feet(2m) or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug.
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• Gas is hydrogen and alkali vapor. If the fire occurred indoor, ventilate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline
solution.
• If leaked vapor or liquid gets in your eye, immediately clean with running water, then get medical attention.
• In case of gas leakage due to high temperature, do NOT use the battery until the high voltage battery cools down to room temperature.

Precautions when handling vehicle after an accident

Preparations when servicing accident affected vehicle

Precautions when EV is unattended for a prolonged period

• Turn OFF the Start Button. Then keep the Smart Key 7feet(2m) or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
(This is to prevent rapid discharging of high voltage battery from dark current.)
• If the high voltage battery state of charge (SOC) is less than 30%, then do not leave the vehicle unattended for a prolonged period.
• If the vehicle is unattended for prolonged period, then fully recharge the battery via normal charging once every 3 months to prevent the
high voltage battery SOC from becoming 0.
• When checking the auxiliary battery for discharge status or when replacing the auxiliary battery, check for problem related to high
voltage battery SOC reset.

Hybrid Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery / Charging Precautions

If the POE oil in the system gets mixed with PAG oil, it may result in dielectric breakdown due to decreased volumetric resistivity and
inoperative A/C compressor, disabling the A/C compressor.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

High Voltage Shut-off Procedure

3. After loosening the nut, remove the safety plug service cover (A).
Safety plug service cover mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Remove the safety plug (A).

Remove the safety plug in the follwing order.

Page 8 sur 127

(3) Remove the high voltage cable (A).

(4) Measure the voltage between the inverter terminals.

Less than 30V : High voltage circuit properly shut
More than 30V : Faulty on high voltage circuit
Page 9 sur 127

Specification
Air Conditioner
Item Specification
Type ESC33n (Electric Scroll)
Communication type CAN communication
Oil type & Capacity POE OIL, 180±10g
Compressor Motor type BLDC
Rated voltage 360V
Operation voltage 240~413V
Displacement 33cc/rev
Condensor Heat rejection 13,400 -3% kcal/hr
Air pressure transducer Pressure value Voltage=0.00878835*Pressure(psig)+0.5
Page 10 sur 127

Expansion valve Type Block type

Type R-134a
Refrigerant Without heat pump 550±25g (19.4±0.88 oz.)
Capacity
With heat pump 900±25g (31.7±0.88 oz.)

Heater And Evaporator Unit

Item Specification
Type Fin & Tube type
PTC Heater Operating voltage DC 240V ~ 420V
Heating capacity 4,700 ± 5% kcal/hr
Exterior Condensor 17,000 - 3% kcal/hr
Heating capacity
Interior Condensor 2,600 - 5% kcal/hr
Heat Pump Chiller 770g
Accumulator 950cc
Mode operating type Actuator
Temperature operating type Actuator
Temperature contorl type Evaporator temperature sensor
Evaporator
A/C ON/OFF ON : 2.3±0.5°C, OFF : 0.6±0.5°C
Heating capacity 4,700 - 5% kcal/hr

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Special Service Tools

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation gloves components
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]

Insulation shoes

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation clothes
components

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses Used in the following cases :

• When removing, installing or inspecting the high voltage
battery terminals or wiring where spark may occur.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.
Page 11 sur 127

Face shield

Removed high voltage components are placed on the

Insulation mat
insulation mat to prevent safety accidents.

High voltage components are covered with insulation sheet to

Insulation sheet protect people not wearing personal protective equipment from
safety accidents.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Troubleshooting
Problem Symptoms Table
Before replacing or repairing air conditioning components, first determine if the malfunction is due to lack of refrigerant, air flow or
compressor.
Use the following table to find the cause of the problem. The numbers indicate the order of the likely cause of the problem. Check each part
in order. If necessary, replace the corresponding parts.
After fixing the area of malfunction, check the complete system to ensure satisfactory performance.
Standard :
Symptom Suspected Area
1. Blower fuse
2. Blower motor
No blower operation 3. PWM blower module
4. Blower speed control switch
5. Wire harness
1. Engine coolant capacity
No air temperature control
2. Heater control assembly
1. Refrigerant capacity
2. A/C fuse
3. Limiter clutch
4. Compressor
No compressor operation
5. A/C pressure transducer
6. A/C switch
7. Evaporator temperature sensor
8. Wire harness
Vented air not cold 1. Refrigerant capacity
2. Refrigerant pressure
3. Drive belt
4. Limiter clutch
Page 12 sur 127

5. Compressor
6. A/C pressure transducer
7. Evaporator temperature sensor
8. A/C switch
9. Heater control assembly
10. Wire harness
1. Refrigerant capacity
2. Drive belt
3. Limiter clutch
4. Compressor
5. Condenser
Insufficient cooling
6. Expansion valve
7. Evaporator
8. Refrigerant lines
9. A/C pressure transducer
10. Heater control assembly
1. MCU
No engine idle-up when A/C switch ON
2. Wire harness
No air inlet control 1. Heater control assembly
No mode control 1. Heater control assembly
1. Cooling fan fuse
2. Fan motor
No cooling fan operation
3. Engine ECM
4. Wire harness

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Instructions
When Handling Refrigerant
1. R-134a liquid refrigerant is highly volatile. A drop on the skin of your hand could result in localized frostbite. When handling the
refrigerant, be sure to wear gloves.
2. It is standard practice to wear goggles or glasses to protect your eyes, and gloves to protect your hands. If the refrigerant splashes into
your eyes, wash off immediately with clean water.
3. The R-134a container is highly pressurized. Never leave it in a hot place, and check that the storage temperature is below 52°C (126°F).
4. An electronic leak detector should be used to check the system for refrigerant leakage. Bear in mind that the R-134a, upon coming into
contact with flame, produces phosgene, a highly toxic gas.
5. Use only recommended lubricant for R-134a systems. If lubricants other than the recommended type are used, system failure may occur.
6. POE lubricant absorbs moisture from the atmosphere at a rapid rate, therefore the following precautions must be observed:
A. When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, cap the components immediately to prevent entry of moisture.
B. When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the cap until just before connecting the components.
C. Complete the connection of all refrigerant tubes and hoses without delay to prevent the A/C system from taking on moisture.
D. Use the recommended lubricant from a sealed container only.
7. Do not use the same A/C recovery / charging station as conventional belt-driven compressors.
8. Since the electric compressor uses high-voltage, you should use POE oil which have high volumetric resistivity.

• If PAG oil mixes into the POE oil of the system, dielectric breakdown may occur due to decreased volumetric resistivity and the
A/C compressor may not work.
9. If an accidental discharging occurs in the system, ventilate the work area before resuming the service.
Page 13 sur 127

When replacing parts ON A/C system

1. Never open or loosen a connection before the system has been discharged.
2. Seal the open fittings of components with a cap or plug immediately to prevent intrusion of moisture or dust.
3. Do not remove the sealing caps from a Replacement component until it is ready to be installed.
4. Before connecting an open fitting, always install a new sealing ring. Coat the fitting and seal with refrigerant oil before making the
connection.

When Installing Connecting Parts

Flange With Guide Pin
Check new O-ring for any damage (use only the specified) and lubricate with compressor oil. Tighten the nut to specified torque.

• T stands for tensile intensity and is stamped on the head of each bolt in numerals.

Handling tubing and fittings

The internal parts of the refrigeration system will remain in a state of chemical stability as long as pure moisture-free refrigerant and
refrigerant oil are used. Abnormal amounts of dirt, moisture or air can upset the chemical stability and cause problems or serious damage.

The Following precautions must be observed

1. When the refrigeration system needs to be opened, have everything you will need to service the system ready so the system will not be
left open any longer than it is necessary.
Page 14 sur 127

2. Cap or plug all lines and fittings as soon as they are opened to prevent the entrance of dirt and moisture.
3. All lines and components in parts stock should be capped or sealed until they are ready to be used.
4. Never attempt to rebind formed lines to fit. Use the correct line for the installation you are servicing.
5. All tools, including the refrigerant dispensing manifold, the gauge set manifold and test hoses, should be kept clean and dry.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Refrigeration Cycle

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Refrigerant System Service Basics

• Since the electric compressor uses high-voltage, POE oil with high volumetric resistivity should be used.
• Do not use the same A/C recovery / charging station as in conventional belt-driven compressors.

• If PAG oil mixes into the POE oil of the system, dielectric breakdown may occur due to decreased volumetric resistivity and the A/C
compressor may not work.

Refrigerant Recovery
Use only U.L.-listed service equipment that is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 when removing HFC-134a (R-134a) from the
air conditioning system.

[Without Heat Pump]

[With Heat Pump]

Page 15 sur 127

2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed from the A/C system after the recovery process is completed. Be sure to install the same
amount of new refrigerant oil back into the A/C system before charging.

System Evacuation
Use only U.L.-listed service equipment that is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 when removing HFC-134a (R-134a) from the
air conditioning system.

• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat.
• Be careful when connecting service equipment.
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming to service.
Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.
1. When an A/C System has been opened to the atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it must be evacuated using an R-134a
refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Charging System. (If the system has been open for several days, the receiver/dryer should be replaced,
and the system should be evacuated for several hours.)
2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant
Recovery/Recycling/Charging System (A) to the high-pressure service port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C) as shown, following
the equipment manufacturer's instructions.

3. If the pressure does not reach over 93.3 kPa (700 mmHg, 27.6 in.Hg) in 10 minutes, there may be a leakage in the system. Partially
charge the system and check for any leakages (see Leak Test).
4. Remove the low pressure valve from the low-pressure service port.

System Charging
Page 16 sur 127

Use only U.L.-listed service equipment that is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 when removing HFC-134a (R-134a) from the
air conditioning system.

2. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to system that was removed during recovery. Use only specified refrigerant oil. Charge the
system with R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system as it may damage the compressor.
Specified amount
Without heat pump : 550 ± 25g (19.4 ± 0.88 oz.)
With heat pump : 900 ± 25g (31.7 ± 0.88 oz.)

Refrigerant Leak Test

Always conduct a leak test with an electronic leak detector whenever leakage of refrigerant is suspected and when conducting service
operations that accompany disassembling, loosening or connecting of fittings.

• In order to use the leak detector properly, read the manual supplied by the manufacturer.
If a gas leak is detected, proceed as follows:
1. Check the tightening torque of the connection fittings, and if it is too loose, tighten to the proper torque. Using a leak detector (A), check
for gas leakage.
2. If leakage continues even after the fitting has been tightened, discharge the refrigerant from the system, disconnect the fittings, and
check their seating faces for damage. Replace at all times even for a slight damage.
3. Check the compressor oil and add oil if required.
4. Charge the system and recheck for gas leaks. If no leaks are found, evacuate and charge the system again.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Component Location Index

Engine Room
Page 17 sur 127

[Without Heat Pump]

1. Receiver-drier 6. Suction & Liquid tube

2. Condensor 7. Expansion valve
3. A/C Pressure Transducer (APT) 8. Suction pipe
4. Service port (Low pressure) 9. Suction hose
5. Service port (High pressure) 10. Electric A/C compressor

[With Heat Pump]

Page 18 sur 127

1. Electric A/C compressor 6. 3 ways solenoid valve assembly

2. Receiver-drier 7. Accumulator
3. Exterior condensor 8. 2 ways solenoid valve assembly
4. Refrigerant temperature sensor #1 9. Refrigerant temperature sensor #2
5. Chiller 10. Expansion valve

Interior
Page 19 sur 127

1. Photo sensor 3. Evaporator temperature sensor

2. Heater & Blower unit 4. Heater & A/C control unit

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Oil Specification
1. The HFC-134a system requires synthetic compressor oil (POE) whereas the R-12 system requires mineral compressor oil. The two oils
must never be mixed.
2. Compressor oil (POE) varies according to compressor model. Be sure to use oil specified for the model of compressor.
A. Since the electric compressor uses high-voltage, POE oil with high volumetric resistivity should be used.
B. Do not use the same A/C recovery / charging station as conventional belt-driven compressors.
Page 20 sur 127

• If the POE oil of the system gets mixed with PAG oil, then dielectric breakdown due to decreased volumetric resistivity can occur
and inoperative A/C compressor may result, A/C compressor may not work.
• If the POE oil gets mixed with PAG oil, replace the compressor with new one and clean inside the A/C system (condenser,
refrigerant line, evaporator and etc.)

Handling of Oil
1. The oil should be free from moisture, dust, metal powder, etc.
2. Do not mix with other oil.
3. The water content in the oil increases when exposed to the air. After use, seal oil from air immediately. (HFC-134a and R-1234yf
compressor oils are prone to absorb moisture.)
4. The compressor oil must be stored in steel containers, not in plastic containers.

Compressor Oil Check

The oil used to lubricate the compressor is circulating with the refrigerant.
Whenever replacing any component of the system or a large amount of gas leakage occurs, add oil to maintain the original amount of oil.
Total volume of oil in system
POE OIL : 180 ±10cc (6.1 ± 0.3 oz.)

Oil Recovery Operation

There is close affinity between the oil and the refrigerant.
During normal operation, part of the oil recirculates with the refrigerant in the system. When checking the amount of oil in the system or
replacing any components of the system, the compressor must be running in advance of oil recovery operation. The procedure is as follows:
1. Open all the doors and the engine hood.
2. Start the engine, turn the air conditioning switch "ON" and set the blower motor control knob to its highest position.
3. Run the compressor for more than 20 minutes between 800 and 1,000 rpm in order to operate the system.
4. Stop the engine.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Component Location
[Without Heat Pump]
Page 21 sur 127

1. Refrigerant line

[With Heat Pump]

Page 22 sur 127

1. Refrigerant line

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Replacement
1. Discharge refrigerant from refrigeration system.
2. Replace faulty tube or hose.

• Cap the open fittings immediately to keep moisture or dirt out of the system.
3. Tighten joint of bolt or nut to specified torque.

• Connections should not be tightened to over the specified torque.

Items N.m kgf.m lb-ft

Compressor 20.0 ~ 33.0 2.0 ~ 3.4 14.8 ~ 24.3
Page 23 sur 127

Accumulator mounting bolt

Discharge hose mounting bolt
Discharge pipe mounting bolt
6.9 ~ 10.8 0.7 ~ 1.1 5.1 ~ 8.0
Suction pipe mounting bolt
Suction hose mounting bolt
Tube & Hose assembly mounting bolt
Accumulator nut
Discharge hose nut
Discharge pipe nut
7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Suction pipe nut
Suction hose nut
Tube & Hose assembly nut
Refrigerant valve 9.8 ~ 11.8 1.0 ~ 1.2 7.2 ~ 8.7
Chiller (Refrigerant line) 5.9 ~ 9.8 0.6 ~ 1.0 4.3 ~ 7.2

4. Evacuate air in the refrigeration system and charge system with refrigerant.
Specified amount
Without heat pump : 550 ± 25g (19.4 ± 0.88 oz.)
With heat pump : 900 ± 25g (31.7 ± 0.88 oz.)
5. Inspect for leakage of refrigerant.
Using a gas leak detector, check for leakage of refrigerant.
6. Inspect A/C operation.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Specification
Model ESC33n
Motor BLDC Motor
Control Type CAN
Compression Type Scroll
Capacity 33cc/rev
Operating Voltage Range 190~320V
Rated Voltage 288V
Mount Type Bracket Mounting, 4 Point Mounting

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Components Location
[Without Heat Pump]
Page 24 sur 127

1. Electric A/C compressor

[With Heat Pump]

Page 25 sur 127

1. Electric A/C compressor

Components
Page 26 sur 127

1. Control Part 3. Compression Part

2. Motor Part

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
Electric compressors improve the fuel efficiency and operates the air conditioner even when the engine has stopped.

Operation Principle
Compression Part
One of the scrolls is fixed while the other orbits eccentrically without self-rotating, thereby to trap and pump refrigerant in the pockets
between the scrolls.
Page 27 sur 127

Motor Part
Converts electric power into a mechanical motion with Brushless DC Motor.

Control Part
Converts direct current to 3-phase alternating current and alters the compressor speed to cope with cooling demand.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Removal

•
Page 28 sur 127

If PAG oil mixes into the POE oil of the system, dielectric breakdown may occur due to decreased volumetric resistivity and the
A/C compressor may not work.
5. Disconnect the compressor connector (A) and high voltage connector (B) after loosening bolt.

• Disconnect high voltage connector by pressing the locker pin (A) and pressing the lever (B).

6. Remove the fixing clip of compressor high voltage cable (A).

7. Remove the engine room under cover.

(Refer to Traction Motor System - "Under Cover")
8. Remove the engine room under side cover [LH].
(Refer to Traction Motor System - "Under Cover")
9. Remove the suction hose (A) and discharge hose (B) after loosening bolts and nuts.

[Without Heat Pump]

Page 29 sur 127

[With Heat Pump]

• When separating the refrigerant line, it must cover the plug or cap for protecting the A/C system from the humidity and dust.
10. Remove the electirc A/C compressor (A) after loosening the mounting bolts.

[Without Heat Pump]

[With Heat Pump]

Page 30 sur 127

Installation
1. Make sure that the compressor mounting bolt with the correct length is screwed in. Tighten the mounting bolts to the specified tightening
order.
Tightening torque :
10.0 ~ 15.0 N.m (2.04 ~ 3.36 kgf.m, 7.37 ~ 11.0 lb-ft)

2. Install in the reverse order of removal and note the followings:

A. If you're installing a new compressor, drain all the refrigerant oil from the removed compressor, and measure its volume. Subtract the
volume of drained oil from 125±10cc. The result is the amount of oil you should drain from the new compressor (through the suction
fitting).
B. Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use the
right O-rings for R-134a to avoid leakage.
C. To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with other refrigerant oils.
D. Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap on the container and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.

• If PAG oil mixes into the POE oil of the system, dielectric breakdown may occur due to decreased volumetric resistivity and the
A/C compressor may not work.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Troubleshooting

Fault code Fail description Remedy

Page 31 sur 127

60 Compressor CAN signal fault 1. Check HV, LV connector connection.

2. Check LV connector pin condition.
3. Check vehicle inverter fuse condition.
61 Compressor operation state error receive
4. A/C ON then check compressor operation.
5. If not operating, replace compressor.
1. Check HV connector connection.
2. Check vehicle inverter fuse condition.
62 Low voltage 3. Check voltage level of high voltage battery.
4. A/C ON then check compressor operation.
5. If not operating, replace compressor.
1. Identify vehicle model on compressor
2. Check voltage level of high voltage battery.
63 High voltage
3. A/C ON then check compressor operation.
4. If not operating, replace compressor.
1. Check heating object in engine room.
2. Check A/C system for defects.
64 Overheat protection 3. After 20 minutes, IG ON and A/C ON then check compressor
operation.
4. If not operating, replace compressor.
65 Overloaded 1. Check cooling fan operation.
66 Over current protection 2. Check AAF(Active Air Flap) for short circuit
3. After 20 minutes, IG ON and A/C ON then check compressor
68 Missed restart
operation.
71 Failure of Over torque stall 4. If not operating, replace compressor.
1. Check 12V battery fuse.
2. Check LV connector connection.
67 Abnormal (not receiving)
3. Check FATC CAN connection.
4. If not operating, replace compressor.
69 Failure of thermistor open
1. Check thermistor condition and inspect.
70 Failure of thermistor short
72 Failure of short circuit current
73 Failure of driver voltage
1. Replace compressor.
74 Failure of current measuring
2. Check vehicle inverter fuse (if necessary, replace).
75 Failure max temperature gradient
76 Failure Internal Error

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Component Location
[Without Heat Pump]
Page 32 sur 127

1. Condenser

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection
1. Check the condenser fins for clogging and damage. If clogged, clean them with water, and blow them with compressed air. If bent, gently
bend them using a screwdriver or pliers.
2. Check the condenser connections for leakage, and repair or replace it, if required.

Replacement

• Do not use the same A/C recovery / charging station as conventional belt-driven compressors.
Page 33 sur 127

• Since the electric compressor uses high-voltage, you should use POE oil which have high volumetric resistivity.
• If PAG oil mixes into the POE oil of the system, dielectric breakdown may occur due to decreased volumetric resistivity and the
A/C compressor may not work.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
3. Shut off the high voltage circuit. (Refer to EV Battery System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
(Refer to Body - "Front Bumper Cover")
5. Remove the side air guard (A) by pulling it upward after pressing the locking hook in the direction of the arrow.

[LH]

[RH]

6. Remove the refrigerant line (A) after loosening the mounting nuts.
7. Separate the condenser (C) from the radiator after loosening the mounting bolt.

[LH]

[RH]
Page 34 sur 127

8. Remove the condenser assembly (A) from the radiator assembly.

9. Install in the reverse order of removal and note the followings :

A. If you're installing a new condenser, add refrigerant oil (POE OIL).
B. Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use the
right O-rings for R-134a to avoid leakage.
C. Be careful not to damage the radiator and condenser fins when installing the condenser.
D. Be sure to install the lower mount cushions of condenser securely into the holes.
E. Charge the system, and test its performance.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Replacement
[Without Heat Pump]
1. Remove the condenser, and then use an L wrench to remove the bottom cap (B) from the condenser.
Tightening torque :
9.8 ~ 14.9 N.m (1.0 ~ 1.5 kgf.m, 7.2 ~ 10.8 lb-ft)

2. Remove the desiccant (A) from the condenser using a long nose plier. Check for crumbled desiccant and clogged bottom cap filter.
Page 35 sur 127

3. Apply air conditioning compressor oil along the O-rings and threads of the new bottom cap.
4. Insert a new desiccant into the receiver drier tank. The desiccant must be sealed in vacuum before it is exposed to air for use.
5. Install the new bottom cap to the condenser.

• Always replace the desiccant and bottom cap at the same time.
• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use
the right O-rings for R-134a to avoid leakage.
• Be careful not to damage the radiator and condenser fins when installing the condenser.
• Be sure to install the lower mount cushions of condenser securely into the holes.
• Charge the system, and test its performance.

[With Heat Pump]

• Do not use the same A/C recovery / charging station as conventional belt-driven compressors.
• Since the electric compressor uses high-voltage, you should use POE oil which have high volumetric resistivity.
• If PAG oil mixes into the POE oil of the system, dielectric breakdown may occur due to decreased volumetric resistivity and the
A/C compressor may not work.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
3. Shut off the high voltage circuit. (Refer to EV Battery System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
(Refer to Body - "Front Bumper Cover")
5. Remove the receiver-drier (A) after loosening the mounting bolts.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

7. Apply air conditioning compressor oil along the O-rings and threads of the new bottom cap.
8. Insert a new desiccant into the receiver drier tank. The desiccant must be sealed in vacuum before it is exposed to air for use.
Page 36 sur 127

9. Install the new bottom cap to the condenser.

• Always replace the desiccant and bottom cap at the same time.
• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use the
right O-rings for R-134a to avoid leakage.
• Be careful not to damage the radiator and condenser fins when installing the condenser.
• Be sure to install the lower mount cushions of condenser securely into the holes.
• Charge the system, and test its performance.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Component Location
[Without Heat Pump]

1. A/C pressure transducer

[With Heat Pump]

Page 37 sur 127

1. A/C pressure transducer

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
The A/C Pressure Transducer (APT) converts the pressure value of high pressure line into voltage value after measuring it. Engine ECU
converts the voltage value to control the cooling fan by operating it in high speed or low speed. Engine ECU stops the operation of the
compressor when the temperature of refrigerant line is very high or very low irregularly to optimize air conditioning system.
Page 38 sur 127

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection
1. Measure the pressure of high pressure line by measuring voltage output between terminals No. 1 and No. 2.

2. Inspect the voltage value whether it is within the specified range.

Voltage= 0.00878835 * Pressure + 0.5[PSIA]

3. If the measured voltage value is not within the specification, replace the A/C pressure transducer.

Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/charging station.

• If PAG oil mixes into the POE oil of the system, dielectric breakdown may occur due to decreased volumetric resistivity and the
A/C compressor may not work.
3. Disconnect the A/C pressure transducer connector (A).
4. Remove the A/C pressure transducer (B).

[Without Heat Pump]

Page 39 sur 127

[With Heat Pump]

• Be careful not to bend the liquid & suction pipe.

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• When installing, replace it with a new O-ring (A).

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
The evaporator temperature sensor will detect the evaporator core temperature and interrupt compressor relay power in order to prevent
evaporator from freezing by excessive cooling
Page 40 sur 127

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor connector.
3. Measure the resistance between terminals "1" and "2" of the evaporator temperature sensor.

4. Connect the evaporator temperature sensor connector.

5. Run the engine and turn the A/C switch ON, then measure the voltage between the terminals of the harness connector.
Specification
Evaporator core
Resistance[KΩ]
temperature[°C(°F)]
-10 / (14) 43.35
0 / (32) 27.62
10 / (50) 18.07
20 / (68) 12.11
30 / (86) 8.3
40 / (104) 5.81

Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the console side cover (A).

[RH]
Page 41 sur 127

3. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor connector (A).

4. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor (A) by pulling it out after rotating it 90° in a counterclockwise direction.

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
The In-car air temperature sensor is integrated into the heater & A/C control unit.
The sensor contains a thermistor which measures the temperature of the inside. The signal decided by the resistance value which changes
in accordance with perceived inside temperature, is delivered to heater control unit and according to this signal the control unit regulates in-
car temperature to intended value.
Page 42 sur 127

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
The photo sensor is located at the center of the defrost nozzles.
The photo sensor contains a photovoltaic (sensitive to sunlight) diode. The solar radiation received by its light receiving portion, generates
an electromotive force in proportion to the amount of radiation received which is transferred to the automatic temperature control module so
that the solar radiation compensation will be performed.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Connect the GDS.
3. Emit intensive light toward the photo sensor using a lamp, and check the output voltage change.
4. The voltage will rise with higher intensive light and reduce with lower intensive light.

1. Auto Light Signal 5. Led GND (To BCM)

2. Auto Light Signal Signal 6. Photo Signal (LH)
3. Photo Signal (RH) 7. Photo Power (SW)
4. Led power (BAT) 8. 5V (Vcc)

Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. With the (-) driver, remove the photo sensor (A) from the center of the defrost nozzle.

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning
Page 43 sur 127

Description
The ambient temperature sensor is located at the front of the condenser and detects ambient air temperature. It is a negative type
thermistor; resistance will increase with lower temperature, and decrease with higher temperature.
The sensor output will be used for discharge temperature control, temperature regulation door control, blower motor level control, mix mode
control and in-car humidity control.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ambient temperature sensor.
3. Check the resistance of the ambient temperature sensor between terminals 1 and 2 whether it is changed by changing of the ambient
temperature.

1. Sensor Ground 2. Ambient Sensor Signal

Specification
Ambient temperature
Resistance between terminals 1and 2 (kΩ)
[°C(°F)]
-10(14) 158.18
0 (32) 95.10
10 (50) 58.80
20 (68) 37.32

4. If the measured resistance is not within the specification, substitute with a known-good ambient temperature sensor and check for proper
operation.
5. If the problem is corrected, replace the ambient temperature sensor.

Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the engine room under cover.
(Refer to Traction Motor Systerm - "Under Cover")
3. Disconnect the connector and then remove the ambient temperature sensor (A).
Page 44 sur 127

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
The cluster ionizer makes disinfection and decomposition of bad smell from the air-conditioner or inflow air. And it cleans the inside air of a
vehicle.
When the air-conditioner or heater is operating, it starts from "CLEAN" mode and alternates from "CLEAN" mode to "ION" mode and vice
versa for every 15 minutes.
In the "CLEAN" mode, the cluster ionizer generates negative ions and positive ions and disinfects and decomposes bad smells from the air-
conditioner or inflow air.
It has an operation indicator lamp on the display area that shows its operating status.
In the “ION” mode, the cluster ionizer generates negative ions and cleans the inside air of a vehicle. It has an operation indicator lamp on the
display area that shows its operating status.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection
1. Press the MODE switch more than 4 times within 2 seconds while pressing the OFF switch.
Display Fail description
00 Normal
50 Cluster ion generator fault

* For diagnostic procedures, refer to DTC code.

Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the glove box and glove box housing.
(Refer to Body - “Glove Box Housing”)
3. Disconnect the cluster ionizer connector (A).
4. Loosen the screws and then remove the cluster ionizer (A).
Page 45 sur 127

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Component Location
Page 46 sur 127

1. Heater unit

Components
[LH]
Page 47 sur 127

1. Floor shower duct assembly [LH] 12. Ventilation guide

2. Duct sensor 13. Heater case [LH]
3. Interior condenser cover 14. Duct sensor
4. Heater core cover 15. Joint flange cap
5. Temp door arm 16. Interior condenser
6. Temp door lever 17. Evaporator core lower insulation
7. Temp actuator motor assembly 18. Floor door assembly
8. Floor door lever 19. Vent door assembly [LH]
9. Mode actuator motor assembly [LH] 20. Cowl top cover - Heat seal
10. Mode cam 21. Cowl top cover - Heat seal
11. Motor & wheel assembly 22. Cowl top cover - Heat seal

[RH]
Page 48 sur 127

1. Evaporator core 10. Defogging actuator motor assembly

2. Joint flange cap 11. Vent door arm
3. Heater lower door 12. Mode cam
4. Temperature control door 13. Mode actuator motor assembly [RH]
5. Floor door assembly [RH] 14. PWM blower motor
6. Vent door assembly [RH] 15. Floor door lever
7. Defogging door assembly [LH] 16. Floor door arm
8. Ventilation guide 17. Floor shower duct assembly [RH]
9. Heater case [RH] 18. Drain hose

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

Page 49 sur 127

6. Remove the expansion valve (A) after loosening the mounting bolts from the evaporator core.
Tightening torque :
7.8 ~ 11.7 N.m ( 0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.7 ~ 8.6 Ib-ft)

• Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust contamination.
7. Loosen the cowl cross member mounting bolts (A).
Page 50 sur 127

8. Remove both sides of front seat assembly.

(Refer to Body - "Front Seat Assembly")
9. Remove the floor console assembly.
(Refer to Body - "Floor Console Assembly")
10. Remove the crash pad lower panel.
(Refer to Body - "Crash Pad Lower Panel")
11. Remove the glove box housing.
(Refer to Body - "Glove Box Housing")
12. Remove the crash pad center panel.
(Refer to Body - "Crash Pad Center Panel")
13. Remove both sides of the front pillar trim.
(Refer to Body - "Front Pillar Trim")
14. Remove both sides of the cowl side trim.
(Refer to Body - "Cowl Side Trim")
15. Remove the steering column shroud lower panel.
(Refer to Body - "Steering Column Shroud Panel")
16. Remove the steering wheel.
(Refer to Steering System - "Steering Wheel")
17. Remove the multifunction switch.
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "Multifunction Switch")
18. Lower the steering column after loosening the mounting bolts.
(Refer to Steering System - "Steering Column and Shaft")
19. Remove the rear airduct assembly (A).
[LH]
(1) Remove the accelerator pedal fixing cap (A).

(2) Remove the accelerator pedal (A) after loosening the mounting bolt.
Page 51 sur 127

(3) Remove the floor carpet fixing clip (A) and the floor wire fixing clip (B).

(4) Bend the front floor carpet backwards.

(5) Remove the rear air duct assembly (A) after loosening the mounting nut.

[RH]
(6) Remove the floor carpet fixing clip (A) and the floor wire fixing clip (B).

(7) Bend the front floor carpet (A) backwards.

Page 52 sur 127

(8) Remove the rear air duct assembly (A) after loosening the mounting nut.

20. Remove the shift lever assembly.

(Refer to Automatic Transaxle System - "Shift Lever")
21. Disconnect the airbag control module (SRSCM) connector (A).

22. After loosening the mounting bolts and nuts, remove the cowl cross bar center bracket (A).

23. Disconnect the passenger compartment junction box connectors (A).

Page 53 sur 127

24. Remove the passenger compartment junction box mounting clips (A).

25. Disconnect the multi box connectors (A).

[Driver's]

[Passenger's]

26. Disconnect the connector (A) and the mounting clips (B) in the front pillar.
[Driver's]
Page 54 sur 127

[Passenger's]

27. Remove the drain hose (A).

28. Disconnect the high voltage PTC heater cable (A).

• How to press the high voltage PTC heater cable locker pin
1. Pull the locker pin (A) in the direction of the arrow.
Page 55 sur 127

2. While pressing the locker pin using a flat driver (A) on the hole (B), pull out the connector.

29. After loosening the bolts, remove the main crash pad and cowl cross bar assembly (A) altogether.
Page 56 sur 127

30. Disconnect the heater and blower unit connectors.

(1) Remove the high voltage heater ground (A) after loosening the mounting bolt (B) and fixing clip (c).

(2) Remove the fixing clip (B) after disconnecting the intake actuator connector (A).
Page 57 sur 127

(3) Remove the fixing clip (B) after disconnecting the blower unit connector (A).

(4) Remove the fixing clip (B) after disconnecting the PWM unit connector (A).

(5) Remove the fixing clip (B) after disconnecting the blower motor connectors (A).

(6) Disconnect the temperature control actuator connector (A) and duct sensor connector (B).
Page 58 sur 127

(7) Remove the fixing clip (B) after disconnecting the mode control actuator conenctors (A).

(8) Remove the fixing clips (B) after loosening the VESS unit mounting screw (A).

31. Remove the mounting clips (A).

Page 59 sur 127

32. Loosen the heater and blower unit mounting bolts (A).

33. Remove the heater and blower unit (A) from the crash pad (B) after loosening the mounting nuts.
Page 60 sur 127

34. Remove the air duct (A) after loosening the mounting screw.

35. Disconnect the connector (B).

And then remove the high voltage line guide (A) after loosening the mounting screws.
Page 61 sur 127

36. Disconnect the high voltage PTC heater unit connector (A).

37. Remove the high voltage PTC heater unit (A) after loosening the mounting screws.

38. Remove the high voltage PTC heater core (A) after loosening the mounting screws.

39. Separate the blower unit (A) from the heater unit (B) after loosening the mounting screws (C).
Page 62 sur 127

40. Install in the reverse order of removal and note the followings:
A. If you're installing a new evaporator, add refrigerant oil. (POE OIL)
B. Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use the
right O-rings for R-134a to avoid leakage.
C. Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
D. Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle ; it may damage the paint ; if the refrigerant oil contacts the paint, wash it off
immediately
E. Apply sealant to the grommets.
F. Make sure that there is no air leakage.
G. Charge the system and test its performance.
H. Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses and install the hose clamps securely.
I. Refill the cooling system with engine coolanSince the electric compressor uses high-voltage, POE oil with high resistivity should be
used.tIf PAG oil mixes into the POE oil of the system, dielectric breakdown may occur due to decreased volumetric resistivity and
the A/C compressor may not work.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• After loosening the bolts, remove the main crash pad and cowl cross bar assembly (A) altogether. (Refer to the below removal
procedure.)
Page 63 sur 127

5. Remove the fixing clip (A) after loosening the mounting screws.
Page 64 sur 127

6. Remove the heater lower case (B) after loosenig the heater lower case mounting bolt (A).

7. Pull out the evaporator core (A) from the heater unit.

8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

If PAG oil mixes into the POE oil of the system, dielectric breakdown may occur due to decreased volumetric resistivity and the
A/C compressor may not work.

• If you're installing a new evaporator core, add refrigerant oil (PAG OIL).
• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use
the right O-rings for R-134a to avoid leakage.
• Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts the paint, wash it off
immediately.
• Apply sealant to the grommets.
• Make sure that there is no air leakage.
• Charge the system and test its performance.
• Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses and install the hose clamps securely.
• Refill the cooling system with engine coolant.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Operation Condition
1. The power supplied to the PTC heater should be within DC 240V - 420V (high voltage).
2. The power supplied to the PTC heater should be within 9.0V - 16.0V (low voltage).
3. The interlcok and insulation resistance must be normal.
4. The engine must be running.
5. The high voltage PTC heater operates depending on the operating Duty output.
6. If the high voltage PTC heater is abnormal, check the Fail Safe.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection
1. Check for output signal in the heater and A/C control unit.
2. Using the GDS, check whether there is a problem in the interlock.
3. Check whether the low voltage (12V) is supplied or not.
4. For inspection, refer to the Self Diagnosis and Fail Safe.

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.

2. Shut off the high voltage circuit.
(Refer to EV Battery System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
3. Remove the floor console assembly.
(Refer to Body -"Floor Console Assembly")
4. Remove the crash pad lower panel.
(Refer to Body -"Crash Pad Lower Panel")
5. Remove the glove box housing.
(Refer to Body -"Glove Box Housing")
6. Remove the crash pad center panel.
(Refer to Body -"Crash Pad Center Panel")
7. Remove the TPMS receiver.
(Refer to Suspension System -"Tire Pressure Monitoring System")
8. Remove the high voltage PTC heater ground (A) after loosening the mounting bolt.

9. Remove the high voltage PTC heater unit (A) after loosening the mounting screws.

10. Disconnect the high voltage PTC heater cable (A).

• How to press the high voltage PTC heater cable locker pin
1. Pull the locker pin (A) in the direction of the arrow.
Page 67 sur 127

2. While pressing the locker pin using a flat driver (A) on the hole (B), pull out the connector.

11. Remove the high voltage PTC heater core (A) after loosening the mounting screws.

12. Separate the blower unit (A) from the heater unit (B) after loosening the mounting screws (C).

13. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
The heater unit includes mode control actuator and temperature control actuator.
Located in the heater unit, the temperature control actuator regulates the temperature in the following procedures.
Page 68 sur 127

Signal from control unit adjusts the position of the temperature door by operating the temperature switch. Then the temperature will be
regulated by the hot/cold air ratio decided by the position of the temperature door.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the temperature control actuator connector.
3. Verify that the temperature control actuator operates to the cool position when 12V is connected to terminal 3 and ground to terminal 7.
Verify that the temperature control actuator operates to the warm position when connected in reverse.

1. - 5. Feedback signal
2. - 6. Sensor ground
3. Cool position 7. Warm position
4. Sensor (+ 5V)

4. Connect the temperature control actuator connector.

5. Turn the ignition switch ON.
6. Check the voltage between terminals 5 and 4.
Specification
Door Position Voltage (V) Error Detecting
Max. cooling 0.3±0.15 Low voltage : 0.1V or less
Max. heating 4.7±0.15 High voltage : 4.9V or more

It will feedback the current position of the actuator to controls.

7. If the temperature control actuator does not operate well, substitute with a known-good temperaturecontrol actuator and check for proper
operation. Use the replaced actuator if it performs well.

Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the crash pad lower panel.
(Refer to Body - "Crash Pad Lower Panel")
3. Remove the driver's side shower duct (A) after loosening the screw.

4. Disconnect the connector (A) and then remove the temperature control actuator (B) after loosening the mounting screws.
Page 69 sur 127

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
Located in the heater unit, the mode control actuator adjusts the position of the mode door by operating the mode control actuator according
to the signal from the A/C control unit. Pressing the mode select switch shifts the mode control actuator in the order of Vent → Bi-Level →
Floor → Mix.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the mode control actuator connector.
3. Verify that the mode control actuator operates to the defrost mode when 12V is connected to terminal 3 and ground to terminal 7.
Verify that the mode control actuator operates to the vent mode when connected in reverse.

1. - 5. Feedback signal
2. - 6. Sensor (+ 5V)
3. Defrost mode 7. Vent mode
4. Sensor ground

4. Connect the mode control actuator connector.

5. Turn the ignition switch ON.
6. Check the voltage between terminals 5 and 4.
Specification
Door position Voltage (V) Error detecting
Vent 0.3±0.15 Low voltage : 0.1V or less
Defrost 4.7±0.15 High voltage : 4.9V or more

It will feedback the current position of the actuator to controls.

7.
Page 70 sur 127

If the mode control actuator does not operate well, substitute with a known-good mode control actuator and check for proper operation.
Use the replaced actuator if it performs well.

Replacement
[Driver's Mode Actuator]
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the crash pad lower panel.
(Refer to Body - "Crash Pad Lower Panel")
3. Remove the driver shower duct (A) after loosening the mounting screw.

4. Lower the steering column after loosening the mounting bolts.

(Refer to Steering System - "Steering Column and Shaft")
5. Disconnect the mode control actuator connector (A).
And then remove the mode control actuator (B) after loosening the mounting screws.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

[Passenger's Mode Actuator]

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the main crash pad assembly.
(Refer to Body - "Main Crash Pad Assembly")
3. Disconnect the mode control actuator connector (A).
And then remove the mode control actuator (B) after loosening the mounting screws.
Page 71 sur 127

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
3. Verify that the auto defogging actuator operates to the open position when 12V is connected to terminal 3 and ground to terminal 4.
Verify that the auto defogging actuator operates to the close position when connected in reverse.
4. Connect the auto defogging actuator connector.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON.
6. Check the voltage between terminals 5 and 6.

1. - 5. Sensor ground
2. - 6. Feedback signal
3. DEF (OFF) 7. Sensor (+ 5V)
4. DEF (ON)

Specification
Door position Voltage (V) Error detecting
Defog OFF (CLOSE) 0.30±0.15 Low voltage : 0.1V or less
Defog ON (OPEN) 3.0±0.15 High voltage : 4.9V or more

It will feedback the current position of the actuator to controls.

7. If the auto defogging actuator does not operate well, substitute with a known-good auto defogging actuator and check for proper
operation. Use the replaced actuator if it performs well.

Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the crash pad lower panel.
(Refer to Body - "Crash Pad Lower Panel")
3. Remove the driver shower duct (A) after loosening the mounting screw.
Page 72 sur 127

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Heat Pump Configuration and Operation

Heat pump is configured to circulate refrigerant flow for cooling/heating function.
This process minimizes battery consumption by the heater resulting in enhanced driving distance of EV.
[Heating]
Page 73 sur 127

1. Outer Condenser - Evaporates liquid refrigerant and forms low temp-low pressure gas substance.
2. 3-Way Solenoid Valve #2 - Redirects the refrigerant direction towards the chiller when heat pump is active.
3. Chiller - Uses waste heat from the motor and performs secondary heat exchange on low temp-low pressure gas.
4. Accumulator - Separates gas/liquid so that only the refrigerant in gas state can flow into the compressor.
5. Electric Compressor - Compressor is operated by electric motor. Converts low temp-low pressure gas refrigerant into high temp-high
pressure gas and sends it to inner condenser.
6. Inner Condenser - Condenses high temp-high pressure gas refrigerant and transforms it into high temp-high pressure liquid refrigerant.
7. 2-Way Solenoid Valve #1 - Instantly expands refrigerant to create low temp-low pressure refrigerant.
8. 2-Way Solenoid Valve #2 - Sends the refrigerant to the evaporator if DEFROST Mode is used when heating.
9. 3-Way Solenoid Valve #1 - Bypasses the refrigerant to chiller if refrigerant accumulation in the outer condenser is detected.
[Cooling]

1. Outer Condenser - Condenses high temp-high pressure gas refrigerant and transforms it into high temp-high pressure liquid refrigerant.
2. 3-Way Valve #2 - Directs refrigerant flow to expansion valve when A/C is operating.
3. Expansion Valve - Instantly expands refrigerant to create low temp-low pressure gas.
4. Evaporator - Operates blower fan to cool the air passing through the evaporator pin while the refrigerant in foggy state is transformed into
gas (surrounding area gets cold).
5. Accumulator - Separates gas/liquid so that only gas state refrigerant can flow into the compressor.
6. Electric Compressor - Compressor is operated by electric motor. Converts low temp-low pressure gas refrigerant into high temp-high
pressure gas and sends it to inner condenser.
7. Inner Condenser - Condenses high temp-high pressure gas refrigerant and transforms it into high temp-high pressure liquid refrigerant.
8. 2-Way Solenoid Valve #1 - Does not expand but circulates refrigerant when A/C is operating.
9. 2-Way Solenoid Valve #2 - Prevents refrigerant from flowing into evaporator.
10. 3-Way Solenoid Valve #1 - Circulates refrigerant to outer condenser.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Components Location
Page 74 sur 127

1. 3-Way Solenoid Valve Assembly 2. 2-Way Solenoid Valve Assembly

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
Changes the valve outlet direction with an electric signal to switch the refrigerant flow direction. This switching of refrigerant flow direction
allows activation of A/C Mode and Heat Pump Mode.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection
Page 75 sur 127

1. Vcc 2. Ground

Check the voltage between terminals 6 and 7.

1. Using the tester, check the resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Temperature
Resistance [KΩ]
°C °F
-30 -22 8.7~9.5
-25 -13 8.92~9.74
-20 -4 9.14~9.98
-15 5 9.37~10.23
-10 14 9.59~10.47
-5 23 9.81~10.71
0 32 10.03~10.95
5 41 10.25~11.19
10 50 10.47~11.43
15 59 10.69~11.67
20 68 10.90~11.90
25 77 11.12~12.14
30 86 11.34~12.38
35 95 11.55~12.61
40 104 11.77~12.85

Replacement
[3-WAY Solenoid Valve]
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/ recycling/ charging station.

• Do not use the same A/C recovery / charging station as conventional belt-driven compressors.
• Since the electric compressor uses high-voltage, POE oil with high resistivity should be used.Since the electric compressor uses
high-voltage, POE oil with high resistivity should be used.
• If PAG oil mixes into the POE oil of the system, dielectric breakdown may occur due to decreased volumetric resistivity and the
A/C compressor may not work.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the 3-WAY solenoid valve connector (A).
Page 76 sur 127

4. Remove the refrigerant line after loosening the mounting nuts (A).

5. Remove the 3-WAY solenoid valve assembly (A) after loosening the mounting bolt and nut.
Page 77 sur 127

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

[2-WAY Solenoid Valve]

1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/ recycling/ charging station.

4. Remove the refrigerant line after loosening the mounting nuts (A).
Page 78 sur 127

5. Remove the 3-WAY solenoid valve assembly (A) after loosening the mounting bolt and nut.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Components Location
Page 79 sur 127

1. Accumulator

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
Separates refrigerant in gas/liquid state so that only the refrigerant in gas state can flow into the compressor.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Page 80 sur 127

Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/ recycling/ charging station.

4. Remove the accumulator (A) after loosening the mounting bolt.

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Components Location
Page 81 sur 127

1. Refrigerant Temperature Sensor #1 2. Refrigerant Temperature Sensor #2

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
Monitors refrigerant temperature in A/C duct and sends resistance data to A/C controller. (same as the thermistor)
Temperature and resistance is inversely proportioned.
Page 82 sur 127

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection

1. Vcc 2. Ground

Check the voltage between terminals 6 and 7.

1. Using the tester, check the resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Temperature Resistance
°C °F Specification [KΩ] Tolerance [%]
-40 -40 225.1 ± 3.06
-30 -22 129.3 ± 2.49
-20 -4 76.96 ± 1.95
-10 14 47.34 ± 1.46
0 32 30 ± 1.00
10 50 19.53 ± 1.43
20 68 13.03 ± 1.82
30 86 8.896 ± 2.19
40 104 6.201 ± 2.54
50 122 4.406 ± 2.86
60 140 3.186 ± 3.16
70 158 2.343 ± 3.44
80 176 1.749 ± 3.71
90 194 1.325 ± 3.96
100 212 1.017 ± 4.20
110 230 0.789 ± 4.42
120 248 0.62 ± 4.63

Replacement
[Refrigerant Temperature Sensor #1]
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/ recycling/ charging station.

3. Loosen the clips and bolts on the front bumper upper cover.

4. Lift the front bumper uppser cover (A) slightly.

5. Remove the front bumper upper cover (A) after loosening the mounting screw (B) on the side.

6. Remove the refrigerant temperature sensor #1 (B) after disconnecting the refrigerant temperature sensor #1 connector (A).

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

[Refrigerant Temperature Sensor #2]

1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/ recycling/ charging station.

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Components Location
Page 85 sur 127

1. Inner Condenser

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
Uses high temp-high pressure refrigerant to warm the air flowing into the interior (same role as the heater core in a conventional system).
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

Page 86 sur 127

6. Remove the expansion valve (A) after loosening the mounting bolts from the evaporator core.
Tightening torque :
7.8 ~ 11.7 N.m ( 0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.7 ~ 8.6 Ib-ft)

• Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust contamination.
7. Loosen the cowl cross member mounting bolts (A).

8. Remove both sides of front seat assembly.

14. Remove both sides of the cowl side trim.

(Refer to Body - "Cowl Side Trim")
15. Remove the steering column shroud lower panel.
(Refer to Body - "Steering Column Shroud Panel")
16. Remove the steering wheel.
(Refer to Steering System - "Steering Wheel")
17. Remove the multifunction switch.
(Refer to Body Electrical System - "Multifunction Switch")
18. Lower the steering column after loosening the mounting bolts.
(Refer to Steering System - "Steering Column and Shaft")
19. Remove the rear airduct assembly (A).

[LH]
(1) Remove the accelerator pedal fixing cap (A).

(2) Remove the accelerator pedal (A) after loosening the mounting bolt.

(3) Remove the floor carpet fixing clip (A) and the floor wire fixing clip (B).

(4) Bend the front floor carpet backwards.

(5) Remove the rear air duct assembly (A) after loosening the mounting nut.
Page 88 sur 127

[RH]
(1) Remove the floor carpet fixing clip (A) and the floor wire fixing clip (B).

(2) Bend the front floor carpet (A) backwards.

(3) Remove the rear air duct assembly (A) after loosening the mounting nut.
Page 89 sur 127

20. Remove the shift lever assembly.

(Refer to Automatic Transaxle System - "Shift Lever")
21. Disconnect the airbag control module (SRSCM) connector (A).

22. After loosening the mounting bolts and nuts, remove the cowl cross bar center bracket (A).

23. Disconnect the passenger compartment junction box connectors (A).

24. Remove the passenger compartment junction box mounting clips (A).
Page 90 sur 127

25. Disconnect the multi box connectors (A).

[Driver's]

[Passenger's]

26. Disconnect the connector (A) and the mounting clips (B) in the front pillar.
[Driver's]

[Passenger's]
Page 91 sur 127

27. Remove the drain hose (A).

28. Disconnect the high voltage PTC heater cable (A).

• How to press the high voltage PTC heater cable locker pin
(1) Pull the locker pin (a) in the direction of the arrow.

(2) While pressing the locker pin using a flat driver (A) on the hole (B), pull out the connector.
Page 92 sur 127

29. After loosening the bolts, remove the main crash pad and cowl cross bar assembly (A) altogether.

30. Remove the interior condensor cover (A) after loosening the mounting screws.
Page 93 sur 127

31. Remove the interior condenser (A) in the direction of the arrow.Since the electric compressor uses high-voltage, POE oil with high
resistivity should be used.

32. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Do not use the same A/C recovery / charging station as conventional belt-driven compressors.
• If PAG oil mixes into the POE oil of the system, dielectric breakdown may occur due to decreased volumetric resistivity and the
A/C compressor may not work.
• If PAG oil mixes into the POE oil of the system, dielectric breakdown may occur due to decreased volumetric resistivity and the
A/C compressor may not work.
• If you're installing a new condenser, add refrigerant oil (POE OIL).
• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use
the right O-rings for R-134a to avoid leakage.
• Be careful not to damage the radiator and condenser fins when installing the condenser.
• Be sure to install the lower mount cushions of condenser securely into the holes.
• Charge the system, and test its performance.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Components Location
Page 94 sur 127

1. Outer Condenser

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
Condenses high temp-high pressure refrigerant when in A/C Mode (same role as the condenser in a conventional system).
Evaporates low temp-low pressure refrigerant when in Heating Mode (same role as the evaporator in a conventional system).
It is designed as down-flow type to facilitate condensed liquid discharge.
Page 95 sur 127

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

• Do not use the same A/C recovery / charging station as conventional belt-driven compressors.
• Since the electric compressor uses high-voltage, POE oil with high resistivity should be used.
• If PAG oil mixes into the POE oil of the system, dielectric breakdown may occur due to decreased volumetric resistivity and the
A/C compressor may not work.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
3. Shut off the high voltage circuit. (Refer to EV Battery System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
4. Remove the front bumper cover.
(Refer to Body -"Front Bumper Cover")
5. Remove the ambient temperature sensor.
(Refer to Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning -"Ambient Temperature Sensor")
6. Remove the refrigerant temperature sensor #1.
(Refer to Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning -"Refrigerant Temperature Sensor #1")
7. Separate the refrigerant line (A) after loosening the mounting nuts.

• Cap the open fittings immediately to keep moisture or dirt out of the system.
Page 96 sur 127

8. Pull out the side air guides (A) after pushing locker hook in the direction of the arrow.

9. Separate the exterior condensor (B) from the radiator after loosening bolts (A).
Page 97 sur 127

10. Remove the exterior condenser (A) in the direction of the arrow.Since the electric compressor uses high-voltage, POE oil with high
resistivity should be used.

• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them. Be sure to use
the right O-rings for R-134a to avoid leakage.
• Be careful not to damage the radiator and condenser fins when installing the condenser.
• Be sure to install the lower mount cushions of condenser securely into the holes.
• Charge the system, and test its performance.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Components Location

1. Chiller

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
Recycles waste electric heat by using the waste heat from electrical motor to exchange heat in low temperature refrigerant.
Page 99 sur 127

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/ recycling/ charging station.

• Cap the open fittings immediately to keep moisture or dirt out of the system.
6. Separate the refrigerant line (A) after loosening nut and then remove the chiller coolant hose (B).

• Cap the open fittings immediately to keep moisture or dirt out of the system.
Page 100 sur 127

7. Remove the chiller (A) after loosening the mounting bolts.

8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

3-Way Coolant Valve

Page 101 sur 127

1. 3-Way Coolant Valve

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
Switches the valve outlet direction through electric signal to change refrigerant flow direction.
Directs refrigerant flow towards chiller when heating pump is activated.
Directs refrigerant flow towards radiator during normal condition.
Page 102 sur 127

1. Towards radiator
2. Towards chiller
3. Inlet

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Replacement
1. Drain the coolant.
(Refer to Traction Motor System - "Coolant")
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the 3-WAY solenoid coolant valve connector (A).
4. Remove the 3-WAY coolant valve connector fixing clip (B).

5. Remove the coolant hose (A) above 3-WAY coolant valve.

6. Remove the coolant hose (A).

Page 103 sur 127

7. Remove the 3-WAY coolant valve (B) after loosening the mounting bolts.

8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Component Location

1. Blower unit
Page 104 sur 127

Components

1. High voltage PTC heater core 10. Intake cam

2. Ionizer 11. Intake arm
3. Evaporator temperature sensor 12. Blower - crash pad seal
4. Air inlet filter cover assembly 13. Air filter
5. Heater core pipe mounting bracket 14. Inlet door assembly
6. Heater - evaporator seal 15. Case clip
7. Intake duct case [LH] 16. Air inlet door assembly
8. Intake arm 17. Intake duct case [LH]
9. Intake actuator motor assembly 18. Evaporator - heater seal

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Replacement

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.

Page 105 sur 127

6. Remove the expansion valve (A) after loosening the mounting bolts from the evaporator core.
Tightening torque :
7.8 ~ 11.7 N.m ( 0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.7 ~ 8.6 Ib-ft)

• Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust contamination.
• Replace the O-rings with new ones.
7. Loosen the cowl cross member mounting bolts (A).
Page 106 sur 127

8. Remove both sides of front seat assembly.

[LH]
(1) Remove the accelerator pedal fixing cap (A).

(2) Remove the accelerator pedal (A) after loosening the mounting bolt.
Page 107 sur 127

(3) Remove the floor carpet fixing clip (A) and the floor wire fixing clip (B).

(4) Bend the front floor carpet backwards.

(5) Remove the rear air duct assembly (A) after loosening the mounting nut.

[RH]
(1) Remove the floor carpet fixing clip (A) and the floor wire fixing clip (B).
Page 108 sur 127

(2) Bend the front floor carpet (A) backwards.

(3) Remove the rear air duct assembly (A) after loosening the mounting nut.

20. Remove the shift lever assembly.

(Refer to Automatic Transaxle System - "Shift Lever")
21. Disconnect the airbag control module (SRSCM) connector (A).

22. After loosening the mounting bolts and nuts, remove the cowl cross bar center bracket (A)..

23. Disconnect the passenger compartment junction box connectors (A).

Page 109 sur 127

24. Remove the passenger compartment junction box mounting clips (A).

25. Disconnect the multi box connectors (A).

[Driver's]

[Passenger's]

26. Disconnect the connector (A) and the mounting clips (B) in the front pillar.
[Driver's]
Page 110 sur 127

[Passenger's]

27. Remove the drain hose (A).

28. Disconnect the high voltage PTC heater cable (A).

• How to press the high voltage PTC heater cable locker pin
(1) Pull the lock pin (A) in the direction of the arrow.
Page 111 sur 127

(2) While pressing the locker pin using a flat driver (A) on the hole (B), pull out the connector.

29. After loosening the bolts, remove the main crash pad and cowl cross bar assembly (A) altogether.
Page 112 sur 127

30. Disconnect the heater and blower unit connectors.

(1) Remove the high voltage heater ground (A) after loosening the mounting bolt (B) and fixing clip (c).

(2) Remove the fixing clip (B) after disconnecting the intake actuator connector (A).
Page 113 sur 127

(3) Remove the fixing clip (B) after disconnecting the blower unit connector (A).

(4) Remove the fixing clip (B) after disconnecting the PWM unit connector (A).

(5) Remove the fixing clip (B) after disconnecting the blower motor connectors (A).

(6) Disconnect the temperature control actuator connector (A) and duct sensor connector (B).
Page 114 sur 127

(7) Remove the fixing clip (B) after disconnecting the mode control actuator connectors (A).

(8) Remove the fixing clips (B) after loosening the VESS unit mounting screw (A).

31. Remove the mounting clips (A).

Page 115 sur 127

32. Loosen the heater and blower unit mounting bolts (A).

33. Remove the heater and blower unit (A) from the crash pad (B) after loosening the mounting nuts.
Page 116 sur 127

34. Remove the air duct (A) after loosening the mounting screw.

35. Disconnect the connector (B).

And then remove the high voltage line guide (A) after loosening the mounting screws.
Page 117 sur 127

36. Disconnect the high voltage PTC heater unit connector (A).

37. Remove the high voltage PTC heater unit (A) after loosening the mounting screws.

38. Remove the high voltage PTC heater core (A) after loosening the mounting screws.

39. Separate the blower unit (A) from the heater unit (B) after loosening the mounting screws (C).
Page 118 sur 127

40. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection
1. Connect the battery voltage and check for the blower motor rotation.

2. If the blower motor voltage does not operate well, substitute with a verified blower motor and check for proper operation.
3. If the problem is corrected, replace the blower motor.

Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the crash pad lower panel.
(Refer to Body - "Crash Pad Lower Panel")
3. Remove the driver shower duect (A) after loosening the mounting screw.

4. Lower the steering column after loosening the mounting bolts.

(Refer to Steering System - "Steering Column and Shaft")
5. Remove the fixing clip (B) after disconnecting the mode control actuator connector (A).
Page 119 sur 127

6. Disconnect the temperature control connector (A).

And then remove the temperature control actuator (B) after loosening the mounting screws.

7. Remove the brake pedal.

(Refer to Brake System - "Brake Pedal")
8. Disconnect the blower motor connector (A).
And then remove the blower motor (B) after loosening the mounting screws.

9. Install the reverse order of removal.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Manually operate the control switch and measure the voltage of blower motor.
Page 120 sur 127

3. Select the control switch to raise voltage until high speed.

Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the glove box housing.
(Refer to Body - "Glove Box Housing")
3. Disconnect the connector (A) and then remove the blower resistor (B) after loosening the mounting screws.

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
The climate control air filter is located in the blower unit. It eliminates foreign materials and odor. The particle filter performs a role as an odor
filter as well as a conventional dust filter to ensure comfortable interior environment.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Replacement
1. Open the glove box (A).
Page 121 sur 127

2. Remove the air filter panel (A).

3. Remove the filter cover (A) by pressing the filter cover knob.

4. Replace the air filter (A) with a new one according to the direction of air filter.

• To remove the filter easily, press the righthand side inward and then pull out the filter.
• In case of driving in an air-polluted area or rugged terrain, check and replace the air filter as frequently as possible.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Description
Page 122 sur 127

The intake actuator is located in the blower unit. It regulates the intake door by signal from control unit. Pressing the intake selection switch
will shift between recirculation and fresh air modes.
Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Inspection
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the intake actuator connector.
3. Verify that the actuator operates to the recirculation position when 12V is connected to terminal 3 and ground to terminal 7.
Verify that the intake actuator operates to the recirculated air position when connected in reverse.

1. - 5. Feedback signal
2. - 6. Sensor ground
3. Fresh air 7. Recirculated air
4. Sensor (+ 5V)

4. Connect the intake actuator connector.

5. Turn the ignition switch ON.
6. Check the voltage between terminals 5 and 6.
Specification
Door position Voltage (V) Error detecting
Fresh air 0.3±0.15 Low voltage : 0.1V or less
Recirculated air 4.7±0.15 High voltage : 4.9V or more

It will feedback the current position of the actuator to controls.

7. If the intake actuator does not operate well, substitute with a verified intake actuator and check for proper operation. Use the replaced
actuator if it performs well.

Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal.
2. Remove the glove box housing.
(Refer to Body - "Glove Box Housing")
3. Disconnect the connector (A) and then remove the intake actuator (B) after loosening the mounting screws.
Page 123 sur 127

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Components
Page 124 sur 127

Connector Pin Function

Pin
Connector A Connector B Connector C
No.
1 ILL (+) Ground Electric compressor interlock (+)
2 Sensor REF (+5V) Sensor ground Electric compressor interlock (-)
3 C_CAN High Blower PWM IN High voltage PTC heater interlock (+)
4 C_CAN LOW Ionizer diagnosis High voltage PTC heater interlock (-)
5 Driver mode actuator (VENT) - PAB IGN3
6 Driver mode actuator (DEF) CLEAN signal PAB ON signal
7 Driver mode actuator F/B Passenger mode actuator (VENT) PAB OFF signal
8 Intake actuator (FRE) Passenger mode actuator (DEF) SBR
9 Intake actuator (REC) Passenger mode actuator F/B Rr LEFT SBR
10 Intake actuator F/B Defogging actuator (OPEN) Rr CENTER SBR
11 K-LINE Defogging actuator (CLOSE) Rr RIGHT SBR
12 HTD Defogging actuator F/B -
13 Rear defog switch Vent left duct sensor (+) -
14 Temp. control actuator (COOL) Floor left duct sensor (+) -
15 Temp. control actuator (WARM) IGN3 -
16 Temp. Control actuator F/B IGN2 -
17 Left seat heater indicator - LOW -
Page 125 sur 127

18 Left seat heater indicator - MID 2 WAY valve #1 (+)

19 Left seat heater indicator - HIGH 3 WAY valve #1 (+)
20 ILL - (RHEO) 3 WAY valve #2 (+)
21 DETENT OUT (+) 2 WAY valve #2 (+)
22 Left seat heater switch CLIMATE_CAN HIGH
23 Left ventilation indicator - LOW CLIMATE_CAN LOW
24 Left ventilation indicator - MID HUMIDITY (PWM)
25 Left ventilation indicator - HIGH Air pressure tranducer signal
26 Right seat heater switch Refrigerant temperature sensor signal #1
27 Ambient sensor (+) Refrigerant temperature sensor signal #2
28 Evaporator sensor (+) Coolant valve OUTPUT
29 Right ventilation indicator - LOW IGN3
30 Right ventilation indicator - MID Blower IS
31 Right ventilation indicator - HIGH Battery
32 Photo sensor (-) Battery
33 Right ventilation switch
34 Left ventilation switch
35 Blower INH
36 MM_CAN HIGH
37 MM_CAN LOW
38 Right seat heater indicator - LOW
39 Right seat heater indicator - MID
40 Right seat heater indicator - HIGH

Heating,Ventilation, Air Conditioning

Self Diagnosis
1. Self-diagnosis process

2. How to read self-diagnostic code

After the display panel flickers three times every 0.5 second, the corresponding fault code flickers on the setup temperature display panel
every 0.5 second and will show two figures. Codes are displayed in numerical format
3. Fault code display
(1) Continuous operation : DTC code for one.
Page 126 sur 127

(2) Continuous operation : DTC code for two or more.

(3) STEP operation

A. Same as continuous operation when normal or one fault code.
B. DTC code for two or more.

Replacement

3. Disconnect the A/C & heater controller connectors (A).

4. Remove the heater & A/C controller unit (A) from the center fascia panel (B) after loosening the mounting screws.

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• Make sure that the connectors are connected in properly.

• Replace any damaged clips.
Page 1 sur 245

EV Battery System

Safety Precaution

Sinse Electric Vehicle contains a high voltage, battery mishandling the high voltage system or vehicle may lead to a serious accident
including electric shock and electric leakage.

• Be sure to shut off the high voltage by removing the safety plug before inspecting or repairing the high voltage system(Refer to “High
Voltage Shut-off Procedures”).
• A responsible worker should keep removed safety plugs to prevent it from being connected by mistake.
• Keep away from any metal objects (watch, ring etc.) while working on the high voltage system, as they may cause serious accidents
like electric shock.
• Before beginning to work on the high voltage system, workers should wear personal protective equipment to prevent safety accidents
(Refer to “Personal Protective Equipment”).
• At any time, do not allow workers not wearing personal protective equipment to touch the high voltage system. High voltage
components should be covered with an insulation sheet to prevent safety accidents.
• Use insulation tools when working on the high voltage system.
• Place removed high voltage components on an the insulation mat.
• Check that voltage between the high voltage terminals is below 30V after removing the safety plug.

• All the high voltage wiring and connectors are in orange.

• A caution label for high voltage is attached to the high voltage components
• High voltage components : High Voltage Battery, Power Relay Assembly (PRA), Quick Charge Relay Assembly (QRA), Motor, Power
Cable, BMS ECU, Inverter, LDC, On-Board Charger (OBC), Main Relay, Pre-charge Relay, Pre-charge resistor, Battery Current
Sensor, Safety Plug, Main Fuse, Battery Temperature Sensor, Busbar, Charge Port, A/C Compressor, Electric Power Control Unit
(EPCU), High Voltage Heater, High Voltage Heater Relay etc.

• Inform of possible danger of high voltage by placing a "high voltage caution" sign on the vehicle as in the image below.
Page 2 sur 245
Page 3 sur 245

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Insulation gloves Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage
components
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]
Page 4 sur 245

Insulation shoes

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation clothes
components

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses

Used in the following cases :

• During Removal & installation or inspection of the high voltage
battery terminals or wiring, which spark might happen.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

All removed high voltage components are placed on an

Insulation mat
insulation mat to prevent safety accidents.

Insulation sheet is used to cover high voltage components to

Insulation sheet protect people not wearing personal protective equipment from
safety accidents.

Warning tape Used for infomring that it is dangerous to come over this line.
Page 5 sur 245

Personal Protective Equipment Inspection

• Check that the personal protective equipment is not damaged.

• Check that the insulation gloves are not torn or damaged.
• Wear the insulation glove after removing moisture.

Fold the insulation glove as above.

Fold again 3~4 times to make it airtight.
Squeeze the inflated glove to see if the glove is torn or damaged.
Caution when repairing the power cable

Precautions when handling high voltage battery

• Battery Control System - Refer to "High Voltage Battery Handling Guide"

Precautions in case of fire in High Voltage Battery System

Precautions in case of high voltage battery gas and/or electrolyte leakage

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug.
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• Gas is hydrogen and alkali vapor. If the fire occurred indoor, ventilate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline
solution.
• If leaked vapor or liquid gets in your eye, immediately clean with running water, then get medical attention.
• In case of gas leakage due to high temperature, do NOT use the battery until the high voltage battery cools down to room temperature.
Page 6 sur 245

Precautions when handling vehicle after an accident

Preparations when servicing accident affected vehicle

Precautions when EV is unattended for a prolonged period

Hybrid Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery / Charging Precautions

If the POE oil in the system gets mixed with PAG oil, it may result in dielectric breakdown due to decreased volumetric resistivity and
inoperative A/C compressor, disabling the A/C compressor.

EV Battery System

High Voltage Shut-off Procedure

High voltage components : High Voltage Battery, Power Relay Assembly (PRA), Quick Charge Relay Assembly (QRA), Motor, Power
Cable, BMS ECU, Inverter, LDC, On-Board Charger (OBC), Main Relay, Pre-charge Relay, Pre-charge resistor, Battery Current Sensor,
Safety Plug, Main Fuse, Battery Temperature Sensor, Busbar, Charge Port, A/C Compressor, Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU), High
Voltage Heater, High Voltage Heater Relay etc.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative (-) terminal of the auxiliary battery.
2. Remove the cover (A) on the floor carpet of the rear seat.
Page 7 sur 245

3. After loosening the nut, remove the safety plug service cover (A).
Safety plug service cover mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Remove the safety plug (A).

Remove the safety plug in the follwing order.

(3) Remove the high voltage cable (A).

(4) Measure the voltage between the inverter terminals.

Less than 30V : High voltage circuit properly shut
More than 30V : Faulty on high voltage circuit
Page 9 sur 245

High voltage battery system inspection guide

Be sure to read and follow the “General Safety Information and Caution” before doing any work related with the high voltage system.
Failure to follow the safety instructions may result in serious electrical injuries.
1. Carry out a visual inspection to determine whether the vehicle requires general repair or accident repair.
2. For the general repair, repair according to the repair process of the corresponding DTC code.
3. For the car accident repair, determine the accident type before repairing.
1) Electrical Accidents
- Over-charge/discharge: Displays a battery over voltage (P1B71) code /low voltage (P1B70) code (Refer to the DTC diagnosis guide).
- Short: Displays a high voltage short (P1B77, P1B25) codes (Refer to the DTC diagnosis guide).
2) Fire

Classification Inspection process Inspection results Measures

1.
Page 10 sur 245

Fire outside the high Perform visual inspections (deformation, High voltage battery insulation Remove the high voltage battery
voltage battery mount corrosion, wire coating, odor, connector). damaged and repair the insulation
2. Check for main fuse open circuit after process/coating.
e.g. fire in engine shutting off the high voltage. High voltage DTC code If a DTC code occurs, comply
3. Check the high voltage main relay for battery not with DTC diagnosis guide and
signs of welding. damaged repair process.
4. Measure the high voltage battery/chassis No DTC code and Do not replace the high voltage
insulation resistance. battery appears battery (if the battery is damaged
5. Check other parts for failure. normal and must be disposed of,
perform the high voltage battery
6. Check the DTC code in the BMS ECU.
disposal process).
Fire in the high voltage 1. Perform visual inspections (deformation, High voltage battery appears Remove the service disconnect
battery mount corrosion, wire coating, odor, connector). damaged (heat, soot, etc.) plug and perform the salt water
2. Check for visible damage of the high battery disposal process.
e.g. fire in trunk voltage battery. High voltage battery insulation Remove the high voltage battery
3. Check the high voltage main relay for damaged and repair the coating/insulation.
signs of welding after shutting off the high High voltage DTC code If a DTC code occurs, perform
voltage if no visible damage is found in the battery not the repair process outlined in the
high voltage battery. damaged DTC diagnosis guide.
4. Measure the high voltage battery/chassis No DTC code and Do not replace the high voltage
insulation resistance. battery appears battery (if the battery is damaged
5. Check other parts for failure. normal and must be disposed of,
6. Check the DTC code in the BMS ECU. perform the high voltage battery
disposal process).

3) Collision
Classification Inspection process Inspection results Measures
Collision damage to 1. Perform visual inspections (deformation, High voltage battery insulation Remove the high voltage battery
areas other than the corrosion, wire coating, odor, connector). damaged and repair the coating/insulation.
high voltage battery 2. Check for main fuse open circuit after High voltage DTC code If a DTC code occurs, perform
mount shutting off the high voltage. battery not the repair process outlined in the
3. Check the high voltage main relay for damaged DTC diagnosis guide.
e.g. front/side collisions signs of melting. No DTC code and Do not replace the high voltage
4. Measure the high voltage battery/chassis battery appears battery (if the battery is damaged
insulation resistance. normal and must be disposed of,
5. Check other components. perform the high voltage battery
6. Check the DTC code in the BMS ECU. disposal process).
Collisions involving the 1. Perform visual inspections (deformation, High voltage battery insulation ⇑ Follow the measures outlined
high voltage battery corrosion, wire coating, odor, connector). damaged above.
mount 2. Check for main fuse open circuit after High voltage DTC code ※ If the high voltage battery
shutting off the high voltage. battery not No DTC code and mount is inaccessible due to
※Example) 3. Check the high voltage main relay for damaged battery appears trunk or door damage, bend or
Rear-end collision signs of melting. normal cut the exterior panels without
4. Measure the high voltage battery/chassis damaging the high voltage
insulation resistance. system and carry out the
inspection and repair process.
5. Check other components.
6. Check the DTC code in the BMS ECU.

4) Submersion
Classification Inspection process Inspection results Measures
High voltage battery not 1. Perform a visual inspection (deformation, High voltage battery insulation Remove the high voltage battery
submerged corrosion, wire coating, odor, connector). damaged and repair the coating/insulation.
2. Check for main fuse open circuit after High voltage DTC code If a DTC code occurs, perform
shutting off the high voltage. battery not the repair process outlined in the
3. Check the high voltage main relay for damaged DTC diagnosis guide.
signs of melting. No DTC code and Do not replace the high voltage
4. Measure the high voltage battery/chassis battery appears battery (if the battery is damaged
insulation resistance. normal and must be disposed of,
5. Check other components. perform the high voltage battery
disposal process).
6. Check the DTC code in the BMS ECU.
High voltage battery 1. Check for main fuse open circuit after Carry out these measures Remove the high voltage battery
submerged shutting off the high voltage. regardless of the inspection results and repair the coating/insulation.
[Regardless of water 2. Check the high voltage main relay for
conditions] signs of melting.
Page 11 sur 245

3. Measure the high voltage battery/chassis

insulation resistance.
4. Check the DTC code in the BMS ECU.

Main Fuse Inspection

When removing the battery pack assembly to inspect the battery system, it can be connected to vehicle by using the SST 0K918-E4100,
0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200. Before installing the battery system assembly, check if the battery is OK by using the SST.
Method 1
1. Remove the safety plug.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery Control System - "Safety Plug")
2. Measure the resistance of safety plug cable which is connected to main fuse.
Specification :Less than 1Ω (20°C)

Method 2
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the auxiliary battery negative (-) terminal.
2. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
3. Remove the high voltage battery upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Case")
4. Remove the upper fuse box (A).

5. Perform the electrical test of main fuse.

Specification :Less than 1Ω (20°C)
Page 12 sur 245

Checking for Welding in the High Voltage Main Relay

When removing the battery pack assembly to inspect the battery system, it can be connected to vehicle by using the SST 0K918-E4100,
0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200. Before installing the battery system assembly, check if the battery is OK by using the SST.
In order to safely remove the battery pack assembly, you must first inspect the high voltage main relay for signs of damage on welding.
You can use Global Diagnostic System (GDS) service data to detect weld damage in the high voltage main relay.

1. Connect the GDS to DLC.

2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Check the BMS weld damage state in the GDS service data.
Specification :NO
Page 13 sur 245

5. Check for damage on welding in the high voltage main relay.

Specification :∞Ω(20°C)
Page 14 sur 245

Insulation Resistance Inspection (With vehicle)

When removing the battery pack assembly to inspect the battery system, it can be connected to vehicle by using the SST 0K918-E4100,
0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200. Before installing the battery system assembly, check if the battery is OK by using the SST.
The insulation status between the vehicle and the battery pack assembly can be checked on GDS or by measuring the resistance.

1. Connect the GDS to DLC.

2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Inspect the insulation resistance in the GDS service data.
Specified value :300KΩ ~ 1000KΩ
Page 15 sur 245

For precise measuring, connect the negative (-) terminal to the parts not painted.

3. After connecting the positive (+) terminal to positive (+) terminal of the battery, measure the resistance as follows.
(1) Supply 500V voltage through mega ohm meter and then wait for about 1 minute to measure the stable resistance value.
(2) Check the resistance.
Specified value : More than 2MΩ (20°C)
Page 16 sur 245

4. After connecting the positive (+) terminal to negative (-) terminal of the battery, measure the resistance as follows.
(1) Supply 500V voltage through mega ohm meter and then wait for about 1 minute to measure the stable resistance value.
(2) Check the resistance.
Specified value : More than 2MΩ (20°C)

Insulation Resistance Inspection (With battery)

3. Remove the protect cover (A) of power relay assembly (PRA).

4. Connect the negative (-) terminal of mega ohm meter to lower case.

For precise measuring, connect the negative (-) terminal to the parts not painted.

5. Connect the positive (+) terminal to high voltage battery (+, -) terminals to measure the resistance.
(1) Connect the positive (+) terminal of mega ohm meter (A) to positive (+) terminal of PRA high voltage.
(2) Supply 500V voltage through mega ohm meter and then wait for about 1 minute to measure the stable resistance value.
(3) Check the reistance value.
Specified value : More than 2MΩ (20°C)
Page 18 sur 245

(1) Connect the positive (+) terminal of mega ohm meter (B) to negative (-) terminal of PRA high voltage.
(2) Supply 500V voltage through mega ohm meter and then wait for about 1 minute to measure the stable resistance value.
(3) Check the reistance value.
Specified value : More than 2MΩ (20°C)

(1) Connect the positive (+) terminal of mega ohm meter (A) to positive (+) terminal of PRA inverter power.
(2) Supply the 500V voltage through mega ohm meter and then wait about 1 minutes to measure the stable resistance value
(3) Check the reistance value.
Specified value : More than 2MΩ (20°C)
Page 19 sur 245

(1) Connect the positive (+) terminal of mega ohm meter (A) to positive (-) terminal of PRA inverter power.
(2) Supply 500V voltage through mega ohm meter and then wait for about 1 minute to measure the stable resistance value.
(3) Check the reistance value.
Specified value : More than 2MΩ (20°C)

Handling Guide for Storing, Transporting, and Disposing of High Voltage Battery Systems
1. High voltage battery system handling process
Page 20 sur 245

2. Defective high voltage battery system handling / Inspection

Classification Item Measures

Storage Remove the service disconnect and store the battery under the same conditions as a new battery.
Undamaged Battery Transport Minimize impacts and ensure the battery does not come in contact with other parts.
Disposal Transport the battery to the designated disposer
Damaged Common Inspection 1. Voltage check(using a digital multimeter)
battery method (1) Measure the voltage between the service disconnect plug upper (+) terminal and [High
voltage battery – PRA] connecting cable (-) terminal.
→ Specification:
(2) Measure the voltage between the service disconnect plug lower (-) terminal and [High voltage
battery – PRA] connecting cable (+) terminal.
→ Specification:
(3) Measure the voltage between the high voltage battery (+) cable terminal and high voltage
battery (-) cable terminal
→Specification:240 ~ 413 V
▶ Measures: If abnormal, submerge the battery in salt water immediately to prevent fire.
2. Temperature check(using a non-contact thermometer)
(1) Check the temperature of battery case.
Page 21 sur 245

(2) Check for temperature changes by measuring the temperature again after 30 minutes.
▶ Criteria: The change should be 3 °C or less and the temperature should be below 35 °C.
▶ Measures
A. If the temperature is higher than 35°C, place the battery in a cool, dry place and wait for the
battery temperature to return to 35°C.
B. If the temperature change is more than 3°C and it continues to rise, submerse the battery in
salt water immediately.
C. If the temperature continues to rise when measuring it at 30 minute intervals, submerse the
battery in salt water immediately.
3. Isolation resistance check(using a MΩ tester)
(1) Measure the isolation resistance between the power relay terminal (+) and the battery pack
cover.
(2) Measure the isolation resistance between the power relay terminal (-) and the battery pack
cover.
▶ Criteria: 2MΩ or less (at 500V)
▶ Measures: Insulate the battery using insulating materials.
(Refer to "Take insulation actions for parts that may short circuit.)
4. Take insulation actions for parts that may short circuit(Visual inspection)
(1) High voltage battery – PRA cable terminal
(2) BMS voltage sensing connector
▶ Insulation actions
A. Use the insulation tape or rubber cap to prevent short circuit to the battery pack, cells,
modules.
B. Fix the connector terminal to prevent wiring from moving.
5. Electrolyte leakage check
A. Check for odors within 30cm of the battery pack (electrolyte odors like chemicals or acryl).
▶ Measures: Submerse the battery in salt water immediately if a smell is detected.
Damaged Remove the service disconnect plug and store the battery under the same conditions as a new
Storage
battery battery.
check Transport Minimize impacts and ensure the battery does not come in contact with other parts.
results: Transport the battery to the designated disposer; discharge it by submerging it completely in salt
normal Disposal
water and carry out the disposal procedure.
Remove the service disconnect plug; insulate all exposed terminals; place the battery in a cool, dry
Damaged
place away from volatile or combustible substances; use insulating materials (insulation tape, rubber
battery
Damaged Storage caps, etc.) or vinyl to wrap the battery; use anti-shock materials inside the box.
battery ▶ Insulation action: Refer to "Take insulation actions for parts that may short circuit.
check ▶ Packing: Abnormal battery must be packed as same as a new battery.
results:
abnormal Transport Minimize impacts and ensure the battery does not come in contact with other parts.
Transport the battery to the designated disposer; discharge it by submerging it completely in salt
Disposal
water and carry out the disposal procedure.

Voltage Check

Be sure to read and follow the “General Safety Information and Caution” before doing any work related with the high voltage system.
Failure to follow the safety instructions may result in serious electrical injuries.
1. Measure the voltage between the service disconnect plug upper (+) terminal and [High voltage battery –PRA] connecting cable (-) terminal.
Specification: 120 ~ 207 V
2. Measure the voltage between the service disconnect plug lower (-) terminal and [High voltage battery –PRA] connecting cable (+) terminal.
Specification: 120 ~ 207 V
Page 22 sur 245

3. Install the safety plug.

4. Measure the voltage between the high voltage battery (+) terminal and (-) terminal.
Specification: 240 ~ 413 V
Page 23 sur 245

Take insulation actions for parts that may short circuit

1. High voltage battery – PRA cable terminal
Page 24 sur 245

A. Wrap insulation tape or rubber cap around (+), (-) cable terminals to prevent short circuit of the battery pack.
B. Secure the cable to the battery pack case with the insulation tape to prevent cables from moving.
2. BMS voltage sensing connector

▶ Insulation actions
A. Wrap insulation tape or rubber cap around connectors to prevent short circuit of the battery cells and modules.
B. Secure the wiring to the battery pack case with the insulation tape to prevent wiring from moving.
Discharging high voltage batteries

High voltage batteries can cause electric shock or other injuries. If the following symptoms are detected in a high voltage battery, discharge it
as soon as possible by submerging it in salt water.
- There are traces of fire or smoke.
- The voltage of the battery is abnormally high (413 V or higher).
- The temperature of the high voltage battery continues to rises abnormally.
- It smells like chemicals or acrylic, a possible sign of electrolyte leakage.
[Discharging a battery by submersing it in salt water]
1. Pour about 53 gallons (200 liters) of water into a plastic container (e.g. poly propylene) that can submerge the whole battery.
2. Add 238 pounds (108kg) of salt to the water. Stir until salt dissolves into the solution.
Page 25 sur 245

[The amount of salt] = 0.538 * [The amount of water that a battery can be fully immersed]
3. Use a lift jack to submerge the high voltage battery in the salt water.
4. Leave the battery in the salt water for 12 hours before taking it out and drying it thoroughly.

The battery should be dried in a ventilated shade to avoid direct sunlight, snow and rain.

Put only one high voltage battery in a single salt water tank.
If you discharge more than one battery, put in the battery after discharging the previous battery completely to ensure safety.
If not, unexpected accidents such as burns may occur by exothermic reaction.
EV Battery System

Specification
High Voltage Shut-off Procedures
▷ Specification
Item Specification Remark
Capacitor Voltage between the inverter
Less than 30V Checkable by multi tester
terminals

High Voltage Battery Handling Guide

▷ Specification
Item Specification Remark
Safety Plug Cable Resistance (Ω) Less than 1Ω (20°C) Checkable by multi tester
Main Fuse Resistance (Ω) Less than 1Ω (20°C) Checkable by multi tester
Checking for Welding in the High voltage
NO Checkable by GDS
Main Relay
Checking for welding in the High Voltage ∞Ω(20°C) Checkable by multi tester
Main Relay
Insulation Resistance Inspection (MΩ) 300 ~ 1000 Checkable by GDS
Insulation Resistance Inspection (MΩ) More than 2MΩ (20°C) Mega Ohm tester
Check the High Voltage Battery Voltage
(V)
120 ~ 207 Checkable by multi tester
[No. 1 Module ~ No. 4 Module or No.5
Module ~ No.8 Module]
Page 26 sur 245

Check the High Voltage Battery Voltage 240 ~ 413 Checkable by multi tester
(V)
[No. 1 Module ~ No. 8 Module]

High Voltage Battery System

Item Specification Note

Cell 96 -
Rated Voltage (V) 360 -
Capacity (Ah) 75 -
Energy (KWh) 27 -
Weight (kg) 203 -
Cooling System Air-cooled Forced air cooled

Item Specification Note

SOC (%) 5 ~ 95
Cell Voltage (V) 2.5 ~ 4.3
Pack Voltage (V) 240 ~ 413 Checkable by GDS
Voltage difference between cells (mV) Less than 40
Insulation resistance (KΩ) 300 ~ 1000
Insulation resistance (MΩ) More than 2 Mega Ohm tester

High Voltage Battery Control System

BMS ECU
▷ Specification
Item Specification Remark
C-CAN terminating resistance (Ω) About 60 Combined resistance (BMS ECU↔Inverter)
C-CAN terminating resistnace (Ω) About 120 BMS ECU resistance

Main Relay
▷ Specification
Item Specification
Rated Voltage (V) 450
ON Rated Ampere (A) 200
Voltage Drop (V) Less than 0.1 (200A)
Operation Voltage (V) 12
Coil
Resistance (Ω) 21.6 ~ 26.4 (20°C)

Item Specification Note

Main Relay Fixing Status NO Checkable by GDS
Main Relay Switch (-) Resistance (Ω) ∞ Checkable by multi tester
Main Relay Operation Beep "Clicking" Checkable by GDS and SST
Coil Resistance (Ω) 21.6 ~ 26.4 (20°C) Checkable by multi tester

Pre-Charge Relay
▷ Specification
Item Specification
Rated Voltage(V) 450
ON Rated Ampere(A) 10
Voltage Drop(V) Less than 0.5 (10A)
Operation Voltage(V) 12
Coil
Resistance(Ω) 104.4 ~ 127.6 (20°C)

Item Specification Remark

Main Relay Switch (-) Resistance (Ω) ∞ Checkable by multi tester
Pre Charger Relay Operation Sound "Clicking" Checkable by GDS and SST
Page 27 sur 245

Pre Charger Relay Coil Resistance (Ω) 104.4 ~ 127.6 (20°C) Checkable by multi tester

PRE-Charge Resistor
▷ Specification
Item Specification
Capacity (W) 60
Coil
Resistance (Ω) 30

Battery Current Sensor

▷ Specification
Current (A) Ouput Voltage (V)
-400(Charge) 0.5
-200 (Charge) 1.5
0 2.5
200 (Discharge) 3.5
+400 (Discharge) 4.5

Item Specifications Remark

Current Sensor Ouput Voltage (V) About 2.5 ± 0.1 Checkable by multi tester
Current Sensor Power Voltage (V) About 5 ± 0.1 Checkable by multi tester

Main Fuse
▷ Specification
Item Specification
Rated Voltage (V) 450 (DC)
Rated Current (A) 250 (DC)

Item Specification Remark

Safety Plug Cable Resistance (Ω) Less than 1 (20°C) Checkable by multi tester
Main Fuse Resistance (Ω) Less than 1 (20°C) Checkable by multi tester

Battery Temperature Sensor

▷ Specification
Temperature (°C) Resitance (KΩ) Tolerance (%)
-40 204.5 ±4.0
-30 117.8 ±3.5
- 20 70.34 ±3.0
- 10 43.43 ±2.5
0 27.63 ±2.0
10 18.07 ±1.6
20 12.11 ±1.2
30 8.303 ±1.2
40 5.813 ±1.5
50 4.149 ±1.9
60 3.013 ±2.2
70 2.225 ±2.5

Runaway Arresting Device (RAD)

▷ Specification
Item Specification Remark
RAD Combined Resistance (Ω) Less than 3 (20°C) Checkable by multi tester
RAD Terminal Resistance (Ω) Less than 0.375 (20°C) Checkable by multi tester
RAD Switch Position Bottom RAD switch and visual inspection

High Voltage Battery Heater

▷ Specification
Page 28 sur 245

[14 Cell LH/ RH]

Item Specification
Resistance (Ω) 26 ~ 29

[10 Cell LH/ RH]

Item Specification
Resistance (Ω) 16 ~ 18

High Voltage Battery Heater Relay

▷ Specification
Item Specification
Rated Voltage (V) 450
ON Rated Current (A) 10
Voltage Drop (V) Less than 0.5 (200A)
Operation Voltage (V) 12
Coil
Resistance (Ω) 104.4 ~ 127.6 (20°C)

Item Specification Remark

Heater Relay Switch Resistance (Ω) ∞ Checkable by multi tester
Heater Relay Operation Sound "Tik", "Tok" Checkable by GDS and SST
Heater Relay Coil Resistance (Ω) 104.4 ~ 127.6 (20°C) Checkable by multi tester

High Voltage Battery Heater Fuse

▷ Specification
Item Specification
Current (A) 10

High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor

▷ Specification
Temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ) Tolerance (%)
-40 204.5 ±4.0
-30 117.8 ±3.5
- 20 70.34 ±3.0
- 10 43.43 ±2.5
0 27.63 ±2.0
10 18.07 ±1.6
20 12.11 ±1.2
30 8.303 ±1.2
40 5.813 ±1.5
50 4.149 ±1.9
60 3.013 ±2.2
70 2.225 ±2.5

High Voltage Battery Cooling System

Cooling Fan
▷ Specification
Duty(%) Fan Speed(rpm)
0 0 0
1 10 900
2 20 1200
3 30 1500
4 40 1800
5 50 2100
6 60 2450
7 70 2600
Page 29 sur 245

8 80 2800
9 90 3000

Inlet Temperature Sensor

High Voltage Charging System

ON-Board Charger (OBC)
▷ Specification
Maximum Output 6.6kW
Ouput Density 0.52kVA/ℓ
Size 327 X 367 X 105 mm
ICCB About 1.4kW
EVSE 6.6kW

▷ Specification
100kW DC 500V, 200A
50kW DC 450V, 110A

Tightening Torques
High Voltage Shut-off Procedures

Item N.m kgf.m lb-ft

Safety plug service cover mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7

High Voltage Battery System

Item N.m kgf.m lb-ft

Ground cable mounting bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
High voltage battery system assembly mounting bolt 55.0 ~ 82.4 5.6 ~ 8.4 40.5 ~ 60.8
Safety plug cable assembly bracket mounting bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
High voltage battery pack upper case mounting bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Battery module outlet duct mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Battery rear mounting bracket mounting bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
High voltage positive (+) power cable mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
High voltage negative (-) power cable mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Inverter busbar mounting bolt/nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Power relay assembly mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
BMS ECU mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Safety plug cable assembly mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
BMS extension wiring mounting bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Ground bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
High voltage connector mounting bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Page 30 sur 245

High voltage battery pack assembly mounting bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Safety plug cable assembly bracket mounting bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7

High Voltage Battery Control System

Item N.m kgf.m lb-ft

High voltage power (+)(-)cable mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Safety plug cable assembly bracket mounting bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
High voltage battery pack upper case mounting bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
BMS ECU mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Safety plug service cover mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Safety plug cable assembly bracket mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7

High Voltage Battery Cooling System

Item N.m kgf.m lb-ft

Protector outlet duct panel mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Outlet cooling duct mounting bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Cooling fan mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Battery module outlet duct mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7

High Voltage Charging System

Item N.m kgf.m lb-ft

OBC mounting bolt 9.8 ~ 11.8 1.0 ~ 1.2 7.2 ~ 8.7
Normal charge port mounting bolt 10.8 ~ 13.7 1.1 ~ 1.4 8.0 ~ 10.1
Rapid charge port mounting bolt 10.8 ~ 13.7 1.1 ~ 1.4 8.0 ~ 10.1

High Voltage Distributing System

Item N.m kgf.m lb-ft

High voltage joint box mounting bolt 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Under cover mounting bolt/ nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Protector bracket mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7
Cable protect mounting nut 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7

EV Battery System

Components Location
Page 31 sur 245

1. High Voltage Battery System Assembly 4. High Voltage Joint Box

2. Electronic Power Control Unit (EPCU) 5. High Voltage Cable
[LDC+Inverter+VCU] 6. Motor Assembly
3. ON-Board Charger (OBC) 7. Reduction

EV Battery System

Description and Operation

Electric vehicle is powered by transforming electric energy into kinetic energy in the motor and high voltage battery. It can be recharged by
high voltage energy via IBC or OBC. Electric motor not only has the role of driving the vehicle but also acts as an alternator to generate
electric energy used to recharge the high voltage battery by regenerative braking. Operation principles among modules are as detailed below.
Page 32 sur 245

High Voltage Electricity Flow Diagram

[Start/ Acceleration/ Uphill Take-off]
Page 33 sur 245

Electric energy stored in high voltage battery pack assembly is used to generate drive force from the drive motor. Electric energy is
transformed into kinetic energy and drive force is transferred to the wheels.

[Deceleration (Regenerative Braking)]

Page 34 sur 245

- Drive motor is used as an alternator and uses the kinetic energy generated during deceleration to recharge electric energy in the high
voltage battery pack assembly.
- Activate: When the vehicle speed is over 10 km/h
- Not Activate: When the vehicle speed is less than 3 km/h

[Rapid Charge]
Page 35 sur 245

- Charge power : 500V, 200A

- Charge Type : Direct Current (DC)
- Charge time: Approx. 25 min.
- Charge Flow Diagram : Rapid Charge Stand -> High Voltage Battery System Assembly
- Charge Volume: 80% of High Voltage Battery's SOC

[Nomal Charge]
Page 36 sur 245

- Charge power: 220V, 35A

- Charge Type : Alternating Current (AC)
- Charge time: Approx. 5 hr.
- Charge Flow Diagram : Normal Charge Stand -> ON-Board Charger (OBC) -> High Voltage Battery System Assembly
- Charge Volume : 95 % of High Voltage Battery's SOC

[Indicator]
Page 37 sur 245

Signal Operation
NO RefSymbol Name Description Color Illumination Control unit
Input power
Request ON when vehicle is
ready for driving.
Ready lamp
1 Green LED CAN VCU IGN1

Request to turn ON indication

Lamp when charging is
Charge complete.
2 Green LED CAN BMS IGN3
Lamp

Request to turn ON indication

Lamp when charging is in
Charge progress.
3 Red LED CAN BMS IGN3
Lamp

In case of fault as indicated

below, vehicle power output is
limited, and Lamp ON is
requested.
Power Down - Overheating, or low SOC
4 Yellow LED CAN VCU IGN1
Lamp
- Overheating and system error
- If vehicle speed is limited due
to ABS or brake system failure.
- Cooling system failure
- Request ON in case of VCU, VCU
MCU, BMS, LDC, FATC, or MCU
OBC failure is detected. BMS IGN1
Service - Turns ON at Start and then
5 Yellow LED CAN LDC
Lamp OFF after 3 seconds.
FATC
IG1 &
OBC
IGN3
6 Yellow LED CAN BMS IGN1
Page 38 sur 245

LOW Battery Request Lamp ON when high

Lamp voltage battery SOC is low.

In case of 12V auxiliary battery

Auxiliary 12V discharged, recharge device
Battery failure, or recharge system
7 Red LED CAN LDC IGN1
Charge failure.
Lamp Warning Lamp ON Request

RES Lamp Request ON in case of

(RBS: regenerative brake failure.
8 Regenerative Yellow LED CAN EBS IGN1
Braking
System)

EV Battery System

System Diagram
Page 39 sur 245

OBC: ON-Board Charger

QRA: Quick Charge Relay Assembly
PRA: Power Relay Assembly
EWP: Electronic Water Pump
EPCU: Electronic Power Control Unit [LDC + Inverter + VCU]
EV Battery System

Special Service Tools

Tool Name / Number Illustration Description
High Voltage Cable Used for measuring the high voltage battery system
0K918-E4100

BMS Check Connector (21pin) Used for measuring the high voltage battery system
0K375-E4100

BMS Check Connector (8pin) Used for measuring the high voltage battery system
0K375-E4200

Insulated tool set Used for measuring or work to high voltage parts
0K375-4U000 -22EA components (Include case)

HV Battery assembly lifting fixture Removing and installing battery pack assembly
0K375-E4300
Page 40 sur 245

No. Tool Name Tool Number

1 Insulated Flat Head Screwdriver-6" 0K375-4U100
2 Insulated Phillips Screwdriver-6" 0K375-4U110
3 Insulated Flat Head Screwdriver-4" 0K375-4U120
4 Insulated Phillips Screwdriver-4" 0K375-4U130
5 Insulated Spanner-8mm 0K375-4U140
6 Insulated Spanner-10mm 0K375-4U150
7 Insulated Spanner-12mm 0K375-4U160
8 Insulated Spanner-12mm 0K375-4U170
9 Insulated Spanner-17mm 0K375-4U180
10 Insulated Ratchet Wrench-3/8" 0K375-4U190
11 Insulated Ratchet Wrench-3/8" 0K375-4U200
12 Insulated Socket Extension Bar-3/8" 0K375-4U210
13 Insulated Socket-8mm 0K375-4U220
14 Insulated Socket-10mm 0K375-4U230
15 Insulated Socket-12mm 0K375-4U240
16 Insulated Socket-14mm 0K375-4U250
17 Insulated Socket-17mm 0K375-4U260
18 Insulated Socket-19mm 0K375-4U270
19 Insulated Nippers-6" 0K375-4U280
20 Insulated Pliers-8" 0K375-4U290
21 Insulated Cutter 0K375-4U300
22 Insulated Tool Box 0K375-4U310

Personal Protective Equipment

Page 41 sur 245

Name Illustration Description

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation gloves components
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]

Insulation shoes

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation clothes
components

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses

Used in the following cases :

• When removing, installing or inspecting the high voltage
battery terminals or wiring where spark may happen.
• When working on high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

Any removed high voltage components are placed on the

Insulation mat
insulation mat to prevent safety accidents.

Insulation sheet is used to cover high voltage components to

Insulation sheet protect people not wearing personal protective equipment from
safety accidents.

Warning tape Used to inform danger above this line.

Page 42 sur 245

Commercial Tool

Tool Name Illustration Description

Battery lift table Removing and installing battery pack assembly

pack weight: 277 kg

pack size: 1647mm x 996mm x 261mm

Multi tester Measuring resistance, voltage, and resistance

Insulation resistance tester(Multi tester) Measuring insulation resistance, voltage, and

resistance

Crane jack Removing and installing battery pack assembly

pack weight: 277 kg

pack size: 1647mm x 996mm x 261mm

EV Battery System

Basic Troubleshooting
Basic Inspection Procedure
Measuring Condition of Electronic Parts' Resistance
The measured resistance at high temperature after vehicle running may be high or low. So all resistance must be measured at ambient
temperature (20°C, 68°F), unless stated otherwise.

The measured resistance to temperature other than ambient temperature (20°C, 68°F) is for reference only.
Intermittent Problem Inspection Procedure
Sometimes the most difficult case in troubleshooting is when a problem symptom occurs but does not occur again during testing. An example
would be if a problem appears only when the vehicle is cold but has not appeared when warm. In this case, the technician should thoroughly
make out a "Customer Problem Analysis Sheet" and recreate (simulate) the environment and condition which occurred when the vehicle was
having the issue.
1. Clear Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
2. Inspect connector connection, and check terminal for poor connections, loose wires, bent, broken or corroded pins, and then verify that the
connectors are always securely fastened.
Page 43 sur 245

3. Slightly shake the connector and wiring harness vertically and horizontally.
4. Repair or replace the component that has a problem.
5. Verify that the problem has disappeared with the road test.
● Simulating Vibration
1) Sensors and Actuators
: Slightly vibrate sensors, actuators or relays with finger.

Strong vibration may break sensors, actuators or relays

2) Connectors and Harness
: Lightly shake the connector and wiring harness vertically and then horizontally.
● Simulating Heat
1) Heat components suspected of causing the malfunction with a hair dryer or other heat source.

• DO NOT heat components to the point where they may be damaged.

• DO NOT heat the ECM directly.
● Simulating Water Sprinkling
1) Sprinkle water onto vehicle to simulate a rainy day or a high humidity condition.

DO NOT sprinkle water directly into the engine compartment or electronic components.
● Simulating Electrical Load
1) Turn on all electrical systems to simulate excessive electrical loads (Radios, fans, lights, rear window defogger, etc.).

Connector Inspection Procedure

1. Handling of Connector
A. Never pull on the wiring harness when disconnecting connectors.
Page 44 sur 245

B. When removing the connector with a lock, press or pull locking lever.

C. Listen for a click when locking connectors. This sound indicates that they are securely locked.

D. When a tester is used to check for continuity, or to measure voltage, always insert tester probe from wire harness side.

E. Check waterproof connector terminals from the connector side. Waterproof connectors cannot be accessed from harness side.

• Use a fine wire to prevent damage to the terminal.

• Do not damage the terminal when inserting the tester lead.
2. Checking Point for Connector
A. While the connector is connected:
Page 45 sur 245

Hold the connector, check connecting condition and locking efficiency.

B. When the connector is disconnected:
Check for missed terminal, crimped terminal or broken core wire by slightly pulling the wire harness.
Visually check for rust, contamination, deformation and bend.
C. Check terminal tightening condition:
Insert a spare male terminal into a female terminal, and then check terminal tightening conditions.
D. Pull lightly on individual wires to ensure that each wire is secured in the terminal.

3. Repair Method of Connector Terminal

A. Clean the contact points using air gun and/or shop rag.

Never use sand paper when polishing the contact points, otherwise the contact point may be damaged.
B. In case of abnormal contact pressure, replace the female terminal.

Wire Harness Inspection Procedure

1. Before removing the wire harness, check the wire harness position and crimping in order to restore it correctly.
2. Check whether the wire harness is twisted, pulled or loosened.
3. Check whether the temperature of the wire harness is abnormally high.
4. Check whether the wire harness is rotating, moving or vibrating against the sharp edge of a part.
5. Check the connection between the wire harness and any installed part.
6. If the covering of wire harness is damaged; secure, repair or replace the harness.

Electrical Circuit Inspection Procedure

● Check Open Circuit
1. Procedures for Open Circuit
A. Continuity Check
B. Voltage Check
If an open circuit occurs (as seen in [FIG. 1]), it can be found by performing Step 2 (Continuity Check Method) or Step 3 (Voltage Check
Method) as shown below.

2. Continuity Check Method

When measuring the resistance, lightly shake the wire harness up and down or left to right.
Specification (Resistance)
1Ω or less → Normal Circuit
Page 46 sur 245

1MΩ or Higher → Open Circuit

A. Disconnect connectors (A), (C) and measure resistance between connectors (A) and (C) as shown in [FIG. 2].
In [FIG.2.] the measured resistance of lines 1 and 2 is higher than 1MΩ and below 1 Ω respectively. Specifically, the open circuit is line
1 (Line 2 is normal). To find the exact break point, check sub line of line 1 as described in the following step.

B. Disconnect connector (B), and measure the resistance between connectors (C) and (B1) and between (B2) and (A) as shown in [FIG.
3].
In this case the measured resistance between connectors (C) and (B1) is higher than 1MΩ and the open circuit is located between
terminal 1 of connector (C) and terminal 1 of connector (B1).

3. Voltage Check Method

A. With each connector still connected, measure the voltage between the chassis ground and terminal 1 of each connectors (A), (B) and
(C) as shown in [FIG. 4].
The measured voltages of each connector are 5V, 5V and 0V respectively. So the open circuit is located between connectors (C) and
(B).

● Check Short Circuit

1. Test Method for Short to Ground Circuit
A. Continuity Check with Chassis Ground
If short to ground circuit occurs as shown in [FIG. 5], the broken point can be found by performing Step 2 (Continuity Check Method with
Chassis Ground) as shown below.
Page 47 sur 245

2. Continuity Check Method (with Chassis Ground)

Lightly shake the wire harness up and down or left to right when measuring the resistance.
Specification (Resistance)
1Ω or less → Short to Ground Circuit
1MΩ or Higher → Normal Circuit
A. Disconnect connectors (A), (C) and measure the resistance between connector (A) and Chassis Ground as shown in [FIG. 6].
The measured resistance of line 1 and 2 in this example is below 1 Ω and higher than 1MΩ respectively. Specifically, the short to
ground circuit is line 1 (Line 2 is normal). To find exact broken point, check the sub line of line 1 as described in the following step.

B. Disconnect connector (B), and measure the resistance between connector (A) and chassis ground, and between (B1) and chassis
ground as shown in [FIG. 7].
The measured resistance between connector (B1) and chassis ground is 1Ω or less. The short to ground circuit is between terminal 1
of connector (C) and terminal 1 of connector (B1).

● Testing For Voltage Drop

This test checks for voltage drop along a wire or through a connection or a switch.
1) Connect the positive lead of a voltmeter to the end of the wire (or to the side of the connector or switch) closest to the battery.
2) Connect the negative lead to the other end of the wire. (or the other side of the connector or switch)
3) Operate the circuit.
4) The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. A difference, or drop of more than 0.1 volts (50mV in 5V circuits),
may indicate a problem. Check the circuit for loose or dirty connections.
Page 48 sur 245

EV Battery System

Components
High Voltage Battery System Assembly

1. High Voltage Battery System Assembly 4. Case

2. High Voltage Battery Pack Assembly 5. QRA (Quick Charge Relay Assembly)
3. PRA (Power Relay Assembly)
Page 49 sur 245

EV Battery System

Description
High Voltage Battery System Assembly
- To provide the 360V high voltage electric energy to electric motor
- To save the electric energy generated by regenerative braking system
- Charged by rapid charge or normal charge

High Voltage Battery Pack Assembly

Type : Lithium Ion Polymer

Cell : Minimum unit which saves the electric energy converted from the chemical energy
Module : A number of cells in series
Pack : A number of modules in series
EV Battery System

System Diagram
High Voltage Battery System Assembly
Page 50 sur 245

System Circuit Diagram

Page 51 sur 245

EV Battery System

Inspection

When removing the battery pack assembly to inspect the battery system, it can be connected to vehicle by using the SST 0K918-E4100,
0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200.
[Battery Pack Assembly Inspection]

Specification Method Countermeasure

Disconnection - Visual check -
Rust
Page 52 sur 245

Discolor
Installation status
Leak
DTC about BMS ECU Refer to DTC guide Refer to DTC guide Refer to DTC guide
Check the "Current Data" by Refer to "SOC level and the countermeasure
SOC 5% ~ 95%
GDS
Cell 2.5 ~ 4.3 V
Pack 240 ~ 413 V Check the "Current Data" by Check the battery voltage sensing circuit (Refer to
Voltage
Difference GDS "Battery voltage sensing circuit")
less than 40mV
between cells
Check the "Current Data" by
300KΩ ~ 1000KΩ
GDS
Insulation resistance Refer to "Insulation resistance circuit"
more than 2MΩ Using mega ohm tester
more than 2MΩ Using mega ohm tester

SOC (State Of Charge) - The percentage of battery charging status

[Visual Inspection]
Item - Electric System, Cooling System, High Voltage Battery Pack Assembly
Problem - Disconnection, Rust, Component status, Oil leak
[SOC Inspection ]
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Connect the GDS to DLC.
3. Turn the ignition ON.
4. Check the SOC in the GDS service data.
SOC: 5 ~ 95 %

[Battery Voltage Inspection]

1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Connect the GDS to DLC.
Page 53 sur 245

3. Turn the ignition ON.

4. Check the Cell Voltage and the Pack Voltage in the GDS service data.
Cell Voltage : 2.5 ~ 4.3 V
Pack Voltage: 240 ~ 413 V
Voltage gap between cells : Less than 40 mV

[Voltage sensing circuit Inspection]

1. Remove the high voltage battery pack assembly.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Battery Pack Assembly")
2. Remove the wiring harness of the voltage & temperature sensor.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Repair procedures - Disassembly - "Wiring harness of the voltage & temperature sensor")
3. Perform the current test of battery module and the BMS ECU connector.
Specified value :Less than 1Ω (20°C)

4. Install the BMS ECU to lower case.

5. Install the wiring harness of voltage & temperature sensor to BMS ECU.
6. Measure the insulation resistance between the battery module harness and the lower case.
Specifed value :More than 1MΩ (20°C)
Page 54 sur 245

[Insulation Resistance Inspection (With vehicle)]

The insulation status between the vehicle and the battery pack assembly can be checked by GDS or measuring the resistance.
[GDS - Service data]
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect the GDS to DLC.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Inspect the insulation resistance in the GDS service data.
Specified value :300kΩ ~ 1000kΩ

[By using the Mega Ohm Tester]

1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shout-off Procedure")
2. Connect the negative (-) terminal of mega ohm meter (A) to ground of the vehicle.

For precise measuring, connect the negative (-) terminal to the parts not painted.
Page 55 sur 245

3. After connecting the positive (+) terminal to positive (+) terminal of the battery, measure the resistance as follows.
[Insulation resistance of positive (+) terminal of the battery pack assembly
(1) Supply 500V voltage through mega ohm meter and then wait for about 1 minute to measure the stable resistance value.
(2) Check the resistance.
Specified value : More than 2MΩ (20°C)

4. After connecting the positive (+) terminal to negative (-) terminal of the battery, measure the resistance as follows.
[Insulation resistance of negative (-) terminal of the battery pack assembly]
(1) Supply 500V voltage through mega ohm meter and then wait for about 1 minute to measure the stable resistance value.
(2) Check the resistance.
Specified value : More thanSpecified value : More than 2MΩ (20°C)
Page 56 sur 245

[Insulation Resistance Inspection (With battery)]

[By using the Mega Ohm Tester]
1. Remove the high voltage battery pack assembly.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Battery Pack Assembly")
2. Remove the upper case of high voltage battery pack assembly.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Case")
3. Remove the protect cover (A) of power relay assembly (PRA).

4. Connect the negative (-) terminal of mega ohm meter to lower case.

For precise measuring, connect the negative (-) terminal to the parts not painted.

5. Connect the positive (+) terminal to high voltage battery terminals to measure the resistance.
[Insulation resistance of positve (+) terminal of PRA high voltage]
(1) Connect the positive (+) terminal of mega ohm meter (A) to positive (+) terminal of PRA high voltage.
(2) Supply 500V voltage through mega ohm meter and then wait for about 1 minute to measure the stable resistance value.
(3) Check the reistance value.
Specified value : More than 2MΩ (20°C)
Page 57 sur 245

[Insulation resistance of negative (-) terminal of PRA high voltage]

[Insulation resistance of positive (+) terminal of PRA inverter power]

(1) Connect the positive (+) terminal of mega ohm meter (A) to positive (+) terminal of PRA inverter power.
(2) Supply 500V voltage through mega ohm meter and then wait for about 1 minute to measure the stable resistance value.
(3) Check the reistance value.
Page 58 sur 245

Specified value : More than 2MΩ (20°C)

[Insulation resistance of positive (-) terminal of PRA inverter power]

EV Battery System
Page 59 sur 245

Removal

5. After loosening the nut, remove the high voltage rear under cover (A).

6. Disconnect the BMS connector (A).

7. Disconnect the high voltage cable (A).

Page 60 sur 245

8. Disconnect the ground cable (B) by loosening the mounting bolt (A).
Ground cable mounting bolt:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

9. Support the high voltage battery pack assembly with the jack (A).

• Securely support the battery pack assembly with a jack to prevent any accidents.
• Confirm that high voltage cable & connectors are completely removed before removing the battery pack assembly.
• Place rubber on the jack to protect the lower part of the battery pack and the stud bolts used to tighten the under cover.

10. Loosen the high voltage battery system assembly mounting bolt (A).
High voltage battery system assembly mounting bolt:54.9 ~ 82.4 N.m (5.6 ~ 8.4 kgf.m, 40.5 ~ 60.8 lb-ft)
[Front]
Page 61 sur 245

[Right]

[Left]

[Back]

11. Remove the high voltage battery system assembly (A) from the vehicle.
Page 62 sur 245

Disassembly

[Left]

3. Remove the safety plug cable assembly bracket mounting bolt (A).
Safety plug cable assembly bracket mounting bolt:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 63 sur 245

4. After loosening the mounting bolt, remove the upper case (A).
High voltage battery pack upper case mounting bolt:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

5. Remove the waterproof gasket (A).

Page 64 sur 245

6. Disconnect the RAD wiring connector (A).

[Right]

[Back]
Page 65 sur 245

[Left]

7. After loosening the mounting nut, remove the battery module outlet duct (A).
Battery module outlet duct mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

8. After loosening the mounting bolt, remove the bracket (A).

Battery rear mounting bracket mounting bolt:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

9. Remove the high voltage power cable cover (A).

Page 66 sur 245

10. After loosening the mounting nut (A), remove the high voltage positive (+) power cable (B)
High voltage positive (+) power cable mounting nut:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

11. After loosening the mounting nut (A), remove the high voltage negative (-) power cable (B).
High voltage negative (-) power cable mounting nut:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

12. Remove the inverter busbar cover (A).

13. Remove the inverter busbar (A).

Inverter busbar mounting bolt/nut:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 67 sur 245

14. Disconnect the high voltage battery heater system control positive (+) power and the ground connetor (A). [With high voltage battery
heater system]

15. Dsiconnect the power relay assembly connector (A).

16. After loosening the mounting nut, remove the power relay assembly (A).
Power relay assembly mounting nut:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

17. Disconnect the BMS ECU connector (A).

Page 68 sur 245

18. After loosening the mounting nut, remove the BMS ECU (A).
BMS ECU mounting nut:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

19. Disconnect the safety plug interlock connector (A).

20. After loosening the mounting nut (A), remove the safety plug cable assembly (B).
Safety plug cable assembly mounting nut:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

21. Loosen the BMS extension wiring mounting bolt (A).

BMS extension wiring mounting bolt:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 69 sur 245

22. After loosening the ground bolt (A), remove the BMS extension wiring (B).
Ground bolt:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

23. After disconnecting the interlock switch connector (A) and loosening the mounting bolt (B), remove the high voltage connector (C).
High voltage connector mounting bolt:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

24. Remove the high voltage battery pack assembly.

(1) Remove the high voltage battery pack assembly mounting bolt.
High voltage battery pack assembly mounting bolt :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
(2) Install the SST No. 0K375-E4300 (A) in battery pack assembly as shown in the image below.
Page 70 sur 245

Be sure to screw the eye bolts to the holes firmly not to allow the bolts to be loosened while lifting the battery pack assembly
using a crane jack.

(3) Install the SST No. OK375-E4300 (A) to crane jack.

(4) Install the SST No. OK375-E4300 & crane jack (A).

• Make sure that the hanger hooks and the eye bolts aligns.
• Adjust the hanger main frame to fit the size of the battery pack assembly.

(5) Remove the high voltage battery pack assembly (A).

Make sure that the battery pack assembly is balanced.

Page 71 sur 245

The battery pack assembly is divided into LH / RH battery pack so be sure to remove the battery one by one. The order of removal
is not important.

25. After loosening the harness mounting screw, remove the voltage & temperature sensor wiring harness (A) from the battery pack
assembly.
[LH]

[RH]
Page 72 sur 245

A/S unit
BMS ECU
Refer to High Voltage Battery Control System - "BMS ECU"

High Voltage Battery Pack Assembly

Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Battery Pack Assembly"

Power Relay Assembly (PRA)

Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Power Relay"

Inverter Busbar
Page 73 sur 245

1. Remove the high voltage battery upper case.

(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Case")
2. Remove the inverter busbar cover (A).

3. Remove the inverter busbar (A).

Inverter busbar mounting bolt/nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

BMS Wiring Harness

1. Remove the BMS ECU
(Refer to High Voltage Battery Control System - "BMS ECU")
2. Remove the power relay assembly (PRA).
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Power Relay Assembly")
3. Loosen the BMS extension wiring mounting bolt (A).
BMS extension wiring mounting bolt :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. After loosening the mounting bolt (A), remove the BMS extension wiring (B).
Ground bolt :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 74 sur 245

Safety Plug Cable

Refer to High Voltage Battery Control System - Safety Plug - "Safety Plug Cable"

Front Case Left Panel

1. Remove the power relay assembly (PRA).
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Power Relay Assembly")
2. Remove the front case left panel.
Page 75 sur 245

Safety Plug Bracket

1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
2. After loosening the mounting bolt (A), remove the safety plug bracket (B).

High Voltage Connector Assembly

1. Remove the high voltage battery upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Case - "Upper Case")
2. After disconnecting the interlock switch connector (A) and loosening the mounting bolt (B), remove the high voltage connector (C).
High voltage connector mounting bolt :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 76 sur 245

Battery Rear Mounting Bracket

1. Remove the high voltage battery upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Case - "Upper Case")
2. After loosening the mounting nut, remove the battery module outlet duct (A).
Battery module outlet duct mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

3. After loosening the mounting bolt (A), remove the bracket (B).
Battery rear mounting bracket bolt :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

Watertight Rainforcement Bracket

1. Remove the high voltage battery system assembly.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Repair procedures - "Removal")
Page 77 sur 245

2. After loosening the mounting bolt & nut, remove the watertight rainforcement bracket (A).

High Voltage Battery System Rear Mounting Bracket

1. Lift the vehicle.
2. Loosen the high voltage battery system rear mounting bracket bolt (A).
High voltage battery system rear mounting bracket bolt :54.9 ~ 82.4 N.m (5.6 ~ 8.4 kgf.m, 40.5 ~ 60.8 lb-ft)

3. Loosen the rear mounting bolt (A).

High voltage battery system rear mounting bracket bolt :54.9 ~ 82.4 N.m (5.6 ~ 8.4 kgf.m, 40.5 ~ 60.8 lb-ft)

4. Remove the high voltage battery system rear mounting bracket (A).
Page 78 sur 245

Battery Voltage & Temperature Sensor Wiring Harness

1. Remove the high voltage battery pack assembly.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "High Voltage Battery Pack Assembly")
2. After loosening the harness mounting screw, remove the voltage & temperature wiring harness (A) from the high voltage battery pack
assembly.
[LH]

[RH]
Page 79 sur 245

High Voltage Positive (+) Power Cable

1. Remove the high voltage battery upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Case - "Upper Case")
2. Disconnect the high voltage power cable cover (A).

3. After loosening the mounting nut, remove the high voltage positive (+) power cable (A).
High voltage positive (+) power cable mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 80 sur 245

High Voltage Negative (-) Power Cable

1. Remove the high voltage battery upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Case - "Upper Case")
2. Disconnect the high voltage power cable cover (A).

3. After loosening the mounting nut, remove the high voltage negative(-) power cable (A).
High voltage negative (-) power cable mounting nut : 7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 81 sur 245

Battery Module Outlet Duct

Safety Plug
Refer to High Voltage Battery Control System - "Safety Plug"

High Voltage Battery Pack Lower Case

Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Case - "Lower Case"
Page 82 sur 245

High Voltage Battery Pack Upper Case

Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Case - "Upper Case"

Installation

When installing the RAD harness, be sure to check if the connector is installed on the correct position.
[If not correct]
1. Failure of precharging
2. RAD malfunction (misrecognize that the high voltage battery is swollen)
[Main inspection items]
1. Check if the RAD switch faces down.
Page 83 sur 245

2. Be careful not to reverse battery No. 1 module RAD connector (2 pins) and the BMS extension connector (1 pin) when assembling.

3. Be careful not to reverse battery No. 8 module RAD connector ( 2 pins) and the BMS extension connector (1 pin) when assembling.

1. Install the high voltage battery system and the related parts in the reverse order of removal.
EV Battery System

Specification
Item Specification Note
Cell 96 -
Rated Voltage (V) 360 2 Cells are parallel connected
Page 84 sur 245

Capacity (Ah) 75 -
Energy (KWh) 27 -
Weight (kg) 203 -
Cooling System Air-cooled Forced air cooled

Item Specification Note

EV Battery System

Components
Without High Voltage Heater System

1. High Voltage Battery Pack Assembly 4. Inlet Temperature Sensor

2. Runaway Arresting Device (RAD) 5. Voltage & Temperature Sensor Wiring Harness
3. Busbar 6. Bolt
Page 85 sur 245

With High Voltage Heater System

Page 86 sur 245

1. High Voltage Battery Pack Assembly 5. Voltage & Temperature Sensor Wiring Harness
2. Runaway Arresting Device (RAD) 6. Bolt
3. Busbar 7. High Voltage Battery Heater
4. Inlet Temperature Sensor 8. High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor

EV Battery System

Inspection

When removing the battery pack assembly to inspect the battery system, it can be connected to vehicle by using the SST 0K918-E4100,
0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200. Before installing the battery system assembly, check if the battery is OK by using the SST.
[SOC Inspection ]
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Connect the GDS to DLC.
3. Turn the ignition ON.
4. Check the SOC in the GDS service data.
SOC:5% ~ 95%
Page 87 sur 245

[Battery Voltage Inspection]

1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Connect the GDS to DLC.
3. Turn the ignition ON.
4. Check the Cell Voltage and the Pack Voltage in the GDS service data.
Cell Voltage:2.5V ~ 4.3V
Pack Voltage:240V ~ 413V
Voltage gap between cells :Less than 40 mV
Page 88 sur 245
Page 89 sur 245
Page 90 sur 245

[Insulation Resistance Inspection (By using the GDS)]

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect the GDS to DLC.
Page 91 sur 245

3. Turn the ignition switch ON.

4. Inspect the insulation resistance in the GDS service data.
Specified value:300KΩ ~ 1000KΩ

[Insulation Resistance Inspection (By using the Mega Ohm Tester)]

1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shout-off Procedure")
2. Connect the negative (-) terminal of mega ohm meter (A) to ground of the vehicle.

For precise measuring, connect the negative (-) terminal to the parts not painted.

Removal

Safety plug cable assembly bracket mounting bolt :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

3. After loosening the mounting bolt, remove the upper case (A).
High voltage battery pack upper case mounting bolt :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Disconnect the RAD wiring connector (A).

[Right]

[Back]

[Left]
Page 94 sur 245

5. After loosening the mounting nut, remove the battery module outlet duct (A).
Battery module outlet duct mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

6. After loosening the mounting bolt, remove the bracke (A).

Battery rear mounting bracket mounting bolt :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

7. Remove the high voltage power cable cover (A).

8. After loosening the mounting nut (A), remove the high voltage positive (+) power cable (B)
High voltage positive (+) power cable mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 95 sur 245

9. After loosening the mounting nut (A), remove the high voltage negative (-) power cable (B).
High voltage negative (-) power cable mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

10. Remove the inverter busbar cover (A).

11. Remove the inverter busbar (A).

Inverter busbar mounting bolt/nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

12. Disconnect the high voltage battery heater system control positive (+) power and the ground connector (A).
[With high voltage battery heater system]
Page 96 sur 245

13. Dsiconnect the power relay assembly connector (A).

14. After loosening the mounting nut, remove the power relay assembly (A).
Power relay assembly mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

15. Disconnect the BMS ECU connector (A).

16. After loosening the mounting nut, remove the BMS ECU (A).
-BMS ECU mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 97 sur 245

17. Disconnect the safety plug interlock connector (A).

18. After loosening the mounting nut (A), remove the safety plug cable assembly (B).
Safety plug cable assembly mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

19. After loosening the ground bolt (A), remove the BMS extension wiring (B).
Ground bolt: 7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

20. Remove the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Be sure to screw the eye bolts to the holes firmly not to allow the bolts to be loosened while lifting the battery pack assembly
using a crane jack.

(3) Install the SST No. OK375-E4300 (A) to crane jack.

(4) Install the SST No. OK375-E4300 & crane jack (A).

• Make sure that the hanger hooks and the eye bolts align.
• Adjust the hanger main frame to fit the size of the battery pack assembly.

(5) Remove the high voltage battery pack assembly (A).

Make sure that the battery pack assembly is balanced.

Page 99 sur 245

The battery pack assembly is divided into LH / RH battery pack so be sure to remove the battery one by one. The order of removal
is not important.

21. After loosening the harness mounting screw, remove the voltage & temperature sensor wiring harness (A) from the battery pack
assembly.
[LH]

[RH]
Page 100 sur 245

Installation

2. Be careful not to reverse battery No. 1 module RAD connector (2 pins) and the BMS extension connector (1 pin) when assembling.
Page 101 sur 245

3. Be careful not to reverse battery No. 8 module RAD connector ( 2 pins) and the BMS extension connector (1 pin) when assembling.

1. Install the high voltage battery pack assembly in the reverse order of removal.
EV Battery System

Description
Power relay assembly (PRA) is installed in the high voltage battery system assembly and it consists of main relays which control the high
voltage, pre-charge relay, pre-charge resister and battery current sensor. PRA controls high voltage of 360V between the high voltage battery
pack and the high voltage joint box by BMS ECU control signal.

Operation

EV Battery System

Removal

• Be sure to shut off the high voltage before doing any work related with the high voltage system(Refer to "High Voltage Shut-off
Procedure"). Failure to follow the safety instructions may result in serious electrical injuries.
1. Remove the high voltage battery assembly.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Battery Pack Assembly - Repair procedures - "Removal")
2. Loosen the safety plug cable assembly bracket mounting bolt (A).
Safety plug cable assembly bracket mounting bolt :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

3. After loosening the mounting bolt, remove the high voltage battery pack upper case (A).
High voltage battery pack upper case mounting bolt :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Remove the high voltage power cable cover (A) and the inverter busbar cover (B).

5. After loosening the mounting nut (A), remove the high voltage positive (+) power cable (B).
High voltage positive (+) power cable mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 103 sur 245

6. After loosening the mounting nut (A), remove the high voltage negative (-) power cable (B).
High voltage negative (-) power cable mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

7. Remove the inverter busbar (A).

7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)Inverter busbar mounting bolt/nut : 0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m

8. Disconnect the high voltage battery heater system control positive (+) power and the ground connector (A).
[With the high voltage battery heater system]

9. Disconnect the power relay assembly connector (A).

Page 104 sur 245

10. After loosening the mounting nut (A), remove the power relay assembly (B).
Power relay assembly mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

Installation

Description
Quick Charge Relay Assembly (QRA) is installed in the high voltage joint box and it consists of main relays which control the high voltage. The
QRA controls the high voltage between the high voltage battery pack and the high voltage joint box by BMS control signal. If the QRA
operates, the PRA operates too.
[Main Function]
1. During rapid charge, it acts as a switch that supplies high voltage to the battery pack.
2. The role of preventing the overcharge

Operation
Page 105 sur 245

EV Battery System

Removal

QRA is integrated into the high voltage joint box and so each part cannot be replaced separately. Refer to removal procedure of high
voltage joint box.

Installation

QRA is integrated into the high voltage joint box and so each part cannot be replaced separately. Refer to removal procedure of high
voltage joint box.
EV Battery System

Removal

[Upper Case]
1. Remove the high voltage battery pack assembly.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "High Voltage Battery Pack Assembly")
2. Loosen the safety plug cable assembly bracket mounting bolt (A).
Safety plug cable assembly bracket mounting bolt :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

3. After loosening the mounting bolt, remove the battery pack upper case (A).
High voltage battery pack upper case mounting bolt/nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 106 sur 245

[Lower Case]
1. Disassemble the high voltage battery system assembly.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Repair procedrues - "Disassembly")

Installation

Components Location
High Voltage Battery System Assembly
Page 107 sur 245

1. BMS ECU 8. Battery Temperature Sensor

2. Main Relay 9. Runaway Arresting Device (RAD)
3. Pre Charge Relay 10. High Voltage Battery Heater (With heater system)
4. Pre Charge Resistor 11. High Voltage Battery Heater Relay (With heater system)
5. Battery Current Sensor 12. High Voltage Battery Heater Fuse (With heater system)
6. Safety Plug 13. High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor (With heater
7. Main Fuse system)

1. BMS ECU 2. Main Relay

3. Pre Charge Relay
Page 108 sur 245

4. Pre Charge Resistor 6. Safety Plug

5. Battery Current Sensor

7. Main Fuse 8. Battery Temperature Sensor

9. Runaway Arresting Device (RAD) 10. High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor

11. High Voltage Battery Heater Fuse

Page 109 sur 245

Power Relay Assembly (Without heater system)

1. Main Relay (+) 4. Pre Charge Resistor

2. Main Relay (-) 5. Battery Current Sensor
3. Pre Charge Relay
Page 110 sur 245

Power Relay Assembly (With heater system)

1. Main Relay (+) 5. Battery Current Sensor

2. Main Relay (-) 6. High Voltage Battery Heater Relay
3. Pre Charge Relay 7. High Voltage Battery Heater Fuse
4. Pre Charge Resistor

EV Battery System

Description
High Voltage Battery Control System
High voltage battery control system consists of BMS ECU, PRA and it controls SOC (State of charge), output, trouble shooting, battery cell
balancing, cooling, power supply & disconnect.
Power Relay Assembly (PRA) consists of main relay, precharge relay, precharge resister, battery current sensor and battery heater relay. It is
connected to battery pack through busbar.
[Main Function]
Purpose
Page 111 sur 245

SOC control • Calculation of SOC by measuring the voltage/current/temperature

Battery ouput control • Battery protection, Prediction of available power, Prevention of overcharge/overdischarge by
calculating the input/output energy as the system status
PRA control • Cut off the power to the high voltage system when IG ON/OFF
• Prevent the safety accidents due to high voltage system failure
Cooling control • Maintain the battery temperature by controlling the cooling fan
Trouble shooting • System troubleshooting, data monitoring and software management
(Refer to "Trouble shooting") • Limit the output by Fail-Safe
• Prevent the safety accidents by controlling the relay

• SOC (State Of Charge): Available energy in the battery

• SOC = [Dischargeable current] / [Battery rated capacity] × 100%

High Voltage Battery Heater System

If the temperature is too low, the battery can be frozen and it can cause reduction in the output voltage. So to prevent this, the heater system
for high voltage battery is adopted. It is controlled automatically by the temperature.
The heater relay is controlled by the BMS ECU and when the heater relay is ON, high voltage is supplied to each heater.
Even when the ignition switch is OFF, the VCU operates the BMS ECU regularly to prevent freezing of the battery.
If the temperature reaches normal range, BMS ECU waits until the VCU gives the order to operate the battery heater via CAN communication.

If the battery SOC is too low while the heater is operating, the BMS ECU stops the heater operation.
If the battery SOC is too low, the heater system will not operate even when the temperature is low.

Operation
High Voltage Battery Control System
Page 112 sur 245

1.Measure the cell voltage, temperature, current and resistance value.

2.Transfer the BMS control data to VCU or control the driving part.
High Voltage Battery Heater System
Page 113 sur 245

EV Battery System

Circuit Diagram
Page 114 sur 245

High Voltage Circuit Diagram

Page 115 sur 245
Page 116 sur 245

EV Battery System

Inspection

Insulation Resistance Loss Inspection

1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Contorl System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
2. Remove the high votlage battery upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Case")
3. Remove the high voltage power cable (A).
High voltage power cable mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Measure the voltage between the high voltage power cable and the ground cable.
Specified value :Approx. 0 V
EV Battery System

Specification
Item Specification Remark
C-CAN terminating resistance (Ω) Approx. 60 Combined resistance (BMS ECU↔Inverter)
C-CAN terminating resistnace (Ω) Approx. 120 BMS ECU resistance

EV Battery System

System Circuit Diagram

Page 118 sur 245

Connector Location
Page 119 sur 245

BMS ECU Connector And Terminal Function

Page 120 sur 245

BMS ECU Terminal Function

A Connector [B01-A] (35 Pin) - Voltage Measurement Connector
Pin no. Description Connected to
1 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 13] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 13]
2 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 10] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 10]
3 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 7] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 7]
4 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 4] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 4]
5 Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 4] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 4]
6 Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 1] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 7/ Cell 1]
7 Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 8] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 8]
8 Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 5] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 6/ Cell 5]
9 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 14] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 14]
10 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 11] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 11]
11 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 9] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 9]
12 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 7] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 7]
13 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 5] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 5]
Page 121 sur 245

14 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 2] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 2]
15 Battery Cell [Module 8/the Lower Line Cell] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8]
16 Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 10] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 10]
17 Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 8] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 8]
18 Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 6] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 6]
19 Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 5] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell5]
20 Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 2] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 2]
21 Battery Cell [Module 7/the Lower Line Cell] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 7]
22 Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 9] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 9]
23 Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 6] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 6]
24 -
25 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 12] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 12]
26 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 8] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 8]
27 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 6] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell6]
28 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 3] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 3]
29 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 1] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell1]
30 Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 9] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 9]
31 Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 7] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 7]
32 Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 5] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 7]
33 Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 3] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 3]
34 Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 10] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 10]
35 Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 7] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 7]

B Connector [B01-B] (26 Pin) - Voltage Measurement Connector

Pin no. Description Connected to
1 Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 3] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 3]
2 Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell the Lower Line] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 6]
3 -
4 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 6] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 6]
5 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 3] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 3]
6 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell the Lower Line] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5]
7 Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 4] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 4]
8 Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 1] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 1]
9 -
10 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 13] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 13]
11 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 11] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 11]
12 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 9] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 9]
13 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 7] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5/ Cell 7]
14 -
15 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 7] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 7]
16 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 4] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 4]
17 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 1] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 1]
18 Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 5] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 5]
19 Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 2] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 2]
20 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 14] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 14]
21 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 12] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 12]
22 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 10] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 10]
23 Battery Cell [Module 10/Cell 1] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 10/Cell 1]
24 -
25 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 5] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 5]
26 Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 2] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 2]

C Connector [B01-C] (28 Pin) - Voltage Measurement Connector

Pin no. Description Connected to
1 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 12] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 12]
2 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 9] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 9]
Page 122 sur 245

3 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 7] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 7]
4 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 5] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 5]
5 Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 5] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 5]
6 Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 3] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 3]
7 Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell the Lower Line] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 3]
8 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 13] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 13]
9 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 10] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 10]
10 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 8] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 8]
11 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 6] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 6]
12 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 3] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 3]
13 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 1] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 1]
14 Battery Cell [Module 4/ the Lower Line Cell] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4]
15 Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 9] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 9]
16 Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 7] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 7]
17 Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 6] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 6]
18 Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 4] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell4]
19 Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 1] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell1]
20 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 14] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 14]
21 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 11] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 11]
22 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 7] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 7]
23 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 4] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 4]
24 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 2] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 2]
25 Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 10] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 10]
26 Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 8] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 8]
27 Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 5] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 5]
28 Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 2] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 2]

D Connector [B01-D] (30 Pin) - Voltage Measurement Connector

Pin no. Description Connected to
1 Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 8] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 8]
2 Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 5] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 5]
3 Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 3] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 3]
4 Battery Cell [Module 2/ the Lower Line Cell] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 2]
5 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 5] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 5]
6 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 2] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 2]
7 -
8 Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 9] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 9]
9 Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 6] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 6]
10 Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 5] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 5]
11 Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 4] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 4]
12 Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 1] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 1]
13 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 13] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 13]
14 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 12] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 12]
15 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 10] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 10]
16 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 8] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 8]
17 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 7] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 7]
18 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 6] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 6]
19 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 3] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 3]
20 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell the Lower Line] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1]
21 Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 10] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 10]
22 Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 7] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 7]
23 -
24 Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 2] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 2]
25 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 14] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 14]
26 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 11] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 11]
27 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 9] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 9]
Page 123 sur 245

28 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 7] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 7]
29 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 4] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 4]
30 Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 1] Voltage Input Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 1]

E Connector [B01-E] (26 Pin) - Control Connector

Pin no. Description Connected to
1 Quick Charge Main Relay [+] Control High Voltage Joint Box
2 High Voltage Main Relay [-] Control Power Relay Assembly (PRA)
3 High Voltage Main Relay [+] Control Power Relay Assembly (PRA)
4 Pre Charge Relay Control Power Relay Assembly (PRA)
5 High Voltage Cooling Fan Relay Control (FCTC) High Voltage Cooling Fan Relay Control
6 Cooling Pan Speed Control High Voltage Battery Cooling Pan
7 Cooling Pan Feedback Input Signal High Voltage Battery Cooling Pan
8 Quick Charge SS2 Input Signal Quick Charge Port
9 -
10 Quick Charge PD Input Signal Quick Charge Port
11 High Voltage Joint Box Interlock Input Signal High Voltage Joint Box
12 Battery Current Sensor Input Signal Power Relay Assembly (PRA)
13 Battery Current Sensor Power (+5V) Power Relay Assembly (PRA)
14 Quick Charge Main Relay (-) Control High Voltage Joint Box
15 Quick Charge Main Relay Ground High Voltage Joint Box
16 High Voltage Main Relay Ground Power Relay Assembly (PRA)
17 High Voltage Battery Heater Relay Control Power Relay Assembly (PRA)
18 -
19 -
20 -
21 Collision Test Input Signal (Crash) Collision detection signal
22 -
23 -
24 -
25 -
26 Battery Current Sensor Ground Power Relay Assembly (PRA)

F Connector [B01-F] (16 Pin) - Temperature Measurement Connector

Pin no. Description Connected to
1 Battery Temperature Sensor #4 [Module4] Signal Input Battery Temperature Sensor #4
2 Battery Temperature Sensor #3 [Module3] Signal Input Battery Temperature Sensor #3
3 Battery Temperature Sensor #2 [Module2] Signal Input Battery Temperature Sensor #2
4 Battery Temperature Sensor #1 [Module1] Signal Input Battery Temperature Sensor #1
5 -
6 High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor #1 [Module1] High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor #1
Signal Input
7 -
8 Safety Plug Interlock Signal Input Interlock (Included in the Safety Plug)
9 Battery Temperature Sensor #4 [Module4] Ground Battery Temperature Sensor #4
10 Battery Temperature Sensor #3 [Module3] Ground Battery Temperature Sensor #3
11 Battery Temperature Sensor #2 [Module2] Ground Battery Temperature Sensor #2
12 Battery Temperature Sensor #1 [Module1] Ground Battery Temperature Sensor #1
13 -
14 High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor #1 [Module1] HighVoltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor #1
Ground
15 -
16 Safety Plug Interlock Ground Interlock (Included in the Safety Plug)

G Connector [B01-G] (12 Pin) - Temperature Measurement Connector

Pin no. Description Connected to
1 Battery Temperature Sensor #8 [Module 8] Signal Input Battery Temperature Sensor #8
Page 124 sur 245

2 Battery Temperature Sensor #7 [Module 7] Signal Input Battery Temperature Sensor #7

3 Battery Temperature Sensor #6 [Module 6] Signal Input Battery Temperature Sensor #6
4 Battery Temperature Sensor #5 [Module 8] Signal Input Battery Temperature Sensor #5
5 Inlet Temperature Sensor Signal Input Inlet Temperature Sensor
6 High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor #2 [Module2] HighVoltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor #2
Signal Input
7 Battery Temperature Sensor #8 [Module 8] Ground Battery Temperature Sensor #8
8 Battery Temperature Sensor #7 [Module 7] Ground Battery Temperature Sensor #7
9 Battery Temperature Sensor #6 [Module 6] Ground Battery Temperature Sensor #6
10 Battery Temperature Sensor #5 [Module 8] Ground Battery Temperature Sensor #5
11 Inlet Temperature Sensor Ground Inlet Temperature Sensor
12 High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor #2 [Module2] High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor #2
Ground

H Connector [B01-H] (22 Pin) - Control Connector

Pin no. Description Connected to
1 Inverter Interlock Signal Input Power Relay Assembly (PRA)
2 Other Control Module, Data Link Connector (DLC), Multi-Check
C-CAN [Low]
Connector
3 Other Control Module, Data Link Connector (DLC), Multi-Purpose
C-CAN [High]
Check Connector
4 Other Control Module, Data Link Connector (DLC), Multi-Purpose
CCP-CAN [Low]
Check Connector
5 Other Control Module, Data Link Connector (DLC), Multi-Purpose
CCP-CAN [High]
Check Connector
6 -
7 Runaway Arresting Device (RAD) Signal Input Runaway Arresting Device (RAD)
8 Normal charging device ON (Wake up) Signal Input Normal charging device, IG3 #2 Relay
9 IG3 Power 12V Auxiliary Battery
10 Battery Power (B+) 12V Auxiliary Battery, IG3 #1/2/3 Relay
11 Battery Power (B+) 12V Auxiliary Battery, IG3 #1/2/3 Relay
12 -
13 -
14 -
15 -
16 -
17 -
18 Quick Charge Port Signal Input (Pilot) Quick Charge Port
19 -
20 -
21 Power Ground Chassis Ground
22 Power Ground Chassis Ground

BMS ECU Terminal Input/Output Signal

A Connector [B01-A] (35 Pin) - Voltage Measurement Connector
Pin
Description Condition Type Level Wave Remark
no.

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 13]

1 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.13 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 10]

2 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.10 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 7]

3 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.7 Cell
Voltage Input

4 Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 4] IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.4 Cell
Voltage Input
Page 125 sur 245

Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 4]

5 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.7 Module No.4 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 1]

6 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.7 Module No.1 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 8]

7 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.6 Module No.8 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 5]

8 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.6 Module No.5 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 14]

9 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.14 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 11]

10 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.11 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 9]

11 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.9 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 7]

12 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.7 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 5]

13 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.5 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 2]

14 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.2 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell The No.8 Module The Lower

15 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V
Lower Line] Voltage Input Line

Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 10]

16 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.7 Module No.10 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 8]

17 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.7 Module No.8 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 6]

18 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.7 Module No.6 Cell
Input

Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 5]

19 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.7 Module No.5 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 2]

20 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.7 Module No.2 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell The No.7 Module The Lower

21 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V
Lower Line] Voltage Input Line

Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 9]

22 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.6 Module No.9 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 6]

23 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.6 Module No.6 Cell
Voltage Input
Page 126 sur 245

24 -

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 12]

25 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.12 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 8]

26 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.8 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 6]

27 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.6 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 3]

28 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.3 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 8/Cell 1]

29 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.8 Module No.1 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 9]

30 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.7 Module No.9 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 7]

31 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.7 Module No.7 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 5]

32 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.7 Module No.5 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 7/Cell 3]

33 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.7 Module No.3 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 10]

34 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.6 Module No.10 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 7]

35 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.6 Module No.7 Cell
Voltage Input

B Connector [B01-B] (26 Pin) - Voltage Measurement Connector

Pin
Description Condition Type Level Wave Remark
no.

Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 3]

1 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.6 Module No.3 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell The No.6 Module The Lower

2 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V
Lower Line] Voltage Input Line

3 -

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 6]

4 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.6 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 3]

5 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.3 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell The No.5 Module The Lower

6 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V
Lower Line] Voltage Input Line

Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 4]

7 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.6 Module No.4 Cell
Voltage Input

8 Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 1] IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.6 Module No.1 Cell
Voltage Input
Page 127 sur 245

9 -

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 13]

10 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.13 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 11]

11 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.11 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 9]

12 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.9 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 7]

13 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.7 Cell
Voltage Input

14 -

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 7]

15 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.7 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 4]

16 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.4 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 1]

17 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.1 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 5]

18 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.6 Module No.5 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 6/Cell 2]

19 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.6 Module No.2 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 14]

20 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.14 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 12]

21 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.12 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 10]

22 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.10 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 8]

23 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.8 Cell
Voltage Input

24 -

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 5]

25 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.5 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 5/Cell 2]

26 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.5 Module No.2 Cell
Voltage Input

C Connector [B01-C] (28 Pin) - Voltage Measurement Connector

Pin
Description Condition Type Level Wave Remark
no.

Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 12]

1 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.12 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 9]

2 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.9 Cell
Voltage Input

3 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 7] IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.7 Cell
Voltage Input
Page 128 sur 245

Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 5]

4 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.5 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 5]

5 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.3 Module No.5 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 3]

6 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.3 Module No.3 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell The No.3 Module The Lower

7 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V
Lower Line] Voltage Input Line

Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 13]

8 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.13 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 10]

9 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.10 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 8]

10 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.8 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 6]

11 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.6 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 3]

12 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.3 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 1]

13 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.1 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell The No.4 Module Cell The

14 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V
Lower Line] Voltage Input Lower Line

Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 9]

15 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.3 Module No.9 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 7]

16 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.3 Module No.7 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 6]

17 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.3 Module No.6 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 4]

18 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.3 Module No.4 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 1]

19 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.3 Module No.1 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 14]

20 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.14 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 11]

21 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.11 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 7]

22 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.7 Cell
Voltage Input
Page 129 sur 245

23 Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 4] IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.4 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 4/Cell 2]

24 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.4 Module No.2 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 10]

25 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.3 Module No.10 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 8]

26 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.3 Module No.8 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 5]

27 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.3 Module No.5 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 3/Cell 2]

28 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.3 Module No.2 Cell
Voltage Input

D Connector [B01-D] (30 Pin) - Voltage Measurement Connector

Pin
Description Condition Type Level Wave Remark
no.

Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 8]

1 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V 2 Module No.8 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 5]

2 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.2 Module No.5 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 3]

3 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.2 Module No.3 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell The No.2 Module The Lower

4 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V
Lower Line] Voltage Input Line

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 5]

5 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.5 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 2]

6 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.2 Cell
Voltage Input

7 -

Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 9]

8 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.2 Module No.9 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 6]

9 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.2 Module No.6 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 5]

10 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.2 Module No.5 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 4]

11 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.2 Module No.4 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 1]

12 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.2 Module No.1 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 13]

13 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.13 Cell
Voltage Input

14 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.12 Cell

Page 130 sur 245

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 12]

Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 10]

15 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.10 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 8]

16 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.8 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 7]

17 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.7 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 6]

18 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.6 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 3]

19 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.3 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell The No.1 Module The Lower

20 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V
Lower Line] Voltage Input Line

Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 10]

21 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.2 Module No.10 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 7]

22 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.2 Module No.7 Cell
Voltage Input

23 -

Battery Cell [Module 2/Cell 2]

24 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.2 Module No.2 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 14]

25 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.14 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 11]

26 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.11 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 9]

27 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.9 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 7]

28 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.7 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 4]

29 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.4 Cell
Voltage Input

Battery Cell [Module 1/Cell 1]

30 IG Off DC Voltage 1.5 ~ 4.8V No.1 Module No.1 Cell
Voltage Input

E Connector [B01-E] (26 Pin) - Control Connector

Pin
Description Condition Type Level Wave Remark
no.

On : VB ± 1.0V Quick Charger Main

Quick Charge Main Relay [+] QuickCharger DC
1 Relay Control Signal
Control Connect Voltage Off : Max 1.0V
(Active High)

High Voltage Main Relay [-] DC On : VB ± 1.0V Main Relay Control

2 Starting
Control Voltage Off : Max1.0V Signal (Active High)

3 Starting
Page 131 sur 245

High Voltage Main Relay [+] DC On : VB ± 1.0V Main Relay Control

Control Voltage Off : Max1.0V Signal (Active High)

On : VB ± 1.0V Pre Charge Relay

DC
4 Pre Charge Relay Control Starting Control Signal (Active
Voltage Off : Max1.0V
High)

High Voltage Battery Cooling DC On : Max1.0V Cooling Relay Control

5 IG On
Fan Relay Control (FCTL) Voltage Off : VB ± 0.5V Signal (Active Low)

Cooling Pan Speed Control

Cooling fan motor

6 Starting Pulse 0 ~ 5.0V Speed Control Signal
(PWM duty)

Cooling fan Speed

Cooling Pan Feedback Signal Feedback Signal
7 Starting Pulse 0 ~ 5.0V
Input (VF1)
(0 ~ 3000Hz)

Quick Quick Charger and

Quick Charge SS2 Signal DC On : 12 ± 1.0V Off :
8 Charger BMS Interface (SAE
Input Voltage 0.9 V Max
Connect J1772)
9 -
Quick QuickCharger and
DC On : 0.9V Max Off :
10 Quick Charge PD Signal Input Charger BMS Interface (SAE
Voltage 5.0 ± 0.1V Max
Connect J1772)
Safety Plug
Installation : 0.9V
Max Joint Box in
High Voltage Joint Box DC
11 IG On HighVoltage Connector
Interlock Signal Input Voltage Safety Plug Interlock (Active Low)
Removal : 5.0 ±
0.1V
0A :
Battery Current Sensor Signal DC 2.4 ~ 2.6 V Current Sensor
12 IG On
Input Voltage -300~300A : (Current sensing value)
0.4~4.6V
On :
Battery Current Sensor Power DC 4.9 ~ 5.1 V Current Sensor (Input
13 IG On
(+5V) Voltage Off : Power (5V))
Max1.0V
On :
Quick Quick Charge Main
Quick Charge Main Relay (-) DC VB ± 0.5V
14 Charger Relay Control Signal
Control Voltage Off :
Connect (Active High)
1.0V Max
Quick Max.150mV @
Quick Charge Main Relay DC Quick Charge Relay
15 Charger 12V assistance
Ground Voltage Ground
Connect Battery Ground
Max.150mV @
HighVoltage Main Relay DC Quick Charge Relay
16 IG On 12V assistance
Ground Voltage Ground
Battery Ground
High voltage
High Voltage Battery
HighVoltage Battery Heater battery DC On : VB ± 1.0V
17 Heater Relay Control
Relay Control heater Voltage Off : Max 1.0V
Signal (Active High)
system action
18 -
19 -
20 -
21 Collision Test Input(Crash) IG On Pulse 0 ~ 5.0V Collision detection
signall (PWM Duty)
Page 132 sur 245

22 -
23 -
24 -
25 -
Max.150mV @
Battery Current Sensor DC Battery Current Sensor
26 IG On 12V assistance
Ground Voltage Ground
Battery Ground

F Connector [B01-F] (16 Pin) - Temperature Measurement Connector

Pin
Description Condition Type Level Wave Remark
no.

Battery Temperature Sensor #4 Battery Temperature

1 IG On DC Voltage 0.3 ~ 4.9V
[Module4] Signal Input Sensor (No.4 Module)

Battery Temperature Sensor #3 Battery Temperature

2 IG On DC Voltage 0.3 ~ 4.9V
[Module3] Signal Input Sensor (No.3 Module)

Battery Temperature Sensor #2 Battery Temperature

3 IG On DC Voltage 0.3 ~ 4.9V
[Module2] Signal Input Sensor (2번 Module)

Battery Temperature Sensor #1 Battery Temperature

4 IG On DC Voltage 0.3 ~ 4.9V
[Module1] Signal Input Sensor (No.1 Module)

5 -
High Voltage Battery Heater High Voltage Battery
6 Temperature Sensor #1 IG On DC Voltage 0.3 ~ 4.9V Heater Temperature
[Module1] Signal Input Sensor (No.1 Module)
7 -
Safety Plug
Installation : Max
Safety Plug Interlock Signal 0.1V Safety Plug Interlock
8 IG On DC Voltage
Input (Active Low)
Safety Plug
Removal : 4.9 ~ 5.1V

Battery Temperature Sensor #4 Battery Temperature

9 IG On DC Voltage 0.1V Max
[Module4] Ground Sensor (No.4 Module)

Battery Temperature Sensor #3 Battery Temperature

10 IG On DC Voltage 0.1V Max
[Module3] Ground Sensor (No.3 Module)

Battery Temperature Sensor #2 Battery Temperature

11 IG On DC Voltage 0.1V Max
[Module2] Ground Sensor (No.2 Module)

Battery Temperature Sensor #1 Battery Temperature

12 IG On DC Voltage 0.1V Max
[Module1] Ground Sensor (No.1 Module)

13 -
High Voltage Battery Heater High Voltage Battery
14 Temperature Sensor #1 IG On DC Voltage 0.1V Max Heater Temperature
[Module1] Ground Sensor (No.1 Module)
15 -

16 Safety Plug Interlock Ground IG On DC Voltage 0.1V Max Safety Plug Interlock

G Connector [B01-G] (12 Pin) - Temperature Measurement Connector

Page 133 sur 245

Pin
Description Condition Type Level Wave Remark
no.

Battery Temperature Sensor #8 Battery Temperature

1 IG On DC Voltage 0.3 ~ 4.9V
[Module8] Signal Input Sensor (No.8 Module)

Battery Temperature Sensor #7 Battery Temperature

2 IG On DC Voltage 0.3 ~ 4.9V
[Module7] Signal Input Sensor (No.7 Module)

Battery Temperature Sensor #6 Battery Temperature

3 IG On DC Voltage 0.3 ~ 4.9V
[Module6] Signal Input Sensor (No.6 Module)

Battery Temperature Sensor #5 Battery Temperature

4 IG On DC Voltage 0.3 ~ 4.9V
[Module8] Signal Input Sensor (No.5 Module)

Inlet Temperature Sensor Signal

5 IG On DC Voltage 0.3 ~ 4.9V Inlet Temperature Sensor
Input

High Voltage Battery Heater HighVoltage Battery

6 Temperature Sensor #2 IG On DC Voltage 0.3 ~ 4.9V Heater Temperature
[Module2] Signal Input Sensor (No.8 Module)

Battery Temperature Sensor #8 BatteryTemperatureSensor

7 IG On DC Voltage 0.1V Max
[Module8] Ground Ground

Battery Temperature Sensor #7 BatteryTemperatureSensor

8 IG On DC Voltage 0.1V Max
[Module7] Ground Ground

Battery Temperature Sensor #6 BatteryTemperatureSensor

9 IG On DC Voltage 0.1V Max
[Module6] Ground Ground

Battery Temperature Sensor #5 BatteryTemperatureSensor

10 IG On DC Voltage 0.1V Max
[Module8] Ground Ground

Inlet Temperature Sensor BatteryTemperatureSensor

11 IG On DC Voltage 0.1V Max
Ground Ground

High Voltage Battery Heater HighVoltage Battery

12 Temperature Sensor #2 IG On DC Voltage 0.1V Max Heater Temperature
[Module2] Ground Sensor Ground

H Connector [B01-H] (22 Pin) - Control Connector

Pin
Description Condition Type Level Wave Remark
no.
Safety Plug
Installation: Max
DC 0.9V Safety Plug Interlock
1 Inverter Interlock Signal Input IG On
Voltage Safety Plug (Active Low)
Removal: 4.9 ~ 5.1
V

Receive :
2.0 ~3.0(2.5)V Vechicle CAN
2 C-CAN [Low] IG On Pulse
Dominant : Communication (Low)
0.5~2.25(1.5)V

Dominant :
2.75~4.5(3.5)V Vechicle CAN
3 C-CAN [High] IG On Pulse
Receive : 2.0~3.0 Communication (High)
(2.5)V

4 CCP-CAN [Low] IG On Pulse

Page 134 sur 245

Receive : Quick Charge CAN

2.0 ~3.0(2.5)V Communication (Low)
Dominant :
0.5~2.25(1.5)V

Dominant :
2.75~4.5(3.5)V Quick Charge CAN
5 CCP-CAN [High] IG On Pulse
Receive : 2.0~3.0 Communication (High)
(2.5)V

6 -
No Operation:
Max1.0V Relay operation
Runaway Arresting Device DC
7 IG On Feedback Signal
(RAD) Signal Input Voltage Operation:
(Active High)
VB ± 1.0V
Quick Quick Charger
Quick Charger ON (Wake up) DC On : 12 ± 1.0V Off :
8 Charger from BMS ECU wake-
Signal Input Voltage 0.9 V Max
connection up Signal

DC
9 IG3 Power IG On 9 < VIG1 < 16V IG3 Signal
Voltage

DC BMS ECU
10 Battery Power (B+) Always 9 < VB < 16V
Voltage Power

DC BMS ECU
11 Battery Power (B+) Always 9 < VB < 16V
Voltage Power

12 -
13 -
14 -
15 -
16 -
17 -
Quick 0 ~ 12V Quick Charger and
Rapid Charge Port signal DC
18 Charger BMS ECU interface
input (Pilot) Voltage Connect quick
connection Charger 9V or 0V) (SAE J1772)
Safety Plug
Installation: 0.9V
DC Max Safety Plug Interlock
19 Inverter Interlock Signal Input IG On
Voltage Safety Plug (Active Low)
Removal:4.9 ~ 5.1
V
20 -
DC Max.150mV @12V
21 PowerGround Always Ground
Voltage Battery Ground
DC Max.150mV @12V
22 PowerGround Always Ground
Voltage Battery Ground

EV Battery System

Inspection
C-CAN Terminating Resistance Inspection (Multi Purpose Check Connector)
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Measure the resistance between pins No. 20 and No. 17 of multi purpose check connector (20 pins).
Measure the resistance between pins No. 3 and No. 11 of DLC (16 pins).
Page 135 sur 245

Specified value :Approx. 60 Ω

3. If the measured vaule is not whithin the specification, check the terminating resistance between the BMS ECU and the Inverter.
C-CAN Terminating Resistance (BMS ECU)
1. Turn the ignition OFF and disconnect the auxiliary battery negative (-) terminal.
2. Lift the vehicle.
3. After loosening the mounting nut, remove the high voltage battery front under cover (A).

4. Disconnect the BMS ECU extension connector (A).

Page 136 sur 245

5. Measure the resistance between pins No. 2 (CAN-High) and No. 9 (CAN-Low) of BMS ECU.
Specified value :Approx. 120 Ω

Removal

4. After loosening the mounting bolt, remove the upper case (A).
High voltage battery pack upper case mounting bolt:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 137 sur 245

5. Remove the BMS ECU

(1) Disconnect the connector (A).

(2) Remove the mounting nut (B).

(3) Remove the BMS ECU(C).
BMS ECU mounting nut:7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

Installation

Specification
Item Specification
Rated Voltage (V) 450
ON Rated Ampere (A) 200
Voltage Drop (V) Less than 0.1 (200A)
Operation Voltage (V) 12
Coil
Resistance (Ω) 21.6 ~ 26.4 (20°C)
Page 138 sur 245

Item Specification Note

EV Battery System

Description
Main Relay is installed in the Power Relay Assembly (PRA) and it controls the high voltage line.
It connects the power between the high voltage battery pack and the high voltage joint box by the BMS ECU control signal.
But when the battery cell is swollen by overcharging, main relay and pre charge relay (PRA) are not operated by RAD.
The RAD is installed on each battery module and will not operate when the battery is normal.
[With High Voltage Battey Heater System]

1. Main Relay (+)

2. Main Relay (-)
Page 139 sur 245

3. Pre Charge Relay 5. Battery Current Sensor

4. Pre Charge Resistor 6. High Voltage Battery Heater Relay
7. High Voltage Battery Heater Fuse

[Without High Voltage Battery Heater System]

1. Main Relay (+) 4. Pre Charge Resistor

2. Main Relay (-) 5. Battery Current Sensor
3. Pre Charge Relay

Operation
Page 140 sur 245

EV Battery System

System Circuit Diagram

With High Voltage Battery Heater System
Page 141 sur 245

Without High Voltage Battery Heater System

Page 142 sur 245

Circuit Diagram
Without High Voltage Battery Heater System
Page 143 sur 245

With High Voltage Battery Heater System

Page 144 sur 245

EV Battery System

Inspection

Inspect the high voltage main relay (-) by using multi tester when the relay is off
1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
2. Remove the high voltage battery upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Case")
3. Measure the resistance between the high voltage (-) power terminal and the Inverter (-) terminal.
Specification :∞Ω(20°C)

[Using GDS (Relay ON)]

1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
2. Remove the high voltage battery upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Case")
3. Connect the SST No: 0K918-E4100, 0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200 to the vehicle.

4. Connect the GDS to DLC.

5. Turn the ignition switch ON.
6. Activate the main relay (-) by using "Actuation Test" on the GDS as shown in the illustration below.

When the relay is ON, there is a relay operation sound.

Page 146 sur 245

Main Relay Coil Resistance

1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
2. Remove the power relay assembly (PRA).
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Power Relay Assembly (PRA)")
3. Measure the resistance of the main relay (+) (between the No.6 and the No.10) and the main relay (-) (between the No.4 and the No.6).
Specification :21.6 ~ 26.4 Ω (20°C)

Removal

Main Relay, Pre Charge Relay, Pre Charge Resistor, Battery Current Sensor, High Voltage Battery Heater Relay and the High Voltage
Battery Heater Fuse are integrated in the Power Relay Assembly (PRA). So Refer to the removal procedure of Power Relay Assembly
(PRA).

Installation

Specification
Item Specification
Rated Voltage(V) 450
ON Rated Ampere(A) 10
Voltage Drop(V) Less than 0.5 (10A)
Operation Voltage(V) 12
Coil
Resistance(Ω) 104.4 ~ 127.6 (20°C)

Item Specification Remark

Page 147 sur 245

Main Relay Switch (-) Resistance (Ω) ∞ Checkable by multi tester

Pre Charger Relay Operation Sound "Clicking" Checkable by GDS and SST
Pre Charger Relay Coil Resistance (Ω) 104.4 ~ 127.6 (20°C) Checkable by multi tester

EV Battery System

Description
Installed in the Power Relay Assembly (PRA), the Pre-charge Relay connects high voltage circuit when pre-charging the inverter capacitor.
When the IG is ON, the current coming through the pre-charge relay and the resistor charges the capacitor in the inverter and when the
capacitor is fully charged, the pre-charge relay turns OFF.
[With High Voltage Battery Heater System]

1. Main Relay (+) 5. Battery Current Sensor

2. Main Relay (-) 6. High Voltage Battery Heater Relay
3. Pre Charge Relay 7. High Voltage Battery Heater Fuse
4. Pre Charge Resistor

[Without High Voltage Battery Heater System]

Page 148 sur 245

1. Main Relay (+) 4. Pre Charge Resistor

2. Main Relay (-) 5. Battery Current Sensor
3. Pre Charge Relay

Operation
Page 149 sur 245

EV Battery System

System Circuit Diagram

With High Voltage Battery Heater System
Page 150 sur 245

Without High Voltage Battery Heater System

Page 151 sur 245

Circuit Diagram
Without High Voltage Battery Heater System
Page 152 sur 245

With High Voltage Battery Heater System

Page 153 sur 245

EV Battery System

Inspection

Inspect the high voltage pre-charge relay by using multi tester when the relay is off
1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
2. Remove the high voltage battery upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Case")
3. Measure the resistance between the high voltage (+) power terminal and the joint box (+) terminal.
Specification :∞Ω(20°C)

[Using GDS (Relay ON)]

1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
2. Remove the high voltage battery upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Case")
3. Connect the SST(0K918-E4100, 0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200) to the vehicle.

4. Connect the GDS to DLC.

5. Turn the ignition swtich ON.
6. Activate the pre charge relay by using "Actuation Test" on the GDS as shown in the illustration below.

When the relay is ON, there is a relay operation sound.

Page 155 sur 245

Pre Charge Relay Coil Resistance

1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
2. Remove the power relay assembly (PRA)
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Power Relay Assembly (PRA)")
3. Measure the resistance between pins No. 6 and No. 8 of the power relay assembly connector.
Specification :104.4 ~ 127.6 Ω (20°C)

Removal

Installation

Spectification
Item Specification
Capacity (W) 60
Coil
Resistance (Ω) 30

EV Battery System

Description
Pre-Charge Resistor is installed in the Power Relay Assembly (PRA) and it protects the high voltage circuit by limiting the charging current
when the inverter capacitor is being pre-charged.
Page 156 sur 245

[With High Voltage Battery Heater System]

1. Main Relay (+) 5. Battery Current Sensor

2. Main Relay (-) 6. High Voltage Battery Heater Relay
3. Pre Charge Relay 7. High Voltage Battery Heater Fuse
4. Pre Charge Resistor

[Without High Voltage Battery Heater System]

Page 157 sur 245

1. Main Relay (+) 4. Pre Charge Resistor

2. Main Relay (-) 5. Battery Current Sensor
3. Pre Charge Relay

Operation
Page 158 sur 245

EV Battery System

System Circuit Diagram

With High Votlage Battery Heater System
Page 159 sur 245

Without High Voltage Battery Heater System

Page 160 sur 245

Circuit Diagram
Without High Voltage Battery Heater System
Page 161 sur 245

With High Voltage Battery Heater System

Page 162 sur 245

EV Battery System

Removal

Installation

Specifications
Current (A) Ouput Voltage (V)
-400(Charge) 0.5
-200 (Charge) 1.5
0 2.5
200 (Discharge) 3.5
+400 (Discharge) 4.5

Item Specifications Remark

Current Sensor Output Voltage (V) Approx. 2.5 ± 0.1 Checkable by multi tester
Current Sensor Power Voltage (V) Approx. 5 ± 0.1 Checkable by multi tester

EV Battery System

Description
Battery Current Sensor is installed in the Power Relay Assembly and it measures the current when the high voltage battery is being charged
or discharged.
[With High Voltage Battery Heater System]
Page 164 sur 245

1. Main Relay (+) 5. Battery Current Sensor

2. Main Relay (-) 6. High Voltage Battery Heater Relay
3. Pre Charge Relay 7. High Voltage Battery Heater Fuse
4. Pre Charge Resistor

[Without High Voltage Battery Heater System]

Page 165 sur 245

1. Main Relay (+) 4. Pre Charge Resistor

2. Main Relay (-) 5. Battery Current Sensor
3. Pre Charge Relay

EV Battery System

Systerm Circuit Diagram

With High Voltage Battery Heater System
Page 166 sur 245

Without High Voltage Battery Heater System

Page 167 sur 245

Circuit Diagram
Without High Voltage Battery Heater System
Page 168 sur 245

With High Voltage Battery Heater System

Page 169 sur 245

EV Battery System

Inspection
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Prcedure")
3. Remove the high voltage battery system assembly.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Repair procedures - "Removal")
4. Remove the high voltage battery pack upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Case - "Upper Case")
5. Connect the SST (No: 0K918-E4100, 0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200) to the vehicle as shown in the image below.
Page 170 sur 245

6. Connect the GDS to DLC.

7. Turn the ignition switch ON.
8. Check the "Battery Pack Current" in the GDS service data.

9. Check voltage for each current.

Current (A) Output Voltage (V)
-400(Charge) 0.5
-200 (Charge) 1.5
Page 171 sur 245

0 2.5
200 (Discharge) 3.5
+400 (Discharge) 4.5

10. Measure the voltage between pins No. 12 (Sensor output) and No. 26 (Sensor ground) of BMS ECU E connector.
Specification :About 2.5V ± 0.1V

11. Measure the voltage between pins No. 1 (Sensor power) and No. 26 (Sensor ground) of BMS ECU E connector.
Specification :Approx. 5V ± 0.1V
Page 172 sur 245

Removal

Installation

Description
Safety Plug is installed on the bottom of the rear seat. High voltage circuit can be shut off by removing the safety plug.
Page 173 sur 245

EV Battery System

System Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram
Page 174 sur 245

EV Battery System

Inspection

Removal

1. Turn the ignition swtich OFF and disconnect the auxiliary battery negative (-) terminal.
2. Remove the cover (A) on the floor carpet of the rear seat.

3. After loosening the nut, remove the safety plug service cover (A).
Safety plug service cover mounting nut :0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m

4. Remove the safety plug (A).

Remove the safety plug in the following order.

[Safety Plug Cable]

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the auxiliary batter negative (-) terminal.
2. Shut off the high voltage.
Page 176 sur 245

(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")

3. Remove the high voltage upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Case")
4. Disconnect the safety plug cable inerlock connector (A).

5. After loosening the nunt (A), remove the safety plug cable assembly (B).
Safety plug cable assembly mounting nut :0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m

Installation

Specification
Item Specification
Rated Voltage (V) 450 (DC)
Rated Current (A) 250 (DC)

Item Specification Remark

Page 177 sur 245

Safety Plug Cable Resistance (Ω) Less than 1 (20°C) Checkable by multi tester
Main Fuse Resistance (Ω) Less than 1 (20°C) Checkable by multi tester

EV Battery System

Description
Installed in the safety plug, the main fuse protects the high voltage circuit from overcurrent.

EV Battery System

System Circuit Diagram

Page 178 sur 245

Circuit Diagram
Page 179 sur 245

EV Battery System

Inspection

Method 2
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the auxiliary battery negative (-) terminal.
Page 180 sur 245

2. Shut off the high voltage.

(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
3. Remove the high voltage battery upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Case")
4. Remove the upper fuse box (A).

5. Perform the electrical test of main fuse.

Specification :Less than 1Ω (20°C)

Removal

Main fuse is combined with the safety plug. Refer to the removal procedure of safety plug.

Installation

Main fuse is combined with the safety plug. Refer to the removal procedure of safety plug.
EV Battery System

Specification
Temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ) Tolerance (%)
-40 204.5 ±4.0
-30 117.8 ±3.5
- 20 70.34 ±3.0
- 10 43.43 ±2.5
0 27.63 ±2.0
10 18.07 ±1.6
20 12.11 ±1.2
30 8.303 ±1.2
40 5.813 ±1.5
50 4.149 ±1.9
60 3.013 ±2.2
70 2.225 ±2.5

EV Battery System
Page 181 sur 245

Description
Installed in the high voltage battery module, Battery Temperature Sensor transfers temperature of each battery module to BMS ECU.

EV Battery System

Circuit Diagram
Page 182 sur 245

EV Battery System

Installation

Battery temperature sensor can not be disassembled.

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
3. Remove the high voltage battery system assembly.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Repair procedures - "Removal")
4. Remove the high voltage battery pack upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Case - "Upper Case")
5. Connect the SST (No: 0K918-E4100, 0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200) as shown in the image below.
Page 183 sur 245

6. Connect the GDS to DLC.

7. Turn the ignition switch ON.
8. Check the "Battery Module Temperature" in the GDS service data.
Page 184 sur 245

9. Turn the ignition swtich OFF.

10. Disconnect the SST (high votlage battery cable & BMS terminal).
11. Check resistance for each temperature sensor.
Temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ) Tolerance (%)
-40 204.5 ±4.0
-30 117.8 ±3.5
- 20 70.34 ±3.0
- 10 43.43 ±2.5
0 27.63 ±2.0
10 18.07 ±1.6
20 12.11 ±1.2
30 8.303 ±1.2
40 5.813 ±1.5
50 4.149 ±1.9
60 3.013 ±2.2
70 2.225 ±2.5
Page 185 sur 245

EV Battery System

Specification
Item Specification Remark
RAD Combined Resistance (Ω) Less than 3 (20°C) Checkable by multi tester
RAD Terminal Resistance (Ω) Less than 0.375 (20°C) Checkable by multi tester
RAD Switch Position Bottom RAD switch and visual inspection

EV Battery System

Components Location
Page 186 sur 245

1. Runaway Arresting Device (RAD) 2. Runaway Arresting Device (RAD) Wiring Harness

EV Battery System

Description
RAD is installed on each battery module.
If the high voltage battery is swollen by cell overcharge, RAD cuts the ground of the main relay and the pre-charge relay.
If the cell is overcharged, the switch turns OFF and the vehicle cannot be driven.
RAD
Page 187 sur 245

RAD on 10 cells

RAD on 14 cells

RAD Wiring Harness

Operation
Module Normal Failure
Current ON (Connected) OFF (Cut off)
RAD - Switch rise
High Voltage Normal Cut off
Page 188 sur 245

Phenomenon Normal Failure on starting the motor and warning light

Diagram

EV Battery System

Circuit Diagram

EV Battery System

Inspection

When removing the battery pack assembly to inspect the battery system, it can be connected to vehicle by using the SST 0K918-E4100,
0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the auxiliary batter negative (-) terminal.
2. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Prcedure")
Page 189 sur 245

3. Remove the high voltage battery upper case.

(Refer to High Votlage Battery System - "Case")
4. Measure the combined resistance of RAD terminal.
Specification :Less than 3 Ω (20°C)

5. Measure the resistance of each RAD.

Specification :Less than 0.375Ω (20°C)
Page 190 sur 245

2. Be careful not to reverse the battery No. 1 module RAD connector (2 pins) and the BMS extension connector (1 pin).

3. Be careful not to reverse the battery No. 8 module RAD connector (2 pins) and the BMS extension connector (1 pin).

EV Battery System

Specification
[14 cells LH/ RH]
Item Specification
Resistance (Ω) 26 ~ 29
Page 192 sur 245

[10 cells LH/ RH]

Item Specification
Resistance (Ω) 16 ~ 18

EV Battery System

Component

1. High Voltage Battery Heater 3. High Voltage Battery Heater Fuse

2. High Voltage Battery Heater Relay 4. High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor

EV Battery System

Description
High Voltage Battery Heater is installed in every module and it is controlled by heater relay.
Page 193 sur 245

High Voltage Flow

Control Flow

Operation
Page 194 sur 245

EV Battery System

System Circuit Diagram

Page 195 sur 245

EV Battery System

Inspection

When removing the battery pack assembly to inspect the battery system, it can be connected to vehicle by using the SST 0K918-E4100,
0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
3. Remove the high voltage battery system assembly.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Repiar procedures - "Removal")
Page 196 sur 245

4. Remove the high voltage battery pack upper case.

(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Case - "Upper Case")
5. Measure the resistance.
14 cells LH/ RH
Item Specification
Resistance (Ω) 26 ~ 29

10 cells LH/ RH
Item Specification
Resistance (Ω) 16 ~ 18

RH cell heater

Removal

High Voltage Battery Heater, High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor and Inlet Temperature Sensor are combined with High
Voltage Battery Pack Assembly. Refer to the removal procedure of high voltage battery pack assembly.

Installation

Specification
Item Specification
Rated Voltage (V) 450
ON Rated Current (A) 10
Voltage Drop (V) Less than 0.5 (200A)
Operation Voltage (V) 12
Coil
Resistance (Ω) 104.4 ~ 127.6 (20°C)
Page 197 sur 245

Item Specification Note

Heater Relay Switch Resistance (Ω) ∞ Checkable by multi tester
Heater Relay Operation Sound "Clicking" Checkable by GDS and SST
Heater Relay Coil Resistance (Ω) 104.4 ~ 127.6 (20°C) Checkable by multi tester

EV Battery System

Component

1. Battery Heater 3. Battery Heater Fuse

2. Battery Heater Relay 4. Battery Heater Temperature Sensor

EV Battery System

Description
High Voltage Battery Heater Relay is installed in the Power Relay Assembly (PRA).
It supplies high voltage flow inside the heater to operate the heater to warm the high voltage battery.
Page 198 sur 245

Control Flow

Operation

EV Battery System

System Circuit Diagram

Page 199 sur 245

Circuit Diagram
Page 200 sur 245

EV Battery System

Inspection

When removing the battery pack assembly to inspect the battery system, it can be connected to vehicle by using the SST 0K918-E4100,
0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200.
High Voltage Battery Heater Relay Switch Resistance
[Using multi tester (Relay OFF)]
Page 201 sur 245

Inspect the high voltage high voltage battery heater relay by using multi tester when the relay is off
1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
2. Remove the power relay assembly (PRA).
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Power Relay Assembly (PRA)")
3. Measure the resistance between the heater relay (+) switch terminal and the (+) power terminal which is connected to high voltage joint
box.
Specification :∞Ω(20°C)

[Using GDS (Relay ON)]

1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
2. Remove the high voltage battery upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Case")
3. Connect the SST(0K918-E4100, 0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200) to the vehicle.

4. Connect the GDS to DLC.

5. Turn the ignition swtich ON.
6. Activate the battery heater relay by using "Actuation Test" on the GDS as shown in the illustration below.

When the relay is ON, there is a relay operation sound.

Page 202 sur 245

High Voltage Battery Heater Relay Coil Resistance

1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
2. Remove the power relay assembly (PRA).
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - "Power Relay Assembly (PRA)")
3. Measure the resistance between the No.6 and No.7 of power relay assembly connector.
Specification :104.4 ~ 127.6 Ω

Removal

Installation

Specification
Item Specification
Current (A) 10

EV Battery System

Component
Page 203 sur 245

1. High Voltage Battery Heater 3. High Voltage Battery Heater Fuse

2. High Voltage Battery Heater Relay 4. High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor

EV Battery System

High Voltage Battery Heater Fuse

It is connected to battery heater relay switch and it cuts off the circuit in case of overcurrent.
It is installed in the Power Relay Assembly (PRA).
Page 204 sur 245

Operation

EV Battery System

System Circuit Diagram

Page 205 sur 245

Circuit Diagram
Page 206 sur 245

EV Battery System

Removal

Installation

Specification
Temperature (°C) Resistance (kΩ) Tolerance (%)
-40 204.5 ±4.0
-30 117.8 ±3.5
- 20 70.34 ±3.0
- 10 43.43 ±2.5
0 27.63 ±2.0
10 18.07 ±1.6
20 12.11 ±1.2
30 8.303 ±1.2
40 5.813 ±1.5
50 4.149 ±1.9
60 3.013 ±2.2
70 2.225 ±2.5

EV Battery System

Component
Page 208 sur 245

1. High Voltage Battery Heater 3. High Voltage Battery Heater Fuse

2. High Voltage Battery Heater Relay 4. High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor

EV Battery System

Description
It senses the temperature to determine if the battery heater is operating well according to conditions.
EV Battery System

Circuit Diagram

EV Battery System

Inspection

High voltage battery heater temperature sensor is installed in modules No. 1 and No. 8.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
3. Remove the high voltage battery system assembly.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Repair procedures - "Removal")
4. Remove the high voltage battery pack upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Case - "Upper Case")
5. Connect the SST (No: 0K918-E4100, 0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200) as shown in the image beow.
Page 209 sur 245

6. Connect the GDS to DLC.

7. Turn the ignition switch ON.
8. Check the "Heater Temperature" in the GDS service data.

9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

10. Disconnect the SST (High voltage battery cable & BMS terminal).
11. Check resistance for each temperature.
Temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ) Tolerance (%)
Page 210 sur 245

-40 204.5 ±4.0

-30 117.8 ±3.5
- 20 70.34 ±3.0
- 10 43.43 ±2.5
0 27.63 ±2.0
10 18.07 ±1.6
20 12.11 ±1.2
30 8.303 ±1.2
40 5.813 ±1.5
50 4.149 ±1.9
60 3.013 ±2.2
70 2.225 ±2.5

Removal

Installation

Component
High Voltage Battery
Page 211 sur 245

1. Cooling Fan 4. Battery Module Outlet Duct

2. Outlet Cooling Duct 5. Inlet Temperature Sensor
3. Protector Outlet Duct Panel

Vehicle

1. Cooling Fan Relay

EV Battery System

Description
The system temperature is calculated by the BMS based on 8 temperature sensor signals. And the cooling fan is conrolled in 9 steps to
maintain the normal temperature of high voltage battery system.
The air-cooling method is applied in the cooling system where indoor air is used to cool down the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Operation
Control Flow
Page 212 sur 245

Air Flow

1. Cooling fan operates.

2. Indoor air flows into the cooling duct (inlet).
3. Cools down the high voltage battery in the direction of the arrows.
4. Air is ventilated out through the cooling duct (outlet).
EV Battery System

Specification
Cooling Fan Speed Duty (%) Fan Speed(rpm)
0 0 0
1 10 900
2 20 1200
3 30 1500
4 40 1800
5 50 2100
6 60 2450
7 70 2600
8 80 2800
9 90 3000
Page 213 sur 245

EV Battery System

Description
It controls the BLDC motor speed by the PWM signal of BMS ECU.

EV Battery System

Inspection
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the auxiliary battery (12V) negative (-) terminal.
2. Connect the GDS to DLC.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON.
4. Inspect "Control Duty" and waveforms according to "Fan Status" by performing "Actuation Test" on GDS.
Cooling Fan Speed Duty (%) Fan Speed (rpm)
0 0 0
1 10 900
2 20 1200
3 30 1500
4 40 1800
5 50 2100
6 60 2450
7 70 2600
8 80 2800
9 90 3000

[Cooling Fan at 1st Speed]

Page 214 sur 245

[Cooling Fan at 2nd Speed]

Page 215 sur 245

[Cooling Fan at 3rd Speed]

[Cooling Fan at 4th Speed]

Page 216 sur 245

[Cooling Fan at 5th Speed]

Page 217 sur 245

[Cooling Fan at 6th Speed]

[Cooling Fan at 7th Speed]

Page 218 sur 245

[Cooling Fan at 8th Speed]

Page 219 sur 245

[Cooling Fan at 9th Speed]

Page 220 sur 245

[Cooling Fan Stop]

Removal
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the auxiliary (12V) negative (-) terminal.
2. Remove the rear cushion.
(Refer to Body - "Rear Seat Assembly")
3. After loosening the nut (A), remove the protector outlet duct panel (B).
Protector outlet duct panel mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Open the trunk.

5. Remove the luggage board (A).
Page 221 sur 245

6. After loosening the bolt (A), remove the outlet cooling duct (B).
Outlet cooling duct mounting bolt :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

7. After loosening the nut (A), remove the cooling fan (B).
Cooling fan mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

Installation
1. Install in the reverse ordrer of removal.
EV Battery System

Description
It works as the air flow path when cooling fan operates.
Battery Module Outlet Duct
Page 222 sur 245

Protector Outlet Duct Panel

Outlet Cooling Duct

EV Battery System

Removal
Battery Module Outlet Duct

Protector Outlet Duct Panel

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the auxiliary battery (12V) negative (-) terminal.
2. Remove the rear seat cushion.
(Refer to Body - "Rear Seat Assembly")
3. After loosening the nut (A), remove the protector outlet duct panel (B).
Protector outlet duct panel mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

Outlet Cooling Duct

1. Turn the igntion swtich OFF and disconnect the auxiliary battery (12V) negative (-) termianl.
2. Remove the rear seat cushion.
(Refer to Body - Rear Seat Assembly")
Page 224 sur 245

3. After loosening the nut (A), remove the protector outlet duct panetl (B).
Protector outlet duct panel mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Open the trunk.

5. Remove the luggage board (A).

6. After loosening the bolt (A), remove the outlet cooling duct (B).
Outlet cooling duct mounting bolt :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

Installation
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.
EV Battery System

50 4.149 ±1.9
60 3.013 ±2.2
70 2.225 ±2.5

EV Battery System

Description
Inlet temperature sensor is installed on the No.8 module of high voltage battery and it detects the inner air temperature of battery. The
operation of cooling fan depends on the inlet temperature sensor value.
Inlet Temperature Sensor

Installation (on the No.8 battery module)

EV Battery System

Circuit Diagram

EV Battery System
Page 226 sur 245

Inspection
1. Turn the ignitionswitch OFF.
2. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
3. Remove the high voltage battery System assembly.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Repair procedures - "Removal")
4. Remove the high voltage battery pack upper case.
(Refer to High Voltage Battery System - Case - "Upper Case")
5. Connect the SST (No: 0K918-E4100, 0K375-E4100, 0K375-E4200) as shown in the image below.

6. Connect the GDS to DLC.

7. Turn the ignition switch ON.
8. Check the "Battery Inlet Temperature" in the GDS service data.
Page 227 sur 245

9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

10. Disconnect the SST (high votlage battery cable & BMS check cable).
11. Check the resistance by the temperature.
Temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ) Tolerance (%)
-40 204.5 ±4.0
-30 117.8 ±3.5
- 20 70.34 ±3.0
- 10 43.43 ±2.5
0 27.63 ±2.0
10 18.07 ±1.6
20 12.11 ±1.2
30 8.303 ±1.2
40 5.813 ±1.5
50 4.149 ±1.9
60 3.013 ±2.2
70 2.225 ±2.5

Removal
Page 228 sur 245

High Voltage Battery Heater, High Voltage Battery Heater Temperature Sensor and Inlet Temperature Sensor are integrated into the high
voltage battery pack assembly. So refer to the removal procedure of high voltage battery pack assembly.

Installation

Components

1. On-Board Charger (OBC) 3. Normal Charge Port

2. Rapid Charge Port 4. High Voltage Battery

EV Battery System

Description
Electric vehicle can be charged by two methods, rapid charge and normal charge.
In the case of normal charge, the battery is charged after 220V AC power is transformed to DC power by On-Board Charger (OBC). In the
case of rapid charge, the DC power from charging station goes directly to the battery.
Page 229 sur 245

While charging the vehicle, the driving of the vehicle is restricted logically for safety. And the vehicle cannot be charged by two charge
methods at the same time.
The logic is controlled by BMS ECU and IG relays #1,2,3.
IG 3 signal activates the Low Voltage DC-DC Converter (LDC), BMS ECU, Motor Control Unit (MCU), Vehicle Control Unit (VCU) and On-
Board Charger (OBC), and it enables the vehicle to be charged.

• IG3 Signal: It is the signal only for the Electric Vehicle. The signal goes to Low Voltage DC-DC Converter (LDC), BMS ECU, Motor
Control Unit (MCU), Vehicle Control Unit (VCU) and On-Board Charger.
• IG3 #1 Relay : When the high voltage controller operates, IG3 signal is provided through the IG3 #1 relay, except for normal or rapid
charge,.
• IG3 #2 Relay : In the case of normal charge, it operates to provide the IG3 signal.
• IG3 #3 Relay : In the case of rapid charge, it operates to provide the IG3 signal.
EV Battery System

Specification
Maximum Output 6.6kW
Output Density 0.52kVA/ℓ
Size 327 X 367 X 105 mm
ICCB Approx. 1.4kW
EVSE 6.6kW

EV Battery System

Description
In normal charge, the battery is charged through the On-Board Charger (OBC) using external power supply of 220V.
Page 230 sur 245

On-Board Charger (OBC) is the equipment that charges the high voltage battery of electric vehicle using the 110 ~ 220V AC power. Its
maximum output is 6.6 kW and the efficiency is about 91%.

Main Function
Item Contents
Control Control the input current power factor To satisfy the AC power standar
• When exceeds the OBC maximum capacity
Limit the maximum output
Protect • When exceeds the OBC limit temperature
Troubleshooting Detect the failure of OBC
Cooperative Cooperative control with other system at pre scheduling
Cooperative control the driving charge / air conditioning
control

EV Battery System

Schematic Diagrams
Page 231 sur 245

Input Connector (AC)

Specification
Terminal Description
Current (normal) Voltage (maximum)
1 Phase voltage (L1)_220VAC
2 Ground 33A 310VAC
3 Phase voltage (L2)_220VAC

Output Connector (DC)

Specification
Terminal Description
Current (normal) Voltage (maximum)
1 High Voltage Battery (-)
2 High Voltage Battery (+)
25A 495VDC
3 High Voltage Interlock Pin
4 High Voltage Interlock Pin

Signal Connector
Specification
Terminal Description
Current (normal) Voltage (maximum)
1 Ground 0V
2 IG3 18V
3 Connection sensing (EVSE) 5V
4 Control Pilot (EVSE) 12V
5 Relay operation 18V
6 CAN_Low 1.5-2.5V
1A
7 CAN-High 2.5-3.5V
8 Charge state indication (Right) 18V
9 Charge state indication (Center) 18V
10 Charge state indication (Left) 18V
11 CP, PD Shielding ground 0V
12 Auxiliary 12V battery (+) 18V

EV Battery System
Page 232 sur 245

Removal

• Be sure to read and follow the “General Safety Information and Caution” before doing any work related with the high voltage system.
Failure to follow the safety instructions may result in serious electrical injuries.
• Be sure to shut off the high voltage before doing any work related with the high voltage system(Refer to "High Voltage Shut-off
Procedure"). Failure to follow the safety instructions may result in serious electrical injuries
1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
2. Remove the high voltage joint box.
(Refer to High Voltage Distribution System - "High Voltage Joint Box")
3. Drain the coolant by loosening the drain plug.
(Refer to Traction Motor System - "Coolant")
4. Disconnect the OBC cable connector (A) and OBC signal connector (B).
5. Loosen the connector bracket mounting bolt (C) and then remove the connector bracket (D) from the OBC.

6. Disconnect the OBC coolant hose (A).

7. Loosen the mounting bolt and then remove the reservoir tnak (A) from the OBC.

8. Loosen the A/C accumulator mounting bolt (A). (With Heat Pump)
Page 233 sur 245

9. Loosen the OBC mounting bolt (A) and then remove the OBC.

Installation
1. Install the OBC in the reverse order of removal.
OBC mounting bolt : 1.0 ~1.2kgf.m

When injecting the coolant, perform the air bleeding by activating the EWP using GDS.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Coolant")
EV Battery System

Specification
Output
100kW DC 500V, 200A
50kW DC 450V, 110A

EV Battery System

Description
Rapid charge charges the battery using high voltage on a quick charge stand.
The electric power goes directly to the battery through the rapid charge port. To protect the battery, it is charged up to 84% in the first charge,
and this can be recharged upto 95% in the second charge.
Page 234 sur 245

Quick charge relay and PRA relay safely protect the rapid charge port by cutting the current to rapid charge port. The current flows through
the quick charge relay and the PRA relay only when the connector is connected to rapid charge port.

EV Battery System

Description
Charge port consists of normal charge port (1) and the rapid charge port (2) in the front of vehicle. The charge starts when the ICCB or the
quick charge coonnector is connected to charge port.
Page 235 sur 245

1. Normal Charge Port

2. Rapid Charge Port
EV Battery System

Removal

Normal Charge Port

1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
2. Disconnect the auxiliary battery (12V) negative (-)terminal.
3. Remove the front bumper cover.
(Refer to Body - "Front Bumper Cover")
4. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (A) and then remove the normal charge connector (B) from the connector bracket (C).
5. Remove the normal charge wiring fixing clip (D) from the cooling fan shroud.

6. Disconnect the normal charge cable connector (A).

Disconnect the cable in the following order.

Page 236 sur 245

7. Remove the normal charge port (A).

Tightening torque :10.8 ~ 13.7 N.m (1.1 ~ 1.4 kgf.m, 7.9 ~ 10.1 lb-ft)

8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Rapid Charge Port
1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure")
2. Disconnect the auxiliary batter (12V) negative (-) terminal.
3. Remove the front bumper cover.
(Refer to Body - "Front Bumper Cover")
4. Disconnect the wiring harness connector (A) and then remove the normal charge connector (B) from the connector bracket (C).

5. Disconnect the rapid charge cable connector (A).

Page 237 sur 245

Disconnect the cable in the following order.

6. Remove the rapid charge port (A).

Tightening torque :1.1 ~ 1.4 kgf.m

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

EV Battery System

Components Location
Page 238 sur 245

1. High voltage joint box 5. PTC heater high voltage cable

2. Air conditioning compressor high voltage connector 6. High voltage battery assembly high voltage cable
3. Electric power control unit (EPCU) high voltage cable 7. High voltage joint box connector
4. On-board charger (OBC) high voltage cable connector 8. Quick charge high voltage cable

EV Battery System

Description
Function: The high voltage joint box distribute high voltage to the each unit of vehicle.
Page 239 sur 245

High-voltage power charge / output system flow

EV Battery System

Removal

2. Disconnect the quick charge high voltage cable (A).

3. Disconnect the high voltage joint box connector (A).

4. Disconnect the air conditioner compressor high voltage connector (A).

5. Disconnect the high voltage battery cable (A).

Page 241 sur 245

6. Disconnect the PTC heater high voltage connector (A).

7. Disconnect the EPCU high voltage cable (A).

8. Disconnect the on-board charger high voltage connector (A).

9. Remove the high voltage joint box (A) after loosening bolts.
Tightening torque :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 242 sur 245

Installation
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• If a high voltage connector is not connected make sure that the pins are bent.
• Do not insert to strong force a high-voltage connector.
EV Battery System

Components Location

1. 3-phase high voltage cable [MCU - Motor] 2. High voltage cable [High voltage battery - High voltage joint box]
Page 243 sur 245

EV Battery System

Removal
[High voltage battery pack - High voltage joint box]

2. Disconnect the high voltage battery cable (A).

3. Remove the under cover (A).

Tightening torque :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Remove the high voltage cable together with protector bracket from body of vehicle after loosening protector bracket nuts (A).
Tightening torque :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 244 sur 245

5. Remove the under cover (A) of high voltage battery.

Tightening torque :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

6. Disconnect the high voltage cable (A) from the high voltage battery.

7. Remove the high voltage cable (A) together with protector bracket from body of vehicle after loosening protector bracket nut.
Tightening torque :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

[MCU - Motor]
Page 245 sur 245

2. Remove the motor high voltage cable (A) from the motor and the MCU.

Installation
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• If a high voltage connector is not connected make sure that the pins are bent.
• Do not insert to strong force a high-voltage connector.
Page 1 sur 61

Traction Motor System

Safety Precaution

Sinse Electric Vehicle contains a high voltage, battery mishandling the high voltage system or vehicle may lead to a serious accident
including electric shock and electric leakage.

• All the high voltage wiring and connectors are in orange.

• Inform of possible danger of high voltage by placing a "high voltage caution" sign on the vehicle as in the image below.
Page 2 sur 61
Page 3 sur 61

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Insulation gloves Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage
components
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]
Page 4 sur 61

Insulation shoes

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation clothes
components

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses

Used in the following cases :

• During Removal & installation or inspection of the high
voltage battery terminals or wiring, which spark might happen.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

All removed high voltage components are placed on an

Insulation mat
insulation mat to prevent safety accidents.

Insulation sheet is used to cover high voltage components to

Insulation sheet protect people not wearing personal protective equipment from
safety accidents.

Warning tape Used for infomring that it is dangerous to come over this line.
Page 5 sur 61

Personal Protective Equipment Inspection

• Check that the personal protective equipment is not damaged.

• Check that the insulation gloves are not torn or damaged.
• Wear the insulation glove after removing moisture.

Fold the insulation glove as above.

Fold again 3~4 times to make it airtight.
Squeeze the inflated glove to see if the glove is torn or damaged.
Caution when repairing the power cable

Precautions when handling high voltage battery

• Battery Control System - Refer to "High Voltage Battery Handling Guide"

Precautions in case of fire in High Voltage Battery System

Precautions in case of high voltage battery gas and/or electrolyte leakage

Page 6 sur 61

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug.
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• Gas is hydrogen and alkali vapor. If the fire occurred indoor, ventilate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline
solution.
• If leaked vapor or liquid gets in your eye, immediately clean with running water, then get medical attention.
• In case of gas leakage due to high temperature, do NOT use the battery until the high voltage battery cools down to room temperature.

Precautions when handling vehicle after an accident

Preparations when servicing accident affected vehicle

Precautions when EV is unattended for a prolonged period

Hybrid Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery / Charging Precautions

If the POE oil in the system gets mixed with PAG oil, it may result in dielectric breakdown due to decreased volumetric resistivity and
inoperative A/C compressor, disabling the A/C compressor.

Traction Motor System

High Voltage Shut-off Procedure

3. After loosening the nut, remove the safety plug service cover (A).
Safety plug service cover mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Remove the safety plug (A).

Remove the safety plug in the follwing order.

Page 8 sur 61

(3) Remove the high voltage cable (A).

(4) Measure the voltage between the inverter terminals.

Less than 30V : High voltage circuit properly shut
More than 30V : Faulty on high voltage circuit
Page 9 sur 61

Specifications
Motor
Item Specifications
Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Type
(Internal permanent magnet)
Maximum output 81.4 kW
Rated power 42.7 kW
Maximum torque 285 N.m
Maximum rotational speed 9800 rpm
Rated output range 2730 ~ 8000 rpm
Operating temperature conditions -40 ~ 105 °C (-40 ~ 221 °F)
Cooling method Water cooling
Page 10 sur 61

Electric Water Pump (EWP)

Item Specifications
Type Motor driven
Operating conditions Speed control
Operating rotational speed 500 ~ 3740 rpm
Operating voltage 13.5 ~ 14.5 V
Capacity Min. 12 lpm (at 0.6 bar)
Rated current Below 2.5 A (at 14 V)
Operating temperature conditions -20 ~ 105 °C (-4 ~ 221 °F)
Storage temperature conditions -40 ~ 125 °C (-40 ~ 257 °F)
Coolant temperature Below 75 °C (167 °F)

Coolant
Item Specifications
Approx. 4.1 ~ 4.2 L
Without heat pump (1.08 ~ 1.11 U.S.gal., 4.33 ~ 4.44 U.S.qt., 3.61 ~
3.70 lmp.qt.)
Coolant capacity
Approx. 4.6 ~ 4.7 L
With heat pump (1.21 ~ 1.24 U.S.gal., 4.86 ~ 4.97 U.S.qt., 4.05 ~
4.14 lmp.qt.)

Tightening Torque
Motor & Gear Differential Unit
Item Quantity N.m kgf.m lb-ft
Under cover mounting bolts 6 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.9 ~ 8.7
Side cover mounting bolts 4 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.9 ~ 8.7
Power electric frame RH support bracket
2 78.5 ~ 98.1 8.0 ~ 10.0 57.9 ~ 72.3
bolts
Power electric frame RH support bracket nuts 4 78.5 ~ 98.1 8.0 ~ 10.0 57.9 ~ 72.3
Power electric frame LH support bracket
2 88.3 ~ 107.9 9.0 ~ 11.0 65.1 ~ 79.6
bolts
Power electric frame LH support bracket nuts 2 49.0 ~ 63.7 5.0 ~ 6.5 36.2 ~ 47.0
Motor mounting bracket through bolt 1 107.9 ~ 127.5 11.0 ~ 13.0 79.6 ~ 94.0
Motor mounting bracket bolt 3 63.7 ~ 83.4 6.5 ~ 8.5 47.0 ~ 61.5
Reduction gear mounting bracket through
1 107.9 ~ 127.5 11.0 ~ 13.0 79.6 ~ 94.0
bolt
Reduction gear mounting bracket bolts 3 63.7 ~ 83.4 6.5 ~ 8.5 47.0 ~ 61.5
Rear roll mounting bracket through bolt 1 107.9 ~ 127.5 11.0 ~ 13.0 79.6 ~ 94.0
Rear roll mounting bracket bolt 3 63.7 ~ 83.4 6.5 ~ 8.5 47.0 ~ 61.5

Motor Cooling System

Item Quantity N.m kgf.m lb-ft
Cooling fan assembly mounting bolt 2 4.9 ~ 7.8 0.5 ~ 0.8 3.6 ~ 5.8
Resistor mounting bolt 1 1.77 ~ 2.45 0.18 ~ 0.25 1.30 ~ 1.81
Cooling fan motor mounting bolt 3 3.9 ~ 5.9 0.4 ~ 0.6 2.9 ~ 4.3
Radiator upper bracket mounting bolt 4 8.8 ~ 10.8 0.9 ~ 1.1 6.5 ~ 8.0
Condenser bracket mounting bolt 2 5.9 ~ 9.8 0.6 ~ 1.0 4.3 ~ 7.2
Electric Water Pump (EWP) assembly
3 8.8 ~ 10.8 0.9 ~ 1.1 6.5 ~ 8.0
mounting bolt
Reservoir tank mounting bolt 2 7.8 ~ 11.8 0.8 ~ 1.2 5.8 ~ 8.7

Traction Motor System

Motor Assembly
Overview
Page 11 sur 61

Drive motor in EV is a system that generates drive power in a vehicle that does not have an engine. Accordingly, it generates high power
output for acceleration, uphill, and high speed driving with almost no sound. During deceleration, the motor acts as an alternator and
generates electricity to recharge the high voltage battery. This system improves fuel efficiency and increases driving distance. Drive force
generated by the motor is transferred to the wheels via reducer linked to the rotor shaft and the drive shaft.

Major Features of Drive Motor

• Power (Discharge) : Drive force is generated through electric energy stored in a battery.
• Regenerative Braking (Recharge): Kinetic energy created during deceleration is converted to electric energy by using the drive motor as
an alternator, and converted energy is used to recharge the battery.

Energy Flowchart
• When driving

• When the regenerative braking system operates

Traction Motor System

Troubleshooting
Failure Cause Inspection Item
– Excessive air in coolant channel
Overheat due to insufficient – Bleed air with GDS and refill coolant
– Insufficient coolant
coolant – Hose clamping, radiator leakage, etc.
– Coolant leakage
– Electric Water Pump (EWP), Cooling Fan
Page 12 sur 61

Overheat due to component – Cooling Fan or Electric Water Pump (EWP)

malfunction failure
Overheating due to clogged
– Clogged coolant channel – Inside coolant channel
coolant channel
– High voltage cable disconnection
(High Voltage Junction Box - On Board Charger – High voltage cable connection
Power Electric related component (OBC) - Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU) –
Drive Motor) – Signal connector connection
failure
– Disconnected signal connector – CAN Line wiring
– Faulty CAN wiring insulation
– Faulty power electric related component
insulation – High Voltage Junction Box, On Board Charger
Low insulation resistance (OBC), Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU),
* If one component is not insulated, it may cause Drive Motor, High Voltage Cable
damage in another component.

Traction Motor System

Removal and Installation

1. Remove the power electric cover (A).

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Traction Motor System

Components
Page 13 sur 61

1. Side cover (RH) 3.Side cover (LH)

2. Under cover

Traction Motor System

Removal and Installation

Under Cover
1. Remove the under cover (A).
Tightening torque :
7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 14 sur 61

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Side Cover
1. Remove the under cover.
2. Remove the side cover (A).
Tightening torque :
7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
[RH]

[LH]

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Traction Motor System

Components
Page 15 sur 61

1. Power electric frame RH support bracket 4. Reduction gear mounting bracket

2. Power electric frame LH support bracket 5. Rear roll mounting bracket
3. Motor mounting bracket

Traction Motor System

Removal and Installation

Power Electric Frame RH Support Bracket
1. Remove the under cover.
(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Under Cover")
2. Install the jack under the motor.
Page 16 sur 61

Put the rubber block between the jack and motor to avoid damaging the motor.
3. Remove the power electric frame RH support bracket (A).
Tightening torque :
78.5 ~ 98.1 N.m (8.0 ~ 10.0 kgf.m, 57.9 ~ 72.3 lb-ft)

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Power Electric Frame LH Support Bracket

1. Remove the auxiliary 12V battery and auxiliary 12V battery tray.
(Refer to Vehicle Control System - "Auxiliary 12V Battery")
2. Remove the under cover.
(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Under Cover")
3. Install the jack under the reduction gear.

Put the rubber block between the jack and reduction gear to avoid damaging the reduction gear.
4. Remove the plug (A).
Page 17 sur 61

5. Remove the power electric frame LH support bracket (A).

Tightening torque
Bolt (B) : 88.3 ~ 107.9 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6 lb-ft)
Bolt (C) : 49.0 ~ 63.7 N.m (5.0 ~ 6.5 kgf.m, 36.2 ~ 47.0 lb-ft)

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Motor Mounting Bracket

1. Remove the under cover.
(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Under Cover")
2. Install the jack under the motor.

Put the rubber block between the jack and motor to avoid damaging the motor.
3. Separate the reservoir tank (A) to obtain space for remove the motor mounting bracket bolt.
Tightening torque
7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
Page 18 sur 61

4. Separate the electric water pump (EWP) (A) to obtain space for remove the motor mounting bracket bolt.
Tightening torque :
8.8 ~ 10.8 N.m (0.9 ~ 1.1 kgf.m, 6.5 ~ 8.0 lb-ft)

5. Remove the motor mounting bracket (A).

Tightening torque
Bolt (B) : 107.9 ~ 127.5 N.m (11.0 ~ 13.0 kgf.m, 79.6 ~ 94.0 lb-ft)
Bolt (C) : 63.7 ~ 83.4 N.m (6.5 ~ 8.5 kgf.m, 47.0 ~ 61.5 lb-ft)

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Reduction Gear Mounting Bracket

Page 19 sur 61

1. Remove the under cover.

(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Under Cover")
2. Install the jack under the reduction gear.

Put the rubber block between the jack and reduction gear to avoid damaging the reduction gear.
3. Remove the Auxiliary 12V Battery and Auxiliary 12V Battery tray.
(Refer to Vehicle Control System - "Auxiliary 12V Battery")
4. Remove the reduction gear mounting bracket (A).
Tightening torque
Bolt (B) : 107.9 ~ 127.5 N.m (11.0 ~ 13.0 kgf.m, 79.6 ~ 94.0 lb-ft)
Bolt (C) : 63.7 ~ 83.4 N.m (6.5 ~ 8.5 kgf.m, 47.0 ~ 61.5 lb-ft)

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Rear Roll Mounting Bracket

1. Remove the under cover.
(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Under Cover")
2. Install the jack under the motor.
Page 20 sur 61

Put the rubber block between the jack and motor to avoid damaging the motor.
3. Remove the rear roll mounting bracket (A).
Tightening torque
Bolt (B) : 107.9 ~ 127.5 N.m (11.0 ~ 13.0 kgf.m, 79.6 ~ 94.0 lb-ft)
Bolt (C) : 63.7 ~ 83.4 N.m (6.5 ~ 8.5 kgf.m, 47.0 ~ 61.5 lb-ft)

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Traction Motor System

Description
Drive motor for EV is a system that generates power in an electric vehicle that has no engine. It generates high power (285Nm) and torque
(81.4kW) to provide necessary force for acceleration, uphill, and high speed driving. In addition, it provides comfortable driving environment
since it does not generates engine noise. When decelerating, the motor acts as an alternator to generate electricity and recharges the
vehicle installed high voltage battery. This improves efficiency and increases drive distance. Drive force generated by the motor is
transferred to the wheels via reducer linked to the rotor shaft and the drive shaft.

Operation
When 3-Phase AC current is supplied to the coil, spinning magnetic field is generated and pulls the permanent magnet in the rotor coil to
generate rotation force.
Page 21 sur 61

Traction Motor System

Components Location
Page 22 sur 61

1. High voltage joint box 4. Motor

2. On-board charger (OBC) 5. Reduction Gear
3. Electric power control unit (EPCU)
[Inverter + Low DC/DC Converter (LDC) + Vehicle Control Unit
(VCU)]

Components
Page 23 sur 61

1. Shaft 7. Stator core

2. Ball-bearing 8. Housing
3. Retainer 9. Coil
4. Plate 10. Rear cover
5. Rotor core 11. Sensor cover
6. Front cover 12. Motor position sensor [Resolver]

Traction Motor System

Removal and Installation

• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces.

• To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors carefully while holding the connector portion.

Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.

1. Shut off the high voltage circuit.
(Refer to Traction Motor System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedures")
2. Remove the auxiliary 12V battery and auxiliary 12V battery tray.
(Refer to Vehicle Control System - "Auxiliary 12V Battery")
Page 24 sur 61

3. Remove the power electric cover.

(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Power Electric Cover")
4. Remove the high voltage joint box.
(Refer to Battery Control System - "High Voltage Joint Box")
5. Remove the on-board charger (OBC).
(Refer to Battery Control System - "On-Board Charger (OBC)")
6. Remove the electric power control unit (EPCU).
(Refer to Vehicle Control System - "Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU)")
7. Disconnect the inhibitor switch connector (A).

8. Remove the shift cable (A) from the reduction gear.

Tightening torque :
Bolt (B) : 19.6 ~ 26.5 N.m (2.0 ~ 2.7 kgf.m, 14.5 ~ 19.5 lb-ft)
Bolt (C) : 8.8 ~ 13.7 N.m (0.9 ~ 1.4 kgf.m, 6.5 ~ 10.1 lb-ft)

9. Remove the nut (A) and then separate the A/C pipe.
Tightening torque :
7.8 ~ 11.8N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7lb-ft)

10. Remove the under cover and side cover.

(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Under Cover")
11. Drain the coolant.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Coolant")
12. Recover the refrigerant.
(Refer to Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning - "Air Conditioning System")
Page 25 sur 61

13. Disconnect the suction line (A) and discharge line (B) from the compressor.
[Without Heat Pump]

[With Heat Pump]

14. Remove the front driveshaft.

(Refer to Driveshaft and Axle - "Front Driveshaft")
15. Disconnect the coolant hose (A). [With Heat Pump]
16. Remove the bolts, and then separate the coolant 3way valve assembly (B). [With Heat Pump]
Tightening torque :
8.8 ~ 10.8N.m (0.9 ~ 1.1kgf.m, 6.5 ~ 8.0lb-ft)

17. Disconnect the motor position and temperature sensor connector (A).
Page 26 sur 61

18. Remove the motor mounting bracket bolt (A).

Tightening torque :
107.9 ~ 127.5 N.m (11.0 ~ 13.0 kgf.m, 79.6 ~ 94.0 lb-ft)

19. Remove the reduction gear support bracket (A).

Tightening torque
Bolt (B) : 107.9 ~ 127.5 N.m (11.0 ~ 13.0 kgf.m, 79.6 ~ 94.0 lb-ft)
Bolt (C) : 59.8 ~ 80.4 N.m (6.1 ~ 8.2 kgf.m, 44.1 ~ 59.3 lb-ft)

20. Remove the rear roll mounting bracket (A).

Tightening torque
Bolt (B) : 107.9 ~ 127.5 N.m (11.0 ~ 13.0 kgf.m, 79.6 ~ 94.0 lb-ft)
Bolt (C) : 63.7 ~ 83.4 N.m (6.5 ~ 8.5 kgf.m, 47.0 ~ 61.5 lb-ft)

21. Support the motor & reduction gear assembly with a floor jack.
22. Remove the power electric frame RH support bracket (A).
Tightening torque :
78.5 ~ 98.1 N.m (8.0 ~ 10.0 kgf.m, 57.9 ~ 72.3 lb-ft)
Page 27 sur 61

23. Remove the plug (A).

24. Remove the power electric frame LH support bracket (A).

Tightening torque
Bolt (B) : 88.3 ~ 107.9 N.m (9.0 ~ 11.0 kgf.m, 65.1 ~ 79.6 lb-ft)
Bolt (C) : 49.0 ~ 63.7 N.m (5.0 ~ 6.5 kgf.m, 36.2 ~ 47.0 lb-ft)

25. Remove the motor & reduction gear assembly by lifting vehicle.

• Before removing the motor & reduction gear assembly, make sure hoses and wire connectors are disconnected.
• When removing the motor & reduction gear assembly, be careful not to damage any surrounding parts or body components.
Page 28 sur 61

• Be careful not to damage high voltage connector.

26. Remove the motor support bracket (A).
Tightening torque :
53.0 ~ 60.8 N.m (5.4 ~ 6.2 kgf.m, 39.1 ~ 44.8 lb-ft)

27. Remove the reduction gear (A) from the motor.

Tightening torque :
42.2 ~ 53.9 N.m (4.3 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 31.1 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)

Cover the high voltage connector section with clean cloth or vinyl to keep out debris.

Inspection
[Phase Resistance]
1. Using a milliohm meter and check the resistance between lines (U, V, W).

Item Inspection part Specification Remark

U-V
Resistance Ordinary temperature
V-W 16.15 ~ 17.85 mΩ
(Line - Line) [20°C (68 °F)]
W-U

[Insulation Resistance]
Page 29 sur 61

1. Using a insulation resistance tester and check insulation resistance.

(1) Connect the negative terminal of insulation resistance tester to housing of the traction motor.
(2) Connect the positive terminal of insulation resistance tester to 3-phase (U, V, W) connector.
(3) Supply the DC 540V voltage through insulation resistance tester and then wait about 1 minute to measure the stable resistance
value.

Item Inspection part Specification Remark

Housing - U
Insulation resistance Housing - V More than 10 MΩ DC 540V, 1 minute
Housing - W

[Dielectric strength]
1. Using a withstanding voltage tester and check leakage current.
(1) Connect the negative terminal of withstanding voltage tester to housing of the traction motor.
(2) Connect the positive terminal of withstanding voltage tester to 3-phase (U, V, W) connector.
(3) Supply the AC 1600V voltage through withstanding voltage tester and then wait about 1 minute to measure the stable current value.

Item Inspection part Specification Remark

Housing - U
Dielectric strength Housing - V Below 11 mA AC 1600V, 1minute
Housing - W

Installation
1. Replace the new shaft O-ring (A).
Page 30 sur 61

2. Apply the grease on the spline part (A).

If grease coating is not applied, clanking noise may occur when shifting to P range, and may reduce the durability of the spline.
3. Install the other parts reverse order of removal.
4. Connect the 3-phase power cable of U, V, W in the correct position.

If the power cable is incorrectly assembled, it may result in serious damage in inverter, drive motor, and high voltage battery. In
addition, it may also cause injury to driver or service engineer. As a result, take caution when assembling the power cable.
5. Fill the coolant and then check the leakage.

Refill the motor cooling system with coolant and then perform the air bleeding using the GDS.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Coolant")
6. Install the motor assembly after Perform the "Initialization of Automatic Resolver Offset Calibration"

If "Initialization of Automatic Resolver Offset Calibration" is not reset after exchanging the motor, it may result in reduced max power
output as well as drive range.
(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Motor Position and Temperature Sensor")
Traction Motor System

Description
Motor Position Sensor
The accurate position of the rotor must be known at all times to ensure maximum output control of the motor. Like the CMP sensor on the
engine, it detects the position of the rotor in the motor.

Motor Temperature Sensor

The motor temperature has the large effect on the motor output. When the motor over heats, it’s IPM and stator coil may deform and their
performance may be affected. To prevent this, a temperature sensor is embedded in the motor to control the motor torque according to its
temperature.
Traction Motor System

Circuit Diagram
Page 31 sur 61

Traction Motor System

Removal and Installation

1. Remove the under cover.
(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Under Cover")
2. Disconnect the motor position and temperature sensor connector (A).

3. Using a multi tester, measure the phase resistance.

Page 32 sur 61

Test item Test part Inspection standard Remarks

R1-R2 26.5Ω ± 10 %
Motor position sensor S1-S3 87.0Ω ± 10 % 25°C (77 °F)
phase resistance
S2-S4 76.0Ω ± 10 %
Motor temperature sensor T1-T2 0.3118kΩ ± 3 % 150°C (302 °F)

Initialization of Automatic Resolver Offset Calibration

1. Turn ignition switch "OFF" and connect the GDS to the Data Link Connector.
2. P range & Turn ignition switch "ON" (Power button LED "Red"), Select "Vehicle S/W Management"
3. Perform the "Initialization of Automatic Resolver Offset Calibration".
Page 33 sur 61
Page 34 sur 61
Page 35 sur 61

Traction Motor System

Description
The motor, On-Board Charger (OBC), and Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU) that makes up the main system in EV generates high heat
when operating. Heat from these components can have negative effect on the performance of relevant parts. Furthermore, various
semiconductor parts in an EV may even melt due to high heat. As a result, proper cooling of these electrical units is essential. Electric Power
Control Unit (EPCU) monitors the operating temperature of various components and if necessary, activates the Electric Water Pump (EWP)
and circulates the coolant.

Coolant Flow
Page 36 sur 61

Traction Motor System

Components
Page 37 sur 61

1. Air guard 5. Radiator upper hose

2. A/C condenser 6. Radiator lower hose
3. Radiator 7. Reservoir tank
4. Cooling fan

Traction Motor System

Coolant Refilling And Bleeding

Never remove the reservoir cap when the high voltage system and electric device radiator is hot. Serious scalding could be caused by
hot fluid under high pressure escaping from the reservoir.

When pouring electric device coolant, be sure to shut the relay box lid and not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the paint. If
any coolant spills, rinse it off immediately.
1. Make sure the electric device system and electric device radiator are cool to the touch.
2. Remove reservoir cap (A).
Page 38 sur 61

3. Remove the under cover.

(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Under Cover")
4. Loosen the drain plug (A) and drain the coolant.

5. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.

6. After draining engine coolant in the reservoir tank, clean the tank.
7. Fill the reservoir with water through the reservoir cap and tighten the cap.

To most effectively bleed the air, pour the water slowly and press on the upper/lower radiator hoses.
8. Connect a GDS and then operate the Electric Water Pump (EWP).
Page 39 sur 61
Page 40 sur 61

9. Repeat steps 1 to 8 until the drained water runs clear.

Page 41 sur 61

10. Fill fluid mixture with coolant and water (50%) slowly through the reservoir cap. Push the coolant hoses of the radiator so as bleed air
easily.

• Use only genuine antifreeze/coolant.

12. When the Electric Water Pump (EWP) operates and electric device coolant circulates, refill electric device coolant through the coolant
filling bottle.
13. When the operational sound volume of the Electric Water Pump (EWP) becomes small and when no air bubbles can be seen in the
coolant filling bottle. Bleeding of the electric device cooling system is completed.

After air bleeding is completed make sure that electric device coolant in the coolant filling bottle flow without air bubble during the
EWP actuation. If the electric device coolant flow is not seen or air bubbles are still seen, repeat steps 10 to 13.
14. After air bleeding is completed, stop the Electric Water Pump (EWP), add electric device coolant to the “F” level on the electric device
reservoir and install the electric device reservoir cap and the electric device reservoir cap.

It takes time to bleed out all the air in the cooling system. Refill coolant when coolant gets cool completely, when recheck the
coolant level in the reservoir tank for 2~3 days after replacing coolant.
Coolant capacity
Without Heat Pump : Approx. 4.1 ~ 4.2 L (1.08 ~ 1.11 U.S.gal., 4.33 ~ 4.44 U,S,qt., 3.61 ~ 3.70 lmp.qt)
With Heat Pump : Approx. 4.6 ~ 4.7 L (1.22 ~ 1.24 U.S.gal., 4.86 ~ 4.97 U,S,qt., 4.05 ~ 4.14 lmp.qt)
Traction Motor System

Components
[Without Heat Pump]
Page 44 sur 61

1. Electric Water Pump (EWP) inlet hose 3. Reservoir tank

2. Reservoir tank

[With Heat Pump]

Page 45 sur 61

1. Electric Water Pump (EWP) inlet hose 3. Reservoir tank lower hose
2. Reservoir tank 4. Radiator lower hose

Traction Motor System

Removal and Installation

1. Remove the power electric cover.
(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Power Electric Cover")
2. Remove the under cover.
(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Under Cover")
3. Drain the coolant.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Coolant")
4. Remove the high voltage PTC heater cable fixing clip (A) from the reservoir tank.
Page 46 sur 61

5. Disconnect the coolant hose from the reservoir tank.

[Without Heat Pump]
(1) Disconnect the radiator lower hose (A).
(2) Disconnect the Electric Water Pump (EWP) inlet hose (B).

[With Heat Pump]

(1) Disconnect the radiator lower hose (A).
(2) Disconnect the Electric Water Pump (EWP) inlet hose (B).
(3) Disconnect the reservoir tank lower hose (C).

6. Remove the reservoir tank (A).

Tightening torque :
7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)
[Without Heat Pump]
Page 47 sur 61

[With Heat Pump]

When installing the reservoir tank, insert the hook to the insert hole of on-board charger (OBC).

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

8. Fill the reservoir with coolant.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Coolant")

Refill the motor cooling system with coolant and then perform the air bleeding using the GDS.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Coolant")

Inspection
Reservoir Cap
1. Remove the reservoir cap, wet its seal with coolant, and then install it on a pressure tester.
Page 48 sur 61

2. Apply a pressure of 93.16 ~ 122.58 kPa (0.95 ~ 1.25 kg/cm², 13.51 ~ 17.78 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.
4. If the pressure drops, replace the reservoir cap.

Reservoir Leakage Test

1. Wait until electric device system and electric device radiator are cool, then carefully remove the reservoir cap and fill the reservior with
motor coolant, then install it on the pressure tester.
2. Apply a pressure tester to the radiator and apply a pressure of 93.16 ~ 122.58kpa (0.95 ~ 1.25kg/cm², 13.51 ~ 17.78psi).

3. Inspect for motor coolant leaks and a drop in pressure.

4. Remove the tester and reinstall the reservoir cap.
Traction Motor System

Description
The cooling fan operates in 2 stages (HIGH/LOW). The electric power control unit (EPCU) controls the cooling fan according to the coolant
temperature, vehicle speed and A/C operation.
[Cooling fan operation conditions]
A/C pressure Vehicle speed Coolant temperature
A/C switch Cooling fan speed
[kgf/cm² G (psi G)] [km/h (mph)] [°C (°F)]
95 ~ 100 (203 ~ 212) LOW
V < 45 (28)
100 (212) or above HIGH
OFF ㅡ 95 ~ 100 (203 ~ 212) LOW
45 (28) ≤ V < 80 (49.7)
100 (212) or above HIGH
80 (49.7) ≤ V 105 (221) or above HIGH
ON P < 6 (85.3) All 105 (221) or above HIGH
45 ~ 100 (113 ~ 212) LOW
V < 45 (28)
100 (212) or above HIGH
6 (85.3) ≤ P < 12 (170.7) 95 ~ 100 (203 ~ 212) LOW
45 (28) ≤ V < 80 (49.7)
100 (212) or above HIGH
80 (49.7) ≤ V 105 (221) or above HIGH
12 (170.7) ≤ P < 15.5 -30 ~ 95 (-22 ~ 203) LOW
(120.5) V < 45 (28)
95 (203) or above HIGH
95 ~ 100 (203 ~ 212) LOW
45 (28) ≤ V < 80 (49.7)
100 (212) or above HIGH
Page 49 sur 61

80 (49.7) ≤ V 105 (221) or above HIGH

15.5 (120.5) ≤ P All -30 (-22) or above HIGH

Traction Motor System

Components

1. Cooling fan mounting retainer 4. Fan motor

2. Torque washer 5. Cooling fan shroud
3. Cooling fan 6. Cooling fan resistor

Traction Motor System

Specifications
Item Specification
Fan type PULLER
Fan speed control Resistor
Air flow rate [㎥/h (yd³/h)] 1,760 (2,302) -8% min.
Fan speed (rpm) 1,960 ± 8%
Current (A) 12.5 + 10% max.
Page 50 sur 61

Traction Motor System

Circuit Diagram

Traction Motor System

Removal and Installation

Cooling fan assembly
1. Disconnect the Auxiliary 12V Battery negative terminal.
2. Remove the under cover.
(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Under Cover")
3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (A) and then remove the motor connector (B) from the connector bracket (C).
4. Remove the normal charge wiring fixing clip (D) from cooling fan shroud.

5. Separate the radiator upper hose (A) from the hose fixing bracket (B).
Page 51 sur 61

6. Remove the cooling fan assembly mounting bolt (A).

Tightening torque :
4.9 ~ 7.9 N.m (0.5 ~ 0.8 kgf.m, 3.6 ~ 5.8 lb-ft)
[RH]

[LH]

7. Remove the cooling fan (A) from the vehicle.

8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Resistor
1. Disconnect the resistor connector (A).
Page 52 sur 61

2. Remove the resistor (A) from the cooling fan shroud.

Tightening torque :
1.8 ~ 2.5 N.m (0.18 ~ 0.25 kgf.m, 1.3 ~ 1.8 lb-ft)

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Disassembly
1. Remove the cooling fan (A) from the cooling fan assembly.

2. Disconnect the resistor connector (A).

3. Remove the fan motor (A) from the cooling fan shroud.
Tightening torque :
Page 53 sur 61

3.9 ~ 5.9 N.m (0.4 ~ 0.6 kgf.m, 2.9 ~ 4.3 lb-ft)

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Inspection
Fan Motor
1. Disconnect the fan motor connector from the resistor.
2. Connect the battery voltage to the "+" terminal and ground to "-" terminal.
3. Check the cooling fan motor operates well.
Traction Motor System

Components
Page 54 sur 61

1. Radiator 4. Radiator upper bracket (RH)

2. Mounting insulator 5. Radiator lower hose
3.Radiator upper bracket (LH) 6. Radiator upper hose

Traction Motor System

Removal and Installation

(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Power Electric Cover")

4. Remove the under cover.
(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Under Cover")
5. Drain the coolant.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Coolant")
6. Remove the cooling fan.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Cooling Fan")
7. Disconnect the quick charge cable (A) and normal charge cable (B).

Disconnect the quick charge cable and normal charge cable as the procedures below.
[Quick charge cable]

[Normal charge cable]

8. Disconnect the radiator upper hose (A).

Page 56 sur 61

9. Disconnect the radiator lower hose (A).

10. Remove the front bumper cover.

(Refer to Body - "Front Bumper Cover")
11. Disconnect the condenser connector (A). [Heat Pump Type]

12. Remove the ambient temperature sensor (A).

13. Remove the air guards (A).

[RH]
Page 57 sur 61

[LH]

14. Remove charging cable mounting bracket (A).

Tightening torque :
10.8 ~ 13.7 N.m (1.1 ~ 1.4 kgf.m, 8.0 ~ 10.1 lb-ft)

15. Remove the radiator upper bracket (A).

Tightening torque :
8.8 ~ 10.8 N.m (0.9 ~ 1.1 kgf.m, 6.5 ~ 8.0 lb-ft)
[RH]

[LH]
Page 58 sur 61

16. Remove the condenser mounting bracket bolt (A).

Tightening torque :
5.9 ~ 9.8 N.m (0.6 ~ 1.0 kgf.m, 4.3 ~ 7.2 lb-ft)
[RH]

[LH]

17. Separate the condenser from the radiator.

18. Pull the radiator (A) upward and remove it from motor room.

19. Install in the reverse order of removal.

20. Fill the reservoir with coolant.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Coolant")
Page 59 sur 61

Refill the motor cooling system with coolant and then perform the air bleeding using the GDS.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Coolant")
Traction Motor System

Description
• The Electric Water Pump (EWP) circulates coolant of the cooling circuit for the Motor system [Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU), Motor,
On-Board Charger (OBC)].
• When the Motor system coolants temperature rise over the threshold [set in the Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU)], Electric Power
Control Unit (EPCU) sends the command signal to Electric Water Pump (EWP) by CAN communication to operate Electric Water Pump
(EWP), and the temperature below the set value then sends stop signal. Electric Water Pump (EWP) sends the status information of
itself to Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU) whether Electric Water Pump (EWP) is in fail or not by CAN communication
• Coolant Flow

Traction Motor System

Components
Page 60 sur 61

1. Electric Water Pump (EWP) inlet hose 5. Electric Water Pump (EWP) upper rubber pad
2. Electric Water Pump (EWP) outlet hose 6. Electric Water Pump (EWP) upper rubber pad
3. Electric Water Pump (EWP) 7. Electric Water Pump (EWP) lower bracket
4. Electric Water Pump (EWP) upper bracket

Traction Motor System

Specifications
Item Specification
Construction Motor Drive
Operation condition Speed control
Speed 500 ~ 3740 rpm
Voltage (V) 13.5 ~ 14.5 V
Capacity min. 12 lpm (0.6 bar)
Rated current (A) Below 2.5 A (14 V)
Operation temperature -20 ~ 105 °C
Storage temperature -40 ~ 125 °C
Coolant temperature Below 75 °C

Traction Motor System

Page 61 sur 61

Removal and Installation

1. Disconnect the Auxiliary 12V Battery negative terminal.
2. Remove the under cover.
(Refer to Motor & Reduction Gear - "Under Cover")
3. Drain the coolant.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Coolant")
4. Disconnect the electric water pump (EWP) connector (A).
5. Disconnect the electric water pump (EWP) inlet hose (B).
6. Disconnect the electric water pump (EWP) outlet hose (C).

7. Remove the electric water pump (EWP) assembly (A).

Tightening torque :
8.8 ~ 10.8 N.m (0.9 ~ 1.1 kgf.m, 6.5 ~ 8.0 lb-ft)

8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

9. Fill the reservoir with coolant.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Coolant")

Refill the motor cooling system with coolant and then perform the air bleeding using the GDS.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Coolant")
Page 1 sur 34

Reduction Gear System

Safety Precaution

Sinse Electric Vehicle contains a high voltage, battery mishandling the high voltage system or vehicle may lead to a serious accident
including electric shock and electric leakage.

• All the high voltage wiring and connectors are in orange.

• Inform of possible danger of high voltage by placing a "high voltage caution" sign on the vehicle as in the image below.
Page 2 sur 34
Page 3 sur 34

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Insulation gloves Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage
components
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]
Page 4 sur 34

Insulation shoes

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation clothes
components

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses

Used in the following cases :

• During Removal & installation or inspection of the high
voltage battery terminals or wiring, which spark might happen.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

All removed high voltage components are placed on an

Insulation mat
insulation mat to prevent safety accidents.

Insulation sheet is used to cover high voltage components to

Insulation sheet protect people not wearing personal protective equipment from
safety accidents.

Warning tape Used for infomring that it is dangerous to come over this line.
Page 5 sur 34

Personal Protective Equipment Inspection

• Check that the personal protective equipment is not damaged.

• Check that the insulation gloves are not torn or damaged.
• Wear the insulation glove after removing moisture.

Fold the insulation glove as above.

Fold again 3~4 times to make it airtight.
Squeeze the inflated glove to see if the glove is torn or damaged.
Caution when repairing the power cable

Precautions when handling high voltage battery

• Battery Control System - Refer to "High Voltage Battery Handling Guide"

Precautions in case of fire in High Voltage Battery System

Precautions in case of high voltage battery gas and/or electrolyte leakage

Page 6 sur 34

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug.
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• Gas is hydrogen and alkali vapor. If the fire occurred indoor, ventilate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline
solution.
• If leaked vapor or liquid gets in your eye, immediately clean with running water, then get medical attention.
• In case of gas leakage due to high temperature, do NOT use the battery until the high voltage battery cools down to room temperature.

Precautions when handling vehicle after an accident

Preparations when servicing accident affected vehicle

Precautions when EV is unattended for a prolonged period

Hybrid Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery / Charging Precautions

If the POE oil in the system gets mixed with PAG oil, it may result in dielectric breakdown due to decreased volumetric resistivity and
inoperative A/C compressor, disabling the A/C compressor.

Reduction Gear System

High Voltage Shut-off Procedure

3. After loosening the nut, remove the safety plug service cover (A).
Safety plug service cover mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Remove the safety plug (A).

Remove the safety plug in the follwing order.

Page 8 sur 34

(3) Remove the high voltage cable (A).

(4) Measure the voltage between the inverter terminals.

Less than 30V : High voltage circuit properly shut
More than 30V : Faulty on high voltage circuit
Page 9 sur 34

Specifications
Item Specifications
Reduction gear ratio 8.206
Maximum torque 285 Nm
Maximum RPM 10500 RPM

Tightening Torques
Item N.m kgf.m lb-ft
Reduction gear mounting bolt 42.2 ~ 53.9 4.3 ~ 5.5 31.1 ~ 39.8
Reduction gear front mounting bolt 63.7 ~ 83.4 6.5 ~ 8.5 47.0 ~ 61.5
Reduction gear front bracket
107.9 ~ 127.5 11.0 ~ 13.0 79.6 ~ 94.0
bolts / nut
63.7 ~ 83.4 6.5 ~ 8.5 47.0 ~ 61.5
Page 10 sur 34

Reduction gear rear bracket bolts /

nut
Manual control lever mounting
9.8 ~ 13.7 1.0 ~ 1.4 7.2 ~ 10.1
bolts
Inhibitor switch mounting bolt 9.8 ~ 11.8 1.0 ~ 1.2 7.2 ~ 8.7
Shift cable bracket mounting bolt 19.6 ~ 16.5 2.0 ~ 2.7 14.5 ~ 19.5
Shift lever assembly mounting bolt 9.8 ~ 13.7 1.0 ~ 1.4 7.2 ~ 10.1

Lubricants
Item Specified lubricant Quantity
1.2 ~ 1.4 L (0.317 ~ 0.370 U.S gal., 1.27 ~
Reduction gear fluid SAE 75W/API 85,GL-4
1.48 U.S.qt., 1.06 ~ 1.23 Imp.qt.)

Reduction Gear System

Special Service Tools

Tool Name / Number Illustration Description

Oil seal installer

A: 09365-E1100 (Installer) Installation of transaxle case oil seal.
B: 09231-H1100 (Handle)

Inhibitor switch guide pin

Inhibitor neutral fixed.
0K948-E4000

Commercial Tool
Tool Name Illustration Description

Used for holding motor assembly when

Auto bar
removing / installing gear drive unit

Reduction Gear System

Component
Page 11 sur 34

1. Differential Oil Seal 3. Oil Drain Plug

2. Oil Filler Plug

Reduction Gear System

Inspection
1. Lift the vehicle.
2. Remove the under cover.
(Refer to Traction Motor System - "under cover")
3. Remove the oil filler plug (A).
Page 12 sur 34

4. Check the oil condition and then oil level (A).

If the oil level is low, supplement the oil up to filler plug hole.
5. Install the oil filler plug (A).

Must replace with new gasket when installing the drain plug.

Replacement

Must replace with new gasket when installing the drain plug.
4. Remove the oil filler plug (A).

5. Supplement up to oil filler plug hole.

6. Install the oil filler plug (A).

7. Install the under cover.

(Refer to Traction Motor System - "under cover")
Reduction Gear System

Description
Page 14 sur 34

• The role of reduction gear is similar to transmission. But unlike the transmission which has various gear ratio, the reduction gear
transfers the motor power with fixed reduction gear ratio.
• The reduction gear increases the torque by reducing the motor speed.
• There are 5 gears inlcuding parking gear in the inner of reduction gear and the MT oil is used for reduction gear. And no need to change
the oil.

Reduction Gear System

Components Location
Page 15 sur 34

1. Motor assembly 2. Reduction Gear

Components
Page 16 sur 34

1. Differential Oil Seal 3. Oil Drain Plug

2. Oil Filler Plug

Reduction Gear System

Removal

• Use the fender cover to prevent the damage on the painting.

• Disconnect the connector & wiring to prevent the damage.

(Refer to EV Battery System - "High voltage joint box")

5. Remove the on-board charger (OBC).
(Refer to Battery Control System - "On-Board Charger (OBC)")
6. Remove the electric power control unit (EPCU).
(Refer to Vehicle Control System - "Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU)")
7. Disconnect the inhibitor switch connector (A).

8. Remove the shift cable (C) by loosening the bolts (A) and nut (B).
Tightening torque:
(A): 19.6 ~ 16.5 N.m ( 2.0 ~ 2.7 kgf.m, 14.5 ~ 19.5 lb-ft)
(B): 8.8 ~ 13.7 N.m (0.9 ~ 1.4 kgf.m, 6.5 ~ 10.1 lb-ft)

9. Remove the nut (A) and then separate the A/C pipe.
Tightening torque:
7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m ( 0.8 ~ 1.2kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

10. Remove the reduction gear upper mounting bolts (A).

Tightening torque:
42.2 ~ 53.9 N.m ( 4.3 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 31.1 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)
Page 18 sur 34

11. Remove the front mounting bracket upper mounting bolt (A).
Tightening torque:
63.7 ~ 83.4 N.m ( 6.5 ~ 8.5kgf.m, 47.0 ~ 61.5 lb-ft)

12. Remove the electric A / C compressor.

(Refer to Heating,Ventilation And Air Conditioning - "Electric A / C Compressor")
13. Fix motor by using the auto bar (A).

14. Remove the drive shaft.

(Refer to Driveshaft and axle - "Front Driveshaft")
15. Fix reduction gear, and then remove the reduction gear lower mounting bracket mounting bolts (A) and (B) .
Tightening torque:
(A): 63.7 ~ 83.4 N.m ( 6.5 ~ 8.5 kgf.m, 47.0 ~ 61.5 lb-ft)
(B): 42.2 ~ 53.9 N.m ( 4.3 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 31.1 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)
Page 19 sur 34

16. Remove the reduction gear mounting bracket (C).

Tightening torque:
(A): 107.9 ~ 127.5 N.m ( 11.0 ~ 13.0 kgf.m, 79.6 ~ 94.0 lb-ft)
(B): 63.7 ~ 83.4 N.m ( 6.5 ~ 8.5 kgf.m, 47.0 ~ 61.5 lb-ft)

17. Remove the reduction gear lower mounting bolts (A).

Tightening torque:
42.2 ~ 53.9 N.m ( 4.3 ~ 5.5 kgf.m, 31.1 ~ 39.8 lb-ft)

18. Remove the reduction gear by using the jack.

Installation
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.

If oil leak happens by damage on the oil seal, replace with new oil seal.
When installing the oil seal, use the oil seal installer(09365-E1100).
2. Reduction gear oil supplement by install the reduction gear.
(Refer to Reduction Gear Assembly - "oil")
3. Fill the reservoir with coolant.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Coolant")
Reduction Gear System

Description
Page 20 sur 34

Inhibitor Switch monitors the lever's position(P, R, N, D) and is used to control gear setting signals.

Reduction Gear System

Specifications
▷ Type: Combination of output signals from 4 terminals
Power supply (V) 12
Output type Combination of output signals

Signal Code Table

P P-R R R-N N N-D D
S1 12V 12V 0 0 0 0 0
S2 0 12V 12V 12V 0 0 0
S3 0 0 0 12V 12V 12V 0
S4 0 0 0 0 0 12V 12V

Reduction Gear System

Circuit Diagram
Page 21 sur 34

Reduction Gear System

Inspection

Thoroughly check connectors for looseness, poor connection, bending, corrosion, contamination, deterioration, or damage.

Power Circuit Inspection

1. Disconnect the Inhibitor switch connector.
2. Ignition KEY "ON"" & Engine "OFF".
3. Measure voltge between supplied power and ground at inhibitor circuit.
Specification : Approx. 12V

Signal Circuit Inspection

1. Connect the Inhibitor switch connector.
2. Ignition KEY "ON" & Engine "OFF".
3. Measure voltages between each terminal and chassis ground during shift lever changed "P, R, N, D".
Specification : See below "Signal Code Table"
Signal Code Table
P P-R R R-N N N-D D
Signal "1" 12V 12V 0 0 0 0 0
Signal "2" 0 12V 12V 12V 0 0 0
Page 22 sur 34

Signal "3" 0 0 0 12V 12V 12V 0

Signal "4" 0 0 0 0 0 12V 12V

Removal

• Use the fender cover to prevent the damage on the painting.

• Disconnect the connector & wiring to prevent the damage.

• Be sure to read and follow the “General Safety Information and Caution” before doing any work related with the high voltage
system. Failure to follow the safety instructions may result in serious electrical injuries.
• Be sure to shut off the high voltage before doing any work related with the high voltage system(Refer to "High Voltage Shut-off
Procedure"). Failure to follow the safety instructions may result in serious electrical injuries.
1. Place the shift lever into the "N" position.
2. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Reduction Gear System. - " High Voltage Shut-off Procedures")
3. Remove the auxiliary 12V battery and auxiliary 12V battery tray.
(Refer to Vehicle Control System - "Auxiliary 12V Battery")
4. Remove the power electric cover.
(Refer to Traction Motor System - "Power Electric Cover")
5. Remove the high voltage joint box.
(Refer to EV Battery System - "High voltage joint box")
6. Remove the on-board charger (OBC).
(Refer to Battery Control System - "On-Board Charger (OBC)")
7. Remove the electric power control unit (EPCU).
(Refer to Vehicle Control System - "Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU)")
8. Disconnect the inhibitor switch connector (A).

9. Remove the shift cable (C) by loosening the bolts (A) and nut (B).

10. Loosen the nut (A) and then remove the manual control lever (B).
Page 23 sur 34

11. Loosen the nut (B) and then remove the inhibitor switch(A).

Installation
1. Place the shift lever into the "N" position.
2. Install the inhibitor switch (A) and then tighten the bolt (B).

Fasten the bolt loosely to adjust.

3. Install the manual control lever (B) and then tighten the nut (A)..

Fasten the bolt loosely to adjust.

Page 24 sur 34

4. Align the hole (A) in the manual control lever with the "N" position hole (B) of the inhibitor switch and then insert the SST inhibitor switch
guide pin (0K948-E40000).

5. Tighten the nut (A) and the bolt 2 ea (B) with the specific torque.
Tightening torque:
(A): 8.8 ~ 13.7 N.m (0.9 ~ 1.4 kgf.m, 6.5 ~ 10.1 lb-ft)
(B): 9.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (1.0 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 7.2 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

6. Remove the SST (0K948-E40000).

7. Connect the inhibitor switch connector (A).

8. Install the shift cable and then tighten the nut (B).
Page 25 sur 34

Fasten the bolt loosely to adjust.

9. Push the shift cable adhere to the direction of the arrow and then tighten the nut.
Tightening torque:
8.8 ~ 13.7 N.m (0.9 ~ 1.4 kgf.m, 7.2 ~ 10.1 lb-ft)

10. Install the electric power control unit (EPCU).

(Refer to Vehicle Control System - "Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU)")
11. Install the on-board charger (OBC).
(Refer to Battery Control System - "On-Board Charger (OBC)")
12. Install the high voltage joint box.
(Refer to EV Battery System - "High voltage joint box")
13. Install the power electric cover.
(Refer to Traction Motor System - "Power Electric Cover")
14. Install the auxiliary 12V battery and auxiliary 12V battery tray.
(Refer to Vehicle Control System - "Auxiliary 12V Battery")
15. Install the high voltage.
(Refer to Reduction Gear System. - " High Voltage Shut-off Procedures")
Reduction Gear System

Components
Page 26 sur 34

1. Shifter lever assembly 4. Key inter lock switch

2. Shift cable retainer 5. Manual mode switch housing
3. Shift cable assembly 6. Shift lock solenoid

Reduction Gear System

Removal
1. Remove the shift lever knob & boots assembly (A) by Pulling in the upside.
Page 27 sur 34

2. Remove the floor console assembly.

(Refer to Body - "Floor Console Assembly ")
3. Disconnect the shift lever switch connector (A).

4. Remove the wiring fastener (A) from the shift lever assembly.

5. Seperate the lever pin (B) and then remove the shift cable (A).

6. Remove the shift lever assembly (B) by loosening the bolts (A).
Tightening torque:
1.0 ~ 1.4 kgf.m
Page 28 sur 34

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

When installing, set room side shift lever and T/M side lever to "N" position.

Replacement
Shift lock solenoid replacement
1. Remove the plastic bracket (B) by loosening the screw (A).

2. Remove the shift lock solenoid (A) from the shift lever assembly.

3. Disconnect the key inter lock switch (B) by removeing the plastic bracket (A).
Page 29 sur 34

4. Disconnect the shift lever main connector (A).

5. Remove the wiring fixed bracket in the main connector.

6. Remove the shift lock solenoid wiring from the main connector

Be sure to check the wiring color before disconnecting the wiring.

Pin Function
3 Shift lock solenoid (-)
4 Shift lock solenoid (+)
9 Key inter lock switch (-)
10 Key inter lock switch (+)

Key inter lock switch

1. Remove the plastic bracket (B) by loosening the screw (A).
Page 30 sur 34

2. Remove the shift lock solenoid (A) from the shift lever assembly.

3. Disconnect the key inter lock switch (B) by removing the plastic bracket (A).

4. Disconnect the shift lever main connector (A).

5. Remove the wiring fixed bracket in the main connector.

Page 31 sur 34

6. Remove the shift lock solenoid wiring from the main connector

Be sure to check the wiring color before disconnecting the wiring.

Pin Function
3 Shift lock solenoid (-)
4 Shift lock solenoid (+)
9 Key inter lock switch (-)
10 Key inter lock switch (+)

Reduction Gear System

Components
Page 32 sur 34

1. Shifter lever assembly 4. key inter lock switch

2. Shift cable retainer 5. Manual mode switch housing
3. Shift cable assembly 6. Shift lock solenoid

Reduction Gear System

Removal

• Use the fender cover to prevent the damage on the painting.

• Disconnect the connector & wiring to prevent the damage.

2. Remove the floor console assembly.

(Refer to Body - "Floor Console Assembly ")
3. Seperate the lever pin (B) and then remove the shift cable (A).

4. Remove the retainer (A) by loosening the nuts (B).

Tightening torque:
9.8 ~ 13.7 N.m ( 1.0 ~ 1.4 kgf.m, 7.2 ~ 10.1 lb-ft)

5. Shut off the high voltage.

(Refer to Reduction Gear System. - " High Voltage Shut-off Procedures")
6. Remove the auxiliary 12V battery and auxiliary 12V battery tray.
(Refer to Vehicle Control System - "Auxiliary 12V Battery")
7. Remove the power electric cover.
(Refer to Traction Motor System - "Power Electric Cover")
8. Remove the high voltage joint box.
(Refer to EV Battery System - "High voltage joint box")
9. Remove the on-board charger (OBC).
(Refer to Battery Control System - "On-Board Charger (OBC)")
10. Remove the electric power control unit (EPCU).
(Refer to Vehicle Control System - "Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU)")
11. Disconnect the inhibitor switch connector (A).
Page 34 sur 34

12. Remove the shift cable (C) by loosening the bolts (A) and nut (B).
Tightening torque:
(A): 19.6 ~ 16.5 N.m ( 2.0 ~ 2.7 kgf.m, 14.5 ~ 19.5 lb-ft)
(B): 8.8 ~ 13.7 N.m (0.9 ~ 1.4 kgf.m, 6.5 ~ 10.1 lb-ft)

13. Remove the shift cable by pulling it toward the interior.

Installation
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Install the cable after placing the shift lever and the transaxle manual control lever in the N position.
Page 1 sur 33

Vehicle Control System

Safety Precaution

Sinse Electric Vehicle contains a high voltage, battery mishandling the high voltage system or vehicle may lead to a serious accident
including electric shock and electric leakage.

• All the high voltage wiring and connectors are in orange.

• Inform of possible danger of high voltage by placing a "high voltage caution" sign on the vehicle as in the image below.
Page 2 sur 33
Page 3 sur 33

Personal Protective Equipment

Name Illustration Description

Insulation gloves Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage
components
[Insulation performance : 1000V / 300A or above]
Page 4 sur 33

Insulation shoes

Used when inspecting or working on the high voltage

Insulation clothes
components

Insulation helmet

Safety glasses

Used in the following cases :

• During Removal & installation or inspection of the high
voltage battery terminals or wiring, which spark might happen.
• When working on the high voltage battery pack assembly.

Face shield

All removed high voltage components are placed on an

Insulation mat
insulation mat to prevent safety accidents.

Insulation sheet is used to cover high voltage components to

Insulation sheet protect people not wearing personal protective equipment from
safety accidents.

Warning tape Used for infomring that it is dangerous to come over this line.
Page 5 sur 33

Personal Protective Equipment Inspection

• Check that the personal protective equipment is not damaged.

• Check that the insulation gloves are not torn or damaged.
• Wear the insulation glove after removing moisture.

Fold the insulation glove as above.

Fold again 3~4 times to make it airtight.
Squeeze the inflated glove to see if the glove is torn or damaged.
Caution when repairing the power cable

Precautions when handling high voltage battery

• Battery Control System - Refer to "High Voltage Battery Handling Guide"

Precautions in case of fire in High Voltage Battery System

Precautions in case of high voltage battery gas and/or electrolyte leakage

Page 6 sur 33

• Turn OFF the Button Start. Then keep the Smart Key 2m or farther away from the vehicle to prevent unintended engine start.
• If the fire is at initial stage, quickly turn OFF the Safety Plug.
(refer to "High Voltage Shut-off Procedure").
• Gas is hydrogen and alkali vapor. If the fire occurred indoor, ventilate the area immediately and evacuate to a safe location.
• If leaked liquid comes in contact with your skin, neutralize the area immediately with boron, and then clean with running water or saline
solution.
• If leaked vapor or liquid gets in your eye, immediately clean with running water, then get medical attention.
• In case of gas leakage due to high temperature, do NOT use the battery until the high voltage battery cools down to room temperature.

Precautions when handling vehicle after an accident

Preparations when servicing accident affected vehicle

Precautions when EV is unattended for a prolonged period

Hybrid Vehicle Refrigerant Recovery / Charging Precautions

If the POE oil in the system gets mixed with PAG oil, it may result in dielectric breakdown due to decreased volumetric resistivity and
inoperative A/C compressor, disabling the A/C compressor.

Vehicle Control System

High Voltage Shut-off Procedure

3. After loosening the nut, remove the safety plug service cover (A).
Safety plug service cover mounting nut :7.8 ~ 11.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 8.7 lb-ft)

4. Remove the safety plug (A).

Remove the safety plug in the follwing order.

Page 8 sur 33

(3) Remove the high voltage cable (A).

(4) Measure the voltage between the inverter terminals.

Less than 30V : High voltage circuit properly shut
More than 30V : Faulty on high voltage circuit
Page 9 sur 33

Description
Electric vehicle is a vehicle that drives on electric energy. Unlike combustion engine vehicle, it does not use fossil fuel to generate drive force
but uses the electric energy stored in the high voltage battery mounted in the vehicle to power the vehicle. While combustion engine vehicle
generates emission gas, electric vehicle is an eco-friendly vehicle that has zero emission.
Page 10 sur 33

Electric vehicle operation principle and recharge method

Motor Drive Control

• VCU: Calculates motor torque command with consideration to usable battery power, usable motor torque, and driver demand (APS,
Brake SW, Shift Lever).
• BMS: Provides usable battery power and SOC data for calculating motor torque command by VCU.
• MCU: Provides usable motor torque for calculating motor torque command by VCU.
Creates Inverter PWM signal to generate motor torque command received from VCU.
Page 11 sur 33

Regenerative Brake Control

• AHB: Calculates total brake force based on driver demand (BPS) and then divides the force into hydraulic brake force and demanded
regenerative brake force.
Monitors the regenerative braking result (VCU) and compensates hydraulic brake force.
• VCU: Calculates motor recharge torque command for regenerative braking by considering demanded regenerative brake force (AHB),
usable battery power (BMS), and usable motor torque, and calculates the actual regenerative brake force by using the actual motor
output torque (MCU).
• BMS: Provides usable battery power and SOC data.
• MCU: Provides usable motor torque and actual motor output torque data.
Creates Inverter PWM signal to generate motor torque command received from VCU.

A/C Load Control

• FATC: Sends AC/PTC power request to VCU when driver demands cooling/heating (AC SW).
A/C load is controlled within the power range allowed by VCU.
• BMS: Provides usable battery power and SOC data.
• VCU: Sends final FATC allowed power by using the battery information and FATC requested power data.
Page 12 sur 33

Electric load power (12V) supply

• BMS: Provides usable battery power and SOC data.
• VCU: Determines LDC ON/OFF and operation mode based on the battery information and vehicle status.
• LDC: Converts high voltage into low voltage based on the command from VCU, and supplies power to vehicle's electric components
(same function as an alternator).

DTE (Distance To Empty)

Calculates Distance To Empty
Page 13 sur 33

Vehicle Control System

Schematic Diagram
Page 14 sur 33

Vehicle Control System

Specification
Item Specification
Input Voltage 240 ~ 413V
Operation Voltage 9 ~ 16V
Cooling Type Water Cooled
Coolant Inflow Temperature Max. 65 °C
Operation Temperature -40 ~ 85 °C
Preservation Temperature -40 ~ 85 °C

Vehicle Control System

Components and Components Location

Page 15 sur 33

1. Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU)

[ Inverter + LDC + VCU]

Vehicle Control System

Description

Electric Power Control Unit (EPCU) is a 80kW power transformer system. It is integrated with inverter, LDC, and VCU.
Page 16 sur 33

- Inverter: It's a system that converts DC power from the high voltage battery to AC power supplied to the vehicle's drive motor.
- LDC (converter): It's a system that converts DC power from the high voltage battery to DC power (low voltage) for the vehicle's electric
components.
Vehicle Control System

Removal

• Use a fender cover to prevent damage on body paint.

• Take caution not to damage the connector and wiring when disconnecting.

Mark to prevent faulty connection between wiring connector and hose.

1. Shut off the high voltage.
(Refer to Vehicle Control System - "High Voltage Shut-off Procedures")
2. Remove the Auxiliary 12V Battery and tray.
(Refer to EPCU - "Auxiliary 12V Battery ")
3. Remove the power electric cover.
(Refer to Traction Motor System - "Power Electric Cover" )
4. Remove the high voltage joint box.
(Refer to High Voltage Distributing System - "High voltage joint box" )
5. Remove the ON-Board Charger (OBC).
(Refer to High Voltage Charging System - "OBC")
6. Disconnect the electric water pump outlet hose (A) and electric power control unit & Motor hoses(B).
Page 17 sur 33

7. Disconnect the electric power control unit connector (A).

8. Disconnect the Low Voltage DC/DC Converter "-" cable (A) and "+" cable (B).
Tightening torque :1.1 ~ 1.4 kgf.m

9. Disconnect the electric power control unit side power cable connector (A).

10. Remove chiller (A) after loosening the mounting bolts.

Tightening torque :0.8 ~ 1.2 kgf.m
Page 18 sur 33

11. Remove the electric power control unit (A).

Tightening torque :5.0 ~ 6.5 kgf.m

Installation
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.
2. Connect the 3-phase power cable of U, V, W in the correct position.

Refill the motor cooling system with coolant and then perform the air bleeding using the GDS.
(Refer to Motor Cooling System - "Coolant")
4. Install the motor assembly then perform "Initialization of Automatic Resolver OffsetCalibration" procedure.

Description
The inverter drives the motor of an Electric Vehicle (EV). It changes the DC current of the high voltage battery to the AC current require to
drive the motor.
That is, it converts the DC power (+, -) from the high voltage battery into 3-phase AC power (U, V, W) and controls it vis the signal from the
control board to drive the motor.
During acceleration, the high voltage battery provides additional power to the motor. During deceleration, the energy generated by the motor
is used to charge the high voltage battery and there by increase the driving distance.
Main function
Class Item Contents Main iteam
• Current control
Generate the torque by controlling the amount and the
Control function Torque control • Rotor position and speed
direction of stator current according to the position of rotor
detection
Protection function Over temperature If excess the restrictive temperature of inverter and motor,
limit then limit the motor power
Page 19 sur 33

limit the max motor power

according with inverter and motor
temperature
• Detection of disorders
associated with inverter
• Detection of problems related to the exernal inerface • Fault detection of performance
Failure detection
• Fault detection in the inverter related
• Inverter hardwere failure
detection
• Demand torque, Battery
condition, EWP, and other
Vehice driving The communication with the another controller of necessary receive information
Cooperative control
control information from the vehicle
• Inverter status information
transmission

Vehicle Control System

Block diagram
Traction motor control
Inverter provides the available torque to VCU for calculating the necessary torque and develops the PWM signal to make the necessary
motor torque calculated by VCU.

Regenerative braking control

Inverter provides the available torque and the actual motor torque to VCU for calculating the necessary torque and develops the PWM signal
to make the necessary motor torque calculated by VCU.

Vehicle Control System

Description
Page 20 sur 33

• High voltage (DC 360V) of the high voltage battery is converted low voltage (DC 12V) through the LDC for supplying power to electrical
components.
• Operation and operation mod of LDC are controlled by the vehicle control unit (VCU).
• The low voltage DC/DC converter is integrated into the EPCU.
System flow

Item Specification
Input High Voltage Battery (360V)
Output Auxiliary Battery (12V)
Purpose Auxiliary battery recharge and power supply to electric loads
Idle stop: Power supply is enabled
Characteristics
Temperature characteristics: Constant power

Vehicle Control System

Specifications
▷ CMF45L-BCI
Item Specification
Capaticy [20HR/5HR] (AH) 45/36
Cold Cranking Amperage (A) 410 (SAE) /328 (EN)
Reserve Capacity (Min) 80

Vehicle Control System

Components
Page 21 sur 33

1. Auxiliary 12V Battery 3. Battery tray

2. Battery mounting bracket

Vehicle Control System

Description
• The CMF(Closed Maintenance Free) battery is, as the name implies, totally maintenance free and has no removable battery cell caps.
• The CMF(Closed Maintenance Free) battery does not require water replenishment for the repair.
• The battery is completely sealed, except for small vent holes in the cover.
Page 22 sur 33

Battery sensor
Battery sensor (A) is mounted on battery (-) terminal. It transmits battery voltage, current, temperature information to LDC. LDC controls
generating voltage by duty cycle based on these signals.

Electrical components power (12V) supply flow

• BMS ECU (Battery Management System Electronic Control Unit): Provide information (available battery power, state of charge)
• VCU (Vehicle Control Unit): Determine operation mod of the LDC according to battery status and vehicle status
• LDC (Low voltage DC/DC Converter): Supplies power to the vehicle electrical components after LDC is convert low voltage to high
voltage according to control of VCU.
Page 23 sur 33

* APS: Accelerator pedal position sensor

Vehicle Control System

Removal
Battery & tray
1. Disconnect the battery terminals .
Tightening torque
(+): 7.8 ~ 9.8 N.m (0.8 ~ 1.0 kgf.m, 5.8 ~ 7.2 lb-ft)
(-): 3.9 ~ 5.9 N.m (0.4 ~ 0.6 kgf.m, 2.9 ~ 4.3 lb-ft)

2. Remove the battery after removing a battery mounting bracket (A).

Tightening torque :8.8 ~ 13.7 N.m (0.9 ~ 1.4 kgf.m, 6.5 ~ 10.1 lb-ft)

3. Remove the battery tray (A) after loosening bolts.

Tightening torque :8.8 ~ 13.7 N.m (0.9 ~ 1.4 kgf.m, 6.5 ~ 10.1 lb-ft)

Batterty sensor
1. Disconnect the battery negative (-) cable.
2. Disconnect the battery sensor connector (A).
3. Remove the battery negative (-) cable after removing the bolt (B).
Tightening torque
(-) terminal: 3.9 ~ 5.9 N.m (0.4 ~ 0.6 kgf.m, 2.9 ~ 4.3 lb-ft)
(B): 26.5 ~ 32.4 N.m (2.7 ~ 3.3 kgf.m, 19.5 ~ 23.9 lb-ft)
Page 24 sur 33

Installation
Battery & tray
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• When installing the battery, fix the mounting bracket on the tray correctly.

Batterty sensor
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.

• For the vehicle equipped with a battery sensor, be careful not to damage the battery sensor when the battery is replaced or
recharged.
1) When replacing the battery, it should be same one (type, capacity and brand) that is originally installed on your vehicle. If a
battery of a different type is replaced, the battery sensor may recognize the battery to be abnormal.
2) When installing the ground cable on the negative post of battery, tighten the clamp with specified torque. An excessive tightening
torque can damage the PCB internal circuit and the battery terminal .
3) When recharging the battery, ground the negative terminal of the booster battery to the vehicle body.

Adjustment
Battery Sensor Recalibration Procedure
After reconnecting the battery negative cable, AMS function does not operates until the system is stabilized, about 4 hours. If disconnecting
the negative (-) battery cable from the battery during repair work for the vehicle equipped with AMS function, Battery sensor recalibration
procedure should be performed after finishing the repair work.
1. Turn the Ignition switch ON and OFF.
2. Park the vehicle for about 4 hours with the hood and all doors closed.

Inspection
Vehicle parasitic current inspection
1. Turn the all electric devices OFF, and then turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Close all doors except the engine hood, and then lock all doors.
(1) Disconnect the hood switch connector.
(2) Close the trunk lid.
(3) Close the doors or remove the door switches.
3. Wait a few minutes until the vehicle’s electrical systems go to sleep mode.

For an accurate measurement of a vehicle parasitic current, all electrical systems should go to sleep mode. (It takes at least one
hour or at most one day.) However, an approximate vehicle parasitic current can be measured after 10~20 minutes.
4. Connect an ammeter in series between the battery (-) terminal and the ground cable, and then disconnect the clamp from the battery (-)
terminal slowly.

• Be careful that the lead wires of an ammeter do not come off from the battery (-) terminal and the ground cable to prevent the
battery from being reset. In case the battery is reset, connect the battery cable again, and then start the engine or turn the
ignition switch ON for more than 10 sec. Repeat the procedure from No. 1.To prevent the battery from being reset during the
inspection,
1) Connect a jump cable between the battery (-) terminal and the ground cable.
2) Disconnect the ground cable from the battery (-) terminal.
Page 25 sur 33

3) Connect an ammeter between the battery (-) terminal and the ground cable.
4) After disconnecting the jump cable, read the current value of the ammeter.

5. Read the current value of the ammeter.

A. If the parasitic current is over the limit value, search for abnormal circuit by removing a fuse one by one and checking the parasitic
current.
A. Reconnect the suspected parasitic current draw circuit fuse only and search for suspected unit by removing a component connected
with the circuit one by one until the parasitic draw drops below limit value.
Limit value (after 10~20 min.) :Below 50mA

Cleaning
1. Make sure the ignition switch and all accessories are in the OFF position.
2. Disconnect the battery cables (negative first).
3. Remove the battery from the vehicle.

Care should be taken in the event the battery case is cracked or leaking, to protect your skin from the electrolyte. Heavy rubber gloves
(not the household type) should be wore when removing the battery.

4. Inspect the battery tray for damage caused by the loss of electrolyte. If acid damage is present, it will be necessary to clean the area with
a solution of clean warm water and baking soda. Scrub the area with a stiff brush and wipe off with a cloth moistened with baking soda
and water.
5. Clean the top of the battery with the same solution as described above.
6. Inspect the battery case and cover for cracks. If cracks are present, the battery must be replaced.
7. Clean the battery posts with a suitable battery post tool.
8. Clean the inside surface of the terminal clamps with a suitable battery cleaning tool. Replace damaged or frayed cables and broken
terminal clamps.
9. Install the battery in the vehicle.
10. Connect the cable terminals to the battery post, making sure tops of the terminals are flush with the tops of the posts.
11. Tighten the terminal nuts securely.
12. Coat all connections with light mineral grease after tightening.

When batteries are being charged, an explosive gas forms beneath the cover of each cell. Do not smoke near batteries being
charged or which have recently been charged. Do not break live circuit at the terminals of batteries being charged.A spark will occur
when the circuit is broken. Keep open flames away from battery.
Vehicle Control System

Troubleshooting
Page 26 sur 33

Vehicle Control System

Description
Page 27 sur 33

Main Features
Main Features Details
Calculates motor torque command with consideration to usable battery power, usable motor
Drive Motor Control
torque, and driver demand (APS, Brake SW, Shift Lever)
• Calculates motor charge torque command for regenerative braking.
Regenerative Brake Control
• Calculates regenerative brake force.
Sends final FATC allowed power by using the battery information and FATC requested power
A/C Load Control
data.
Determines LDC ON/OFF and operation mode based on the battery information and vehicle
Electric Load Power Supply
status.
Drive Power, Energy Flow, ECO Level, Power Down, Shift Lever Position, Service Lamp &
Cluster Display
Ready Lamp ON Request
• Indicates usable battery energy, and distance to empty based on prior drive pattern.
DTE (Distance to Empty) • If drive path is set by using AVN, DTE accuracy is improved by estimating the energy
consumption to destination.
• Remote control via Center/Smartphone through synchronization with TMU.
Reserve/Remote Charge/A/C
• Reservation function through operation time setting by driver.
Analog/digital signal processing and
APS, Brake Switch, Shift Lever, Airbag Deployment Signal processing and diagnosis
diagnosis

Vehicle Control System

Cruise Control
The cruise control system is engaged by the cruise "ON/OFF" main switch located on right of steering wheel column. The system has the
capability to cruise, coast, accelerate and resume speed.
It also has a safety interrupt, engaged upon depressing brake or shifting select lever.
The ECM is the control module for this system. The main components of cruise control system are mode control switches, transmission
range switch, brake switch, vehicle speed sensor, ECM and ETS motor that connect throttle body.
The ECM contains a low speed limit which will prevent system engagement below a minimum speed of 40km/h (25mph).
The operation of the controller is controlled by mode control switches located on steering wheel.
Transmission range switch and brake switch are provided to disengage the cruise control system. The switches are on brake pedal bracket
and transmission. When the brake pedal is depressed or select lever shifted, the cruise control system is electrically disengaged and the
throttle is returned to the idle position.
Cruise main switch (ON/OFF)
The cruise control system is engaged by pressing the cruise "ON/OFF" main switch. Pressing the cruise "ON/OFF" main switch again
releases throttle, clears cruise memory speed, and puts vehicle in a non-cruise mode.
Set/Coast switch (SET/–)
The "SET/–" switch located on right of steering wheel column has two functions.
The set function - Push the "SET/–" switch and release it at the desired speed. The SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate. Release the accelerator pedal. The desired speed will automatically be maintained.
The coast function - Push the "SET/–" switch and hold it when the cruise control is on. The vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the
switch at the desired speed. The desired speed will be maintained.
Push the "SET/–" switch and release it quickly. The cruising speed will decrease by 2.0km/h (1.2mph) or 1.6km/h (1.0mph).
Page 28 sur 33

Resume/Accel switch (RES/+)

The "RES/+" switch located on right of steering wheel column has two functions.
The resume function - If any method other than the cruise “ON/OFF” main switch was used to cancel cruising speed temporarily and the
system is still activated, the most recent set speed will automatically resume when the "RES/+" switch is pushed. It will not resume, however,
if the vehicle speed has dropped below approximately 40km/h (25mph).
The accel function - Push the "RES/+" switch and hold it when the cruise control is on. The vehicle will gradually accelerate. Release the
switch at the desired speed. The desired speed will be maintained.
Push the "RES/+" switch and release it quickly. The cruising speed will increase by 2.0km/h (1.2mph) or 1.6km/h (1.0mph).
Cancel switch (CANCEL)
The cruise control system is temporarily disengaged by pushing the "CANCEL" switch.
Cruise speed canceled by this switch can be recovered by pushing the "RES/+" switch.
Vehicle Control System

System Block Diagram

Component Parts And Function Outline

Component part Function
Vehicle-speed sensor, ESP/ABS Control Module Converts vehicle speed to pulse.
ECM Receives signals from sensor and control switches.
Cruise control indicator Illuminate when CRUISE main switch is ON (Built into cluster)
Cruise Control switches CRUISE switch Switch for automatic speed control power supply.
Resume/Accel switch (RES +) Controls automatic speed control functions by Resume/Accel switch
Set/Coast switch (RES -) (Set/Coast switch)
Cancel switches Cancel switch Sends cancel signals to ECM.
Brake-pedal switch
Transaxle range switch (A/T)
Page 29 sur 33

ETC Motor Regulates the throttle valve to the set opening by ECM.

* ETC Motor : Electronic Throttle Control Motor

Vehicle Control System

Trouble Symptom Charts

Trouble Symptom 1

Trouble Symptom 2
Trouble symptom Probable cause Remedy
The set vehicle speed varies greatly upward Repair the vehicle speed sensor system, or
or downward Malfunction of the vehicle speed sensor circuit
replace the part
"Surging" (repeated alternating acceleration
and deceleration) occurs after setting Malfunction of ECM Check input and output signals at ECM

Trouble Symptom 3
Trouble symptom Probable cause Remedy
The CC system is not canceled when the Damaged or disconnected wiring of the brake Repair the harness or replace the brake pedal
brake pedal is depressed pedal switch switch
Page 30 sur 33

Malfunction of the ECM signals Check input and output signals at ECM

Trouble Symptom 4
Trouble symptom Probable cause Remedy
The CC system is not canceled when the shift Damaged or disconnected wiring of inhibitor
switch input circuit Repair the harness or repair or replace the
lever is moved to the "N" position (It is inhibitor switch
canceled, however, when the brake pedal is Improper adjustment of inhibitor switch
depressed) Malfunction of the ECM signals Check input and output signals at ECM

Trouble Symptom 5
Trouble symptom Probable cause Remedy
Temporary damaged or disconnected wiring Repair the harness or replace the "SET/–"
Cannot decelerate (coast) by using the "SET/ of "SET/–" switch input circuit switch
–" switch
Malfunction of the ECM signals Check input and output signals at ECM

Trouble Symptom 6
Trouble symptom Probable cause Remedy
Damaged or disconnected wiring, or short Repair the harness or replace the "RES/+"
Cannot accelerate or resume speed by using circuit, or "RES/+" switch input circuit switch
the "RES/+" switch
Malfunction of the ECM signals Check input and output signals at ECM

Trouble Symptom 7
Trouble symptom Probable cause Remedy
CC system can be set while driving at a Repair the vehicle speed sensor system, or
vehicle speed of less than 40km/h (25mph), or Malfunction of the vehicle-speed sensor circuit replace the part
there is no automatic cancellation at that
speed Malfunction of the ECM signals Check input and output signals at ECM

Trouble Symptom 8
Trouble symptom Probable cause Remedy
Damaged or disconnected bulb of cruise main
The cruise main switch indicator lamp does switch indicator lamp Repair the harness or replace the part.
not illuminate (But CC system is normal)
Harness damaged or disconnected

Vehicle Control System

Component Location
Page 31 sur 33

1. Audio switch (LH) 3. Bluetooth hands free switch

2. Cruise switch (RH) 4. Trip switch

Vehicle Control System

Circuit Diagram

Vehicle Control System

5. Separate the upper steering wheel remote control switch (A) from the steering wheel.

6. Remove the upper steering wheel control switch (B) disconnecting the connector (A).

Installation
1. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Inspection
[Measuring Resistance]
1. Disconnect the cruise control switch connector from the control switch.

2. Measure resistance between terminals on the control switch when each function switch is ON (switch is depressed).
Page 33 sur 33

Resistance
Function switch Terminal
[kΩ ± 5%]
CANCEL 2-4 0.18
SET– 2-4 0.33
RES+ 2-4 0.55
CRUISE 2-4 0.88

3. If not within specification, replace switch.

[Measuring Voltage]
1. Connect the cruise control switch connector to the control switch.

2. Measure voltage between terminals on the harness side connector when each function switch is ON (switch is depressed).
Function switch Terminal Voltage (V)
CANCEL 2-4 0.63 ~ 0.97
SET– 2-4 1.03 ~ 1.37
RES+ 2-4 1.58 ~ 2.02
CRUISE 2-4 2.08 ~ 2.52

3. If not within specification, replace switch.

Vie-X088 - QG English
No ratings yet
Vie-X088 - QG English
16 pages
Doctor Charge 50 954096
No ratings yet
Doctor Charge 50 954096
272 pages
ENGINE PERFORMANCE - Land Rover Range Rover Sport HSE 2014 - SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS
100% (1)
ENGINE PERFORMANCE - Land Rover Range Rover Sport HSE 2014 - SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS
18 pages
User Guide For ALIENTECH Suite and KESS3 OBD
100% (1)
User Guide For ALIENTECH Suite and KESS3 OBD
47 pages
Climate Control System - General Information
No ratings yet
Climate Control System - General Information
376 pages
DTC Codes
100% (1)
DTC Codes
147 pages
INV0002
No ratings yet
INV0002
4 pages
Cooper (R56) L4-1.6L (N12) (2008)
No ratings yet
Cooper (R56) L4-1.6L (N12) (2008)
10 pages
2006 COROLLA Electrical Wiring Diagram System Circuits
No ratings yet
2006 COROLLA Electrical Wiring Diagram System Circuits
1 page
2019 Audi A8 Electrics Onics
No ratings yet
2019 Audi A8 Electrics Onics
113 pages
Jaguar - Land Rover: Battery Care Manual
No ratings yet
Jaguar - Land Rover: Battery Care Manual
24 pages
Mercedes-Benz C-Class Sedan 2014 4d Hybrid EN 205.14v2.0
No ratings yet
Mercedes-Benz C-Class Sedan 2014 4d Hybrid EN 205.14v2.0
2 pages
Volkswagen - New Beetle - Wiring Diagram - 2007 - 2008
No ratings yet
Volkswagen - New Beetle - Wiring Diagram - 2007 - 2008
13,861 pages
VW Up 2012 Maintenance Eng
No ratings yet
VW Up 2012 Maintenance Eng
143 pages
2014 Volvo S60 Owners Manual
100% (1)
2014 Volvo S60 Owners Manual
386 pages
GR00002600 23a PDF
100% (1)
GR00002600 23a PDF
180 pages
FORD D FaultCodes 0366 PDF
No ratings yet
FORD D FaultCodes 0366 PDF
1 page
Saab 2001-9-5 Se Owners Manual
No ratings yet
Saab 2001-9-5 Se Owners Manual
272 pages
Heater & Air Conditioning System: Section
100% (1)
Heater & Air Conditioning System: Section
188 pages
MG3 Hybrid Owner Manual
0% (1)
MG3 Hybrid Owner Manual
344 pages
VW Crafter 2 WD Eng
No ratings yet
VW Crafter 2 WD Eng
821 pages
Datasheet
No ratings yet
Datasheet
210 pages
Peugeot 206 Owners Manual 2007
0% (1)
Peugeot 206 Owners Manual 2007
109 pages
2022 Hyundai Tucson Plug in Hybrid 64
No ratings yet
2022 Hyundai Tucson Plug in Hybrid 64
657 pages
Hfe Pioneer vsx-1021-k Service en
No ratings yet
Hfe Pioneer vsx-1021-k Service en
132 pages
Av 370Z
No ratings yet
Av 370Z
367 pages
SM 32
No ratings yet
SM 32
1,790 pages
SRS Airbag
No ratings yet
SRS Airbag
30 pages
Relay and Fuse A8
No ratings yet
Relay and Fuse A8
13 pages
Hybrid Electric Vehicle
No ratings yet
Hybrid Electric Vehicle
23 pages
E-Class: Coupe and Cabriolet Operator's Manual
No ratings yet
E-Class: Coupe and Cabriolet Operator's Manual
394 pages
2009 Mercedes Benz Manual
100% (1)
2009 Mercedes Benz Manual
408 pages
2004 Toyota Land Cruiser 64
No ratings yet
2004 Toyota Land Cruiser 64
311 pages
Ducati Monster s4 '02 Owner's Manual PDF
No ratings yet
Ducati Monster s4 '02 Owner's Manual PDF
74 pages
Eaton Fault Code 21
No ratings yet
Eaton Fault Code 21
468 pages
Skoda Octavia Break 2015 Manual
No ratings yet
Skoda Octavia Break 2015 Manual
196 pages
Renault k9k Engine Control System
No ratings yet
Renault k9k Engine Control System
256 pages
User Manual Toyota Corolla (2021) (English - 624 Pages)
No ratings yet
User Manual Toyota Corolla (2021) (English - 624 Pages)
1 page
Wiper, Washer & Horn: Section
No ratings yet
Wiper, Washer & Horn: Section
64 pages
H090 Switch Control Panel
No ratings yet
H090 Switch Control Panel
1 page
Xj8 2000 Vehicle Care Handbook
No ratings yet
Xj8 2000 Vehicle Care Handbook
88 pages
Safety Recall H03 Front Control Module: Dealer Service Instructions For
No ratings yet
Safety Recall H03 Front Control Module: Dealer Service Instructions For
9 pages
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS 2 Jaguar - F-Type
No ratings yet
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS 2 Jaguar - F-Type
137 pages
Audi 80 Motronic Ignition PDF
100% (1)
Audi 80 Motronic Ignition PDF
118 pages
2021 Sonata
No ratings yet
2021 Sonata
9 pages
BR BRAKE SYSTEM Nissan Pathfinder R52
No ratings yet
BR BRAKE SYSTEM Nissan Pathfinder R52
49 pages
Trouble Codes
100% (2)
Trouble Codes
171 pages
VW Id4 Body Repairs Interior Eng
No ratings yet
VW Id4 Body Repairs Interior Eng
245 pages
C220 W203 Electrical Component Locations
No ratings yet
C220 W203 Electrical Component Locations
2 pages
R129 Main Lift Cylinder Removal
No ratings yet
R129 Main Lift Cylinder Removal
9 pages
Prius P Hev Manual
100% (1)
Prius P Hev Manual
16 pages
Safety Precaution: General Information
No ratings yet
Safety Precaution: General Information
27 pages
SM 14
No ratings yet
SM 14
33 pages
SM 10 PDF
No ratings yet
SM 10 PDF
127 pages
SM 7
No ratings yet
SM 7
61 pages
SM 11
50% (2)
SM 11
245 pages
SM 13
No ratings yet
SM 13
34 pages
Engine Electrical System C
No ratings yet
Engine Electrical System C
41 pages
Steering System F
No ratings yet
Steering System F
28 pages
Brake System
No ratings yet
Brake System
85 pages
Body Interior and Exterior PDF
No ratings yet
Body Interior and Exterior PDF
195 pages
spf0001 Ds en
No ratings yet
spf0001 Ds en
2 pages
Latitude Rugged Family Brochure
No ratings yet
Latitude Rugged Family Brochure
7 pages
ElectricPowerSteeringEPS - ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
No ratings yet
ElectricPowerSteeringEPS - ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
2 pages
TC80310APWS
No ratings yet
TC80310APWS
33 pages
LAN System
No ratings yet
LAN System
149 pages
Unit2 6
No ratings yet
Unit2 6
74 pages
2020 Seo Analog Signals Vs Digital Signals - r1.0
No ratings yet
2020 Seo Analog Signals Vs Digital Signals - r1.0
7 pages
ActiveSuspension ACTIVE-SUSPENSION
No ratings yet
ActiveSuspension ACTIVE-SUSPENSION
2 pages
S32K1
No ratings yet
S32K1
2 pages
Abrites rh850 v850 Programmer User Manual
No ratings yet
Abrites rh850 v850 Programmer User Manual
19 pages
Benchmarking State Art Technologies
100% (1)
Benchmarking State Art Technologies
21 pages
TOUGHBOOK - 33 - mk3 - Specification 2023 12 14 - 07 35 19
No ratings yet
TOUGHBOOK - 33 - mk3 - Specification 2023 12 14 - 07 35 19
3 pages
Abprog User Manual
No ratings yet
Abprog User Manual
53 pages
Electrical System
No ratings yet
Electrical System
445 pages
Getac S410 Product WW
No ratings yet
Getac S410 Product WW
2 pages
Abrites Programmer User Manual
No ratings yet
Abrites Programmer User Manual
43 pages
X-431 IMMO PAD Manual
0% (1)
X-431 IMMO PAD Manual
71 pages
Toyota Camry Hybrid 2007 Factory Repair Manual Part2
No ratings yet
Toyota Camry Hybrid 2007 Factory Repair Manual Part2
96 pages
Bosch Aa Training Cat 22
No ratings yet
Bosch Aa Training Cat 22
41 pages
SSP 615 Audi A6 Hybrid and Audi A8 Hybrid
No ratings yet
SSP 615 Audi A6 Hybrid and Audi A8 Hybrid
44 pages
27074754wqj0 Autel Im608 User
No ratings yet
27074754wqj0 Autel Im608 User
131 pages
1396 Bosch Training Programme Guide 2020 20-12-19 LR
No ratings yet
1396 Bosch Training Programme Guide 2020 20-12-19 LR
31 pages
Sae 2020-01-1286 Benchmark 2018 Toyota Camry Ub80e Eight Speed Auto Trans
No ratings yet
Sae 2020-01-1286 Benchmark 2018 Toyota Camry Ub80e Eight Speed Auto Trans
13 pages